Home

VPG 3.4 User Manual

1. CARD DESCRIPTION name of this card PID part ID of the base DOF the degree of freedom of the base shock VAD set the shock signal type LCID the shock value curve in time region DIA the diameter of base cross section 7 9 4 3 ANALYSIS CONTROL Description this function helps user to define control parameters such as CONTROL_ CONTACT CONTROL_ SHELL etc and also automatically calculates the termination time 7 96 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Analysis Control simulation Starts From Drop Height E Specified Height 10 00 mm Ref by the lowest Mode Main Control Cards E Control Shell E Control Hourglass E Control Timestep TerminationTime Step Factor End Time Total Time 2 50 0 S5000 s Steps in daplot 20 Steps in time history 200 e Simulation Start From define initial analysis height note that this value should be less than or equal to the drop height Drop height take drop height as initial analysis height Specified Height define initial analysis height Main Control cards active control cards about contact etc Total Time time needed from initial analysis height to the floor Steps in d3plot files steps during simulation Steps in time ASCII files steps during simulation 7 9 4 4 TIME HISTORY OPTION Description this function is used to add and control the output file options The user can select the desired nodes and elements to output the desired file The types
2. lis TP Et I Averag v Select Computation Modify Y Axis x c vs Resulting Curve Copy Paste Delete Apply Undo Clear New Graph Figure 9 75 The Curve Operation Window There is a curve list box on the left of the Operation window The curve names are list on this list box The user can select one or several curve name s through press the left mouse and move it CURVE OBJECT OPERATION e COPY This function allows the user to copy the selected curve s e PASTE This function allows the user to paste the copied curve s to the current curve window NOTE The user cannot paste the curve to other software such as MS Word since the format that copy from curve is the inner format of eta Post Processor If the user wants to paste to other software using the Clipboard function is available way e DELETE This function allows the user to delete the selected curve s from the current curve window 9 12 6 16 CURVE DATA OPERATION 9 75 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CURVE OPTION The Curve Options includes 9 kinds of operation for the curve data NEGATIVE This function allows the user to change the Y axis value of selected curves through multiplying 1 xx SCALE This function allows the user superimposes the scale curve that scales the Y axis value of selected curves through multiplying a given Y scale factor Js INTEGRATIE This function allows the user to sup
3. Frame Number d FramesiSecond 25 E T Figure 9 55 Pause Status FIRST FRAME display the first frame PREVIOUS FRAME 4 display the previous frame NEXT FRAME __ display the next frame LAST FRAME display the end frame STOP E Stops the animation WRITE AVI AND E3D__ This function creates a avi file or a e3d file from current animation An AVI file is a Microsoft multimedia file that provides a means to store a series of images for animation An E3D file is an ETA 3D player file that provides a means to store the file for true 3D demo by eta 3D Player Eta Post outputs AVI or E3D files during the animation process only To output an AVI file first animate the result During Animation click the WRITE AVI icon Eta Post displays the WRITE FILE window for the user to choose a name and location for the AVI file After entering the name and location of the file SAVE button in the WRITE FILE window eta Post displays the SELECT COMPRESSION FORMAT for the user to select the compression type and quality Once the compression type and quality are determined OK accepts and creates the file FRAME NUMBER After pause the animation this function allows the user to drag the slider to the desired frame and the frame will be plotted automatically When play animation the frame number is changed automatically according with the eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING animation FRAMES SECOND This function
4. Transition Region 7 78 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 8 1 3 CYLINDER CORE IN BOX Description the generated explosive models are cylinder fluid and solid coupling models Cylinder Core Parameters Unit bihi TOM SECM Explosive Dimension ALE one Cylinder Mine _ gt Shape cube ass Radius 100 0000 Fone 1 Dimension Length 1200 0000 Material sal an x1 1600 0000 Location User Define 7 1 1600 0000 CX 1 600 0000 mi Lee i Cz 300 0000 fone 2 Dimension Orientation Z axis v W Include Zone 2 FlementSize Materia Air Size 20 0000 pr Wax Ratio 5000 Pu Transition Region Ss TR 100 0000 Apply Undo Cylinder in box 7 8 1 4 CUBE CORE IN BOX Description the generated explosive models are cube fluid and solid coupling models 7 79 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 Cube Core Parameters Explosive Dimension Cube Mine Side x 100 0000 Side Y 100 0000 Side Z 200 0000 Center Location User Define M o DY cz 300 0000 Orientation Z axis x Element Size Size 20 0000 Wax Ratio J2 5000 Transition Region TR 50 0000 Apply VPG MODULES Unit WM TOM SEC N ALE Zone Shape Cube fone 1 Dimension Material Soil x 1 s00 0000 wi 600 0000 Fl 00 0000 fone 2 Dimension Ww Include one 2 Material Air E2 s00 0000 Exit Cube in box
5. Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS SHELL TO SOLID Description This function defines a tie between a shell edge and solid elements Nodal rigid bodies can perform the same function and may also be used Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS SPLINE Description This function defines an elastic cubic spline interpolation constraint Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS SPOTWELD Description This function defines massless spot welds between non contiguous nodal pairs Refer to section 6 3 4 for more details CONSTRAINT CARDS TIE BREAK Description This function defines a tied shell edge interface that can release locally as a function of plastic strain of the shells surrounding the interface nodes A rather ductile failure is achieved Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 139 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CONSTRAINT CARDS TIED NODES W FAIL Description This function defines a tied node set with the failure based on plastic strain The nodes must be coincident Usage 1 When C
6. 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT Figure 10 3 5 Renumber Part ID 10 3 20 DELETE EMPTY PARTS Description This function allows the user to delete parts that contain no lines surfaces or elements 10 3 21 MODIFY Description Allows the user to change a selected part s attributes such as thickness material etc Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 10 25 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 2 After the user selects a part a Part Definition window appears _10 3 22 THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to calculate and apply a nodal thickness value for each part of the model The calculation of the thickness is made via a one step metal forming analysis As the part is selected a background process calculates the nodal thickness values based on material properties the shape of the component and the initial component thickness Note This process is available only on HP UX operating systems and requires an additional license key 1 AUTO NORMAL 2 CALCULATE 3 READ DYNAIN 4 READ CONTACT PRESSURE 5 MAP PRESSURE SHOW PART 6 THICKNESS 7 EPS 8 SIGxx 9 SIGyy 10 SIGzz 11 SIGxy 12 SIGyz 13 SIGzx 14 EPSxx 15 EPSyy 16 EPSzz 17 EPSxy 18 EPSyz 19 EPSzx REMOVE 20 PART THICKNESS 24 PART STRESS EPS 22 PART STRAIN EX EXIT Figure 10 3 6 Thickness Menu AUTO NORMAL Description The calcul
7. 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and has exited the menu VPG 6 125 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR prompts gt xxxx ELEMENTS REMOVED FROM SET XXXX 6 7 20 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the elements of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 21 SHOW SET ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined element sets VPG displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined element Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST 2 List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL ELEMENT SETS UNDO EXIT VPG displays all element sets and returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each element viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific element set at a time 6 7 22 ANNOTATE PART Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX e Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 23 CREATE PART Description This function allows the user to gen
8. 6 RIPPLE TRACK 2 eta VPG 3 4 7 5 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 8 COBBLESTONE TRACK 9 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 10 PAVE SURFACE 11 WASHBOARD SURFACE 2 7 6 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 12 23 DEGREE RAMP SURFACE 7 7 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 3 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete a defined road surface Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ELEM C OR ROAD NAME R gt CURSOR PICK AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT ELEMENT ROAD NAME DONE EXIT 2 Once the road surface is selected VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART XXXX OF ROAD XXXX The road is deleted DONE or EXIT returns the user to the ROAD DEFINITION MENU 7 1 4 SUMMARY Description This option gives a summary of a selected road surface i e Part Name number of parts PID and number of elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED ROAD SURFACE SUMMARY gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE TARGET ROAD SURFACE Once the desired road surface is selected its characteristics are displayed in the VPG MENU WINDOW 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER CR TO EXIT YEG Henu Findor SUMMARY OF COBSTONE PART_NAME PID COBSTONE 20 STONEL 37 STONE 38 STONE 39 EXIT 7 1 5 MOVE ROAD SURFACE Description This option allows the user to translate a defined road surface It is used primarily to move two road surfaces together before combining them into one Usage 1 VPG prompts gt MOVE ROAD SURFACE IN D
9. 9 82 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NOTE During the operation for curves some curve data operations require the sample frequency and intervals are the same e g binary arithmetic operation Some other unary operations require a minimum number of samples e g Differentiation Integration etc If the user used these operations without respecting these requirements an error message box will be popped up There are four digital filters as discussed earlier in Graph All the filters have default parameters for convenience There are two classes of digital filter non recursive and recursive Butterworth filter is the lowpass recursive filter and the FIR and average filter are non recursive filters The computation requirement for the FIR filters is lower than that for Butterworth However the Butterworth gives more power and less signal loss 9 12 9 NEW GRAPH Description This function allows the user to create the new graph on a new Curve window and set as the current window By default the new graph is plot on the current curve window if the user press Apply NOTE Prior to opening multiple graph files the user should open a NEW CURVE WINDOW for each graph This will prevent the graphs from merging into a previously opened graph unless it is needed 9 12 10 SAVE Description This function allows the user to save all the graphs in current curve window 9 12 11 EXIT Description This button allows the user to exit the Grap
10. Chapter 7 195 65 R15 44 0 1b TIRE MASS IS 20 0 Kg TIRE PRES IS 0 248 MPa 36 0 psi ETAZVPG 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES ABORT KEY IN XYZ MAPPING NODE POINT SPINDLE H yt ETASVPG Note For tire tuning procedures see the eta VPG applications manual sections 1 5 and 2 4 eta VPG 3 4 1 32 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 5 CREATE DIRECT MATRIX Description This option allows the user to auto generate direct matrix tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE TIRE PROFILE Dialog SECTION WIDTH mm i 95 000000 ASPECT RATIO 65 a RIM DIAMETER inch 15 000000 RIM WIDTH inch 6 500000 NO OF RADIAL ELEM ENTS 40 20 000000 PRESSURE UNIT E MPa _ Psi VALUE 0 248000 TIRE NUMBER 1 TIRE M OK Cancel 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire 7 33 eta VPG 3 4 VPG MODULES Chapter 7 cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT NO returns the user to the tire parameter window 3 If the user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES ABORT KEY IN XYZ MAPPING NODE POINT SPINDLE ic ie ETASV
11. Mo Documents My Computer z Muy Network File name Places Files of type LS DYNA dyn mods k kep All Files Figure 5 7 1 Import File Window 5 7 1 FILE TYPE File Manager Select the drop down selection in the FILE TYPE field to select the proper format The available formats are MODEL DATA FORMAT LS DYNA Nastran Abaqus Ansys Genesis Moldflow PamCrash Radioss Nastran SOL 700 CAD DATA FILE IGES LINE VDA DXF CATIA STEP Unigraphics Proe Parasolid Solidworks Ideas SPECIAL MODEL FORMAT ADAMS ADAMS Pre A detailed description of each file import function is given in the following section IGES 1gs iges LINE in VDA vda t vdas DF det CATIAd model CATIAS CATPatrt STEP stp step JG ort LS DYNA dyn mod Kj NWASTRANM dat nas Genesis dath ABAQUS inp PAMCRASH pc RADIOSS 000 MOLDFLOVW mf ADAMS adm Pre susp Tst rst Figure 5 7 2 File Format 9 5 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 7 1 1 READ CAD DATA A series of functions in this menu allow the user to read converted wireframe and surface data into VPG The supported file formats include IGES igs iges VPG lin VDA vda DXF dxf CATIA4 model CATIA5 catpart STEP stp step and UG prt In order to provide flexibility in accepting line data from different CAD systems VPG uses a neutral line data format to communi
12. RO MASS DENSITY 7 830000 E 009 E YOUNG S MODULUS 2 070000 E 005 PR POISSON S RATIO 2 800000 E 001 DA AXIAL DAMPING FACTOR 0 000000 E 000 DB BENDING DAMPING FACTOR lo O00000E 000 Define Properties 6 160 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 10 ERASE UNREF MATL Description This function automatically deletes all materials that have no parts assigned to them Usage 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced materials If unreferenced materials are found VPG shows the number of materials found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 UNREFERENCED MATERIALS Y N If no unreferenced materials are found VPG prompts gt NO UNREF MATERIALS FOUND and returns to the material menu 6 10 11 LIST Description This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL CARD LIST 6 10 12 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 10 13 ON OFF Description This function toggles the selected material ON OFF Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material Users may select an existing material by picking an element or material name of a material 2 The selected material and parts are turned ON OFF 6 10 14 RENUMBER Description This function allows the user to assign a new material ID MID number to a material type Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTIONS e Methods as following AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT
13. SELECT SECTION TYPE BEAMS DAMPER AND SPRING POINT POINT MIXTURE SEATBELT SHELL SHELL 101 105 SHELL ALE SHELL ALE 101 105 ep SLE elles SHELL EFG 101 105 SOLIL SOLID ALE SOLID EFG SPH SPH_TENSOR THICK SHELL e If the user enters BEAMS the BEAM SECTION OPTIONS a menu pops up as follows BEAM SECTION OPTIONS 1 INTEGRATEDLTYRPE 1 2 RESULTANT g TRUSS 4 INTEGRATED TYPE 4 S INTEGRATEDLTYRE 3 6 DISCRETE f 2D SHELL TYPE 7 o 20 SHELLUTYPE 8 9 SPOTWELD 10 SCALAR 11 INTEGRATED WARPED 12 RESULTANT WARPED 13 RESULTANT ALTERNATIVE 14 ExIT 6 12 7 DELETE NASTRAN Description This function deletes selected element properties from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user for the target property name 6 171 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT SECTION LIST OF PROPERTIES WINDOW MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL UNDO EXIT 2 After the part is selected VPG displays the part in gray The following message is issued gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED e If the user enters EXIT VPG deletes the property and changes the color of the part from gray to white White indicates that the part does not have properties assigned to it VPG returns to step 1 6 12 8 DELETE LS DYNA Description This function deletes selected element sections from the database Sections are displayed in the section card list Selecting a section places an asterisk by its name When the user exits th
14. This function allows the user to output a LINE SURFACE DATA lin data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters The lin extension is suggested 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N YES NO e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts gt WRITE LINES SURFACES ONLY IN ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO e YES will only output the lines surfaces displayed on the screen e NO will output all elements lines surfaces in the database 5 10 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 8 5 WRITE MOLDFLOW FILE This function allows the user to output the current model data into an external file in MOLDFLOW format VPG supports Moldflow version 5 1 Note Node and element numbers must be in sequence to write a MOLDFLOW file The user may either renumber or compress nodes elements see NODE OPTIONS menu If the nodes are not in sequential order VPG prompts gt RENUMBER NODE NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN or gt RENUMBER ELEMENT NUMBERS AND TRY AGAIN 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROOT NAME FOR INPUT FILES OR STOP TO EXIT e VPG writes three files in accordance with the MOLDFLOW format mfl mod and tri 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EX
15. To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three Once the desired nodes 2 or points 2 have been selected the element will be created e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE MASS CONM2 NASTRAN Description This subsection covers the options for the MASS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONM2 ELEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER MASS VALUE AND MOMENTS OF INERTIA e VPG displays a pop up window with the following items 111 121 122 131 132 133 etc MOMENT OF INERTIA The user may enter only the mass if desired The moment of inertia is an optional entry The user should remember that the units of the CONM2 s should be consistent with the units of the database e g DATABASE MM CONM2 KG 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three The elements will be created simultaneously upon selection of the desired nodes points e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE BEAM CBEAM NASTRAN Description This subsection covers the options for the BEAM NASTRAN CBEAM section of CREATE ELEMENTS 6 44 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CBEAM OFFSET VALUE e VPG displays a pop up window of CBEAM OFFSET VALUE 2 Once the beam of
16. YES NO e If YES then go to step 4 e If NO then go to step 2 ABORT e If ABORT is selected then the function is terminated 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer 5 VPG prompts gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R 2 MOVE ROTATE ABORT e If MOVE is entered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 will copy the selected line s 1000 units along the W axis gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N Allow the user to specify the desired part e If ROTATE is entered gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT degrees i e 200 degrees gt INCLUDE COPIED LINE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N Allow the user to specify the desired part e f ABORT is entered then the function is terminated 6 1 6 COMBINE LINES Description This function allows the user to combine multiple lines into a new single line with a new line number The original lines will be deleted after they are combined The combined line should be selected in a logical sequence to form the new line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINES TO COMBINE 6 6 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once all the lines are selected DONE or EXIT combines the lines and exits the command 6 1 7 SPLINE CURVE Description This function allows the user to draw a spline curve line through multiple points or nodes or any combination of points or nodes A minimum of 3 Points or Nodes is required for use of this function Usage 1 VPG p
17. _ _ FREE ROTATION The Freehand Rotation FREROT command is a combination of SX and SY Moving the mouse up down manipulates SX Moving the mouse left right manipulates SY Moving the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation Pressing Control and the left mouse button can also activate this function 10 13 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY This command translates the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking the left mouse button stops the pan Pressing Control and the middle mouse button can also activate this function S cursor zoom The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the User may move the cursor up or down to zoom in and out Pressing Control and the right mouse button can also activate this function 4 E WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses the left mouse button and drags the mouse diagonally down until the desired window size is reached Release the left button The section included in the window is displayed in full screen G FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines the area of zoom window by clicking and holding the left mouse button in the display area and drawing a circle around the interested area When the l
18. e Allows user to modify already created SET ADAPTIVE cards DEFINE SPOTWELD Description This function is to define criteria for spotweld failure stress or parameter for rupture Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION SPOTWELD OPTION FAILURE RUPTURE PARAM RUPTURE STRESS EXIT 2 select an option VPG prompts DEFINE e This function creates an SPOTWELD card LIST e This function lists already created SPOTWELD cards in pop up window REMOVE e This function deletes already created SPOTWELD cards DEFINE STAGED CONSTR PART Description This function offers a simple way to define parts that are removed added and used temporarily during the analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an STAGED CONSTR PART card DELETE e This function deletes already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards LIST e This function lists already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created STAGED CONSTR PART cards DEFINE TABLE Description The definition card in the TABLE subsection defines a table Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the TABLE DEFINITION window appears Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 195 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE VECTOR Description This function defines a vector using the coordinates of two nodes or points Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X
19. gt ENTER XYZ RANGE XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX ACTIVE WINDOW IS OFF Turns off or deactivates the current active window SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW This allows the user to scale the current active window to a larger or smaller window gt ENTER SCALE FACTOR DRAG WINDOW The user defines the active window by selecting a two region diagonal on screen 10 8 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY MULTI POINT WINDOW The user defines an active multi point window by cursor window starts with left button and middle button will close and complete the window GROUP ELEMENTS VPG prompts user to select elements the selected elements will be active and others will be inactive INVERSE Active models including geometry elements will be inactive those inactive will change to be active 10 1 17 EXPLODE VIEW Description This function shows an explode view for the model user can identify node and elements under explode surroundings Usage 1 VPG pops up a dialog window Explode Vier Explode Scale 0 51 Identify Node Identify Element e Explode by user can select by part or part set e Explode Scale set a explode scale level default is 0 00 e Identify Node identify a node under explode surroundings e Identify Element identify an element under explode surroundings e OK exit and terminate explode effect 10 1 18 NORMAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles normal color mode on or off for s
20. gt SAVE ROAD SURFACE IN LIBRARY gt ENTER ROAD LIBRARY FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT This creates the road surface library file or specifies a previously defined library 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROAD SURFACE NAME Once the road surface name is entered the road surface is saved to the road surface library 3 To retrieve a saved road surface access the USER DEFINED key in the SELECT FROM LIBRARY menu VPG prompts for the library name Once the library is specified VPG lists the road surfaces in the MENU WINDOW 7 10 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 2 SUSPENSION MENU The functions in the SUSPENSION MENU allow the user to auto generate Front and Rear Automotive Suspension beam models from a library of suspension types and easily attach them to the vehicle body model The beam chassis suspension model is commonly used in VPG applications Although a number of different and detailed finite element suspension models can be used the simulations will take much more CPU time than they would for simplified beam models Unless stress strain history and distribution information are needed for chassis Suspension durability analyses the beam model is recommended and is both adequate and efficient for most VPG applications such as full vehicle structural durability analysis road load prediction full vehicle system NVH analysis and ride and handling analysis For more information on suspension definition see the eta VPG Applica
21. gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts gt DEFINE TAIL OF VECTOR OR GLOBAL X Y Z AS VECTOR 3 Once the vector is defined VPG prompts gt ENTER THE DRAG LENGTH ALONG THE VECTOR DEFAULT VECTOR LENGTH 4 After entering the length VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS THRU THICKNESS DEFAULT 1 5 Once the layer number is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT DRAG MESH Y N DRAG MESH NORMAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the NORMAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The normal drag function extrudes the selected plate elements in the normal direction to create solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER THICKNESS OF NORMAL DRAG e This is the total thickness of the drag operation gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS THRU THICKNESS DEFAULT 1 e This is the thickness of each layer of elements gt ACCEPT EXTRUDE MESH Y N Note Plate element normals should be consistent prior to the execution of NORMAL DRAG DRAG MESH ROTATIONAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the ROTATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the axis of rotation to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements 6 56 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts to select elements 2 VPG
22. gt USE DEFAULT MASS CG amp INERTIA MOMENT Y N e YES completes the suspension 8 If NO is entered VPG prompts the user to select the parts to modify gt PICK PARTS TO MODIFY FPG Henu Findor PID PART NAME KNUCKL_R BARNEC_R BARCUR_R UPSTRU_R LWSTRU_R RACK STABLIZE KNUCKL LL UPARM_L LOWARM_L TIEROD_L T SELECT ALL UNDO ALL CURSOR A EXIT Once the parts are selected and the user has exited the list VPG prompts the user gt MODIFY MASS A CG CENTER gt MODIFY INERTIA MOMENT e VPG displays a pop up window with the parts properties allowing the user to alter them 7 15 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Front Suspension Library SHORT LONG A ARM SUSPENSION i MCPHERSON H ARM FRONT SUSPENSION Rear Suspension Library MCPHERSON H ARM REAR SUSPENSION 7 16 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 5 LINK REAR SUSPENSION QUADRA LINK REAR SUSPENSION 7 17 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES TRAILING ARM REAR SUSPENSION HOTCHKISS REAR SUSPENSION TWIST BEAM 7 18 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES HONDA 5_LINK 7 2 2 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete defined suspension models from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUSPENSION FROM SUSPENSION LIST OR SCREEN e Once an element from the suspension is selected VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE THIS SUSPENSION Y N e YES deletes the suspension model a
23. 2 13 VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW The VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW allows users to access files and directories The DIRECTORIES and FILES windows are accompanied VPG OPEN FILE WINDOW is a convenient tool for viewing of directories and files E linear _mapping pg mesh pg E Abe vpg El solid _tetra pg E 6 line_mesh vpg E 10_Field_Format ypq E 700_empty v pg E appilar_7O0 vpq My Recent Documents Beams_model_lypq vpg E Beams_shading vpg E boundary _condition_split pg E Desktop E split _surface pg E surface_split ypq E taper pd bumper pq Ej bumper FOO vpg E bumper_nastran vpq E Caravan pg E flange vpg E Frnvesel4 vpg E intersect line pg E line_revolute ypq temp pd E test vpg E test _9 vYpg E test_15 pg E total_mesh vpq E unit v pg My Documents ga Mo Computer My Network Places File name Files of type Figure 2 13 1 Open File Window All files listed in the OPEN FILE window are displayed from the current directory based on a filter filename extension such as vpg The current directory is listed at the top of the LOOK IN drop down menu Changing the filter parameter in the File Type drop down menu sets the file type filter The FILE NAME window allows the user to enter the file name and directory manually 2 13 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features 2 14 RECOMMENDED NAMING CONVENTION his lin bin etc The protocol for naming files during
24. 2 OPEN SAVE BEFORE RESTART YES NO ABORT Figure 5 1 2 Save Prompt This function allows the user to open databases 9 2 My Recent Documents Desktop My Network Places 6 line_mesh vpg io Field Format pg zoo empty vpg E appilar_ FOO vpg E Beams_model_lypq vpg E Beams _shading vpg E boundary condition _split spg bumper pg bumper FOO vpg E bumper _nastran pq J caravan vpg E intersect line wpa line_revolute ypq File name Files of type PG Database vpq fmb r linear_mapping vpg fal mesh pg el Abe vpg E solid tetra pg Ej split _surface w pg surface_split ypq E taper vpg E temp vpa test vpg E test_9 vpq E test_1l5 vpaq total_mesh vpq Ej unit pg Cancel Figure 5 2 1 Open File Window eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager If a database file already has been opened in VPG and has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before opening another one See Figure 5 2 2 SAVE BEFORE RESTART YES NO ABORT Figure 5 2 2 Save Prompt 5 3 RESTART This function allows the user to restart the current database from the last saved point VPG will prompt the user to save the current file See Figure 5 2 2 After that VPG will prompt the user to restart from a new database or the current one RESTART WITH NEW DB YES NO ABORT Figure 5 3 1 Restart Database Select YES to open a new database The Open File Windo
25. 6 1 1 ADD POINTS Description This function allows the user to add points to an existing line either randomly or between two selected points Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR ADDED POINTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT POINT LOCATION ON LINE e The user may create new points by placing the cursor anywhere on the line and pressing the left mouse button or the user may select one the following options BETWEEN 2 POINTS 6 2 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e This option allows the user to select 2 end points of a line segment and create a specified number of new points between them see step 3 CURSOR LOCATION POINT REJECT LAST 3 VPG prompts gt BETWEEN 2 POINTS gt SELECT POINT 1 ON LINE gt SELECT POINT 2 ON LINE gt ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS TO BE ADDED The user enters the desired number of points 4 EXIT or DONE returns the user to the LINE menu Circles indicate the locations where points have been added 6 1 2 GENERATE ARCS Description This function allows the user to generate arcs and circles either globally locally or about a selected node or point The created arc will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global about which to create the arc VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to cr
26. CATIA5 Proe Solidworks STEP Unigraphics versions 18 and NX to NX5 2 12 CONVENTIONS This manual is designed to reduce the amount of reading material on the page and maintain text clarity Several fonts and symbols are implemented throughout the manual An example is given at the bottom of the page FIXED FONT This font indicates text found within VPG e g menu ALL CAPS BOLD Names subsections commands and options within commands etc Proportional Font This font indicates explanatory text e g command descriptions notes and section titles 2 12 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features ALL CAPITALS explanatory text gt The greater than symbol directs the user to read the text displayed in VPG s DIALOGUE WINDOW The question mark directs the user to select an option that is listed in VPG s MENU WINDOW e The bullet signals a description of the previous command or situation This font indicates a function menu name card command etc found in CREATE 4 PLATE ELEMENT This section covers the options for the PLATE ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS 1 VFG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT NODE POINT To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three a An element will be created after three or four nodes points are selected n EXIT or ABORT will exit this function lt
27. LOAD BC Card Boundary Spc Option Choice 1D Type Title SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET zs z OMAN OA FF UNa Cancel Figure 8 1 Case Control definition window e ADD A new case will be created and set as current case e DEL Current case will be deleted and the next case will be set as current case e OK Cases definition finished and exit e CANCEL No cases modification will be done and exit 8 1 2 REMOVE ALL CASE Description this function deletes all already defined cases 8 2 ANALYSIS SUBMISSION The ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu allows the user to interactively run the VPG solver LS DYNA from the Graphical User Interface window The option buttons in the ANALYSIS 8 2 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION SUBMISSION window CONTROL CARD BOUNDARY CARDS CONSTRAINT CARDS etc provide access to the necessary functions for completing a DYNA input file The toggle button at the bottom of the window RUN ANALYSIS writes an input file and submits the job for analysis when the user selects OK The WRITE INPUT FILE toggle writes an input file without submitting an analysis ANALYSIS SUBEISSION Database Ascii Database Binary L Gravity Load LOAD amp BOUNDARY CONDITION Boundary Cards Constraint Cards Load Cards Initial Velocity CONTACT INTERFACE Define Contact LOAD CURVE Define Cure Dyna Inpu
28. NUMBER OF SHELL ELEMENT STEP SIZE GLOBAL X VELOCITY GLOBAL Y VELOCITY GLOBAL Z VELOCITY JOINT FORCE FILE JNTFORC 9 64 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description The user can plot the joint force data from the jntforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y_ FORCE Z FORCE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT RESULTANT _ FORCE RESULATANT_ MOMENT MATERIAL ENERGIES MATSUM Description The user can plot the material energy time history data from the matsum file The following types are available INTERNAL ENERGY KINETIC ENERGY X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT X RIGID BODY VELOCITY Y RIGID BODY VELOCITY Z RIGID BODY VELOCITY CONTACT INTERFACE FORCES NCFORC Description The user can plot the contact interface force data from the ncforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FOECE Z FORCE PRESSURE X COORDINATE Y COORDINATE Z COORDINATE NODAL FORCE NODFOR Description The user can plot the nodal force data from the nodfor file eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING NODAL POINT DATA NODOUT Description The user can plot the nodal point data from the nodout file The following types are available X DISPLACEMENT Y DISPLACEMENT Z DISPLACEMENT X VELOCITY Y VELOCITY Z VELOCITY X ACCELERATION Y ACCELERATION Z ACCELERATION RIGID BODY DATA RBDOUT Description The user can plot the rigid body time history dat
29. Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET PART gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts gt ELEMENTS WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name 10 16 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY gt SELECT ELEMENTS 3 The user selects the desired elements then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 2 ADD LINES TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy lines from one part to another part The part to which the lines are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET PART gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target part VPG prompts gt LINES WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name gt SELECT LINES 3 The user selects the desired lines then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 3 ADD SURFACES TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy surfaces from one part to another part The part to which the surfaces are added does not have to be current or on Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET PART gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects the target parts VPG prompts gt SURFACES WILL BE ADDED TO PART xxxx part name gt SELECT SURFACES 3 The user selects the desired surfaces then enters DONE to exit the menu 10 3 4 CONNECTING ELEMENTS Description This function is used to determine element connectivity from desired part s in the model to oth
30. gt ENTER RADIUS OF ARC OR 1 TO EXIT e Any real value greater than zero is valid e An arc tangent to the 2 lines is drawn The lines need to be long enough to make actual contact with the arc but do not need to intersect 6 1 4 3 POINT ARC Description This function allows the user to create an arc through 3 points nodes that are not collinear The created arc will be included in the current part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE e This command will be prompted 3 times e When 3 points or nodes are selected an arc will automatically be drawn 2 EXIT will terminate this function The asterisks represent the points through which the arc is drawn 6 1 5 COPY Description This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate lines The user may then simultaneously translate and or rotate the copied lines Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO COPY gt SELECT LINES 6 5 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 e Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A
31. gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts gt MATERIAL ID xx DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID x 6 10 7 CREATE Description This function creates a new material Usage 6 159 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 After selecting create VPG offers the following material categories MATERIAL TYPES STRUCTURAL ALE DAMPER SPRING SEAT BELT YPG MATERIALS ExlT 2 Selecting either category yields an LS DYNA material card list When the desired material is selected from the list VPG displays its definition card s The user can then edit the material card for the desired properties 6 10 8 DELETE Description This function deletes the user selected materials from the database VPG displays the material card list Selected materials are marked with an asterisk When the user exits the material card list the selected materials are deleted 6 10 9 DEFINE PROPERTIES Description This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material Users may select an existing material by picking an element or material name of a material 2 After the user selects a material its MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears 3 The user may modify the properties manually in the MATERIAL DEFINITION window HATERIAL DEFINITION MATERIAL DEFINITION MAT_ELASTIC ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION MID MATERIAL ID
32. 1 ELAST 14 COMPSO 1 ELAST 2 PLAS JOHNS 2 PLAS JOHNS 33 FOAM PLAS 34 BOLTZMAN 1 ELAST 1 ELAST 6 HYD_VISC 3 HYDPLA 3 HYDPLA 1 ELAST 1 ELAST 2 PLAS JOHNS 2 PLAS JOHNS 33 FOAM _ PLAS eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C C 20 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 17 MAT_ORIENTED_CRACK 2 PLAS_JOHNS 18 MAT_POWER_LAW_PLASTICITY 2 PLAS_JOHNS 19 MAT_STRAIN_RATE_DEPENDENT_ PLASTICITY 2 PLAS JOHNS 20 MAT_RIGID 1 ELAST 21 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_THERMAL 14 COMPSO 22 MAT_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 14 COMPSO 23 MAT_TEMPERATURE_DEPENDENT_ORTHOTROPIC 4 HYD_JCOOK 24 CONC 14 COMPSO 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 PLAS_TAB 25 MAT_GEOLOGICAL_CAP_MODEL 24 CONC 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 2 PLAS_JOHNS 27 MAT_MOONEY RIVLIN_RUBBER 1 ELAST 28 MAT_ RESULTANT PLASTICITY 2 PLAS JOHNS 29 MAT FORCE LIMITED 2 PLAS JOHNS 30 MAT_CLOSED FORM SHELL PLASTICITY 2 PLAS JOHNS 31 MAT_FRAZER NASH RUBBER MODEL 1 ELAST 32 MAT_LAMINATED_GLASS 33 MAT_BARLAT_ANISOTROPIC_PLASTICITY 33 MAT_BARLAT_YLD96 34 MAT_FABRIC 35 MAT_PLASTIC_GREEN NAGHDI_RATE 36 MAT_3 PARAMETER_BARLAT 2 PLAS_JOHNS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 14 COMPSO 2 PLAS_JOHNS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 37 MAT_TRANSVERSELY_ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_PLASTIC 38 MAT_BLATZ KO_ FOAM 39 MAT_FLD_TRANSVERSELY_ ANISOTROPIC 40 MAT_NONLINEAR_ORTHOTROPIC 41 MAT_USER DEFINED MATERIAL MODELS 51 MAT_BAMMAN 52 MAT_BAMMAN_ DAMAGE 53 MAT_CLOSED CELL FOAM 54 MAT_ENHANCED_CO
33. 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_ PLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_ PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_ PLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 1 ELASTIC 34 VISCOELASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 2 ELASTIC PLASTIC PLASTICITY 2 ELASTIC_ PLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_ PLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC_DISCRETE BEAM 1 ELASTIC 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 33 VISCOPLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 35 VISCOELASTIC eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 77 MAT_HYPERELASTIC_ RUBBER 77 MAT_OGDEN_ RUBBER 78 MAT_SOIL_CONCRETE 79 MAT_HYSTERETIC SOIL 80 MAT_RAMBERG_OSGOOD 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_ DAMAGE 83 MAT_FU_CHANG_ FOAM 86 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ VISCOELASTIC 42 HYPERELASTIC 42 HYPERELASTIC 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 1 ELASTIC 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 87 MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER 1 ELASTIC 88 MAT_MTS 1 ELASTIC 89 MAT_PLASTICITY_POLYMER 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 90 MAT_ACOUSTIC 1 ELASTIC 94 MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELASTIC 96 MAT_BRITTLE_DAMAGE 98 MAT SIMPLIFIED JOHNSO
34. 14 GENERAL SOLID SECTION_SOLID CONVERTS RADIOSS SPRING PROPERTY TYPE 4 8 12 13 INTO DYNA s MATERIAL 196 IF H 0 N1 0 LINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA K RADIOSS D DYNA C RADIOSS IF H 0 N1 gt 0 NONLINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA A RADIOSS IF A RADIOSS 0 0 THEN K DYNA 1 0 C2 DYNA B RADIOSS A RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS IF H 1 N1 gt 0 K DYNA K RADIOSS A RADIOSS 1 0 IS ASSUMED C2 DYNA B RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS CONVERT RADIOSS SPRING INTO DYNA BEAM IN ALL CASES IF THE LENGTH OF SPRING IS FINITE SET SCOOR IN SECTION_BEAM TO 2 IF THE LENGTH IS VERY SMALL lt 0 000001 OR ZERO SET SCOOR TO 0 2 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 0 VOID 1 MAT_ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 4 JOHNSON_COOK 6 HYDRODYNAMIC_ VISCOUS 10 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 19 ELASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 21 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM There is no direct conversion of RADIOSS mat 21 to MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM An example input for a mat57 seat foam is attached 1 MAT_ELASTIC 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_ JOHNSON_COOK 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 9 MAT_NULL 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC UNITS kg mm ms GPa MAT_LOW_DENSITY_ FOAM seat foam 571258 8200E 08 0
35. 6 Triangle Min Interior Angle lt on nr _ 7 Quad Max Interior Angle gt 5 sp _ 7 Quad Min Interior Angle _ Fixed Featureline Angle _ Fixed Boundary No Of Iterations o Check Repair Close Reset Fedo e The user may define parameters Upon clicking Check VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED XXXXXX CHECK gt PICK A NODE WILL INITIATE DYNAMIC REPAIR Enter SELECT MESH 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS e After entering DONE the MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window pops up Enter SET DYNAMIC REPAIR 2 The DYNAMIC REPAIR OPTION menu pops up as following NODE MOVE MODE STEP VALUE 3 If entering NODE MOVE MODE VPG prompts gt PLEASE SELECT NODE MOVE MODE AVERAGE NORMAL PERPENDICULAR PLNE 4 If entering STEP VALUE VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT STEP VALUE DEFAULT 1 0 6 5 25 SUMMARY CHECK 6 111 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description The SUMMARY CHECK function performs a comprehensive model check on the current elements in the model database using user specified parameters The results of the SUMMARY CHECK function are displayed as a table of model quality parameters by parts as a percentage of elements passing each modeling criteria value This data may be exported into an ASCII file for model documentation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT MESH CHECK CATEGORY e Simultaneously the Mesh Check window is displayed as follows Hes
36. 7 8 2 DEFINE PROPERTY Description this function allows the user to redefine the materials of explosive and medium in the model and the properties of state equation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After apart is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DEFINE ALE MATERIAL CREATE SELECT MODIFY CURRENT MATERIAL xa e CREATE anew material will be created for selected part e SELECT a material will be selected for selected part e MODIFY CURRENT MATERIAL user can modify current material of selected part e Click EXIT exit material definition 3 After material is defined VPG prompts 7 80 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES gt SELECT OPTION DEFINE ALE SECTION CREATE SELECT MODIFY CURRENT SECTION EXIT CREATE a new section will be created for selected part e SELECT a section will be selected for selected part MODIFY CURRENT SECTION user can modify current section of selected part EXIT exit section definition After section is defined VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DEFINE ALE EOS CREATE SELECT MODIFY CURRENT EOS EXIT CREATE a new EOS will be created for selected part SELECT a EOS will be selected for selected part MODIFY CURRENT EOS user can modify current EOS of selected part EXIT exit EOS definition 7 8 3 DEFINE COUPLING Description this function is used to define the fluid and solid coupling between explosive and me
37. ITHS SIDE IMPACT DATA ITEMS DATA VEH BARRIER Y CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 BARRIER VELOCITY mm s 1 S65669E 004 X OF WHEELBASE CENTER mm f 500000E 003 OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000 E 000 VEHICLE WHEELBASE mm 2 400000 E 003 2 VPG prompts for the crash target for MDB gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model S58 seas Figure 13 An Example of a Generated IIHS SIDE PASSED IMPACT Model 7 4 7 5 AMS RIGID 15 DEG Description This function will create a rigid wall at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER AMS WALL INFORMATION 7 56 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES AES WALL DATA 1T EMS MW DATA RIGID WALL STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm EEA VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 1 115972E 004 Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000E 000 RIGID WALL ANGLE deg 1 500000E 001 FRICTION COEFFICIENT 8 000000E 001 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL ABORT Cu RSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target pos
38. ModelD 267 ModelD 264 Mum of Layers Mum of Layers g Bias Factor From Source Face Bias Factor From Source Face o l oal Apply Cancel Apply Cancel Select source elements and target elements and the numbers of both elements The distributions of node locations are similar and VPG will automatically look for the aligning nodes in the model sometimes user needs to manually select the Usage 1 should be the same 2 aligning nodes from source and target elements 3 Set the number of layers between source elements and target elements and the bias factor from source face click the Apply button to generate solid elements by linear mapping 7 8 1 2 SPHERE CORE IN BOX Description the generated explosive models are sphere fluid and solid coupling models During the process the materials the element properties and the state equation of each part in the model will all be defined automatically 1 17 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Sphere Core Parameters Unit Mit TON SEC M Explosive Dimension ALE Zone Sphere ine Shape Cube Radius 100 0000 Fone 1 Dimension 7 Material Soi ry 1 600 0000 Location User Define Y1 1600 0000 1 600 0000 Gaz 300 0000 fone 2 Dimension Orentaon ajs w Include one 2 clement Size Material air Size J20 0000 Marx Ratia 2 a000 Transition Region 7 TR 100 0000 Apply Undo Sphere in box
39. Part Selection gt Select Parts lt Reference gt Set Clear lt Control Parameter gt Inner Outer M Keep Check Apply Exit 9 9 14 SPH CONTROL Description This function allows the user to define options of showing SPH results SPH Control Display Type Particle Particle Size 4 T M Contour Colors Select SPHS Contour Setting Usage Select particle ribbon or vector as the SPH display type and then define size of particle ribbon or vector User can select all or a portion of particles to show result 9 9 15 DRAWBEAD FORCE Description This function allows the user to show drawbead force for metal forming 9 9 16 EXPORT BOUNDARY LINE Description This function allows the user export boundary lines of parts Export Boundary Line Select Parts EPeEPEPEE PEPE ree etter eee eter tere eee teeter eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee Exit 9 41 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Usage 1 User selects one or more parts and boundary lines of selected parts will be shown highlighted 2 Export the highlighted boundary lines saved as format of lin 9 9 17 MODEL SUMMARY Description This function enables the user to display the statistics regarding elements and nodes in the model Figure 9 44 shows a sample model summary Model Summary Mumber of Parts Number of Elerns Number of Modes Wax Elem Mo Wax Mode No Beams Tri Plates Quad Plates Hexahed
40. SELECT REFERENCE LOCATION ABORT KEY IN X Y Z NODE POINT REJECT LAST DONE After selecting reference location VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET LOCATION ABORT CURSOR ON LINE INCREMENTAL XYZ KEY IN X Y Z NODE POINT REJECT LAST DONE After transformation the following options are available AGAIN e Repeats the previous transformation LINE eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR POINT REVERSE OPERATION e Reverses the previous transformations DONE EXIT e EXIT will return to step 1 6 1 22 BRIDGE LINE Description This function creates a spline curve to connect selected two lines Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE BY PLACING THE CURSOR NEAR THE CONNECTING END gt SELECT NODES POINTS BRIDGE LINE WILL BE CONNECTED TO THE LAST LOCATION SELECT LINE SELECT LINE NODES POINTS REJECT LAST EXIT 2 SELECT LINE e Selects the first line NODES POINTS e Selects several nodes to create a line segment for the first line definition REJECT LAST Rejects last selected line EXIT 2 After selecting the first line selects the second line then a spline curve will be created to connect these two lines e Lines created by method NODES POINTS will be removed automatically after bridge line is created 6 17 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 6 2 SURFACE PRE PROCESSOR Commands in this menu are used to create and modify CAD surface data in VPG VPG imports surface data and line data and converts it in
41. available VPG Structure contains many special features designed specifically for system level or full vehicle analysis These features allow for easy modeling of joints and bushings finite element meshes boundary conditions materials properties suspension system components tire models and road surface models VPG Safety was introduced in release 2 0 of eta VPG This module is targeted at LS DYNA users who wish to construct vehicle impact and occupant safety simulations This module is 1 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 1 Introduction based on two integral sub components a crash tool library and the test procedures associated with a specific governmental regulation The Crash Tool Library contains the dummy or barrier needed to perform a specific analysis For instance a European Side Impact test requires an EEC Side Impact Barrier and a EUROSID dummy model These are combined with the testing procedure vehicle velocity etc and measurement criteria to establish a process VPG Safety follows that process to set up the simulation model A total of 21 different governmental or insurance institute test procedures are contained within VPG Safety 1 5 eta VPG Special Features eta VPG was initially designed with unique features specifically for virtual proving ground simulations These features are not found in competing general purpose pre and post processors The development of these features and functions was necessary to satisfy the followin
42. gt ENTER DEPENDENT D O F DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Any combination of integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees of freedom Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom i e 123456 all D O F 2 Next VPG prompts for nodes points for element gt PICK NODES POINTS gt AT INDEPENDENT NODE e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 3 Once the desired node or point has been selected VPG prompts gt AT DEPENDENT NODE e The user may select up to 200 dependent nodes 4 Once the user picks the dependent node s DONE registers the selection and restarts the prompt cycle CREATE PLOTEL ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS PLOTEL elements are used as the cross section pattern for the DRAG MESH operation Usage 6 41 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function Note PLOTEL elements may be output to a NASTRAN bulk data file They are ignored for other analysis programs CREATE PLATE ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the PLATE ELEMENT
43. gt SELECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE 3 After selecting the first reference node VPG prompts gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE e After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 5 MOVE NODE TO SURFACE 1 If NODE TO SURFACE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE NODE UNDO LAST EXIT UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT A POINT ON SURFACE gt SELECT SURFACE e After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 6 MOVE NODE TO SURF BOUNDARY 1 If NODE TO SURF BOUNDARY is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE NODE UNDO LAST EXIT 6 89 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT A POINT ON SURFACE BOUNDARY gt SELECT SURFACE After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 7 ALONG EDGE 1 If ALONG EDGE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE NODE UNDO LAST EXIT e UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCATION ON ELEMENT EDGE e Select a highlighted element edge the
44. gt SELECT MATERIAL TO COPY 2 Once the user selects a material to copy VPG copies the material and prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt MATERIAL ID XX DUPLICATED FROM MATERIAL ID X The user exits the function COPY 6 11 4 CREATE Description This function creates a new material Usage 1 A pop up window appears with the material types The list of the material types depends on the analysis program e g NASTRAN LS DYNA defined in the SETUP menu 2 Once the user has chosen a material type a pop up window appears with the material s properties e The displayed property table allows the user to insert values for the material s properties 6 11 5 DELETE Description This function deletes the user selected materials from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user for the name of the target material gt SELECT MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATL 6 164 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 The user selects the material to be deleted The elements that are assigned with that material turn gray and VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED If the user enters EXIT VPG deletes the material and changes the color of the part from gray to white The white indicates that the part does not have any material properties assigned to it VPG returns to step 1 6 11 6 DEFINE PROPERTIES Description This function defines or modifies the properties of a selected material Usa
45. gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT 6 128 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST PART ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e This prompt is repeated until all sets are entered new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST e Once set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW PART SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 7 30 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 31 SHOW SET PARTS Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined part sets VPG displays the appropriate ID numbers on the screen next to each defined part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT VPG displays the selected part sets and returns the user to the PART SET submenu Note Because more than one ID number may be assigned to each part viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific part set at a time 6 7 32 SET ON OFF PART Description This function allows the user to turn on and off parts included in a selected
46. highlighted and ID will be shown e SHOW SURF NUMBER All surfaces ID of the displayed surfaces will be shown e EXIT 6 2 19 SWEEP SURFACE Description This function allows the user to create a surface via the selection of a section line and a direction line The surface is generated along the length of the direction line DIRECTION Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a sweep type gt SELECT SWEEP TYPE NORMAL SWEEP e The section lines remain perpendicular to the line of direction RIGID SWEEP The section lines remain parallel to the line of pattern 2 VPG prompts the user to select a line gt SELECT A LINE FOR THE SWEEP PATTERN The selected line will act as a constant cross section for the new surface 3 Once the line has been selected VPG prompts gt SELECT A LINE FOR THE SWEEP DIRECTION e The new surface will generate along the selected line and the user will return to step 2 6 26 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 20 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to move or rotate a selected surface either locally or globally Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system 2 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e i
47. operation Input Yiew Name Userview 3 Cancel Figure 9 26 View Name control window RECALL VIEW Recalls the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click RECALL The program will display the model according to the viewing orientation saved under the selected VIEW NAME DELETE Deletes the previously saved viewing orientation Click a VIEW NAME in the view list and then click DELETE to delete the saved view EXIT Closes the SAVE VIEW control window and exits the function 9 8 11 BACKGROUND COLOR Description This function allows the user to select a color from color palette as the background color in the graphic display window Once the function is selected the program displays a color palette as shown in Figure 9 27 9 26 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 27 Background Color Palette Usage The user may select any color in the palette as the background color The program will change the background color immediately and exit the function as the color is selected Press the ESC key to exit the function without selecting any color 9 27 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 9 TOOL MENU The functions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 28 The user can define section cut mirror result define active window trace node and define node curve section Cut Constraint Motion Mirror Result by XYZ Face Reflection Define Active Window Clear Active Window
48. returns the user to the PART CONTROL menu The materials and properties of a new part do not have to be defined at the time the part is created 3 If PART COMPOSITE OPTION is selected VPG displays the PART DEFINITION window as below 10 19 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY PART DEFINITION PART DEFINITION PART_ COMPOSITE OPTION ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION PID PART ID ELFORM ELEMENT FORMULATION SHRF SHEAR FACTOR o0 000000E 000 MLOC LOCATION OF REFERENCE SURFACE lo MAREA MOM STRUCTURAL MASS PER UNIT AREA o 000000E 000 HSID HOURGLASS ID ol ADPOPT ADAP TIYITY FLAGI ol OK Cancel 4 After clicking OK VPG displays following options DYNA PART COMPOSITE OPTIONS PART COMPOSITE EXIT The user can select these two options to define PART COMPOSITE or PART COMPOSITE CONTACT Please refer to DYNA manual for reference Note The new part is displayed as current 10 3 8 CURRENT Description This function changes the current part All lines surfaces and elements that the user creates are automatically included in the current part The name of the current part is displayed in its part color in the lower right corner of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NEW CURRENT PART gt PICK A LINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART e The user selects a target part to make current e Once the user selects the target part VPG makes the part current and displays the part name in the lowe
49. the user is returned to step 1 6 119 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 2 CREATE NODE Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique node and element ID numbers The nodes may be included in multiple sets Usage al VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid e Ifthe user enters a node set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt NODE SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e The user may press the left most mouse button or N to select the node nearest to the cursor If the user selects the same node twice while creating a node set VPG returns the prompt gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED If the user enters DONE VPG saves the set and prompts gt X NODES INCLUDED IN NODE SET X If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 6 7 3 CURRENT NODE Description This function lists the defined node sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage i VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 Once the set s is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET 6 7 4 DELETE NODE Description This function allows the user to remove node sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize n
50. 0045 2222 0 4 0 0 0 0 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINE_CURVE 2222 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0625 0 119800001 0 122500002 0 383390009 0 177499995 0 377400011 0 234999999 0 413399994 0 280699998 0 444999993 0 344999999 0 466100007 0 397000015 0 497999996 0 444900006 0 53670001 0 49000001 0 561600029 0 528999984 0 601000011 0 564999998 0 653999984 0 597000003 0 721000016 0 622500002 0 818000019 0 644900024 0 897000015 0 660000026 0 949999988 0 666999996 0 989000022 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 0 670000017 0 99000001 0 671999991 1 0 0 699000001 1 20000005 0 75 1 51999998 0 800000012 2 19000006 0 808000028 2 30299997 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_ DAMAGE 23 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_ DAMAGE 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 16 MAT_ PSEUDO TENSOR 25 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 2 MAT ORTHOTROPIC ELASTIC 27 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_ DAMAGE 28 ORTHOTROPIC 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB We set DYNA s value PR 0 0 SIGY 1 0 VF 0 2 MU 0 2 and ELFORM 1 in relative SECTION SOLID card We create a HOURGLASS card with IHQ 4 and put it into relative PART s HGID field In RADIOSS if the relative element property ID is 0 or the element property type is not TYPE 6 we will set the material directions 1 2 3 align with the global axes X Y Z AOPT 2 A1 A2 A3 1 0 0 D1 D2 D3 0 1 0 Otherwise we will set AOPT 0 and map the RADIOSS 1 2 3 axes to the LS DYNA b c a axes The RADIOSS yield functio
51. 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 After selecting surfaces VPG prompts gt IS THE OFFSET DIRECTION CORRECT ABORT e Abort offset surface and exit this function REVERSE e Reverse current offset direction ACCEPT e Accept current highlighted offset direction 3 After confirming the offset direction VPG prompts gt ENTER OFFSET DISTANCE enter distance value and click OK the selected surfaces are offset 6 2 29 MERGE SURFACES Description This function helps to merge two or more surfaces into one surface user can reserve the original surfaces or not Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 After selecting surfaces VPG prompts DO YOU WANT TO DELETE ORIGINAL SURFACES gt YES e The original surfaces will be deleted NO e The original surfaces will be reserved 6 2 30 EXTEND SURFACE Description This function helps to extend a surface user can extend a surface to a target surface or along an original surface edge or perpendicular to an original surface edge Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE EXTENDING OPTION SELECT OPTION AE AUTO EXTEND TO SURFA Es EXTEND TO SURFACE FE ExTEND ALONG EDGE NE NORAML EXTEND DO DONE 6 35 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 6 36 2 gt PRE PROCESSOR AUTO EXTEND TO SURFACE Select a surface to extend the program will automatically extend a surface till intersecting with another surface EXTEND TO SURFACE Select a surface to ext
52. 3D simulation of a model The user may toggle the hidden lines on and off while using the SHADING and FILL HIDE PLOT commands This effect creates opaque elements that prevent objects in the background from showing through objects in the foreground 10 6 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Usage 1 VPG prompts gt HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL ON or gt HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL OFF Note When checking for penetration make sure the flag HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL ON appears along the bottom of the display area 10 1 14 TRANSPARENCY MODE ON OFF toggle Description This function toggles the transparency mode on or off during shading Transparency factors are defined in the SETUP menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt TRANSPARENCY MODE ON or gt TRANSPARENCY MODE OFF 10 1 15 MOVE LIGHT SOURCE Description VPG uses two types of light sources ambient light and directional light Ambient light comes from all directions and illuminates objects regardless of their position or orientation with the same intensity Directional light comes from a specific direction It flows uniformly and maintains a consistent intensity It has a directional vector that determines the face on which an object receives light The MOVE LIGHT SOURCE command positions a directional vector at two points that are perpendicular to an object The right and left arrow keys move the light source in the positive and negative X direction while the up and down arrow keys m
53. 4 3 MULTIPLE PARTS go to step 5 4 VPG prompts for a starting node number gt ASSIGN STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N YES gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR PART xxxx e Once a number has been entered the prompt will read gt NODE x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT NODE NO xxxx gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR PART xxxx e These prompts will continue for every part in the database If the user enters a STARTING NUMBER that already exists VPG 6 92 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gives the message that the location has already been assigned and returns the user to the beginning of this step gt RENUMBER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb Zero 0 will assign MAX NODE NO 1 NO gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER 1 TO EXIT e Once a number has been entered the prompt will read gt ENTER NODE NUMBER INC BETWEEN PARTS gt 0 DEFAULT TO 1000 1 NO GAP BETWEEN PARTS e Any integer may be entered gt RENUMBER SUMMARY IS WRITTEN ON FILE ntb 5 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART e After parts are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING NODE NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PART e Any integer may be entered 6 4 16 SCALE Description This section applies a scale factor to any or all X Y and Z components for some or all nodes in a global or local direction The scale factor may be positive or negative change the sign on any or all of the X Y Z components The parts will be magnified if
54. 4 VPG then prompts for the beam orientation gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR BEAM GAP ORIENTATION 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO YES NO e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines 6 ABORT DONE or EXIT exits this function 6 3 13 RENUMBER Description This function allows the user to renumber all elements in the existing database with the option of creating a summary table report of the element ranges between each part The user may renumber elements in sequence or by parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RENUMBERING OPTION EXIT SEQUENCE ALL PARTS MULTIPLE PARTS 6 61 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 When user enters SEQUENCE VPG prompts gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER DEFAULT 1 3 When user enters ALL PARTS VPG prompts ASSIGN STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR EACH PART Y N YES ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NO FOR PART xxxx Once a number has been entered the prompt will read ELEMENT x TO xx ASSIGNED NEXT ELEM NO yyyy If blank or zero is entered yyyy will be used as the starting element number for the next part These prompts will continue for every part in the database NO ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER any positive integer gt ENTER ELEMENT INCREMENT BETWEEN PARTS 1000 Any positive integer may be entered e V V V V 4 When user enters MULTIPLE PARTS VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PA
55. 6 10 15 SHOW BUSHING Description This function shows bushing Clicking the Clear screen icon turns bushing off 6 161 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 16 THERMAL MATL MENU Description This function creates thermal materials Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION e Methods as following ASSIGN MATERIAL CREATE DELETE DEFINE PROPERTIES LIST VIEW EXIT The functions of the THERMAL MATERIAL MENU are similar to the functions of the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU See the preceding pages for a complete description of these functions 6 162 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 11 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the material properties in the database Parts are displayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white The functions in this menu are organized as follows MATERIAL PROPERTY ASSIGN MATERIAL CHANGE COLOR COPY CREATE DELETE DEFINE PROPERTIES ERASE UNREF MATL UST MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF ON OFF RENUMBER VIEW EXIT By switching solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the user can assign and create materials that are solver code specific The user may assign and create materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note If t
56. Angle E Drop Height mm From 1000 To 11500 Inc loo Rotate About X Axis Counter Clockwise degree From To Inc l Rotate About Y Axis Counter Clockwise degree From To Inc OK 7 9 1 8 TOOLKIT Description this function is used for redo operation and setup Usage e RECALCULATE CG recalculate the model s center of gravity REMOVE DAMPING remove the previously defined damping in DTM module 7 87 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 9 2 PRESSURE TEST This Pressure Test can quickly create simulation models for pressure tests in accordance with the process guidance For a Pressure Test process users define a PUNCH with a certain diameter then create a node set including interested test points PUNCH will apply a pressure at the first node with a procedure of three phrases Ramp up Hold and Release Then PUNCH moves to next node with the specified moving time period and repeat the loading procedure until all node positions are tested PRESSURE TEST BOUNDARY CONDITIONS PRESSURE LOCATION ANALYSIS CONTROL TIME HISTORY OPTION RUN TT My EXPORT DYNA FILE A detailed description is given in the following sections 7 9 2 1 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Description This function helps to define SPCs for parts if needed SELECTION OPTION CREATE BEBE Nr INCLUDE NODES IN SET LIST SET MODIFY REMOVE NODES IN SET SHO e CREATE create SPC for selected nodes DELETE delete SPC for selected node or
57. CARD LIST 1 AUTO N TO 5S BUMPER TO WALL I MASTER amp SLAVE _ MASTER ONLY _ SLAVE ONLY SELECT ALL EXIT Note The displayed contact may be erased by clicking the CLEAR button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW 6 178 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS The DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU contains distinct LS DYNA specific functions VPG defines these functions in two ways graphically when defining such things such as a box or vector and with cards based on the definition cards found in the LS DYNA Keyword User s Manual An example of a definition card can be found in Section 2 13 DYNA MISC AIRBAGS ALE COMPONENT GEBOD CONTROL CARDS DAMPING CARDS DATABASE DEFINE DEFORMABLE TO RIGID EQUATION OF STATE EXCHANGE FACTOR HOURGLASS INTEGRATION INTERFACE CARDS PERTURBATION RAIL SEATBELT SENSOR TERMINATION Note The DYNA MISCELLANEOUS option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software is NASTRAN Note All of these options share this standard submenu except CONTROL CARDS Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window a
58. CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function allows the user to change the color of parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO CHANGE COLOR gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user selects target part s VPG prompts gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT e The user selects the desired color from the color bar 10 3 7 CREATE Description This function creates a new part inthe VPG database The user must name the new part with any combination of up to eight alohanumeric characters 10 18 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Usage 1 VPG displays following DYNA part type DINA PART IYPE PART OPTION PART COMPOSITE OPTION EXIT e If PART OPTION is selected go to step 2 if PART COMPOSITE OPTION is selected go to step 3 2 If PART OPTION is selected VPG displays the PART DEFINITION window as below See figure 10 3 2 PART DEFINITION PART DEFINITION PART ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION PID PART ID SECID PART SECTION ID MID MATERIAL ID EOSID EQN OF STATE ID HGID HOURGLASS ID GRAV GRAVITY LOAD INITIALIZATION FLAG ADPOPT ADAPTIVITY FLAG i q o q q q o TMID THERMAL MATERIAL ID OK Cancel Figure 10 3 2 Part Definition Window e The user edits the window to create the part If SECID MID EOSID HGID or TMID is selected the user is prompted to edit another window for these properties before retuning to the PART DEFINITION window OK completes the part and
59. Define Node Trace Clear Node Trace Part Value Curve Nodal Value Curve Element Value Curve Nodal Displacement Curve Distance Curve Screen Curve Operation Part Distance Part Interference Check SPH Control Drawbead Force Export Boundary Line Model Summary Figure 9 28 Tool Menu A detailed description of each function and corresponding submenu is given in the following section 9 9 1 SECTION CUT Description This function displays the section cut of a finite element model with a defined plane intersecting the edges of elements The functions in SECTION CUT control window are shown in Figure 9 29 DEFINE CUT PLANE is the only option available when the SECTION CUT functions starts 9 28 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Section Gut Operation Section only Define Cut Plane Clear Section Cut E Normal View Section Cut Options Export Cut Section Cut Plane Operation Translate Rotate Move Section By Mouse Apply Exit Figure 9 29 Section Cut Operation Usage DEFINE CUT PLANE The section plane is the U V plane of a user defined local coordinate system The local coordinate system may be defined by selecting one two or three nodes from the model The program displays a Control Option window as shown in Figure 9 30 The program also changes the displayed model to gray color Control Option Select by Cursor wY along 7 Axis w along Z Axis Reject Last Figure 9 30 Define Cut Plane 9
60. ETA US SIDE Model eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES TAKATA 3 Year Child Model FAA HYBRID Ill 7 6 4 CREATE DUMMY MODELS Description This command imports and positions a finite element dummy model into the current model database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR THE FTSS50 DUMMY 2 DUMMY ASSEMBY 7 71 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES YEG Henu Findo DUMMY ASSEMBLY YOKE L ABORT ROTATION ANGLE Phi Phi Theta Theta Psi Psi REJECT ASSEMBLY RESET ASSEMBLY RESET ALL PART ON OFF MOVE H POINT SHADE ON OFF IGNORE STOP ANGLES The user may adjust part altitude in the dummy then press exit to end the adjustment procedure 3 VPG prompts gt DO YOU NEED A SEATBELT 7 72 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES NEED SEATBELT DRIVER DEFAULT PASSENGER DEFAULT DRIVER CONTROL LENGTH PASSENGER CONTROL LENG DRIVER PROFILE PASSENGER PROFILE ON OFF SENSOR AND RETRA NO ABORT The user can choose a seatbelt type in this menu 4 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD UPPER ANCHOR 5 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON INBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 6 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LOWER ANCHOR 7 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE ON OUTBOARD LAP BELT ANCHOR 8 VPG prompts gt DEFINE A VECTOR TO MOVE SEATBELTS TRANSFORM ABORT MOVE BOTH SEATBELTS MOVE UPPER SEATBELT MOVE LOWER SEATBELT REVERSE OPERATION KEY IN VECTOR
61. EXIT DISTANCE e This measures the distance between the points and nodes IDENTIFY ELEMENT e This identifies the element numbers of the plate elements that represent the free surfaces in the FREE SURFACE sub menu Each plate element ID is identical to the solid element ID i e one solid element with the ID xyz will have the plate elements that correspond with ID xyz IDENTIFY NODE e Identifies the nodes in the solid elements and acquires the node numbers and the X Y Z global coordinates CREATE EL FROM SURF e Creates plate elements on the free surfaces of the displayed solids The plate elements will reside on the screen in the current part at the time of creation e In order to for the user to identify any unwanted free surfaces VPG creates plate elements that carry element node numbers from a parent solid element If these plate elements are used in a model they should be renumbered with the RENUMBER ELEMENT and RENUMBER NODE commands in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus respectively 6 106 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR EXIT e Returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 18 CHECK SPRING Description This function checks spring elements for unconnected ends If unconnected elements are found a mass value can be entered to create mass elements at the free ends automatically Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHECK FOR NON ZERO LENGTH SPRINGS Y N YES e This will identify all spring elements that are
62. EXIT returns the user to the UTILITY MENU 10 4 7 IDENTIFY ELEMENTS Description This function allows the user to identify an element and its nodes by cursor selection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR e VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window e The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics e It will also identify NASTRAN ELEMENT LS DYNA ELEMENT TYPE TYPE pC BEAM CBAR RIGID EL Bee ceas SPRING 10 34 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY CELAS1 SPOTWELD RBAR MASS CTUBE JOINT ISO SHL T SHELL CRBES SEATBELT IDENTIFY ELEMENTS displays element numbers and corresponding node numbers 10 4 8 LOAD CURVE Description This function defines and modifies the load curves for a nonlinear analysis The LOAD CURVE command requires several levels of submenus Usage 1 VPG displays the Load Curve option menu as below figure LOAD CURVE CREATE DELETE ERASE UNREF CURV LIST MODIFY READ CURVE RENUMBER SHOW CURVE COPY CURVE CHECK SUSPENSION CURVE EXIT Figure 10 4 8 1 Load Curve Option Menu 2 After the user selects a command VPG lists a set of options specific to that command CREATE Description This function allows the user to create load curves Usage 1 VP
63. FINITE SET SCOOR OF SECTION_BEAM TO 2 IF LENGTH IS VERY SMALL lt 0 000001 OR ZERO SET SCOOP TO 0 IF RADIOSS DOES NOT HAVE INER VALUE VPG SET It AS 1 0 8 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 0 VOID 9 MAT_NULL 1 ELAST 1 MAT_ELASTIC 2 PLAS_JOHNS or PLAS_ZERIL 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 3 HYDPLA 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 4 HYD JCOOK 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 6 HYD_VISC 9 MAT NULL 10 LAW10 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 14 COMPSO 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC ELASTIC 15 CHANG 2 MAT ORTHOTROPIC ELASTIC 19 FABRI 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 21 DPRAG 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM NOTE There is no direct conversion of RADIOSS s material type 21 to DYNA s MAT_L OW_DENSITY_FOAM VPG uses the following example as DYNA s material type 57 for seat foam UNITS kg mm ms GPa MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM seat foam 571258 8200E 08 0 0045 2222 0 4 0 0 0 0 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DEFINE_CURVE 2222 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0625 0 119800001 0 122500002 0 383390009 0 177499995 0 377400011 0 234999999 0 413399994 0 280699998 0 444999993 0 344999999 0 466100007 0 397000015 0 497999996 0 444900006 0 53670001 0 49000001 0 561600029 0 528999984 0 601000011 0 564999998 0 653999984 0 597000003 0 721000016 0 622500002 0 818000019 0 644900024 0 897000015 C 15 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 0 660000026 0 949999988 0 666999996 0 989000022 0 670000017 0 99000001
64. Figure 9 57 Project on Undeformed Blank LS DYNA usar input STEP t0 TIME 0 021176 419 43208 ge COMPONENT Huan stress ING 1 B75747145 4 717407 Z30000 7 997775 IPAH 74 711960 ETAPOST Figure 9 58 Current Frame Contour 9 53 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 11 7 ELEMENT RESULT Description This function determines whether the CONTOUR will be based on elements or nodes 9 11 8 CONTOUR SETTING Description This function will start the Contour Bar Options Control Window shown as Figure 9 60 There are several options Usage e REVERSE CONTOUR BAR This function allows the user to reverse the color of contour bar for the contour plot The result of the reverse contour bar is show in Figure 9 59 900009 E9e Ocr9ts 00E Sleds LEC CECOT GEL GPOSPEL ELL LSO 3 lt GF SESLaGEL belSrros OL 80f GEL a oe Gasen GIE O0S668 c C6097 OGE o 99 R CSF G6c06F OLS S00009 C9 OcFSEs00 el ZEC cLcb00 S b SFOSEL ELL LGO 3 oF SESLOS EL GcbSrros gL 80E GEL BECI eOe Gasen soe J066 ZE C60E9 IGE ogge T EGF SocOor Sts Figure 9 59 The Reverse contour Bar result Contour Bar Options lt Contour Mode RGB x s Contour Level Continue lt Lantour Range Min 363 6000 Max 516 4903 Reverse Contour Bar Reset Contour Range Apply Exit Figure 9 60 Contour Setting box e RESET CONTOUR RANGE This function resets the contour value range
65. IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector e NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector The head will align with the normal of the element e SHELL NORMAL seede e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected Figure 17 An Example of a Generated 30 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact 7 61 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 5 OCCUPANT SAFETY 7 5 1 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 5 1 1 FMVSS201 HEAD IMPACT Description This function will position a FMVSS201 Head Impact Head Form model in the VPG model database and apply appropriate boundary conditions It should be noted that the FTSS Head Form is available only to users who have a valid FTSS Dummy or Head Form License Agreement Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER HEAD IMPACT INFORMATION FISS HEAD FORE DATA ITEMS Mm im _ DATA HEAD FORM STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mim geese HEAD FORM VELOCITY mm s 2 VPG prompts gt PICK MOST OUTSIDE SKIN TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE HEAD Define the target on the pillar where the head will impact ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRCETION AGAINST HEAD ABORT KEY IN VECTOR NODES VECTOR SHELL NORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UNDO LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector e NODES VECTOR Select two nodes to define a vector e SHELL NORM
66. LAST DONE EXIT ABORT will exit this function 6 1 21 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to translate or rotate the selected lines or points to a new location Usage 1 VPG prompts LES POINT TO POINT EXIT e If LCS is selected go to step 2 if POINT TO POINT is selected go to step 6 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts MOVE 6 15 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 16 ROTATE ABORT e If MOVE is entered gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS i e 0 0 1000 This will move the selected line s 1000 units along the W axis lf ROTATE is selected the user enters an angle increment Note All rotational commands are about the local W axis or the global Z axis VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR TRANSFORM ABORT LINE POINT After transformation the following options are available AGAIN e Repeats the previous transformation LINE POINT REVERSE OPERATION e Reverses the previous transformations DONE EXIT e EXIT will return to step 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR TRANSFORM ABORT LINE POINT After selecting lines or points VPG prompts gt
67. MODIFY READ BLC STF FILE G VALUE SPRUNG MASS g VALUE UNSPRUNG MASS EXIT 7 2 12 1 CREATE Description This option allows the user to create boundary condition load and constraint for model Usage 1 VPG prompts BOUNDARY HARDPOINT BOUNDARY PART LOAD HARDPOINT LOAD PART CONSTRAINED PART CONTROL CARD EXIT BOUNDARY HARDPOINT e User can define boundary conditions such as velocity acceleration and displacement on hard point of suspension 7 24 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES BOUNDARY PART e User can define boundary conditions such as velocity acceleration and displacement on part of suspension LOAD HARDPOINT e User can add load on hard point of suspension load type can be defined as constant ramp up sinusoidal or by curve LOAD PART e User can add load on part of suspension load type can be defined as constant ramp up sinusoidal or by curve CONSTRAINED PART e User can define constrain between master part and slave part CONTROL CARD e User can define analysis parameter such as termination time and output time step etc 7 2 12 2 DELETE Description This option allows the user to delete already defined boundary condition load and constraint in suspension model 7 2 12 3 LIST Description This option lists already defined boundary condition load and constraint in suspension model 7 2 12 4 MODIFY Description This option allows the user to modify already defined b
68. MODIFY REMOVE NODES IN SET SHOW EXIT 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages SPC CREATE Description This function creates a new SPC set The SPC set may be used later for subcase definition Usage 1 When the user enters CREATE SPC VPG prompts gt ENTER SPC SET NUMBER XXXX OR 1 TO EXIT e The user must enter an integer before proceeding 2 After the user enters SPC set number VPG prompts gt DEFINE D O F FOR SPC e Simultaneously the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box pops up and as 6 151 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR following SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOR Select One From The Following __ xY Symmetry _ X Anti Symmetry _ Y Z Symmetry __ Z Anti Symmetry _ XZ Symmetry __ XZ Anti Symmetry Select Any Combination From Following __ XTranslation __ XRotation __ Translation __ Y Rotation _ Z Translation __ ZRotation OK Cancel The options in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alternate methods for defining the degree of freedom Only the top or the bottom can be selected not both X Y SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X Y ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the
69. NASTRAN SOL 700 The MATERIAL PROPERTY and ELEMENT PROPERTY menus change according to the analysis program Note VPG is unable to convert existing properties into the selected solver format AUTO SEGMENT END toggle Description This option allows the user to designate the end points of line segments to serve as control points Note This function is used in conjunction with CONTROL POINT MESH VPG prompts the user to select control points on lines that are joined through the line segment option CONTROL POINT MESH toggle Description This function pre selects the points on a line for the desired node locations associated with the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S mesh programs FLANGE MESH toggle Description This option turns on the ability of the automeshing routines to support a flange mesh option The Flange Mesh option allows users to identify flange areas of spot welded assemblies and requires that either 2 or 3 elements be placed on the width of the flange CORNER BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative to the selected corner of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected corner by the bias factor Note A bias factor greater than 1 0 generates proportionately larger elements from the selected corner A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately sm
70. NODAL RIGID BODIES 5015 SPOTWELDS 302799 QUAD ELEMENTS 20990 TRIA ELEMENTS 4574 HEXAGONS 695 WEDGES 4 TETRAHEDRONS 16 JOINTS 10 4 11 HARDCOPY DEFAULTS Figure 10 4 10 Database Statistics Window EXPORT Description This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files Refer the detailed descriptions in section 5 9 10 4 12 SETUP DEFAULTS Description The SETUP DEFAULTS window contains various preprocessing utilities that are toggle switch activated See the figure below SETUP DEFAULTS Program Display ANALYSIS PROGRAM 1B aay tad __ AUTO SEGMENT END __ CONTROL POINT MESH __ FLANGE MESH __ CORNER BIAS MESH __ EDGE BIAS MESH ia AUTOMATIC BACKUP Element Type Display I BEAM M SHELL I SPRING I mass I SPH E THICK SHELL i SEATBELT 2 NODES I CONST NODE SET __ SEGMENT SYMBOL __ TYPE IDENTIFIER E NODAL RIGID BODY E SOLD I SPOTWELD I CONST INTERPOLATION E JOINT I INERTIA i SEATBELT 4 NODES __ CONSTRAINED I LOCAL COORD SYSTEMS Figure 10 4 12 Setup Defaults Menu 10 39 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY A detailed description of each option is given in the following section ANALYSIS PROGRAM Description This option adjusts the property and material data to match the selected parameters of the solver The default solver code for VPG is DYNA Nas TRAN DYMA ABAQIJS MOLDOF LC PAMLRASH RADIOSS GENESIS
71. OR E TO EXIT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts gt DEFINE TAIL OF VECTOR ABORT KEY IH X Y Z HODE POINT 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE HEAD OF VECTOR ABORT INCREMENTAL XYZ KEY IN X Y Z HODE POINT REJECT WECTOR TAIL e After defining the vector head the vector is displayed with its vector number in the display window Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 8 DEFORMABLE TO RIGID Description The definition cards of DEFORMABLE TO RIGID specify properties of deformable parts Deformable parts may be switched to rigid at the start of a calculation using the DEFORM TO RIGID card Part switching may be specified on a restart or it may be performed automatically using the AUTOMATIC card The INERTIA card sets inertial properties for deformable parts that will be switched to rigid Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option DEFORMABLE TYPES DEFORM TO RIGID AUTOMATIC INERTIA EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 196 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 9 EQUATION OF STATE Description The definition cards of EQUATION OF STATE specify element properties Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option EQN OF STATE TYPES LINEAR POLYNOMIAL JL SACK TUESDAY GRUNEISEM RATIO POLYNOMIALS POLY VWWENRGY LEAK IGNITION
72. OR SELECTING FROM THE PART LIST e Once a STF part from the suspension is selected the definition window is displayed as shown 7 22 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SIF SUSPENSION PART DEFINITION STF SUSPENSION PART DEFINITION CARD 1 tea STF_SUSPENSION_PART ITEMS DATA PART DESCRIPTION SHOCK UPPER MASS PART MASS 2 000000E 003 SIDE SIDE OPTION 2 CG_DEFIN PART C G DEFINE METHOD 4 NSTR gt POINT CONSTRUT MET e When the user has finished altering the data select OK to accept this change or select cancel to quit 7 2 11 VISUALIZE SUSPENSION Description This option allows the user to visualize a Suspension and change part color VPG will create temporary surfaces that can be shaded for visualization purposes These temporary surfaces are deleted upon exiting this function The user may change the suspension component colors by selecting CHANGE PART COLOR from the menu The user then selects the part to modify from a screen selection or from the part listing The new color is then selected from the color bar displayed in the Display Window This function is terminated by selecting the EXIT command Usage 1 VPG prompts SUSPENSION COLOR REPLACE COLOR CHANGE PART COLOR EXIT 7 23 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES E TAYPE 7 2 12 LOADING ANALYSIS Description This option allows the user to define an LS DYNA file to analyze STF or XML suspension motion CREATE DELETE LIST
73. OUTPUT subsection specify the BINARY database output files Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY EXIT Refer to the beginning of this section for a description of these commands 2 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION EXTENT DATABASE TYPES AUS BINARY HOUTE HPES SSSTAT EXIT 3 When the option is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE FORMAT Description The definition cards in the FORMAT subsection specify database format Usage When DEFINE is selected the DATABASE FORMAT DEFINITION window appears User can select result file as DYNA ANSYS or both DATABASE FSI Description This function defines parameters for the fluent data results file 6 186 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DATABASE FSI SENSOR Description This function defines pressure sensor s locations which follow the positions of some Lagrangian segments during the simulation DATABASE HISTORY Description The definition cards in the HISTORY subsection specify which nodes or elements are outputted into the binary history file Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DATABASE HISTORY OPTION BEAM BEAM SET NODE NODE ID NODE LOCAL NODE SET NODE SET LOCAL PLATE PLATE ID PLATE SET SOLID SOLID ID SOUD SET TSHELL TSHELL ID SET TSHELL EXIT e The
74. PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements will be removed from their original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO e VPG prompts the user to check the individual elements for aspect ratio via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 4 BOUNDARY DISPLAY Description This function checks the continuity of the free edges in a group of elements All free edges will be highlighted with a boundary display Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHECK SINGLE OR MULTIPLE SURFACE S M SINGLE SURFACE e Checks the continuity of the displayed elements and highlights all of the single free edges of the displayed model MULTIPLE SURFACE e Checks the continuity of the displayed elements It also highlights the non intersecting free edges of the multiple surfaces unless the intersection of the multiple surfaces is not connected properly 2 VPG prompts gt GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS FOR FREE EDGES PLOTEL ELEMENTS LINE SEGMENTS EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects PLOTEL ELEMENTS VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO 4 Ifthe user selects YES the PART DEFINITION window pops up 6 98 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e VPG will both add plotels to the part and make the part current e The boundary will remain highlighted until the user selects CLEAR Note VPG will display the boundary of the outer most edges of a solid element struc
75. PRE PROCESSOR message NO PROPERTIES DEFINED IN DATABASE and the command prompt will return VPG prompts the user to designate a part s to accept the selected property gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN SECTION gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART gt 3 The property will be assigned to the elements in the selected parts After the user exits the selected parts will be shown in the property color 6 12 2 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected property Usage 1 The color bar is displayed at the right edge of the graphic area 2 VPG prompts the user to select a section SELECT SECTION TO CHANGE COLOR The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name gt 3 After the user selects a section the prompt reads gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 4 The new color is assigned to the selected section 6 12 3 COPY NASTRAN Description This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name 2 After the user selects the desired property to copy VPG prompts gt SECTION ID X IS SEL
76. ROOF ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEF PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the roof rail part as target position The rigid plate is imported and placed in the location you have specified Proper contacts and velocity will also be defined in the model ETAPE Figure 4 An Example of a Generated FMVSS216 Roof Crush Model 7 4 5 5 FMVSS301 FLAT REAR IMPACT Description This function imports and positions rigid walls used to simulate an FMVSS301 Rear Impact test Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER REAR IMPACT INFORMATION 7 45 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES REAR IMPACT DATA ITEMS RIGID WALL STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm Anann RIGID WALL VELOCITY mm s 1 340633E 004 Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm Jo 000000E 000 RIGID WALL MASS ton 1 816000E 000 Cancel Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL ABORT CURSOR AT NODE KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model ETAZ VPG Figure 5 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 Flat Rear Impact Model 7 4 5 6 FMVSS301 70 REAR IMPACT Description This function will generate a Moving D
77. ROTATION This shortcut rotates the model about the screen X axis where the X axis is parallel to the horizontal edge of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation SY SCREEN Y ROTATION This shortcut rotates the model about the screen Y axis where the Y axis is parallel to the vertical edge of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation ig Cs P SZ SCREEN Z ROTATION This command rotates the model about the screen Z axis where the Z axis is perpendicular to the plane of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation i a D VX VIRTUAL X ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global X the X axis is as displayed in the coordinate system at the lower left side of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar
78. SPOTWELD TO MAT100 SP SPOTWELD TO RBE SPRING TO SPOTWELD EXIT 6 17 5 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user delete connections of the five types Choose one type of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selected connections would be deleted from the database ABORT Do nothing and exit 6 17 6 REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART AS TARGET TO BE REPLACED e Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 6 210 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 After click EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART TO REPLACE TARGET PART e Select a new part by choosing its name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 3 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N e YES The target part will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part 6 17 7 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set the nodes index on the old parts
79. UNDO LAST remove the last created node EXIT the user will return to the NODE OPTIONS menu 6 4 8 DELETE UNREF NODES Description This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTED unreferenced nodes in a database Unreferenced nodes are labeled with asterisks Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE ALL OR SELECT FREE NODES A S E 6 85 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ALL FREE NODES SELECT FREE NODE EXIT 2 ALL FREE NODES e Deletes all unreferenced nodes SELECT FREE NODE e The user may now select individual or grouped nodes If any of the selected nodes are referenced nodes VPG displays the message gt CANNOT DELETE NODE xxxx IT IS NOT UNREF When unreferenced nodes are deleted VPG will echo the following message gt XXXX unreferenced nodes deleted 6 4 9 DISTANCE Description This function calculates the distance between two points two nodes or a node and point The calculated distance will be displayed in the Message area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT A NODE POINT FOR DISTANCE e The overall distance and the global DX DY DZ components will be displayed at the prompt area of the screen The user enters ABORT DONE or EXIT 6 4 10 IDENTIFY NODE POINT Description This function identifies any point node and its corresponding global location in terms of its X Y Z coordinates and node or point number U
80. Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES FOR BOTTOM LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 8 LINE SOLID function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE menu The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 8 LINE SOLID e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE menu 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES FOR TOP 3 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEM N1 N2 N3 N1 any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines N2 any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines N3 any positive integer for the number of elements between the bottom and top surface 4 Once N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 SOLID MESH 9 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function allows the user to generate 6 or 8 node solid elements automatically inavolume The volume is defined by 9 lines 3 lines for the top surface 3 lines for the bottom surface see 6 LINE MESH and 3 lines connecting the top and bottom surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP SELECT 3 LINE
81. Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION NODE SET e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS GENERALIZED WELD Description This function defines spot and fillet welds Coincident nodes are permitted if the local coordinate ID is defined For the SPOTWELD a local coordinate ID is not required if the nodes are offset Failures can include both the plastic and brittle failures These can be used either independently or together Failure occurs when either criterion is met The welds may undergo large rotations since the equations of rigid body mechanics are used to update their motion Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 136 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BUTT WELD COMBINED WELD CROSS FILLET WELD FILLET WELD SPOT WELD EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS GLOBAL Description This function defines global constraints Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED GLOBAL DEFINITION window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS INTERPOLATION Description This function defines an interpolation constraint With this constraint type the motion of a single
82. VELOCITY LOAD MPC SPC SUBCASE CONTROL EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note If the selected analysis code is LS DYNA a separate menu with different options will appear See Section 6 8 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LS DYNA 6 9 1 SUBCASE CONTROL Description This function allows users to create and manipulate NASTRAN subcases Specific descriptions of each of the commands are provided in the following sections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE SUBCASE DELETE SUBCASE SHOW SUBCASE MODIFY SUBCASE EXIT SUBCASE CONTROL CREATE SUBCASE Description This function incorporates load sets and SPC sets into a subcase The user may use any combination of load sets and SPC sets in each subcase Usage 1 The NASTRAN SUBCASE DEFINITION window pops up and VPG prompts the user to enter a series of identifiers The subcase number defaults to the next available set number in sequence The user enters the name of the subcase The user can choose from a list of all available SPC sets If there are no SPC sets defined in the database then VPG will enter the CREATE SPC SET menu and prompt the user to define the SPC set SUBCASE CONTROL DELETE SUBCASE Description This function deletes selected subcases from the VPG database 6 145 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO DELETE e All available subcases are list
83. VELOCITY_RIGID_LOCAL velocity IMPOSED VELOCITY_SET velocity Delete CONTACT_ENTITY CONTACT_INTERIOR CONTACT_1D CONTACT _2D_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _2D_AUTOMATIC_NODE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_2D_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_IN_CONTINUUM CONTACT _2D_PENALTY CONTACT _2D_PENALTY_FRICTION CONTACT _2D_ SLIDING ONLY CONTACT _2D_SLIDING_VOIDS CONTACT _2D_TIED_ SLIDING CONTACT _GEBOD Convert slave type 2 3 5 6 into segment set Convert master type 2 3 into segment set eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 CONTACT_AIRBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SURFACE CONTACT _CONSTRAINT_NODES CONTACT_CONSTRAINT_SURFACE CONTACT _DRAWBEAD CONTACT_ERODING_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_ERODING_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_ERODING_SURFACE_TO CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER CONTACT_FORMING_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _FORMING_ONE_WAY CONTACT_FORMING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO CONTACT_RIGID_NODES_TO_RIGID_BODY CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_ONE_WAY_TO CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_TWO_WAY_TO CONTACT_SINGLE_EDGE CONTACT_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY_PENALTY CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_TO CONTACT_TIEBREAK_SURFACE_TO CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_E
84. VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e This prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST e Once set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW type SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 6 11 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the elements nodes parts of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 6 12 SHOW SET Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined sets VPG displays an ID number next to each element node part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part ALL type SETS EXIT e VPG displays all node sets and returns the user to the set submenu Note Because more than one set ID number may be assigned to each element node part viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific set at a time 6 6 13 SET ON OFF PART Description This function allows the user to turn on and off parts included in a selected part set It allows for convenient organization of parts in a complicated model and manipulation of large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 6 14 SET ATTRIBUTE DATA ON OFF Description This function toggles on off the attr
85. YZ plane X Z ANTI SYMMETRY Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X TRANSLATION e X translation will be constrained Y TRANSLATION e Y translation will be constrained Z TRANSLATION e Z translation will be constrained X ROTATION e X rotation will be constrained Y ROTATION e Y rotation will be constrained Z ROTATION e Z rotation will be constrained 3 Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts gt D O F xxxx IS FIXED gt ENTER ENFORCED DISPLACEMENT DEFAULT IS 0 0 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Nodes may be selected one at a time with the left mouse button e DONE will exit the user to the ENTER SPC SET NUMBER prompt step 1 e ABORT will exit the user to the SPC OPTIONS menu without constraining any of the selected grids SPC DELETE Description This function deletes the selected SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO DELETE 6 152 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e All available SPC sets are displayed for selection in the BOUNDARY SPC SET box 2 Whena SPC set has been selected for deletion VPG prompts gt ONE SPC SET IS SELECTED e EXIT deletes the SPC set and the user exits the function DELETE SPC INCLUDE NODES IN SET Description This function adds additional nodes into the selected boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO ADD NODES 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e DONE will ad
86. a new file in the Dialogue window The recommended practice is to add the extension vpg to a newly created file 3 lf creating a NEW file the user would be prompted to do so CREATE NEW FILE YES NO Figure 3 1 2 Create New File Prompt 4 The user will be prompted to select the analysis program desired 3 1 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started SELECT ANALYSIS PROGRAM NASTRAN DYNA ABAQUS MOLDFLOW PAMCRASH RADIOSS GENESIS NASTRAN SOL 700 Figure 3 1 3 Select Analysis Type The analysis program selected will set defaults for the eta VPG session to generate either LS DYNA or NASTRAN cards 5 The user will also be prompted to select the Unit System desired SELECT UNIT SYSTEM 1 MM TON SEC N 2 MM G MSEC N 3 MM KG MSEC KN 4 M KG SEC N o FT SLUG SEC LB 6 IN LB SEC ZAN SEC LB T NEUTRAL CM G SEC DYNE 9 CM G MICROSEC Figure 3 1 4 Unit System The selected unit system will be stored in the database as the default value setting The user will now be in the MAIN MENU of eta VPG and ready to start the session 3 2 SETTING UP A VPG SYSTEM MODEL Following is a general outline for setting up a VPG system model There are three unique modules in the VPG pre processor that allow the user to create a VPG model in an automated procedure A detailed description of each of these processes is available in the VPG Structure Tutorial 1 Generating a Front Suspension Model The user begins by se
87. a VPG session includes attaching suffixes to the file names that specify the file tyoes Examples of suffixes include IGES igs iges Example When reading in a line data LINE in file VPG prompts for a line data file name VDA vda vdas all file Names in that directory with the DXF dxf suffix lin are listed in the options area CATIAd model The user then selects the appropriate file CATIAS CATPart name This practice makes the file name stp step selection convenient and organizes the UG pri user s work directory LS DYNA dyn mod k NASTRAN dat nas Genesis dat ABAQUS inp PAMCRASH 0c RADIOSS DOO MOLDFLOW mel ADAMS adm Pre_ susp fst rst 2 15 LS DYNA CARDS eta VPG supports all LS DYNA input data from versions 971 and earlier As a result models generated using eta VPG require no external editing to complete the file for execution The input cards are arranged as they are in the LS DYNA manual eta VPG displays the necessary input parameters in windows as shown in Figure 2 15 1 and as described below CARD SELECT BUTTON The CARD SELECT BUTTON displays the number of definition cards and allows the user to jump conveniently to the desired card The card button is not an option when only one card is needed to define the selected property or the number of cards is dependent on user defined values CARD DESCRIPTION FIELD The CARD DESCRIPTION FIELD allows the us
88. a surface by the SURFACE MESH command Note The SURFACE function is specific to the selection of elements 2 18 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started Chapter Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 OPENING CREATING AN eta VPG DATABASE FILE To start the VPG software the user must execute the VPG program file using the method appropriate for their operating system In Windows this may be accomplished by double clicking the shortcut to the VPG executable file Once the VPG software is activated the VPG Open File window is displayed for the user to OPEN or CREATE a new VPG database 1 See the Open File window below Look ir EE E A 6 line_mesh vpg linear_ mapping vpg EG E 10_Field_Format ypq Ei mesh pg My Recent E 700_empty vpg E Rbez vpg Bre elie its Ei appilar_7O0 vpq E solid tetra pg 2 E Beams_model_lyvpq vpg E split _surface v pg _ Beams_shading ypg surface_split ypq E boundary _condition_split pg E taper w pg bumper po E temp pg Desktop cS E bumper _FOO vpg E test vpg bumper_nastran pg E test _o vpg E caravan w pg Ei test_15 vpg _ E flange pg E total _mesh pg PE E Frnvese1l4 vpq unit pg intersect line vpa E line_revolute ypq My Documents hy Amputer z hy Network File name ped Places Files of type PG Database wpa fmb Cancel Figure 3 1 1 Open File Window 2 The user would either select the name of a previously saved file or enter the name of
89. allows user to adjust the speed at which the animation is running by altering the number of frames per second The number of frames is dragged to the desired position To reduce the animation speed the user must select a value lower than the current frame rate Once the frame rate is selected eta Post will continue to use that rate until it is reset or the eta Post session is ended CONTOUR The functions in this menu animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to display the results of individual steps The color bar located on screen displays the corresponding contour values The location of the highest contour value on the model is labeled with an asterisk and the lowest is labeled with a zero 0 The options are shown in Figure 9 56 Contour Operation StressStrain urrent Component SIGMA AA hd lt urrent Layer INTC M Undeform l Element Result Contour Setting Export Contour Line List Value Frames single Frame M Reset m l 0 000000 0 003416 0 006831 0 010248 5 0 013663 x From 1 To z0 Inr 1 Frame Mumber R FramesiSecongd Figure 9 56 Animate Contour control window 9 51 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 11 4 SELECT COMPONENT Description There are STRESS STRAIN and DISPLACEMENT They determine the type of contour variable displayed during the plot animation The type of variable selected determines the type of plot com
90. animate the transient analysis results in real time and are used to display the results of individual steps with the vector The options are shown in Figure 9 66 9 58 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Vector Operation Displacement Current Layer Current Component Iw x Iv Wz TC Undeform Ay Elem Size Scale Factor 1 0 Contour Setting List Value Frames Single Frame Reset 0 000000 j 2 QO 003416 3 0 006831 4 0 010248 5 0 013663 From 1 To 20 Figure 9 66 Vector Operation control window 9 11 11 SELECT COMPONENT Description There are four types of component DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY ACCELERATION STRESS and STRAIN in the function Usage When selecting DISPLACEMENT VELOCITY or ACCELERATION the CURRENT LAYER is disabled and the CURRENT COMPONENT is enabled used The user can select them in any combination If STRESS or STRAIN is selected the CURRENT LAYER is enabled and the CURRENT COMPONENT is disabled There are MIDDLE TOP and BOTTOM available in the CURRENT LAYER 9 11 12 BY ELEMENT SIZE AND SCALE FACTOR Description This function is used to alter the size of the vector BY ELEMENT SIZE means 9 59 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING the vector size is based on the element size Usage SCALE FACTOR allows the user to enter a percentage of the maximum magnitude contained the model Note When BY ELEMENT SIZE is toggled on the SCAL FACTOR is dis
91. based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET gt SELECTED FIRST PART SET AS TARGET e Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 2 VPG prompts gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE THE TARGET e Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 3 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N e YES The target part set will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE DEFAULT VALUE 10 Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts 6 211 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 18 MASS MENU NASTRAN The functions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses represent nonstructural components or to modify masses to change the center of the gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized as follows CONM2 MENU READ FROH FILE WRITE TO FILE CREATE CONH2 DELETE COMM COHM2 PROPERTY IDENTIFY HASS CALCULATE HASS ATTACH MASS EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 18 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add mass elemen
92. be selected MULTI PT REGION A multi point region polygon is defined by clicking the left mouse button in succession to enclose the desired polygon region Click on the right mouse button to reject the last defined point Click on the middle button to complete the region Entities within this region will be selected If part of an entity is outside of the region it will not be selected PART The part names will be listed in the menu area Pick the name from the part list or pick an entity from the screen to select the part Selected parts will be highlighted in white in the MENU WINDOW All entities in the part will be selected REJECT LAST This option negates the last selection whether from single cursor pick or a group of entities selected by any of the above options 2 17 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features EXCLUDE ON OFF This option works like a toggle switch If turned on all the subsequent selected entities will be removed from the previously selected list The user may toggle this option on and off during the course of the selection TYPE This option is used to control the type of elements to be selected If DONE is selected immediately after selecting TYPE all elements of this type will be selected Otherwise other options may be used to limit the selection of elements Note The TYPE function is specific to the selection of elements SURFACE This function is used to select elements created from
93. define boundary conditions on the model Selecting BOUNDARY CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the BOUNDARY CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 5 CONSTRAINT CARDS Description Constraint Cards allow the user to define constraint conditions on the model Selecting CONSTRAINT CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 6 LOAD CARDS Description Load Cards allow the user to define loading conditions on the model Selecting LOAD CARDS on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the LOAD CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 7 INITIAL VELOCITY Description Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY allows the user to define initial conditions on the model Selecting INITIAL VELOCITY on the ANALYSIS menu directs the user to the INIT COND CARDS menu in the pre processing BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu See Section 6 8 of this manual 8 2 8 DEFINE CONTACTS Description DEFINE CONTACTS allows the user to create apply and modify contact interfaces within an LS DYNA model By selecting DEFINE CONTACTS on the ANALYSIS menu VPG directs the user to the CONTACT INTERFACE menu in the pre processing menu See Section 6 13 of this manual 8 2 9 DEFINE CURVE Description The DEFINE CURVE function on the ANALYSIS menu allows users
94. displayed model greatly reduces the amount of editing required Definition cards appear at specific junctions in the session prompting the user for material element properties A Material Library is available in the LS DYNA environment allowing users to select common ferrous and aluminum materials from a pre populated set of material definitions Users also have the option to specify the analysis software NASTRAN LS DYNA RADIOSS PAMCRASH prior to assigning properties CONTACT INTERFACE eta VPG seamlessly interfaces with LS DYNA allowing the user to create and assign impact sliding or automatic interfaces for VPG applications eta VPG displays contact properties in easily read and modified CONTACT CARDS with a high degree of speed and flexibility BOUNDARY CONDITIONS eta VPG s BOUNDARY CONDITIONS menu allows the user to quickly create and verify constraints and loads on VPG models MODEL INTEGRITY CHECKING FUNCTIONS The functions in eta VPG s MODEL CHECKER menu quickly validate models for element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles Model validation default values are easily adjusted to suit the user s needs CONSTRAINTS eta VPG supports all LS DYNA Constraint Cards for quick easy definition and manipulation of joints welds rivets etc 2 3 POST PROCESSOR eta VPG integrates a general purpose complete post processor for data post processing of analysis result files Analysis results are seamless
95. e 0 0 1000 This will transform the selected surface s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE e If ROTATE is entered enter angle increment right hand rule about the W axis The remaining commands are the same as the MOVE option ABORT e User will now be prompted to select the surface to be transformed 3 VPG prompts the user to select surfaces to transform The user also has the option to select AGAIN or REVERSE to repeat the rotation or movement Once the desired surfaces are selected enter DONE to continue 6 2 21 TRIM SURFACE Description This function defines curves for trimming edges and or cutting holes on the selected surface The defined curves may be poly lines b spline lines circles piecewise linear segments or intersecting lines of two surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts for a surface gt SELECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION 2 Upon selection of the surface VPG prompts gt PLEASE SELECT OR DEFINE LINES SELECT LINE e Directly select a line to trim surface CURSOR TO DEFINE LINE e After defining a line user needs to select line as trim line 6 27 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR TRIM SURFACE CIRCLE Description This function cuts circles on a selected surface The user defines the location of the circle via mouse pick Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE The user defines the center of the circle anywhere on the surface gt SELECT A POINT ON THE CIRCLE e The user
96. either create a new part and assign it solid properties or make a part current that contains solid properties Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING DAMPER LS DYNA Description This function defines a spring damper element between two nodes points Itis recommended that the user select the ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in the element options menu prior to creating a spring damper This will pop up the ELEMENT DISCRETE CARD for user input Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e This step is repeated once e When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SPRING DAMPER element 6 48 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE MASS LS DYNA Description This function defines a lumped mass element on a node This section covers the options for the MASS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE 2 After entering a value VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e Select a node mass element will be created CREATE SEATBELT 2 NODES LS DYNA Description This function defines a seatbelt element between two nodes points Other seatbelt functions such as ACCELEROMETER RETRACTOR SENSOR etc are located in the DYNA MISCELLANEOUS menu Usage 1 VPG promp
97. elements It does not support JOINT NODAL RIGID BODY PLOTEL and SPOTWELD elements 6 3 26 MESH TO SURFACE Description This function creates surfaces from shell elements 6 75 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Kesh To Surface Segmentation Fillet Radius 80 00 Identify Fillets Normal Angle 13 00 segment Mesh Regions Repair Add to Region Merge Regions Create a Region Generate Surfaces Exit Usage 1 VPG prompts to identify fillets and segment mesh IDENTIFY FILLETS e Input the largest radius for fillets to identify value between 5 50mm User can input new radius and click this button many times SEGMENT MESH e Input Normal Angle between 1 30 degree and do segment mesh User can input new angle value and click this button many times 2 After click SEGMENT MESH user can adjust region if there is no need to adjust regions user can jump over this step ADD TO REGION e select elements and add them to the target region MERGE REGION e select regions one by one and they are merged into one region click middle mouse to accept the merge and right mouse to cancel the merge right mouse again to exit merge region CREATE A REGION e select elements to make up a new region 3 After adjust regions user can generate surfaces now GENERATE SURFACE e VPG will generate surfaces according to the regions 6 3 27 AUTO REMESH Description This function will automatically remesh the s
98. enter a property name if no properties exist in the database at the current time Once a name is entered a pop up window will 6 45 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR appear with a list of properties to edit 2 Once the property ID has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT Generating isoparametric tri or quad elements require the user to select three nodes points per side 6 CREATE RIGID BODY RBE3 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID BODY RBE3 subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Defines the degrees of freedom 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR RBE3 3 VPG prompts ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR 0 TO END ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT 123 FOR NODE WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR 100E 01 SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES VVV V 4 Step 3 is repeated until the user selects DONE or ABORT CREATE SPOTWELD NASTRAN Descript
99. extension The Select File dialog box will display and prompt the user to select the desired name e ATTRIBUTE This function enables the user to change the attribute of the curve Clicking the Attribute button the pop up window will be displayed under the curve window The pop up window is shown in figure 9 73 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Curve Findow 1 E m fx Sh 172 17 stress ip 1 Sh 2835 79 stress ip 1 Time E 2 Print _ Clipboard Export Attribute Operation Save oh f2 YY siress p 1 Curve Name Sh 172 YY stress ip 1 oh 263 YY stress ip 1 oh 1606 YY stress ip 1 Curve Style SOLID Mark ROUND Number of Curve Marks 10 Curve Color E Background Color E Axis Log X Log Y M Grid _ Modify Y Axis X Tite Time Min fo max 0 0599993 Y Title ly Min 274 88 Max 264 36 New Value X Y Modify On Off Properties Apply Undo Reset Figure 9 73 The Graphing Attribute menu There are many options for the user to change the attribute of the selected curve On the left of the patulous window the name of current curve is listed The user should select the intended name of curve to change the attribute 9 12 6 1 CURVE NAME Description This function offers an option for the user to change the name of the curve 9 12 6 2 CURVE STYLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the displaying type of curve There are four kinds of display type available S
100. file name at the lower right corner of the picture 5 10 13 eta VPG This function prints eta VPG logo at the lower left corner of the picture 5 10 14 SELECT REGION This function allows the user to define a graphic region by using a drawing window Only the graphics within the region will be written to the graphics file If the option is off default the complete graphics region will be saved to the output file Note The user will be prompted to define the region drag window after PRINT is selected 5 10 15 NO OF COPIES This function allows the user to print multiple copies 5 10 16 SETUP SAVE LOAD Default page settings may be used saved and selected by the user All parameters are defined in the HARDCOPYDEFAULT file in the VPG installation directory 5 10 16 1 LOAD SYSTEM DEFAULT This function will load the system defaults that are saved in a VPG Hardcopy Default file located in the VPG executable directory 5 10 16 2 LOAD USER DEFAULT This function will load the user defined defaults that have been saved in a HardcopyDefault file located in the user s home directory 5 10 16 3 SAVE AS DEFAULT 5 17 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager This function saves user modified hardcopy options to a HardcopyDefault file located in the user s Home directory 5 11 EXIT This function allows the user to exit the program VPG will prompt to save current database 5 18 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Chapter Chapte
101. following sections 7 2 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 1 SHOW ROAD Description This option allows the user to look at the 12 types of roads and find which road s the user would want to create NA iy W NE Al KEEL AE Yy ty fa thy ty ti TTT TTT CIMT TTT TTT LLAMA TTT Usage Select SHOW ROAD from the VPG Road Menu The road surface models contained in the VPG Road Library will be displayed 7 1 2 SELECT FROM LIBRARY Description This option allows the user to read a Road Surface from the library into the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ROAD SURFACE FROM LIBRARY gt ENTER COMMAND 2 USER DEFINED Prompts the user for a previously defined road surface library name and allows the user to select saved road surfaces from that library 7 3 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 gt SELECT C S TYPE VPG MODULES ROAD LIB MENU USER DEFINED BODY TWIST LANE ALTERNATE SURFACE POTHOLE 1 TRACK POTHOLE 2 SURFACE RIPPLE 1 TRACK RIPPLE 2 TRACK CHATTERSTRIP COBBLESTONE TRACK WASHBOARD 1 SURFACE WASHBOARD 2 SURFACE 24 DEG RAMP SURFACE EXIT When one type of road surface library is selected VPG prompts SELECT C S TYPE FIXED MOVING EXIT The desired road surface is displayed on the screen 1 BODY TWIST LANE 7 4 2 ALTERNATE SURFACE eta VPG 3 4 VPG MODULES Chapter 7 5 RIPPLE TRACK 1 3 POTHOLE TRACK 1 4 POTHHOLE TRACK 2 7 CHATTERSTRIP
102. following table JOINT NUMBER OF ORIENTATION IDENTIFIER TYPE NODES SYMBOL Spherical ___ 1 N1 6 49 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Center UJ Perpendicular Axes Translation 3 N1 N3 N5 Axis amp Plane The program then prompts the user to select the second part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint All the required coincident nodes on the second part will be created and added to the second rigid body as CONSTRAINED EXTRA NODES NODES The following will take create locking as example Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT JOINT TYPE 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER RELATIVE PENALTY STIFFNESS 1 0 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT 1 PART RIGID BODY ONLY FOR JOINT gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 4 After part is selected VPG prompts gt PICK NODE ON RIGID BODY FOR THE JOINT 5 VPG prompts gt PICK 2 NODE ON RIGID BODY TO DEFINE THE 1 AXIS OF JOINT 6 VPG prompts gt PICK 3 NODE ON RIGID BODY TO DEFINE THE PLANE OF THE JOINT CREATE PLOTEL ELEMENT LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the PLOTEL ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e This step is repeated until user enters ABORT or EXIT CREATE INERTIA LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the INERTIA subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts to define local coordinates 6 50 eta VPG3 4 Chapter
103. forces written to an ASCII Section Force file Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW CROSS SECTION ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 After entering new cross section ID VPG prompts gt SELECT CROSS SECTION TYPE PLANE see step 3 SET see step 7 3 Ifthe user selects PLANE VPG will first prompt for a part set gt SELECT PART SET H ALL PARTS 1 CREATE 2 SELECT e VPG then prompts for a coordinate system for the cross section 4 Next the user will be prompted for the origin of the cross section 5 VPG then prompts gt ENTER LENGTH L ALONG U AND M ALONG V 0 FOR INFINITE 6 After entering the U V increments VPG displays the cross section The following commands are available for creating and altering new cross sections e CREATE defines a new cross section DELETE deletes a defined cross section DISPLAY ON OFF toggles the cross section display on off MODIFY redefines a cross section SHOW SECTION CUT lists the defined cross sections in the VPG menu WINDOW VIEW 6 185 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e EXIT 7 If the user selects SET VPG prompts for a set type If the type of set selected has not yet been defined the user will be prompted to create one see SET MENU Section 6 6 6 7 Once the set has been determined VPG returns to step 1 Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE EXTENT OUTPUT Description The definition cards in the EXTENT
104. function is selected the PART ON OFF dialog window is displayed shown as Figure 9 2 Part Operation Show Element Type wW Beam W Shell l Solid Other r All r All Of Reverse Indo Redo Exit Figure 9 2 PART ON OFF Window Note When PART ON OFF dialog window is displayed only VIEW OPREATION functions are enabled to use other functions are disabled User can select part to turn on or off by picking the part name in the part list There are several other methods to turn part on or off as described below SELECT BY A PICK ELEMENT The part including the selected element is selected The element will be highlighted as the 9 4 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING cursor moves over the part SELECT BY DRAG WINDOW This function allows the user to drag a window around the desired parts All parts including the selected elements are selected Ei SELECT BY MULTI REGION This function allows the user to select a multi point region all parts including the selected elements are selected Points are selected by clicking the mouse in the Graphic Display area E SELECT BY FREE HAND This function allows the user to select a region by a free hand all parts including the selected elements are selected The user depresses the left mouse button and moves the mouse to select the desired region SELECT BY ELEMENT TYPE This function allows the user to turn selected element types on off so that they
105. function retains the ON status of the selected part s and turns OFF the deselected parts The program automatically re scales the selected part s to fill the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO KEEP gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART The user selects a target part VPG highlights the selected line s or element s 2 Once the user selects the desired part s VPG prompts gt PART xxxx part name IS SELECTED 3 EXIT terminates this function after replotting and rescaling the selected parts 10 3 11 LIST Description This function lists the part names with the corresponding PID numbers and 10 21 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY ON OFF status Parts that are currently ON are listed in their part color Parts that are currently OFF are listed in white 10 3 12 MASS CALCULATION Description This function determines the mass of a part a group of parts or the entire model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT 2 Once the file name is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT oe VPG displays the SUMMARY OF MASCAL window with the part s properties and displays in the dialogue window the part s density 10 3 13 ON OFF Description This function toggles selected parts ON and OFF and the parts listed can be sorted by Part ID or Part Name with the triangle icon in the part list window The following options
106. in the interface color The segment letters for master and slave may be turned OFF by setting the control button SEGMENT SYMBOL in the SETUP dialog box A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note Contact interface definition is implemented for a LS DYNA RADIOSS or PAM CRASH analysis only 6 13 1 COPY Description This function allows the user to copy previously defined interfaces Usage le has displays the CONTACT CARD LIST which lists the defined interfaces and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO COPY 2 Upon selecting an interface card from the menu VPG prompts gt CONTACT ID XX DUPLICATED FROM CONTACT ID X 6 13 2 CREATE Description This function allows the user to define new interfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CONTACT OPTION 6 175 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INTERFACE TYPES AUTO MOVE COUPLING ENTITY GEBOD GUIDED CABLE INTERIOR RIGID SURFACE 1 DIMENSIONAL 2 DIMENSIONAL 3 DIMENSIONAL RIGIDWALL EXIT e VPG supports all contact types in LS DYNA If general 3D contact type is selected the program will display all six cards required to define contact The following notes apply to card 2 CONTACT DEFINITION CONTACT DEFINITION CARD 2 aed CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION SSID SLAVE ID MSID MASTER ID SSTYP SLAVE TYPE MSTYP MASTER TYPE SBOXID BOXID FOR SLAVE DEFINITION MBOXID BOXID FOR MASTER DEFINIT
107. in the model database TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to change the origin of coordinate systems 10 4 3 DRAW ARROW Description This function allows the user to draw arrows about a specific image on the display screen Arrows created using this function may be removed from the display by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon bar Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK THE TAIL LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT UNDO LAST 2 After the user selects the location of the tail VPG prompts for the location of the head gt PICK THE HEAD LOCATION FOR THE ARROW CURSOR LOCATION EXIT UNDO LAST 3 After the user defines the location of the head VPG draws the arrow and returns to 10 32 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY step 1 See figure 10 4 3 DRAL AKRON OPTION Figure10 4 3 Draw Arrow 10 4 4 DISTANCE Description This function calculates the distance between 2 points 2 nodes or a node anda point This command is also listed in the ELEMENT OPTIONS and NODE OPTIONS menus Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a node or point gt SELECT TWO POINTS NODES e After the user selects the appropriate points or nodes VPG displays in the prompt area of the screen the vector distance and the DX DY and DZ components 2 ABORT DONE or EXIT terminates this function 10 4 5 DEFINE TITLE Description This function allows the user to enter a title or text label at any location on the di
108. input a distance along the W axis from the selected origin of the coordinate 3 After defining coordinate system VPG prompts LIME PLOTEL ELEMENTS ABORT e User can select to generate lines or plotels 6 105 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 If PLOTEL ELEMENTS is selected VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO e If NO is selected plotel elements will be added to the current part and the user will return to the MODEL CHECKER menu 5 If YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up e The plotel elements will be included in the new part The new part will be ON and CURRENT 6 5 17 CHECK FREE SURFACE Description This function checks the continuity of the solid elements A free surface is the face of a solid element that is occupied by one solid element VPG will replot the solid elements on screen displaying only the free surfaces Any unexpected quad or tri surface indicates potential errors in the solid element connectivity Usage 1 CHECK FREE SURFACE The following five messages will appear in the command line area of the screen XXXX SURFACES FOUND CHECKING FOR FREE SURFACES XXXX SURFACES CHECKED CONTRUCTING FREE SURFACES xxxx FREE SURFACES FOUND The user is now placed in a FREE SURFACE sub menu vvvvyv 2 The following are brief descriptions of the options for the FREE SURFACE sub menu DISTANCE IDENTIFY ELEMENT IDENTIFY NODE CREATE EL FROM SURF
109. is detailed in Chapter 6 EXTENSIVE MODEL BUILDING FUNCTIONS eta VPG includes a comprehensive selection of functions for creating and modifying line data and CAD surfaces In addition to automeshing functions element generation through 2 line 4 line 6 line and 8 line mesh creates beam shell and solid elements COMPREHENSIVE MODEL MODIFICATION FUNCTIONS All aspects of the model may be modified using the pre processing menus All defined material elements nodes contacts and analysis parameters may be modified deleted copied etc as required by the user 2 2 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features FULI SYSTEM ASSEMBLY __ The ASSEMBLY menu allows users to create assemblies which may be modified as a group This includes part replacement and connectivity attributes of the model AUTOMESHING eta VPG s automeshing function easily eliminates 90 of the time required to mesh trimmed and standard surfaces The automeshing function creates quadrilateral elements with a minimum of triangular elements Various automeshing algorithms are available including Triangular Meshing Paving Mesh and Topology Automeshing A tetra element automesher is available generating both 4 noded and 10 noded solid elements MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTIES eta VPG supports all LS DYNA and NASTRAN material and element property cards eta VPG s ability to create and assign material and element properties directly on a
110. may select a second point on the surface to define the radius of the circle VPG proceeds to draw the circle 2 The user should then select exit VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT SURFACE BOUNDARY e Selects the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation 6 28 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY ABORT CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim circle operation NO INNER BOUNDARY e VPG trims the surface of the outer boundary REJECT LAST CURVE 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains a copy of the original surface 5 The user is returned to step 1 of TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE INTERSECTION LINE Description This function allows the user to trim away the intersection of two surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE FOR TRIM OPERATION Note This surface is referred to as a primary surface in this section gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE e Once the user selects the second surface VPG draws a boundary line between the two intersectin
111. non zero length and give the user the option of placing these elements in a new part gt XX NON ZERO LENTH SPRINGS FOUND INCLUDE ELEMENTS IN NEW PART Y N 2 If the user selects Y the elements detected will be placed in a new part named NON ZERO If NO the function is terminated 3 VPG prompts gt CONTINUE TO CHECK FOR LOOSE CONNECTION Y N e Selecting YES will cause VPG to check for spring elements that are not connected to at least one other beam spring shell or solid element Selecting NO will terminate the function 6 5 19 CHECK JOINT Description This function allows the user to check for loose joint elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt xxxx UNCONNECTED JOINT ELEMENTS FOUND gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO e If YES is selected the PART DEFINITION window pops up After clicking OK to close the window the user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu e lf NO is selected the user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 20 CHECK MASS INERTIA Description This function allows the user to check for loose mass and inertia Usage 1 If loose mass or inertia entities are found VPG prompts gt XX LOOSE MASS INERTIAS FOUND INCLUE ELEMENTS IN NEW PART Y N 6 107 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 21 CHECK PENETRATION Description This function allows the user to check penetration Those penetrated elements will be shown highlighted when only two parts are selected to check
112. number of node is equal 4 Otherwise VPG converts one CONSTRAINED NODAL_RIGID_ BODY 4 Rigid Body element without mass and inertia in Radioss convert to CONSTRAINED _NODAL_RIGID_BODY but when the Rigid Body element with mass and inertia in Radioss converts to CONSTRAINED NODAL RIGID BODY_INERTIA The Radioss primary node number RBID be used as the parameter NODEID on card 2 of CONSTRAINED NODAL RIGID _BODY_INERTIA ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 Delete VOID RIVET property in Radioss 2 BEAM converts SECTION BEAM RESULTANT TRUSS converts SECTION BEAM TRUSS and SPRING converts SECTION BEAM DISCRETE 3 SPRING elements TYPE 4 8 12 and 13 in Radioss convert into DYNA V970 material Type196 MAT_ GENERAL_SPRING_DISCRETE_ BEAM This Model permits elastic and elastoplastic spring with damping to be represented with a discrete beam element type 6 For elastic behavior a load curve defines force or moment versus displacement or rotation For inelastic behaivor a load curve yield force or moment versus plastic deflection or rotation which can vary in tension and compression MATERIAL PROPERTY 1 Radioss material type 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC converts to MAT SIMPLIFIED _ JOHNSON COOK 2 Radioss material type 21 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_DP converts to DYNA V970 material type 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 3 Radioss material type 28 ORTHOTROPIC converts to DYNA V970 material type26 MAT HONEYCOMB in relative SECTION SOLID and creates new HOURGLASS card in relat
113. of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 42 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER SPRING DIRECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END e Two entries are required one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x direction e Any number of spring elements may be created for the same connectivity depending upon the number of directions required 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis 2 Once the desired direction has been entered for the spring VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING RATE e Any positive real number may be entered for the spring rate 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e Tocreate the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e Select 2 nodes points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS 1 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the general SPRING ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SPRING DIRECTION 1 to 6 AT EACH END e Two entries are required one for each end of the spring e g 1 1 for the x direction e Any number of spring elements may be created for the same connectivity depending upon the number of directions requi
114. of the output files are Animation file d3plot Node output file nodout Element output file elout Total energy message of the model glstat Material absorption capability matsum Resultant contact force during impact rcforc Contact energy message sleout 7 97 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Time History Files ELOUT GLSTAT L MATSUM RCFORC l SLEOUT Nodes Add Remove show Elements Add Remove Show OK 7 9 4 5 RUN IT NOW Description this function enables the user to output the analysis file and submit it to dyna immediately for simulation 7 9 4 6 EXPORT DYNA FILE Description this function exports the analysis file but do not run it now 7 98 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 10 HEEDS HEEDS is an optimization program based on NASTRAN DYNA etc which will help to find a best result and do much good to the design HEEDS module in VPG supports to define HEEDS discrete set distribution variable tag and output HEEDS file and relative DYNA file For tagging it now only supports DYNA material and section HEED S MENU DISCRETE SET DIS TRIBUTION VARIABLE TAGGING EXPORT HEEDS FILE THICKNESS OPTIMIZATION ExT 7 10 1 DISCRETE SET Description This function helps user to define discrete set SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY CREATE create a discrete set DELETE delete defined discrete sets LIST list defined discrete sets MODIFY modify defined di
115. on the name list window the name of the curve will display on the Result Curve text box Then click the SQUARE button and the INTEGRATE button respectively The content of the Result curve text box will change to such expression as C27 Sq Int In this expression the C27 means the name of selected curve Sq and Int mean the operation to this curve There is a colon following each operation There are two kinds of colour of the expression in the Result curve text box One is black and another is red Those two kinds colour denote two different kinds of meaning When the colour of the expression is black it means that the user can press the Apply to perform this operation If the colour of the expression is red it means that the expression is not correct or the condition of current operation is not satisfied so the operation can t be executed The user can input by keyboard to define the operation according to the format of the program But this method is not very convenient for new user so this method is not recommended for the new user 9 12 8 1 APPLY Description This function allows the user to execute the operation after the user has selected some operation 9 12 8 2 UNDO Description This function allows the user to cancel the last selected operation before pressing the Apply button 9 12 8 3 CLEAR Description This function allows the user to cancel all the selected operations before pressing the Apply button
116. on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation eee VY VIRTUAL Y ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global Y the Y axis is as displayed in the coordinate system in the lower left hand corner of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right hand side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation ch i ef VZ VIRTUAL Z ROTATION This command rotates the model about the global Z the Z axis is as displayed in the coordinate system in the lower left corner of the screen When the user selects this command VPG displays a ruler bar on the right side of the screen Moving the cursor up or down causes the model to rotate tick marks represent 20 degree rotation increments Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation g TOP VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the TOP or XY plane SIDE VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the SIDE or XZ plane REAR VIEW This command automatically displays the model from the REAR or YZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW This command automatically displays the model form the ISOMETRIC 60 Degree Isometric point of view
117. penetration VPG can also helps to repair the penetration Usage Penetration Check Select Parts Select Parts By Par Groups Master Check Tolerance 0 000010 Repair Repair Parts Locally Move Entire Parts Wax Movement 10 000000 e Among Parts click Select Parts button to select parts for penetration check penetration between any two selected parts will be checked e By Groups user needs to set the master part group and slave part group This function is used to check the penetration between two part groups There is no checking of penetration between parts within the part group e Check Tolerance set tolerance value for check e Repair Parts Locally only elements penetrated will be adjusted to remove penetration as possible e Move Entire Parts move the whole penetrated part for a distance to remove penetration without modifying the element shape e Max Movement set maximum distance during one movement for node and entire part e Check execute the penetration check function e Repair execute the repair function e OK accept result and exit this Penetration Check dialog 6 5 22 CHECK UNCONNECTED Description This function allows the user to check unconnected parts or assemblies Unconnected parts are defined as any shell or solid mesh that is not connected via rigid elements or a node to node connection 6 108 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SE
118. preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE NODAL FORCE GROUP Description The definition cards in the NODAL FORCE GROUP subsection specify a nodal force group for output into ASCII files Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE SPRING FORWARD 6 187 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description The definition card in the SPRING FORWARD subsection creates a spring forward nodal force file Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE SUPER PLASTIC FORMING Description The definition card in the SUPER PLASTIC FORMING subsection specifies the output intervals to the superplastic forming output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DATABASE TRACER Description The definition card in the TRACER subsection allows the user to create tracer particles which will save a history of either a material point or a spatial point into an ASCII file TRHST Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 7 DEFINE Description The DEFINE definition cards allow the user to define boxes c
119. prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e If YES the user goes to step 4 If NO the user returns to step 2 If ABORT the user exits the function COPY and returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu 6 84 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 lf the user selects YES VPG prompts for the number of copies and the type of transformation gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES positive integer gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE ROTATE ABORT MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e e g 0 0 1000 This entry will copy the selected node s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT e Enter the angle increment right hand rule for local W or global Z ABORT 6 4 7 CREATE NODE Description This function generates UNREFERENCED NODES on points or by entering the coordinates etc Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT METHOD TO CREATE NODE POINT IS DEFAULT 2 The user may now select node locations by KEY IN X Y Z UNE POINT SURFACE UNDO LAST EXIT e KEY IN X Y Z enter the coordinate of the node to be created LINE select a line create node by cursor or by entering the number of nodes on this line POINT create a node at the selected point SURFACE create nodes by cursor on the selected surface
120. prompts to define the axis of rotation 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once the number of layers is entered the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH DRAG MESH TRANSLATIONAL DRAG Description This section covers the options for the TRANSLATIONAL DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the W axis to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select elements 2 VPG prompts to create local coordinates 3 Once local coordinates are defined VPG prompts gt ENTER DRAG DISTANCE ALONG W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 4 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS ABOUT W AXIS OR 0 TO EXIT 5 Once the number of layers is entered the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH DRAG MESH 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG Description This section describes the options for the 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH The line drag commands extrude the selected plate elements to create solid elements bounded by 3 or 4 lines in space Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 THEN PRESS D OR 4 CONTROL LINES e The user must select the 4 volume lines in clockwise or counterclockwise
121. remove element sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize element sets for this procedure For deleting element nodes refer to the command in section 6 7 4 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL ELEMENT SETS 2 Ifthe user selects ALL ELEMENT SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL ELEMENT SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL ELEMENT SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu 3 If the user selects an individual element set in step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED If the user selects EXIT VPG deletes the element set e After again selecting EXIT the user returns to the ELEMENT SET menu 6 7 17 INCLUDE ELEMENTS Description This function adds additional elements to the current element set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FOR ELEMENT SET XXXX gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 When the user has finished selecting elements and exited the menu VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS IN SET XXXX The selected elements are added to the set and numbered accordingly 6 7 18 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 19 REMOVE ELEMENTS Description This function deletes elements from the current element set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FROM ELEMENT SET XXXX gt SELECT ELEMENTS
122. respect to the local coordinate system for the rigid body Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED ORIENTATION Description This function defines an imposed orientation for a rigid body Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESSURE CFD SET Description This function defines pressure CFD set boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESSURE OUTFLOW Description This function defines pressure outflow boundary conditions These boundary conditions are attached to solid elements using the Eulerian ambient formulation and defined to be pressure outflow ambient elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS RADIATION Description This function defines radiation boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS SLIDING PLANE Description This function defines a sliding symmetry plane The option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 132 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BOUNDARY CARDS SPH Description this function is used to define cards for SPH Smooth Particle Hydrodynamics BOUNDARY CARDS SPC Description
123. screen and also outputs the information in the message window E9 ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This function measures the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes The first selected node defines the vertex of the angle The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window that is common with the one in DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES function Once three nodes are selected the program labels the angle at the vertex node and outputs the information in the message window KE ANGLE BETWEEN TWO LINES This function is used to measure the angle between two lines that are composed by selected four nodes Default setting is to select by mouse click or inputting node numbers After selecting four nodes program displays the angle at the two lines by selected four nodes and at the same time output information in the information window ie RAIDIUS BETWEEN THREE NODES This function enables the user to measure the radius of an arc that is passing through three selected nodes by cursor selection default or key in node number After selecting three nodes the program will display the radius on screen and output the coordinates of the center of the arc in message window crap This function is used to read ASCII file results plot and operate curves 2 AD2FEA This function will transform ADAMS model to FEA model A NODOUT TO MODE This function will do a FFT transformation to the ASCII file result 9 4 1 POSTPROCESSING ICONS The functions in the POSTP
124. slider in the vertical bar to adjust the brightness of the selected material The RBG values of the material color are shown in the column on the right side of the control window The user may change these values to change the material color The user may choose any of the four scales to show the RGB values Byte RGB Hex or HSV When the desirable color is obtained click OK to accept the color and exit the control window Otherwise click CANCEL to reject the color and exit the control window SHININESS The user may click and drag the slider to adjust the shininess of the selected material RESET MATERIAL Resets the material color to the default setting Figure 9 18 Color Map Control EXIT Close the light property control window and exit the function 9 8 7 COLOR MAP Description Eta Post uses 14 different colors to distinguish wat _GOlor parts in the model This function enables the user to modify any part color from default setting The program displays the COLOR MAP control window as shown in Figure 9 18 Usage The user may select any color to modify by clicking on a color block in the color palette The program will display a change part color control window as shown in Figure 9 19 The procedure of changing Part Color is same as in Change Material Color that has been described in Section 4 6 Figure 9 19 Part Color Control 9 8 8 PART ATTRIBUTES Description The functions in PART ATTRIBUTES control window allow
125. smoothing mesh result Cancel abort the elements selected for smoothing Undo after clicking Yes user still can reject the smoothing mesh and return to the result before smoothing Exit exit this smoothing mesh function Note 1 The Feature angle option will be inactive if there is surface information in database 2 Nodes on the surface boundary will keep unmoved during smoothing 3 There is no matter whether to select elements or anchor nodes first when doing smoothing mesh and before clicking Apply user can select elements and anchor nodes any times 6 3 32 LOCAL REMESH Description Local Remesh function helps to remesh the elements region user selected It has following features 1 support to remesh on elements attached no surface 2 support to remesh elements crossing multiple surfaces 3 support to change element size during remesh Eemesh Elem Size i 0 00 Select Elements select elements region to remesh Elem Size VPG gives a default element size according select elements user can modify it as needed Preview see result of local re mesh select elements are highlighted and new generated elements are shown as part color Apply accept the remesh result and the remesh region boundary is shown highlighted Undo reject the remesh result and the remesh region boundary is shown highlighted Exit exit this local remesh function 6 80 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 4 NODE OPTIO
126. that included both component level and full vehicle applications with the ability to perform real time simulations The analysis would be dynamic and nonlinear unlike the static linear analysis techniques utilized by the then current CAE practices ETA first tested this concept on simple mechanisms simulating mechanical systems such as engine connecting rod piston crankshaft systems and suspension mechanisms The mechanisms were simulated as a dynamic nonlinear system in real time events The results demonstrated that the motion and forces derived from the VPG simulation were the same as the rigid body linkage motion simulation results produced from conventional multibody dynamics software However when implementing flexible bodies FE the benefit of obtaining realistic stress and strain results of flexible components from the VPG simulation in an event based fashion produced valuable analysis data that could not be generated in traditional FEA approaches ETA engineers moved another step forward by simulating a rotating tire impact in a pothole event A tire model was developed to include a control volume technique to simulate the tire air pressure behavior under an impact condition The simulation of the frictional contact of the tire model with the rigid road surface was extremely realistic and correlated with existing tire data To complete the system level simulation the need for dynamic test based boundary conditions was necessary ET
127. the GRAPHICS DISPLAY WINDOW shown as Figure 9 64 BUMPER_2 STEPS TIME 0 047999 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises 327 464783 SS 296 206482 vais 35 bieo 264 948181 RES SS e 233 689880 Rik Sa S 202 431580 ane sisi mags 171 173294 X a 139 914993 i 108 656693 77 398392 46 140091 14 881793 LJ x INY I E A vate A ERRINA LAL AEG igh ah 2 m9 f233 6971 L Index NodeiD MAX_VONMISES Y b fag fasezaga O 448 236 7443 a fogo 174 5643 5 gp 213 2497 ETA POST Figure 9 64 List Node Value 5 At the same time another Control Option Window appears shown as Figure 9 65 The functions control the number and position of nodes listed and which nodes 9 57 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING should be listed Control Option Highest List Down List Up Lowest List per Page List Position Figure 9 65 List Value Control Option HIGHEST The set of nodes with highest value are listed NEXT HIGHEST The set of nodes with next highest value are listed NEXT LOWEST The set of nodes with next lowest value are listed LOWEST The set of nodes with lowest value are listed SET LIST NUMBER The function prompts a data control window that allows the user to enter the number of the listed nodes SET LIST POSTION This function allows the user to place the list window by the cursor pick Other functions are common with those the SECTION DEFORMATION fad VECTOR The functions in this menu
128. the diffuse light except the light is reflected sharply in a particular direction RESET LIGHT Reset the light property to the default setting Specular SHININESS Reset Material Exit Figure 9 16 Light Property Control Option Window 9 8 6 MATERIAL PROPERTY Description eta Post allows the user to modify different material properties for rendering the part The material property only takes effect in the SHADE mode with GRAY COLOR option Usage Diffuse clor MATERIAL User may select the material from the Material drop down list The available materials are aluminum steel copper iron silver bronze and rubber User may assign a material to selected parts by using the PART ATTRIBUTE function MATERIAL COLOR The program provides adjustment for Figure 9 17 Light Adjustment Control Window 9 22 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING AMBIENT DIFFUSE and SPECULAR color by clicking the color box next to the property type The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 17 The user may click and drag the marker in the color map window to change the color of the selected material The program updates the model display with the new material color in the graphic display window It also shows the new material color in the color box on the low left side of the control window The user can compare the new material color with the original color on the right The user may also click and drag the
129. the display area SHOW SIGyz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yz component stress values via color fringe plots The yz component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGzx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zx component stress values via color fringe plots The zx component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSxx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xx component strain values via color fringe plots The xx component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSyy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yy component strain values via color fringe plots The yy component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSzz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zz component strain values via color fringe plots The zz component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSxy Description This function allows
130. the mouse diagonally combines the movements of both commands Clicking the left mouse button stops the rotation This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Left mouse button and exits by releasing left mouse button PAN This command enables the user to translate the model by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the screen the cursor reappears at the center of the screen Clicking the left mouse button stops the pan This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Middle mouse button and exits by releasing Middle mouse button A CURSOR ZOOM The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user may move the cursor up or down to zoom in or out This function can also be activated by pressing Control and Right mouse button and exits by releasing Right mouse button 2 9 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Note If the cursor is moved off the screen in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears the opposite of the screen automatically jl E WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally down until the desired window size is reached After releasing the left button the section included in the window is displayed in full screen FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free reg
131. the user to customize the display characteristics for selected parts in the model There are fives options The default PART ATTRIBUTES control window is shown in Figure 9 20 Usage PART COLOR The user may change part color from the color list Click on the PART COLOR option and select the parts from the part list window or click the part from the screen 9 23 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 24 The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the screen Select a color from the color table to change the part color Then click APPLY below the control window The program will change the color of the selected part on the screen and the part name in the window Please see the Figure 9 20 PART MATERIAL This option allows the user to assign material property to the selected parts when the GRAY SHADE option is turned on The available materials are aluminum steel copper iron Gold silver bronze and rubber Click on the MATERIAL button and select a material type from the draw down list Then the user can select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the selected parts will be endued with the specified material The changes of part s material can be show only when the SHADE and GRAY option are turned on Please see the Figure 9 21 T
132. the user to deselect the last reference point during the selection process X AS LOCAL W AXIS e This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global X axis and the local origin at the first reference point Y AS LOCAL W AXIS e This defines a local coordinate system that is parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Y axis and the local origin at the first reference point Z AS LOCAL W AXIS e This defines a local coordinate system parallel to the global axis with the local W along the global Z axis and the local origin at the first reference point 3 Once the user defines the desired coordinate system VPG displays it and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A YES e VPG prompts for the next command NO e The user returns to step 1 ABORT The user returns to the menu 2 17 ENTITY SELECTION In certain commands such as COPY DELETE etc VPG prompts the user to select elements nodes lines surfaces etc A list of options will appear in the MENU WINDOW The default selection option is cursor pick at the entity Other commonly used selection options are described below WINDOW A window drag window is defined by clicking the left mouse button dragging the cursor diagonally across the screen until the desired entities are within the window and releasing the left mouse button to complete the selection If an entity is partially outside the window it will not
133. the user to visualize the calculated xy component strain values via color fringe plots The xy component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPSyz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yz component strain values via color fringe plots The yz component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area 10 28 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY SHOW EPSzx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zx component strain values via color fringe plots The zx component strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area REMOVE THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined thickness values obtained from a thickness calculation The user must then recreate a shell section or material thickness using the appropriate modeling parameter REMOVE STRESS EPS Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined stress and resultant strain values obtained from calculation REMOVE STRAIN Description This function allows the user to remove previously defined strain values obtained from a thickness calculation 10 3 23 VIEW Description The functions in the VIEW menu are used to adjust
134. this part Parts may be turned on and off for display purposes from the PART menu 4 3 PRE The PRE menu is the main Preprocessing menu In this menu the user will find all of the necessary modeling functions to create elements nodes materials contacts element properties and boundary conditions 4 4 ROAD The ROAD Menu allows users to select and place a road surface model in their VPG model This 4 1 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 4 Main Menu menu is only available if the user is in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu SETUP command 4 5 SUSPENSION The SUSPENSION menu allows users to create suspension system models from predefined templates This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu Typical automotive suspension types are predefined and users may input their data into the desired suspension template VPG will then construct an LS DYNA based model using appropriate entities for the various model components 4 6 TIRE VPG contains tools to generate parametric tire models These tire models are described in Chapter 7 This menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 7 SAFETY This menu accesses the VPG Safety Module Access to this menu is available only in LS DYNA mode see UTILITIES menu 4 8 ALE FSI VPG s ALE FSI modules are used for fluid and solid coupling simulations 4 9 DTM This module allows users to set up a series of trop tests for a test specimen using a few simple problem desc
135. to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS GAS MIXTURE Description This function is used to initialize the temperature and the density of different gas species in MAT_GAS_MIXTURE Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS MOMENTUM Description This card defines initial momentum to be deposited in solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS STRAIN Description This card defines initial strain Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS STRESS Description This card defines initial stress and plastic strains in the Hughes Liu beam elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS TEMPERATURE Description This card defines initial nodal point temperatures using nodal set ID s or node numbers These initial temperatures are used in a thermal only analysis or a coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VEHICLE KINEMATICS Description This card defines initial vehicle kinematics Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VELOCITY Description This card defines initial nodal point translational velocities using nodal set ID s This may also be used for sets in which some nodes have other velocities Refer to the LS DYNA User
136. to the default maximum minimum values If the value is more than the maximum the contour is displayed in dark colour of the top bar and if the value is less than the minimum value the contour is displayed in dark color of the bottom bar Please see the Figure 9 61 Note Contour Range is only accessible after plotting Once the user has made a plot and selected SET 9 54 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CONTOUR RANGE the lower range and upper range are entered via the DAPT INPUT field The APPLY button is then selected and the model will be re plotted with new range BUMPER_2 STEPS TIME 0 047999 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises 327 464783 305 137421 282 810089 260 482727 238 155365 215 828003 193 500641 171 173294 148 845932 126 518578 104 191223 81 863861 59 536507 37 209148 14 881793 z s ET POST Figure 9 61 An Example for Contour Range e CONTOUR MODE There are four types of colour RGB red green blue RGBM red green blue magenta RG red green GRAY e CONTOUR LEVEL The contour level can be set from 2 20 levels The program defaults to CONTINUE If the user sets the contour level with any value 2 20 the contour is displayed discretely as contour line Please see the Figure 9 62 9 55 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING BUMPER_2 STEP9 TIME 0 047999 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises ALABAN FE 296 206482 264 948181 233 689880 202 431580 171 173294 EN a 139 914993 r tS a 108 6
137. two nodes to define a vector e SHELL NORMAL The head will align with the normal of the element selected e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected 4 Select SHELL NORMAL i Aa oe ai a ad 1 i i hE ee Sey SHES ts Pe oS i e a Hl Figure 11 An Example of a Generated Side Pole Impact Model 7 54 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 7 3 IIHS 40 ODB FRONT Description This function will create ODB at the 40 front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER IIHS 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION IIHS 40 ODHE CRASH DATA IT EM 5 DATA VEHICLE ODB CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 4 787778E 004 VEHICLE WIDTH mm 1 500000E 003 OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000 E 000 Cancel 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAINST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY INX Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED Figure 12 An Example of a Generated IIHS 40 ODB Impact Model 7 4 7 4 IIHS SIDE PASSED IMPACT Description This function will create ODB at the side of the vehicle Usage 7 55 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FMVSS IIHS SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION
138. window The example is shown on Figure 9 70 gt curve Window 1 DER DErgg 0 PRH 2w Ffi Sh 153 XX stress ip 1 Sh 222 XX stress ip 1 4 _ Sh 1552 XX stress ip 1 Graph Result File Load Unload i 6 Time E 2 Print Clipboard Export Attribute I Operation Save C1 Sh 153 XX stress ip Curve Option Sh 283 YY stress ip 1 C2 Sh 222 Xx stress ip C3 Sh 1552 XX stress i 4 xx S 8 x2 J UdaBdeed Log Ln FFn nag cu Filter Averag Ae Select Computation Modify Y Axis x 7 odo vs 1 XxX stress Resulting Curve 3 ZZ stress ca C8 C9 C10 4 XY stress 5 YZ stress Copy Paste D Apply Undo Clear New Graph 6 ZX stress 7 Plastic strain Time E 2 Print Clipboard Export Attribute Operation Save C12 Sh 283 YY stres c13 Seo vv tes 14 x 1 8 x2 salad tnferntanas cul Filter Averag v Select Computation Modify Y Axis ado ETA POST Resulting Curve 4 ml 1 MAPPING CELLS ARE FOUND copy Paste Delete Apply Undo Clear New Graph 1 MAPPING CELLS ARE FOUND T ag 2 MAPPING CELLS ARE FOUND i v 3 MAPPING CELLS ARE FOUND E Hidden Surface Plate Normal M Background Graph Curve Figure 9 70 the eta Post Processor Interface Window Integral Point D ip 2 Plot New Graph Ext x 1 MAPPING CELLS ARE FOUND Color 9 12 6 CURVE OPERATION TOOLBA
139. with the output file The user can then load the RADIOSS input file DOO e If NO is selected VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES BY VPG Y N 5 7 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager e YES will locate the RIGID bodies and recalculate the rigid body primary node locations e NOvwwill finish the input sequence without modifying the model information VPG creates some default materials and element properties for elements that are lost during the file reading These are assigned to the part DEFAU _ VPG creates anode set element set material set property set and interface contact set for boundary conditions interface rigid walls time history etc VPG can read multiple RADIOSS input files into the same database 5 7 1 9 READ NASTRAN SOL 700 FILE This function allows the user to read a NASTRAN SOL 700 dat file directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dat will be listed in the options area The user may then select the desired file 5 7 1 10 READ ANSYS FILE This function allows the user to read a file of ANSYS format cdb or anf VPG supports to read in and write out Element Node and Part information of FE model 5 7 1 11 READ SUSP ADAMS Section J of the Appendix gives a complete description of converting ADAMS models to VPG Please refer to that section when converting an ADAMS suspension 5 8 EXPORT This function allows the user to output from the curr
140. 0 671999991 1 0 0 699000001 1 20000005 0 75 1 51999998 0 800000012 2 19000006 0 808000028 2 30299997 22 DAMA 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 23 LAW23 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 24 CONC 16 MAT_PSEUDO_TENSOR 25 COMPSH 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC 27 PLAS_BRIT 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_WITH_DAMAGE 28 HONEYCOMB 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB NOTE VPG set DYNA s value PR 0 0 SIGY 1 0 VF 0 2 MU 0 2 and ELFORM 1 in relative SECTION_SOLID card VPG create a HOURGLASS card with IHQ 4 and put it into relative PART s HGID field In RADIOSS if the relative element property ID is 0 or the element property type is not TYPE 6 VPG will set the material directions 1 2 3 align with the global axes X Y Z AOPT 2 A1 A2 A3 1 0 0 D1 D2 D3 0 1 0 Otherwise VPG will set AOPT 0 and map the RADIOSS 1 2 3 axes to the LS DYNA b c a axes The RADIOSS yield functions for the honeycomb material which have mu as the abscissa values must be converted into LS DYNA curves with mu 1 mu as the abscissa values In the above discussion it is assumed that the angle PHI in the RADIOSS orthotropic solid property set data is set to zero If PHI is nonzero further thought must be given to the conversion 32 HILL 3 MAT_ PLASTIC KINEMATIC 33 FOAM_PLAS 34 BOLTZMAN 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 35 FOAM_VISC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 36 PLAS_TAB 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 38 VISC_TAB 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 40 KELVINMA
141. 000E 001 VEHICLE ACCLERATION 9 2 800000E 001 2 VPG prompts 7 67 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 68 gt PICK SEAT REAR END TO LOCATE LUGGAGE HORIZONTALLY ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE LUGGAGE VERTICALLY ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST LUGGAGE eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 6 DUMMY POSITIONING The functions in the DUMMY POSITIONING menu allow the user to auto generate dummy and seatbelt models from a library of dummy types and position them in the current database The data required for positioning of the dummy is the H Point of the occupant position DUMMY MENU YPE DUMMY DEFORMABLE 30 DEFORMABLE 5 DEFORMABLE 95 RIGID 50 RIGID 3 RIGID 93 ES Es Il Es Ire olD OTHER DUM AY TAKATA o YEAR CHILD FAA HYBRID Ill THOR Lx DUMMY LST 50 RIGID SEATBELT EXIT The user may select any dummy from the DUMMY MENU 7 6 1 LSTC DUMMIES LSTC Deformable 50 LSTC Deformable 95 Dummy Model Dummy Model 7 69 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 LSTC Deformable 5 Dummy Model LSTC Deformable 50 Dummy Model 7 6 2 ETA DUMMIES ETA ECE SIDE Model 7 6 3 OTHER DUMMIES 7 70 VPG MODULES LSTC Rigid 5 Dummy Model LSTC Rigid 95 Dummy Model
142. 104 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 15 FEATURE LINE DISPLAY Description This function allows the user to check the angle between plate and solid elements based on user specified angle criteria The user can also automatically generate plotel elements at these locations to display the structures main features Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FEATURE LINE ANGLE CRITERION DEFAULT 20 DEG 2 VPG prompts gt GENERATE PLOTEL ELEMENTS OR LINES FOR FEATURE LINES PLOTEL ELEMENTS LINE SEGMENTS EXIT EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e PLOTEL or LINE SEGMENTS prompts the following 3 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE PLOTEL ELEMENTS or LINE SEGMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N NO Plotel elements or Line segments will be included in the current part e YES VPG prompts for a new part 6 5 16 SECTION CUT Description This function cuts through the plate and solid elements at a UV plane that the user defines and creates plotel elements or line at that plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create section plotels VPG prompts the user to create a local system 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A YES gt ENTER DISTANCE OF SECTION PLANE FROM W 0 e Any real value is a valid response e User may now
143. 2 TRUSS PROD 3 BEAM PBAR 4 SPRING PELAS 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID PSOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING PELAS 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL PSHELL 10 COMP SHELL PSHELL 11 COMP SHELL PSHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING PELAS 13 BEAM TYPE SPRING PELAS 14 GENERAL SOLID PSOLID 6 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 6 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION General Comments Delete PRESSURE LOAD RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN SPC SPC CONCENTRATED LOAD NODE FORCE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY 6 5 OTHERS General Comments Delete NODE SET SHELL SET BEAM SET SOLID SET SPRING SET TRUSS SET Delete all others cards that can t be converted RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN FUNCTION LOAD CURVE SKEW moving LOCAL COORDINATE SKEW fixed LOCAL COORDINATE 7 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO RADIOSS 7 1 ELEMENT General Comments Delete RBE3 amp CGAP elements eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C NASTRAN CBAR RBE2 SHELL SOLID CELAS2 CELAS1 RBAR CONM2 CBEAM CROD CTUBE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL gt RADIOSS V4 1 BEAM RIGID BODY SHELL SOLID SPRING 8rd node is created if necessary to define the direction SPRING 8rd node is created if necessary to define the direction SPOTWELD MASS BEAM TRUSS BEAM SHELL 7 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete PGAP properties NASTRAN PSHELL PSOLID PBAR PBEAM PELAS PROD PTUBE gt RADIOSS V4 1 1 SHELL 14 GENERAL_SOLID 3 BEAM 3 BEAM 4 SPRING 2 TRUSS 3 BEAM 7 3 MATERIAL
144. 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE DRIVER LEFT KNEE ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PASSAGER LEFT KNEE KNEE BOLSTER Cin IMPACTOR 7 5 1 7 FMVSS203 STEERING CONTROL Description This function will create a body block model and position it for simulation of an FMVSS 203 Steering Control System analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER STEERING CONTROL INFORMATION 7 66 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES STEERING CONTROL DATA DATA al ammm STEERING WHEEL BODY BLOCK CLEARA 2 000000 E 001 6 667000 E 003 Cancel BODY BLOCK VELOCITY mm s 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A STEERING WHEEL NODE TO LOCATE BODY BLOCK ABORT CURSOR AT NODE KEY IN X Y Z Select CURSOR AT NODE default and select a node from the part as target position S ae M BODY BLOCK ETAPE 7 5 2 OCCUPANT SAFETY ECE REGULATIONS 7 5 2 1 ECE17 LUGGAGE INTRUSTION Description This function will import and position luggage blocks of the proper weight and dimensions for use in an ECE 17 Luggage Intrusion simulation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUGGAGE INTRUSION INFORMATION LUGGAGE INTRUSION DATA I T E M5 FDATA HORIZONTAL CONTACT CLEARANCE mm MANtaa naast VERTICAL CONTACT CLEARANCE mm i 000
145. 29 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Section Cut Operation Displa eor only Y Define Cut Plane Clear section Cut Normal View Section Cut Options Export Cut Section Cut Plane Operation Translate Rotate Move Section By Mouse Apply Exit Figure 9 31 Section Cut Operation ONE POINT Select a node by cursor to define the origin of the LCS then select a global direction as the local W axis and click EXIT The global direction may be either or X Y or Z axis as listed in Figure 9 31 The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with the local W axes follow the selected direction and U V axes parallel to the other two global axes TWO POINTS Select the first node to define the origin of the LCS and select second node to define the local W axis and click EXIT to define the LCS The local coordinate system will be defined at the first node with local w axis aligned with the vector connecting the first and the second node THREE POINTS Select the first node to define the origin of the LCS select the second node to define the local U axis and the third node to define the U V plane The local V and W axis will be computed according to the right hand rule Once the local system is defined and accepted the program will display the section lines in part color that represent the section cut of the model in the u v plane The program will activate other options as shown in Figure 9 32 for the u
146. 3 MAT122 MAT123 MAT125 MAT133 by far will ignore other types elements eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 6 SET MENU LS DYNA The functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization of data specification and output control data The following options are available in the SET MENU when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA SET MENU BEAM BEAM ADD DISCRETE DISCRETE ADD NODE NODE ADD PART PART ADDO SEGMENT 20 SEGMENT SHELL SHELL ADD SOLID SOLID ADD THICK SHELL Note When the analysis code is set to NASTRAN see section 6 7 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their respective set groups 6 114 ANNOTATE CREATE CURRENT DELETE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS LIST REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET REVIEW LIST SHOW SET SET ON OFF PART VIEW eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 6 1 ANNOTATE Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 6 2
147. 3 4 APPENDIX C sfric dfric edc vic th th_sf pen_sf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ignore frceng 1 0 CONTROL_ENERGY hgen rwen sinten rylen 2 2 2 2 CONTROL_OUTPUT npopt neecho nrefup iaccop opifs ipnint ikedit iflush 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200 5000 iprtf 0 CONTROL_SHELL wrpang itrist irnxx istupd theory bwc miter proj 20 000 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 rotascl intgrd lamsht 0 0 0 0 CONTROL_TERMINATION endtim endcyc dtmin endeng endmas 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CONTROL_TIMESTEP dtinit tssfac isdo tslimt dt2ms Ictm erode msist 0 0 0 90000 0 0 0 1 100E 3 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I If you don t have RADIOSS ENGINE file VPG will set up DYNA DATABASE cards for you as following 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATABASE_ABSTAT dt 0 5 DATABASE GLSTAT dt 0 5 DATABASE_ MATSUM dt 1 000 DATABASE_NODOUT dt 0 5 DATABASE_ RCFORC dt 0 5 DATABASE_RWFORC dt 0 5 DATABASE_ SECFORC dt 0 5 DATABASE_ ELOUT dt 0 5 1 2 4 3 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 8 DATABASE_BINARY_D3PLOT dt cycl Icat beam npltc 5 000 0 0 0 DATABASE_BINARY_D3DUMP dt cycl 100000 DATABASE_BINARY_RUNRSF dt cycl 1000 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 8 9 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO RADIOSS C 18 eta VPG 3 4
148. 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Analysis Control Simulation Starts From Drop Height E Specified Height o OO mm Fef by the lowest Mode E Control Shell E Control Hourglass E Control Timestep TerminationTime Step Factor End Time Total Time 2 50 0 5000 Steps in d plot 20 Steps in time history 200 e Simulation Start From define initial analysis height note that this value should be less than or equal to the drop height Drop height take drop height as initial analysis height Specified Height define initial analysis height Main Control cards active control cards about contact etc Total Time time needed from initial analysis height to the floor Steps in d3plot files steps during simulation Steps in time ASCII files steps during simulation 7 9 2 4 TIME HISTORY OPTION Description this function is used to add and control the output file options The user can select the desired nodes and elements to output the desired file The types of the output files are 7 90 Animation file d3plot Node output file nodout Element output file elout Total energy message of the model glstat Material absorption capability matsum Resultant contact force during impact rcforc Contact energy message sleout eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Time History Files ELOUT GLSTAT L MATSUM RCFORC SLEOQUT Nodes Add Remove show Elements Add Remove Show OK 7 9 2 5 RU
149. 56693 SRA 77 398392 46 140091 ca 14 881793 o VANE N j ae alt f W v a tok b j 1 rg SS i z aS SIS 3 NEN X SOLT SOY if Gas N gy L LIA EA LR i gt lt b eee SA SE F RKI SSS SS a a a Se cok ETA POST Figure 9 62 An Example for Contour Line 9 11 9 EXPORT CONTOUR LINE Description This function allows user to export the contour line when the CONTOUR LEVEL is not CONTINUE into VPG Line Data format file Usage eta Post prompts the user to enter the file name After determining the file name and clicking SAVE button the contour lines will be saved in the given file 9 11 10 LIST VALUE Description This function lists the contour value of selected nodes or selected element if ELEMENT RESULT is toggled on For example list node value as below step Usage 1 Activate the LIST VALUE function in the CONTOUR CONTROL WINDOW 2 The Control Option window is displayed with Select Node Option shown as Figure 9 63 9 56 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Select by Cursor Select by Window Select by Polygon Select by Freehand Select by Displayed Reject Last Selected Figure 9 63 Select Node Control Option 3 Select the desired node to be listed The default setting is by mouse pick The user can also select nodes by dragging window polygon or free hand region 4 Once the node is selected the highest three nodes are listed at the down left corner of
150. 6 PRE PROCESSOR SELECT GLOBAL EXIT 2 After local coordinates are defined VPG prompts gt ENTER MASS INERTIA Ixx Ixy Ixz lyy lyz amp Izz 3 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT CREATE SPH LS DYNA Description This function defines a SPH element on a node This section covers the options for the SPH subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE 2 After entering a value VPG prompts gt PICK NODES e Select nodes and click DONE SPH elements will be created CREATE CONST NODE SET LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the CONST NODE SET subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER APPLICABLE DOF 1 TO 7 TYPE 0 TO EXIT 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR CONST NODE SET 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES CREATE CONST INTERPOLATION LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the CONST INTERPOLATION subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT NUMBERS DEFAULT 123456 OR 1 TO EXIT e Defines the degrees of freedom 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE NODE FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 6 51 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMPONENT WITH WEIGHTING FACTOR DEFAULT 123456 gt ENTER WEIGHTING FACTOR WT 1 REAL OR 0 TO END gt SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES FOR CONST INTERPOLATION 4 Step 3 is repeated unt
151. 7 VPG MODULES Chapter Chapter 7 VPG MODULES VPG MODULES includes the following sections ROAD MENU SUSPENSION MENU TIRE MENU SAFETY MENU ALE FSI and DROP TEST DTM Menu The functions in these menus allow the user to quickly and easily construct the components required for proving ground simulations and in the case of the SAFETY MENU import tools and set boundary conditions for use in vehicle impact and safety simulations 7 1 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 1 ROAD DEFINITION The ROAD DEFINITION menu allows the user to define and save road surfaces Models may be created using the modeling functions available in eta VPG imported using VPG s IGES translator or selected from VPG s library of road surfaces VPG s library currently consists of 11 models The road surfaces included in this library are digitized models of roads found on the MGA Research proving ground facility in Burlington WI and make up the majority of the 20 000 mile General Durability Test see the eta VPG Applications Manual Section 1 5 By default the road surfaces are defined as rigid bodies with nominal mass At the user s discretion the road surface may be modeled using deformable material definitions The following functions are included in VPG s ROAD DEFINITION menu ROAD DEFINITION ROAD MENU DELETE MOVE ROAD SHOW ROAD COMBINE EXPORT ROAD SELECT FROM LIBRARY SUMMARY EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the
152. A therefore formed an agreement with MGA Research Corporation to model the company s vehicle proving ground facility located in Burlington Wisconsin ETA created road surface profiles that could be digitized from the proving ground construction drawings in a CAD surface format FEA mesh could be generated from the CAD surface data and produced a selection of specific road profiles representing the characteristics of the proving ground testing conditions After years of development and evaluation it has been confirmed that VPG technology produces repeatable reliable and correlated analysis results The level of confidence from users and correlation results has lead to aggressive simulation use and a broad application scope Dr John Hallquist at Livermore Software Technology Corporation LSTC has been instrumental in the development of the VPG application technology by implementing various features and functions of LS DYNA to meet VPG requirements This partnership with LSTC has allowed the VPG methodology to grow in scope of application and reliability The release of VPG 1 0 in 1998 was an effort to address the specific needs of system modeling by combining the tools created for tire modeling and suspension modeling with the finite element meshing and associated tools found within the eta FEMB product As usage progressed and the needs of users expanded fatigue analysis software was embedded into VPG as were the signal processing tools use
153. ACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 11 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE Creates anew CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE Set all CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE s SOFT 1 IGNORE 1 RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL_GEOMETRIC 2 6 AIRBAG MONITORED VOLUMES MONITORED VOLUMES AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL REPLACES THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL WITH MAT_FABRIC C 5 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 2 7 SEATBELT CONVERTS RADIOSS S MATERIAL TYPE 1 WITH VERY SMALL YOUNG S MODULUS INTO DYNA S MAT_FABRIC 2 8 OTHERS Delete TRUSS SET MAT SET PROP SET Delete ACCELEROMETER MONITORED VOLUME SECTIONS SENSOR CONTROL CARDS RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 FUNCTION DEFINE_CURVE SKEW moving DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES SKEW fixed DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR 3 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO RADIOSS 3 1 ELEMENT Delete INERTIA elements DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 BEAM BEAM SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL T SHELL SOLID DISCRETE SPRING VID is converted into the third node MASS MASS JOINT JOINT CONSTRAINED NODAL _RIGID_BODY RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_NODE_SET RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD SPOTWELD SEATBELT BEAM 3 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete SPH section Convert spring stiffness into RADIOSS element property DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 1 SECTION BEAM integrated SECTION_BEAM resultant SECTION_BEAM discrete SECTION_BEAM truss SECTION_BEAM spotweld SECTION DISCRETE SECTION SHELL SECTION SHELL ALE SECTION SOLID SECTI
154. ADAMS Description ability to export data in an XML format which is intended to facilitate sharing of the data with other applications Imported XML data generated by Adams creates all of the topology of the suspension the bushings springs dampers rigid links and beam elements that make up a suspension DATABASE ASCII Description The definition cards in the ASCII subsection specify the ASCII database output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE 6 183 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ASCII DATABASE OPTIONS ABSTAT AIRBAG STATISTICS AWSFLT AWS FORMAT DE BOUNDARY CONDITION DEFORMED GEOMETRY DISCRETE ELEMENT ELEMENT DATA GCEOUT GEOM CONTACT ENT GLSTAT GLOBAL DATA H3HOUT DATA JOINT FORCE DATA MATSUM MATERIAL ENERGIES MOVIE MOWIE FORMAT DE MPGS MPGS FORMAT DE NCFORC NODAL INTERFACE EXIT 2 The user then selects the type of ASCII card to define VPG displays the definition card to be edited The time interval once entered will be used as the default value for future cards defined To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user must click once on the card to turn it on and again to have it displayed e AYES inthe right column of the DATABASE ASCII indicates that this type of card has been defined e ANO in the right column indicates that this type of card has not been defined e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further d
155. AL The head will align with the normal of the element selected 7 62 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e SHELL REVERSE The head will align with the reverse normal NORMAL direction of the element selected Z a 7 5 1 2 201 ETA HEAD IMPACT Description This function will position a FMVSS201 Head Impact Head Form model in the VPG model database and apply appropriate boundary conditions The FEA model used is an ETA head model Please refer to FMVSS201 HEAD IMPACT for detail usage 7 5 2 3 201 GM HEAD IMPACT Description This function will position a FMVSS201 Head Impact Head Form model in the VPG model database and apply appropriate boundary conditions The FEA model used is a GM head model Please refer to FMVSS201 HEAD IMPACT for detail usage 7 5 1 4 FMVSS207 210 SEATBELT ANCHORAGE Description This function will import and position the body block used in the evaluation of seat belt anchorages to support the simulation of FMVSS 207 and FMVSS 210 requirements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SEATBELT ANCHORAGE CRASH INFORMATION SEATBELT ANCHORAGE DATA ITEMS BODY BLOCK CLEARANCE mm DRIVER SIDE 1 PASSENGER SIDE 2 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF LOWER BLOCK 7 63 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE CENTER OF UPPER BLOCK 4 VPG prompts gt DEFINE A VECTOR TO M
156. ALE FSI modules are used for fluid and solid coupling simulations It has following features Simulate structure interaction with high energy explosion Parametric Soil Fluid Air ALE mesh generation i Automated ALE material section EOS definition i Easy FSI coupling Coupled with SPH elements Organized ALE control definition Export complete LS DYNA input file No editing required Creates standard meshes sets up ALE zones defines the coupling and material properties Defines control cards and exports the model ALE Fal MENU CREATE ALE SOLID MESH DEFINE PROPERTY DEFINE COUPLING INITIAL DETONATION INITIAL VOLUME FRAC TION DEFINE ALE CONTROL CARD EXPORT DYNA FILE ExlT 7 8 1 CREATE ALE SOLID MESH This option helps user to define standard ALE zones and quickly sets up ALE Meshes and Explosive Source Models SELECT OPTION LINEAR MAPPING SPHERE CORE IN BOX CYLINDER CORE IN BOX CUBE CORE IN BOX EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 8 1 1 LINEAR MAPPING Description This function allows the user to generate solid elements model by linear mapping 7 76 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 Linear Napping Select Source Elements Select Target Elements VPG MODULES Linear Mapping 198 elems selected 198 elems selected Select Aligning Modes Select Aligning Modes ModelD 3 ModelD 1 Source M1 SOURCE fy Target M1 Target M2
157. AN Description This function lists the names of the element properties in the VPG MENU WINDOW VPG displays the element properties in their corresponding colors when the properties are turned ON and in white when the properties are turned OFF 6 12 13 LIST LS DYNA Description This function displays the VPG section card list 6 12 14 ON OFF Description This function turns the selected property and its parts ON OFF Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property gt SELECT SECTION WINDOW MULTI PT REGION ON ALL SECTION OFF ALL SECTION UNDO EXIT 2 VPG turns the selected property and its parts on off 6 12 15 PROPERTY PART COLOR toggle Description This function toggles the display of the part between its property and part color 6 12 16 RENUMBER Description This function renumbers the ID for a selected property or for all properties Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT 2 Ifthe user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts 6 173 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER FIRST PROPERTY ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each property The following prompt will be repeated for each property in the database gt ENTER PRID number FOR PROPERTY name OR E TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 Ifthe user enters SELECT ONE V
158. AND GROWTH TABULATED COMPACT TABULATED PROPELLANT DEFLAG PORE COLLAPSE IDEAL GAS J ALE GASKET USER DEFINE e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 10 EXCHANGE FACTOR Description This function characterizes radiative heat transfer between collections of flat surfaces the union of which is a closed surface an closure Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option DEFINE EF CARD EF CONTROL EF GRID EF MATERIAL EF TOGGLES EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 197 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 14 11 HOURGLASS Description This function allows the user to define hourglass and bulk viscosity properties Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 12 INTEGRATION Description this function is used to define integration parameters for beam and shell elements 6 14 13 INTERFACE CARDS Description This function defines interfaces for linking calculations Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION INTERFACE OPTIONS COMPONENT NODE COMPONENT SEGMENT DISCRETE NODE LINK DISCRETE SET LINK LINK SEGMENT LINK EDGE Jor SPRINGBACK COMPENSATION NEW e All of the preceding commands yield varying definition
159. APPENDIX C 9 1 ELEMENT Delete PLOTEL CONSTRAINED_INTERPOLATION element DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 BEAM BEAM DISCRETE SPRING Convert DYNA s VID into RADIOSS s third node INERTIA MASS MASS MASS SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID T SHELL SOLID CONSTRAINED NODAL RIGID BODY RBODY CONSTRAINED NODE SET RBODY CONSTRAINED SPOTWELD RIVET JOINT JOINT SEATBELT BEAM 9 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete SPH POINT_SOURCE POINT_SOURCE_MIXTURE section Convert DYNA s spring stiffness into RADIOSS s element property DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 SECTION_BEAM integrated 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM discrete 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM spotweld 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM 2D shells 3 BEAM SECTION_DISCRETE 4 SPRING SECTION_SHELL 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL_ALE 1 SHELL SECTION_SOLID 14 SOLID SECTION_SOLID_ALE 14 SOLID SECTION_TSHELL 14 SOLID SECTION_SEATBELT 3 BEAM 9 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY DYNA V970 gt OONOOARWNDN MAT_ELASTIC MAT ELASTIC FLUID MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC MAT_ ANISOTROPIC ELASTIC MAT PLASTIC KINEMATIC MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ THERMAL MAT_SOIL_AND_ FOAM MAT_ VISCOELASTIC MAT_BLATZ KO_RUBBER MAT_HIGH EXPLOSIVE_BURN MAT_NULL MAT_ELASTIC _PLASTIC_HYDRO MAT ELASTIC _PLASTIC_HYDRO SPALL MAT_STEINBERG MAT_STEINBERG_LUND MAT_ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_ PLASTIC MAT_ISOTROPIC_ELASTIC_ FAILURE MAT_SOIL_AND_ FOAM FAILURE RADIOSS V4 4 1 ELAST
160. ATABASE 7 8 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES gt SELECT A NODE IN THE ROAD SURFACE TO BE MOVED 2 After the first node is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT A CORRESPONDING NODE FOR THE NEW LOCATION e After the second node is selected the road surface is moved by aligning the first selected node with the second Road Surface 1 Node 1 7 1 6 COMBINE Description This option allows the user to combine 2 road surfaces into a single continuous road surface It is used in conjunction with the MOVE ROAD SURFACE function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt COMBINE ROAD SURFACES IN DATABASE gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE FIRST ROAD SURFACE The selected road surface is highlighted in white 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN ELEMENT ON THE SECOND ROAD SURFACE e The selected road surface is highlighted in white 7 9 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Note The selected surfaces must be in contact Otherwise VPG will prompt gt BEFORE COMBINING PLEASE MOVE TWO ROADS TOGETHER 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMBINED ROAD SURFACE NAME The combined road surface will have a new name 4 Once the name is entered VPG prompts gt ROAD SURFACES COMBINED SUCCESSFULLY 7 1 7 EXPORT ROAD Description This option allows the user to save a user defined or modified road surface to a user defined road surface library Multiple road surface libraries can be created with multiple road surfaces in each Usage 1 VPG prompts
161. BER yyyy ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR CR TO IGNORE 6 3 3 COPY Description This function allows the user to generate a set of duplicate elements The user 6 38 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR may simultaneously translate rotate or offset in the normal direction the copied elements Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select the elements to be copied gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once the desired elements have been selected DONE continues to the next step where VPG prompts gt ENTER COPY OPTION M R N P A MOVE ROTATE NORMAL OFFSET MAPPING LCS ABORT 3 Then VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES 4 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG is asking for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system 5 Once the coordinate system is determined VPG prompts the user to select magnitudes for the transformation respective to the selections made in step 4 e If MOVE was selected gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e i e 0 0 1000 This will copy the selected element s 1000 units along the Z axis e If ROTATE was selected gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT e Enter the angle increment right hand rule about the W axis e If NORMAL offset was selected gt ENTER THICKNESS IN NORMAL DIRECTION e Thickness is the distance away from the plane of the elements in the direction of the element s normal 6 VPG promp
162. CCELEROMETERS RADIOSS MISC SENSORS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS GRAVITY CONTACT CONTACT ELEMENT OPTIONS ELEMENT OPTIONS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS IMPOSED VELOCITY ELEMENT OPTIONS RADIOSS MISC SECTION CARDS ELEMENT OPTIONS RADIOSS MISC MONITORED VOLUMES 2 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO DYNA RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 BEAM BEAM TRUSS BEAM SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL SPRING BEAM MASS MASS JOINT If number of node is equal 4 we will convert it into 2 CONSTRAINED_NODAL_ RIGID_BODY and 1 CONSTRAINED_JOINT_ CYLINDRICAL Otherwise we will convert it into 1 CONSTRAINED NODAL_RIGID_BODY RIGID BODY CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_ BODY Doesn t have mass and inertia CONSTRAINED _NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA Including mass and inertia The RADIOSS primary node number RBID be used as the parameter NODEID on card 2 of CONSTRAINED_ NODAL_RIGID_BODY_INERTIA SPOTWELD CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD C 3 2 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete VOID RIVET property Convert spring stiffness into DYNA material RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 1 SHELL SECTION_SHELL 2 TRUSS SECTION_BEAM truss 3 BEAM SECTION_BEAM resultant 4 SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL 10 COMP SHELL 11 COMP SHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING SECTION_SOLID SECTION_BEAM discrete SECTION_SHELL SECTION_SHELL SECTION_SHELL SECTION_BEAM discrete eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 13 BEAM TYPE SPRING SECTION_BEAM discrete
163. CONM2 elements to the nearest nodes in the surrounding parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL MASS TO NEAREST NODES Y N A YES attach all mass to the nearest nodes NO and ABORT do nothing and return the user to the CONM2 MENU 6 214 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 19 ASSEMBLY NASTRAN The functions of the AUTO ASSEMBLY MENU are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows READ FROM FILE WRITE TO FILE CREATE CONNEC TION DELETE CONNEC TION REPLACE PART REPLACE PART SET EXIT 6 19 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that stores the connection information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME e The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 Ifthe file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the AUTO ASSEMBLY menu 6 19 2 WRITE TO FILE Description The function allows the user to output connection information to a file The functions in this menu are organized as follows CELAS1 CELAS 2 RBAR RBE RBES EXIT The user selects one kind of connection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEA
164. CREATE Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique ID numbers The respective element node part may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW type SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid If the user enters a set ID number already assigned VPG returns the prompt gt type SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part e The user may press the left most mouse button or N to select the element nearest to the cursor e If the user selects the same element node part twice while creating a the set VPG returns the prompt gt type xxxx ALREADY PICKED e Ifthe user selects DONE EXIT VPG saves the set and prompts gt X type INCLUDED IN type SET X e Ifthe user selects ABORT VPG deletes the node set and returns the user to the SET submenu 6 6 3 CURRENT Description This function allows the user to select the current set from a list of previously defined sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets 6 115 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CURSOR AT element node part EXIT 2 Once the set s is selected VPG prompts gt SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET e The selected set is current 6 6 4 DELETE Description This function allows the user to remove sets by ID number Selecting the set name also indicates where the set has been used such as in boundary
165. CT 2 POINTS NODES 3 VPG displays angle information gt ANGLE XX XX TOP XX XX SIDE XX XX REAR XX XX 4 DONE or EXIT returns the user to the UTILITY menu 10 4 2 COORDINATE SYSTEM Description The functions in this menu create and modify local coordinate systems Note The COORDINATE SYSTEM command requires several submenus To help guide the user each submenu is described in the following subsections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND 10 30 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY LOCAL SYSTEM CREATE DELETE ERASE UNREF LOCAL IDENTIFY MODIFY ON OFF RENUMBER TRANSFORM EXIT 10 4 2 Coordinate System Menu 2 After the user enters the appropriate system VPG lists the options specific to that system CREATE Description This function creates local coordinate systems The CS command is used in conjunction with the ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM TO NODE command Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES SYSTEM VECTOR 2 VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 After the user enters one of the options above the local coordinate system appears on screen with its C S number DELETE Description This function deletes local coordinate system sets from the database Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELET
166. D BUMPER REBOUND IN SHOCK BUSHING RATE COMPACT SIZE PARALLEL LINK COIL OUT OF SHOCK TORSION JOUNCE OUT SHOCK REBOUND OUT SHOCK FULL SIZE SUV OK VPG prompts Cancel Reset gt MODIFY GEOMETRY DATA e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT THESE GEOMETRY DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 4 e NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION GEOMETRY table eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SUSPENSION GEOMETRY DATA aT COE C PomTo2 23000 30000 27500 Potos 19800 57500 PomToa ooo eooo 250 00 Potos oo sooo PomTos 18000 30000 450 Pomor ooo esoo 480 PomTos ooo 59000 20 Pomos ooo 40o Pomma ooo 45000 ok Previous Cancel Abot 4 VPG displays the following pop up window with suspension stiffness data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY BUSHING STIFFNESS DATA gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT STIFFNESS DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 5 e NOreturns the user to the SUSPENSION BUSHING STIFFNESS table Note If the user selects cancel at any time during the suspension creation process the process is ended and the suspension is not defined BUSHING STIFFHESS amp LCID ITEMS SPRI
167. DGE_TO CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_SURFACE_TO SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_TO_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_TO SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_ TO SURFACE 8 SLIDE 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_ PENALTY 7 SLIDE VOID_ CONSTRAINT 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID_SURFACE_TO SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID 6 SLIDE VOID_ RIGID BODY 6 SLIDE VOID_RIGID_ BODY 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID 7 SLIDE VOID_ SURFACE 2 TIED CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_FAILURE 2 TIED RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL 3 6 OTHERS Delete T SHELL SET Delete all other cards that can t be converted DYNA V970 ee RADIOSS V4 1 DEFINE COORDINATE NODES SKEW_MOV DEFINE COORDINATE SYSTEM SKEW_MOV DEFINE COORDINATE VECTOR SKEW_ FIX DEFINE CURVE FUNCTION 4 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO DYNA 4 1 ELEMENT General Comments When some RBE s share the common nodes merge them into one RBE2 Delete RBE3 amp CGAP elements C 9 According to the Dof NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 CBAR BEAM RBE2 CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY CONSTRAINED _NODE_SET SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C CELAS2 CELAS1 RBAR CONM2 CBEAM CROD CTUBE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL 4 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY DISCRETE Create DEFINE SD ORIEN
168. E 2 EXIT deletes the selected coordinate system from the database and resets the nodes to the global system Note To remove the local systems definitions from individual nodes the user must reassign the nodes to the global coordinate system refer to ASSIGN COORDINATE SYSTEM on page 3 of this section ERASE UNREF LOCAL Description This function allows the user to delete any local coordinate systems not referenced by any entity in the model 10 31 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY MODIFY Description This function modifies the definition of an existing local coordinate system Usage 1 VPG displays the define coordinate card list and prompts gt EXIT TO CONTINUE 2 After selecting the coordinate system VPG displays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD which allows the user to select and edit the coordinate systems data 3 Once the user accepts the modified card the new local system appears on the screen All local systems belonging to the modified coordinate system automatically adjust to match the labeled coordinate system CURRENT Description This function switches the current coordinate system from local to global DISPLAY ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of local coordinate systems on or off RENUMBER Description This function changes the ID of selected local coordinate systems The user may select individual local coordinates or may renumber all or a portion of the local coordinate systems
169. E 207 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises MAX_VONMISES NODE 402a MAX_VONMISES NODE 887 oe Ag Ii 301 747040 323 587952 a y 279 906097 258 065155 236 224228 214 383301 192 542374 170 701431 148 860504 3 4 Times E 2 127 019577 MAX_VONMISES NODE 207 3 5999 10e 002 2 445825e 002 105 178642 MAX_VONMISES NODE 1029 3 5999 10e 002 2 637425e 002 83 337715 61 496784 39 655853 17 814920 ETA POST Figure 9 43 Node Curve Result 9 9 8 ELEMENT VALUE CURVE 9 38 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected elements The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected 9 9 9 NODAL DISPLACEMENT CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the displacement result in a time history graph of the selected node The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected 9 9 10 DISTANCE CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the distance result in a time history graph This distance can be node to node to element to part and to plane The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected Distance Curve lt Component gt x FY zZz M Total Curve Type gt Node Node 7 Node Node Usage The user first selects a node then select another node a
170. E EXIT 2 Ifthe user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST CONTACT ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each contact The following prompt will be repeated for each contact in the database gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 Ifthe user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT ONE CONTACT e Once the user selects one contact card VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW CONTACT ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 13 7 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function allows the user to reverse the contact orientation normal for all contacts 6 177 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 The CONTACT CARD LIST pops up and simultaneously VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT TO REVERSE NORMAL e Once the user selects one contact card VPG prompts gt PICK CONTACT PORTION TO REVERSE NORMAL HASTER SLAVE EXIT 2 After the user selects MASTER or SLAVE VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 6 13 8 SHOW Description This function shows the contact area with filled color Upon selection of the SHOW command the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed When the desired interface is selected the contact area will be shown with filled color master is shown as red slave is shown as blue Usage 1 VPG prompts gt THIS CONTACT TYPE CANNOT BE SHOWN e The CONTACT CARD LIST is as following CONTACT
171. E 001 RAM BOUNDARY VELOCITY mm s 4 000000 E 003 X RAM FRONT BOTTOM EDGE mm l1 230000E 0043 Z RAM FRONT BOTTOM EDGE mm 2 700000 E 002 Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK THE FRONT EDGE IN THE LOWER SURFACE OF THE RAM gt PICK A NODE OR INPUT THE Y VALUE OF THE RAM ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN Y ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the door outer panel as target position The rigid ram will be positioned to desired location Proper contact and velocity will also be defined in the model Figure 1 An Example of a Generated Side Door Intrusion Model 7 41 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 2 FMVSS214 DYNAMIC SIDE IMPACT Description This function allows the user to import the FMVSS214 US Moving Deformable Barrier MDB and dummies and position these according to the requirements of FMVSS 214 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FMVSS 214 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION FE SS SIDE IMPACT DATA ITEMS HH DATA VEH BARRIER Y CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 BARRIER VELOCITY mm s 1 497264E 004 X OF WHEELBASE CENTER mm f 00000E 003 OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000 E 000 2 Input values and press OK 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE e Select a node from the left most part of the vehicle e The MDB is imported from the library and put on the specified location 4 VPG
172. E command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT CONSTRAINT CARDS ADAPTIVITY Description This function defines adaptivity Usage 6 135 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED ADAPTIVITY DEFINITION window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS BUTT WELD Description This function defines a butt weld between master node set and slave note set Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the BUTT WELD window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS EULER IN EULER Description this fuction is used to define EULER IN EULER card Usage 1 When CREATE is selected the CONSTRAINED EULER IN EULER window pops up e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS EXTRA NODES Description This function defines extra nodes for a rigid body
173. ECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT DAMPING COEFFICIENT DATA Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 7 e NO returns the user to the SPRING INITIAL OFFSET table BUSHING DAMPING amp LCID Ta 5c DAMPING DIRECTION RADIAL TORSIONAL CONICAL BUSH 1 DAMPING VALUE 7600 75000 610000 BUSH 2 DAMPING_VALUE 300 7600 75000 610000 BUSH 3 DAMPING_VALUE 400 12000 130000 1700000 BUSH 4 DAMPING_VALUE 590 5800 180000 1300000 BUSH 5 DAMPING_VALUE 130 730 300000 170000 BUSH 6 DAMPING_VALUE 1300 10000 2300 110000 BUSH 7 DAMPING_VALUE 20 1500 20 250000 BUSH 8 DAMPING_VALUE 14000 14000 10000 f 10000 BUSH 9 DAMPING_VALUE 14000 14000 30000 30000 DAMPER LOAD CURVE ID 4 OK Previous Cancel 7 VPG displays a pop up window with bush axial data VPG prompts gt MODIFY EXTRA NODE COORDINATES gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT EXTRA NODE COORDINATES Y N e NO returns the user to the bush axial data table e f YES is entered VPG prompts 7 14 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES BUSH AXIAL DIRECTION Ponta oo ow oo POINT 03 10 00 000 o POINT 07 POINT 08 POINT 05 POINT 06 OK Previous Cancel Abort
174. ECT FIRST POINT ON BOUNDARY gt SELECT SECOND POINT ON BOUNDARY e VPG splits the surface once the user selects the second boundary point RESPACE U V LINES gt ENTER THE NUMBERS OF UV LINES N1 N2 e N1 and N2 cannot be greater than 199 e The user may choose a desired section line once the user selects the section lines for N1 and N2 SECTION U V LINE gt SELECT SECTION LINE TO SPLIT SURFACE SURFACE INTERSECTION gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE Once the user selects the second surface the first surface splits at the intersection of the two surfaces The user may split the second surface at the same intersection SPLINE CURVE gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE e The user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface in order to complete a spline curve LINEAR SEGMENTS gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR LINEAR SEGMENT e The user may pick up to 500 locations on the surface to complete a piecewise linear curve CURVE IN DATABASE gt SELECT LINES e The user may select lines in database as split lines OVERLAP SURFACE gt SELECT AN OVERLAP SURFACE 6 24 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The user may select an overlap surface as split line DEFINE LCS gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e This will lead user to create a coordinate system EXIT 6 2 17 SECTION REVOLUTION Description This function creates a surface by rotating a selected section line the generatrix up to 360 about a vector the axis of revolution Usage 1
175. ECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected and the user has exited the REMOVE submenu VPG removes the nodes from their node set 6 121 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 10 RENUMBER SET Description This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST NODE ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 If entering ONE BY ONE VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT e This prompt is repeated until all sets are given a new set ID 4 If entering SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST e Once set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER NEW NODE SET ID OLD X TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 7 11 REVIEW LIST Description This function displays the defined sets in the MENU WINDOW When a set is selected the nodes of that set are displayed in the CONTENTS OF SET window 6 7 12 SHOW SET NODE Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined node sets VPG displays an ID number next to each node Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all node sets CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT VPG displays all node sets and returns th
176. ECT OPTION GEBOD GEBOD JOINT HYBRIDITI HYERIDIII JOINT EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 4 CONTROL CARDS Description Control cards are optional default settings Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LEFT BUTTON TO DEFINE OR MODIFY RIGHT BUTTON TO REMOVE gt SELECT CARD TO CREATE 6 181 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CONTROL CARD u CFD_TURBULENCE HECK A YES in the right column indicates that this type of control card has been defined A NO in the right column indicates that this type of control card has not been defined 6 14 5 DAMPING CARDS Description Damping cards define mass weighted nodal damping that applies globally to the nodes of deformable bodies Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION DAMPING OPTIONS FREQUENCY GLOBAL PART MASS PART STIFFNESS RELATIVE EXIT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 6 DATABASE Description Database definition cards are used to obtain output result files Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT DATABASE TYPE 6 182 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR SELECT D B TYPE ADAMS ASCII BINARY CROSS SECTION EXTENT OUTPUT FORMAT Fal Fal SENSOR HISTORY NODAL FORCE GROUP SPRING FORWARD SUPER PLASTIC FORMING TRACER DATABASE
177. ECTED gt SECTION ID XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X The user exits the function COPY and returns to the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu 6 12 4 COPY LS DYNA Description This function copies the properties from one element to another Usage 1 VPG displays the SECTION CARD LIST and prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT SECTION TO COPY 6 169 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 After the user selects the desired section to copy VPG prompts gt SECTION ID XX DUPLICATED FROM SECTION ID X 6 12 5 CREATE NASTRAN Description This function allows the user to create define a property Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select property type gt SELECT OPTION e The SELECT PROPERTY TYPE menu is shown as below 1 PBAR 2 PBARL 3 PBCOMP 4 PBEAM 5 PBEAML 6 PBEND PBUSH 5 PBUSH1D 9 PCOMP 10 PDAMP 11 PELAS 12 PGAP 13 PLPLANE 14 PLSOLID 15 PROD 16 PSHEAR 1 PSHELL 18 PSOLID 19 PTUBE EX EXIT 2 Once a property type is selected VPG displays a definition card in which the user may insert the values for the element properties 6 12 6 CREATE LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to create define a property To create a property VPG first displays a list of section types Once a type is selected its definition card is displayed and the user can edit the card for the desired properties e The SELECT SECTION TYPE menu is as following 6 170 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR
178. ECTION UV PLANE gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system to define the UV plane A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 4 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT Y N e YES go to step 9 e NO go to step 7 5 Option SURFACE VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE e ABORT exits without action DONE completes the operation and continues to step 6 6 VPG prompts gt PROJECT TO SURFACE ALONG THE NORMAL Y N e YES go to step 9 e NO goto step 7 7 VPG Prompts gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system to define the projection vector 8 VPG displays the desired coordinate system and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A 9 Ifthe user selects YES VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR PROJECTION e DONE or EXIT completes the operation and exits the PROJECT NODE menu 6 91 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Elements to be projected onto the surface using PROJECT NODE Surface with projection of elements 6 4 15 RENUMBER NODES Description Renumbers all nodes in the existing database There is also an option of creating a summary table report of the node ranges between each part The user may renumber nodes by sequence or parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RENUMBERING OPTION EXIT ALL PARTS MULTIPLE PARTS 2 ALL PARTS goto step
179. EGMENT SHELL SOLID THICK SHELL EXIT The ICON BAR contains commonly used commands Database and Part control gene Viewing manipulation P y n ul si Baia jale E w amp a 2 ily The user initiates the commands via mouse pick A detailed description of each function is given in the following section 10 2 1 DATABASE AND PART CONTROL 10 11 eta VPG3 4 C 10 12 hapter 10 UTILITY ih NEW FILE Allows the user to create a new database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER OPEN FILE Allows the user to open a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER SAVE FILE Allows the user to save a database file For a detailed description see chapter 5 FILE MANAGER PRINT Allows the user to create a postscript file of display area and send the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software Note The user can change the Printing Defaults in the SETUP HARDCOPY DEFAULT menu PART ON OFF Allows the user to turn selected parts on or off The PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is displayed once the icon is selected For a description of the command PART ON OFF refer to PARTS PART ON OFF in Section 10 3 10 2 2 VIEWING MANIPULATION i d SX SCREEN X
180. ELECT PART OR ALL SP A E 3 lf the user selects ALL PARTS VPG prompts gt XXXX of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS All modeled parts in the database separate from each other This includes PLATES SOLIDS CBARS CBEAMS CELAS1 CELAS2 ELEMENTS PLOTEL ELEMENTS CROD CTUBE ELEMENTS These entities do not separate RBE2 RBAR ELEMENTS CONM2 ELEMENTS CORD2R ELEMENTS 4 Ifthe user enters SELECTED PARTS VPG prompts SELECT PART TO SEPARATE gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART e The parts separate from each other and VPG prompts gt XXXX of RBE2s RBE2S CREATED BETWEEN SELECTED PARTS V eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 17 TRANSPARENT MODE Description This function makes selected parts transparent during the shading operation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK ALINE L ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART 2 The user makes the appropriate selection then enters DONE to exit the menu Note The user may adjust the degree of transparency in the SETUP menu refer to Section 10 4 10 3 18 RENAME Description Allows the user to change a selected part s name Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO RENAME gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After the user selects a part VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART NAME OR EX TO EXIT 10 3 19 RENUMBER PID Description This function allows the user to renumber all parts PID in the existing database See Figure 10 3 5 Usage
181. ELEM ORIEN Note SHADE RESET Turns plot lines on off This function reduces the size of all elements by 20 percent SHRINK is also useful for locating any missing elements in a shell or solid structure This function creates a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements which provides the user with a realistic view of the model Turns highlighted surfaces on off This function displays the orientation of an element with an arrow that is at the centroid of the element and that is perpendicular to the surface of the element For a solid element the arrow points toward the bottom surface of the element The FILLCOLOR option fills the displayed elements with a designated part color The ELEM option turns elements on off This function displays element orientation Beam element orientation is shown by drawing a vector at the first node of the beam toward the element local Y axis Shell orientation is shown by drawing an arrow from the first node of an element toward the second node of an element Solid element orientation is viewed by drawing an arrow from the bottom surface toward the top surface This display is useful for picturing the beam orientation and the normal direction of the shell elements the normal of the shell follows the right hand rule from the first node to the second node The clarity of the element orientation display improves when the SHRINK ELEM ON OFF command is activated This command d
182. ELOCITY eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C VPG converts NODE SET ELEMENT SET NASTRAN gt DYNA V970 LOAD CURVE DEFINE_CURVE LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM 11 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO NASTRAN 11 1 ELEMENT Delete SEATBELT amp JOINT elements DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR CBEAM CROD According to it s element property CONSTRAINED _NODAL_RIGID_BODY RBE2 T SHELL SOLID SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID DISCRETE CELAS1 Create a LCS for spring direction MASS CONM2 CONSTRAINED_ SPOTWELD RBAR INERTIA CONM2 CONSTRAINED NODE_SET RBE2 11 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG seletes SEATBELT section and converts spring stiffness into element property DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN SECTION_BEAM integrated PBAR According to it s ELFORM and CST SECTION_BEAM resultant PBAR SECTION_BEAM discrete PBAR SECTION_BEAM truss PROD SECTION BEAM spotweld PBAR SECTION_DISCRETE PELAS SECTION _SHELL PSHELL SECTION SOLID PSOLID SECTION SOLID _ALE PSOLID SECTION_TSHELL PSOLID 11 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All material MAT1 11 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN C 24 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C BOUNDARY _SPC_NODE BOUNDARY _SPC_SET INITIAL_ VELOCITY INITIAL_ VELOCITY _NODE INITIAL_ VELOCITY_GENERATION LOAD NODE POINT LOAD NODE SET LOAD SHELL ELEMENT LOAD SHELL SET 11 5 OTHERS Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET DYNA V970 DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM DEFINE_COORDINAT
183. ES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e e Vv V 3 If NO the user returns to step 2 If YES VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION M R L MOVE ROTATE RADIAL ABORT 2 MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e e g 0 0 1000 This will move transform the selected node s 1000 units along the W axis ROTATE gt ENTER ANGLE INCREMENT RIGHT HAND RULE ABOUT LOCAL W OR GLOBAL Z RADIAL gt ENTER INCREMENTAL RADIUS ABORT 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTIONS TO SELECT NODES e After the nodes have been chosen VPG translates them to their new location Selecting again will repeat the translation Clicks EXIT to return to step 1 5 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e After the nodes have been chosen VPG translates them to their new location Selecting again will repeat the translation 6 After selecting nodes and clicks DONE VPG prompts gt SELECT REFERENCE LOCATION 7 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT TARGET LOCATION e Select a target node then the nodes selected in step 5 are transformed 6 94 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR S gt 6 4 18 ON OFF UNREF NODES Description This function toggles unreferenced nodes ON OFF for viewing purposes 6 4 19 CIRCLE CENTER Description This function creates a node at the center of three nodes
184. ESSOR Warpage Taper Aspect Ratio Interior Angles Jacobian The user may specify the criteria that will be used to evaluate the model and will subsequently be used to attempt to improve the mesh quality The ENHANCE MESH function uses an iterative approach to satisfy as many of the mesh quality parameters as possible The convergence is controlled by the TOLERANCE value and the number of iterations used to attempt to improve the mesh quality is the ITERATIONS parameter When the ENHANCE MESH function is executed VPG will display a number at each element centroid identifying the parameter s that have failed for that element For instance a value of 1 2 4 displayed at the element would indicate that the element has failed the warpage taper and interior angle criteria By selecting the FIXED BOUNDARY option the outer boundaries of the model will not be modified during the mesh repair operations Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SEARCHING FEATURE LINES CHECK AND REPAIR SELECT MESH SET DYNAMIC REPAIR EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu Enter CHECK AND REPAIR 2 The MESH QUALITY PARAMETERS window appears 6 110 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BESH QUALITY PARABETERS Co 1 Max Size gt 1 Min Size 5 p 10 00 0 77 _ 4 Aspect Ratio 110 00 Broo ren gt 2 Warpage lt gt 3 Taper E 5 Jacobian o 60 _ 6 Triangle Max Interior Angle 455 9p _
185. E_VECTOR DEFINE_CURVE gt SPC SPC INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY NODAL FORCE NODAL FORCE SHELL PRESSURE SHELL PRESSURE Delete all other cards that can t be converted NASTRAN LOCAL COORDINATE LOCAL COORDINATE LOCAL COORDINATE LOAD CURVE 12 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO NASTRAN 12 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 4 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR JOINT RBE2 MASS CONM2 QUAD SHELL RBODY RBE2 RIVET RBAR RLINK RBE2 SHELL SHELL SHEL16 SOLID SOLID SOLID SPRING CELAS1 The third node is converted into an LCS TRUSS CROD XELEM RBE2 12 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY Delete TYPEO VOID TYPE5 RIVET TYPE28 NSTRAND property RADIOSS V4 4 1 SHELL 2 TRUSS 3 BEAM 4 SPRING 6 ORTHOTROPIC SOLID 8 GENERAL SPRING 9 ORTHOTROPIC SHELL 10 COMP SHELL 11 COMP SHELL 12 3 NODES SPRING 13 BEAM TYPE SPRING gt C 25 NASTRAN PSHELL eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 14 GENERAL SOLID 32 PRETENSIONNER SPRING 33 JOINT TYPE SPRING 35 AIRBAG STITCH SPRING 36 PREDIT SPRING PSOLID PELAS PELAS PELAS PELAS 12 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 12 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION VPG deletes PRESSURE LOAD RADIOSS V4 4 BCS CLOAD INITIAL VELOCITY 12 5 OTHERS gt NASTRAN SPC NODE FORCE INITIAL VELOCITY VPG deletes all other cards that can t be converted RADIOSS V4 4 FUNCTION FRAME gt NASTRAN LOAD CURVE LOCAL COORDINATE 13 CONVER
186. G displays the CURVE DEFINITION CARD allowing the user to define the load curve gt ENTER LOAD CURVE NUMBER xxxx OR 1 TO EXIT gt ENTER CURVE NAME UP TO 8 CHARACTERS e VPG recommends using the extension Icr for this command 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT XXXX OR END e Where XXXX is the point number and the input format is TIME VALUE d VPG displays the curve operations 10 35 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY CURVES CURVE OPERATIONS CLEAR SCREEN DELETE HARDCOPY OPTIONS QUERY RANGE SAVE EXIT Figure 10 4 8 2 Curves Operations Menu DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE 2 EXIT deletes the selected load curves from the database ERASE UNREF CURVE Description This function will delete all functions that have not been used in model LIST Description This function lists the available load curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST MODIFY Description This function allows the user to quickly modify points on a defined curve Usage 1 VPG lists the curves in the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and prompts gt SELECT CURVE FROM CURVE LIST 2 After selecting the curve the CURVE DEFINITION CARD appears allowing the user to edit the curve data READ CURVE Description This function imports existing curve data into the VPG database Usage 1 VPG disp
187. G3 4 Chapter 4 Main Menu Chapter Chapter 4 Main Menu This is the first menu bar the user encounters when beginning a session with VPG The initial options unfold into an additional series of submenus These submenus are documented in the following sections File Parts Pre Road Suspension Tire Safety ALE FSI DTM HEEDS Analysis Fatigue Post Utilities View Macro Help Menus are selected by mouse pick and contain all eta VPG functions Each of these menus may be accessed through the Function Keys 4 1 FILE The FILE menu allows for the import and export of data into and out of the eta VPG database This data may be in the form of finite element data CAD files or a combination of the two The FILE menu also allows users to SAVE databases It is important to Know that eta VPG does not automatically save the user s data The user must execute the SAVE command to write the database changes to the file The FILE menu provides functions for RESTART IMPORT and EXPORT functions 4 2 PARTS Models constructed in eta VPG are organized into PARTS These Parts may contain lines surfaces and or elements Parts may contain only one type of entity or may contain any combination of entity tyoes Parts may be created from the PART menu All data that is created in eta VPG such as elements lines or surfaces is created in the CURRENT PART The current part may be selected or changed from the PART menu Once selected all data created is placed in
188. IC_ PLASTIC 38 MAT_BLATZ KO_FOAM 39 MAT_FLD TRANSVERSELY_ ANISOTROPIC 40 MAT_NONLINEAR_ORTHOTROPIC 41 MAT_USER_DEFINED MATERIAL MODELS 51 MAT_BAMMAN 52 MAT_BAMMAN _ DAMAGE 53 MAT_CLOSED CELL FOAM 54 MAT_ENHANCED_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 58 MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SHELL_MODEL 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_FAILURE_SOLID_ MODEL 60 MAT_ELASTIC_WITH_VISCOSITY 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_ VISCOELASTIC 62 MAT_ VISCOUS FOAM 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_ FOAM 64 MAT_RATE_ SENSITIVE _POWERLAW 65 MAT_MODIFIED_ ZERILLI_ ARMSTRONG 66 MAT_ LINEAR ELASTIC DISCRETE BEAM 67 MAT_NONLINEAR ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 68 MAT NONLINEAR PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 69 MAT_SID_ DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 70 MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_ DAMPER 71 MAT_CABLE DISCRETE BEAM 72 MAT_ CONCRETE DAMAGE 73 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS FOAM 74 MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_ DISCRETE BEAM 75 MAT_BILKHU DUBOIS _ FOAM 76 MAT_GENERAL_ VISCOELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 34 VISCOELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 6 HYDRODYNAMIC_VISCOUS 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 3 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRODYNAMIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 4 JOHNSON_COOK 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC
189. ID_BODY_ONE_WAY_TO_RIGID_BODY CONTACT_RIGID_BODY_TWO_WAY_TO_RIGID_BODY CONTACT_SINGLE_EDGE CONTACT_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY CONTACT_SLIDING_ONLY_PENALTY CONTACT_SPOTWELD CONTACT _SPOTWELD_WITH_TORSION CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_THERMAL CONTACT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIEBREAK_NODES_ONLY CONTACT_TIEBREAK_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_NODES_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_ NODES TO SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_ OFFSET CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_BEAM_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SHELL_EDGE_TO_SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_OFFSET CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_OFFSET TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_CONSTRAINED_OFFSET CONTACT_TIED_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_FAILURE RIGIDWALL 9 6 OTHERS TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID RWALL Delete all other cards that ca
190. IELD DOUBLE FIELD FREE FORMAT EXIT SINGLE FIELD fixed format columns of eight DOUBLE FIELD double precision OUTPUT OPTION e Displays a submenu with output options PRINT PUNCH ALL EXIT PARAM CARDS e Displays the parameter modify window see figure below WRITE FILE EXIT 5 12 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager PARABETER HODIFY ITEMS AUTOSPC COUPMASS EST GRDPNT NEWSEQ POST SUPER USETPRT WTMASS Cancel SOLVER OPTION e Prompts user to select NASTRAN solver SELECT SOLVER OPTION MSC NASTRAN NE NASTRAN EXIT 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 3 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e NO will output all elements existing in the database 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER ANALYSIS TITLE e Any alphanumeric input up to 72 characters may be entered as the title of the NASTRAN bulk data file 5 8 7 WRITE PAMCRASH FILE This function allows the user to output a PAMCRASH pc data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 5 13 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 Fi
191. IME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT FILE NAME This function prints the file name at the lower left corner of the picture PRINT ETA LOGO This function prints eta VPG at the lower right corner of the picture PRINT GRAPHIC DESCRIPTION If the function is toggled on the field below the toggle switch is enabled to use User can enter a string of characters to describe the current image to be printed on the print out 9 7 5 5 NUMBER OF COPIES Description This function allows the user to print multiple copies to the printer It has no effect on the PRINT TO FILE option 9 7 5 6 PRINT Description This function will send the model to a selected printer or prompt the user to enter a file name to save the file 9 7 5 7 CANCEL Description This function allows user to exit the function and reject any selections made 9 7 6 PRINT TO FILE 9 18 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function prints the result to a file 9 7 7 QUIT ALT Q Description Selection of this option ends the current eta Post session and returns back to eta VPG pre processing environment If the user is executing eta Post from a stand alone mode this option terminates the eta Post software 9 19 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 8 EDIT MENU The functions in the Edit menu allow the user to modify the setting of the model display Figure 9 13 shows the drop down list of t
192. ION SPR PRINT SLAVE IN FORCE FILE q q 9 q q q m MPR PRINT MASTER IN FORCE FILE Previous Cancel e Unnecessary data fields are in gray and unselectable e Default Slave and Master segment type is Segment Set 0 The user needs to define the segment type before defining the Slave and Master Set ID e If the Segment Type is modified the corresponding Segment Set ID needs to be redefined 6 13 3 DELETE Description This function deletes previously defined interfaces 6 176 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE VPG displays the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST with the options gt SELECT ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT Cursor pick marks the selected interfaces with an asterisk Exiting the CONTACT CARD LIST will delete all asterisked interfaces 6 13 4 MODIFY Description This function allows the user to redefine interface properties Upon selection of the MODIFY command the CONTACT CARD LIST is displayed with a list of the interfaces An interface is selected by cursor pick and its definition card is then displayed for the user to modify 6 13 5 LIST Description This function lists the defined interfaces in the CONTACT CARD LIST 6 13 6 RENUMBER Description This function renumbers the ID for a selected contact or for all contacts Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ON
193. IRROR MODIFY LINE MESH RENUMBER REVERSE NORMAL SPLIT SURFACE MESH AUTO REPAIR 2 LINE MESH 3 LINE MESH 4 LINE MESH SOLID MESH TRANSFORM COMPLETE MESH MIDDLE LAYER ELEMENT ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF MESH TO SURFACE AUTO REMESH SEPARATE ELEMENT SPECIAL ELEMENT KEYYYORL ADD WASHER oMOTH LOCAL REMESH VIEW ExlT VPG supports a wide range of element types for LS DYNA and NASTRAN refer to Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A Programs 6 37 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 1 COARSE ELEMENT Description This function coarsens 2 CQUAD4 elements or 2 TRIA elements or a combination of a TRIA and a CQUAD4 into one element Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select 2 3 or 4 elements 2 Once desired elements have been selected e DONE coarsens the selected elements and prompts for more e ABORT or EXIT will exit this function The larger elements were created from groupings of four smaller elements 6 3 2 CHANGE ID Description This function allows the user to change an existing element number Parts do not need to be ON or CURRENT Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select elements gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NEW ELEMENT NUMBER 2 Once the user selects a desired element VPG prompts the user to enter the new element number gt ENTER NEW EL NO FOR xxxx OR CR TO IGNORE e xXxxx s the original element number 3 Ifthe user enters a number that already exists the prompt will read gt ELEMENT NUM
194. ISC 42 OGDEN 42 OGDEN 10 LAW10 24 CONC 1 ELAST 22 DAMA 33 FOAM_PLAS 14 COMPSO 1 ELAST 1 ELAST 2 PLAS_JOHNS 1 ELAST 1 ELAST eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 96 MAT_BRITTLE_DAMAGE 24 CONC 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_ JOHNSON COOK 2 PLAS JOHNS 100 MAT_SPOTWELD 1 ELAST 103 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_ VISCOPLASTIC 33 FOAM_ PLAS 104 MAT_DAMAGE_1 22 DAMA 105 MAT_DAMAGE_ 2 22 DAMA 116 MAT_COMPOSITE_LAYUP 14 COMPSO 117 MAT_COMPOSITE_MATRIX 1 ELAST 118 MAT_COMPOSITE_DIRECT 1 ELAST 123 MAT_MODIFIED_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 124 MAT PLASTICITY COMPRESSION TENSION 126 MAT_MODIFIED HONEYCOMB 36 PLAS_TAB 2 PLAS_JOHNS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 127 MAT_ARRUDA BOYCE_RUBBER 42 OGDEN 128 MAT_HEART_TISSUE 1 ELAST 129 MAT LUNG TISSUE 1 ELAST 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC 19 FABRI OTHER MATERIAL TYPE 1 ELAST 9 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 RADIOSS V4 4 BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION displacement IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT gt gt BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION velocity IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION acceleration IMPOSED ACCELERATION BOUNDARY_SPC BCS CONSTRAINED_LINEAR MPC INITIAL_ VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD NODE CLOAD Deleted when DOF is 4 or 8 LOAD_SEGMENT PLOAD LOAD_SHELL PLOAD 9 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL VPG deletes CONTACT ENTITY CONTACT_INTERIOR CONTACT_1D CONTACT _2D_ OPTIONS CONTACT GEBOD OPTION CONTACT RIGID SURFACE CONTACT AUTO MOVE CONTACT COUPLING C 21 DYNA V970 CONTACT_AI
195. ISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 After entering file name VPG prompts gt SELECT UNIT CURRENTLY USED IN DATABASE 2 MM CM IN 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the elements displayed on the screen e N will output all elements existing in the database 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE 5 8 6 WRITE NASTRAN This function allows the user to output the current model data to an external file into NASTRAN format The user may output either the complete model data or partial model data For detailed descriptions of these options users should refer to NASTRAN software documentation NASTRAN FILE CONTROL ANALYSIS TYPE FORMAT OPTION OUTPUT OPTION PARAM CARDS SOLVER OPTION EXIT Detailed description 1 VPG Prompts 5 11 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager gt ENTER CONTROLS OPTION ANALYSIS TYPE e Displays a submenu with NASTRAN analysis types HASTRAN AHALTSIS TYPE 101 STATICS 103 NORMAL MODES 105 BUCKLING 106 NON LINEAR STATICS 10 7 DIRECT COMPLEX EIGENVALUES 108 DIRECT FREQUENCY RESPONSE 109 DIRECT TRANSIENT RESPONSE 110 MODAL COMPLEX EIGENVALUES 111 MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE 112 M0ODAL TRANSIENT RESPONSE 129 NON LINEAR TRANSIENT RESPONSE 153 STEADY STATE HEAT TRANSFER 159 TRANSIENT HEAT TRANSFER EXIT FORMAT OPTION e Displays a submenu with file format options SINGLE F
196. IT SURFACE BOUNDARY e Selects the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY The surface between the outer boundary and the inner boundary will be retained during the trim operation The inner boundary can be a line segment open spline closed spline or circle NO INNER BOUNDARY e The surface outside of the outer boundary will be trimmed CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e Deselects the curve selected for the trim operation 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface e NO generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface 5 The user is returned to step 2 of TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE REJECT LAST POINT Description This function deselects points when defining a trim line TRIM SURFACE DONE CLOSED Description This function defines a closed curve on a selected surface After determining the surface type of curve and points this function connects the points closing the curve with the first and last points selected linked 6 2 22 UNTRIM SURFACE Description This function removes all holes on the selected surface Once th
197. IVE CONTOUR RANGE Description This function will toggle on off active contour range 9 10 11 OVERALL CONTOUR RANGE Description This function will toggle on off overall contour range 9 10 12 DEFINE ROTATE CENTER Description This function will toggle on off rotate center 9 10 13 DISPLAY GRAPH ON SCREEN toggle Description Graphs will directly be shown in display window without creating a new window when this option is on 9 10 14 APPLY VPG LAYOUT Description This function will toggle on off initial status of eta post for VPG or DYNAFORM 9 45 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 10 15 APPLY SECOND RENDER Description This function will toggle on off second render 9 10 16 APPLY LOCAL LIGHT Description This function will toggle on off local light 9 10 17 APPLY MOUSE TRACKING Description This function will toggle on off mouse tracking 9 10 18 APPLY MODEL CONFIGURATION Description Configurations will be written into configure file and set as default parameters when start eta post next time if this option is on 9 46 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 11 POSTPROCESS The functions in the POSTPROCESS menu allow the user to graphically display and manipulate analysis results There are 4 functions shown in the post processing tool bar as shown in Figure 9 48 Figure 9 48 Post process functional icons Once a function in the tool bar is selected the POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW appea
198. LECT OPTION CHECK PART CHECK ASSEMBLY EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e CHECK PART or CHECK ASSEMBLY prompts the following 2 VPG prompts gt xxxx PARTS UNCONNECTED gt UNCONNECTED PARTS TURN ON gt CONNECTED PARTS TURN OFF The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 23 NORMAL ALIGNMENT Description This function allows the user to check normal alignment Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE TYPE OF ELEMENTS RIGID LINK SPRING ELEMENT EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the model checker menu e RIGID LINK or SPRING ELEMENT prompts the following 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER TOLERANCE ANGLE DEFAULT IS 8 0 DEGREES e Any real number is a valid entry e If there are no failed elements VPG prompts gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e lf there are failed elements VPG prompts gt XXXXx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt ADJUST THE NORMAL FOR RIGID LINK SPRING ELEMENTS AUTOMATICALLY Y N YES NO e If NO is selected VPG prompts gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES NO 6 5 24 ENHANCE MESH Description The ENHANCE MESH function allows the user to correct modeling errors by evaluating and repairing several quality parameters simultaneously The ENHANCE MESH function may be applied to complete models parts or selected elements The mesh quality parameters that can be repaired automatically using ENHANCE MESH are e Element size 6 109 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROC
199. LIST 6 11 9 MATERIAL COLOR ON OFF Description This function toggles the display of parts between the material and part color 6 11 10 ON OFF Description This function toggles the selected material on or off Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select material gt SELECT MATERIAL e The user selects a material by picking an element C or material name M of a material 2 The selected material and parts are turned on off 6 11 11 RENUMBER ID Description This function renumbers the material ID for the selected material or all materials Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT 2 Ifthe user enters AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST MATERIAL ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 3 Ifthe user selects ONE BY ONE VPG prompts for a new ID for each material The following prompt will be repeated for each material in the database gt ENTER MID number FOR MAT name OR E TO EXIT If the user enters nothing VPG defaults to the original values 4 Ifthe user enters SELECT ONE VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEM C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATERIAL e After the user selects the material VPG prompts for a new ID gt MATERIAL name IS SELECTED gt ENTER MID number FOR MATERIAL name 6 166 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 167 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 12 ELEMENT PROPERTY The functions in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are design
200. LOR gt PICK AN ELEM OR PART NAME OF A PART e The user selects a part as follows A By placing the cursor on a displayed part element and pressing the left mouse button B VPG displays the part list from which the user may select any part 2 Once the user selects a part VPG prompts gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT e VPG displays the color bar on the right edge of the screen The user may select a desired color via the mouse 3 EXIT terminates this command COLOR BAR Description Once the user executes this command VPG displays the color bar and the assigned colors and numbers on the right edge of the screen VPG removes the color bar when the user activates the REDRAW or CLEAR command 10 1 2 MAGNIFY WINDOW Description This function magnifies an object in the display area Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER MAGNIFICATION e The user may enter any positive number as the magnification factor Ifthe number is greater than 1 it will cause the size of the object in the display area to be enlarged If the number is less than 1 it will cause the size of the object in the display area to be reduced e g an entry of 5 will enlarge the picture whereas an entry of 5 will reduce the picture 10 1 3 REPEAT Description This function is used in conjunction with the SCREEN AXES ROTATION and the VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION commands to repeat the degree of rotation and to replot the geometry of apart The user may repeat this comman
201. MIRRORED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N A YES NO e YES will place all selected elements into their source part e NO will place all selected elements into the CURRENT PART 6 3 11 MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any displayed elements The displayed elements that are to be modified DO NOT need to be in the CURRENT part VPG will automatically identify the element type of the selected element and prompt the user to recreate it Details are covered in CREATE ELEMENTS earlier in this section In LS DYNA mode MODIFY allows the user to edit element attributes i e eid pid nid if the ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF function in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu is on For further description see the command ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF in this section Note For one dimensional elements beams bars etc VPG displays the selected beam s property ID and allows the user to modify it and the beam s connectivity Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option 2 gt 3 6 60 MODIFY ELEMENT GEOMETRY TYPE EXIT If GEOMETRY is selected go to step 2 if TYPE is selected go to step 3 If GEOMETRY is selected VPG then prompts PICK ELEMENT TO MODIFY select an element VPG then guide user to select nodes to regenerate element If TYPE is selected user has following options to change element type PLOTEL TO BEAM change selected PLOTEL element to beam element ACM3 TO MAT 100 SP
202. MODIFY Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and the CURVE DEFINITION CARD once a curve has been selected READ CURVE e Displays the VPG File Dialog window and allows the user to read in a previously saved curve cur file RENUMBER e Renumber the selected load curve or all load curves SHOW CURVE e Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST with all defined curves By selecting a listed curve and exiting the list the curve will be displayed DEFINE DEATH TIME Description This function is to dynamically define death time for BOUNDARY PRESCRIBED MOTION based on the location of nodes or rigid bodies Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an DEATH TIME card DELETE e This function deletes already created DEATH TIME cards LIST e This function lists already created DEATH TIME cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created DEATH TIME cards DEFINE FRICTION Description This function is to define coefficients between parts for use in the contact options Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an FRICTION card DELETE e This function deletes already created FRICTION cards LIST e This function lists already created FRICTION cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created FRICTION cards 6 193 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY Description This function is to define a list of hexahedral solid elements cl
203. MPOSITE_DAMAGE 57 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_FOAM 58 MAT_LAMINATED_ COMPOSITE FABRIC 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_ FAILURE SHELL MODEL 59 MAT_COMPOSITE_ FAILURE SOLID MODEL 60 MAT_ELASTIC_WITH_ VISCOSITY 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_ VISCOELASTIC 62 MAT VISCOUS FOAM 63 MAT_CRUSHABLE_FOAM 2 PLAS JOHNS 33 FOAM_PLAS 2 PLAS JOHNS 14 COMPSO 1 ELAST 2 PLAS JOHNS 2 PLAS JOHNS 33 FOAM _ PLAS 14 COMPSO 33 FOAM _ PLAS 14 COMPSO 14 COMPSO 14 COMPSO 1 ELAST 34 BOLTZMAN 33 FOAM_ PLAS 10 LAW10 64 MAT_RATE_SENSITIVE_POWERLAW_PLASTICITY 65 MAT_MODIFIED_ZERILLIARMSTRONG 66 MAT_LINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM 2 PLAS_JOHNS 2 PLAS_JOHNS 1 ELAST 67 MAT_NONLINEAR ELASTIC DISCRETE BEAM 1 ELAST 68 MAT_NONLINEAR PLASTIC DISCRETE BEAM 2 PLAS JOHNS 69 MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 1 ELAST 70 MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM 71 MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM 72 MAT_CONCRETE_DAMAGE 73 MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS FOAM 74 MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM 75 MAT_BILKHU DUBOIS_FOAM 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 77 MAT_HYPERELASTIC_ RUBBER 77 MAT_OGDEN_ RUBBER 78 MAT_SOIL_CONCRETE 79 MAT_HYSTERETIC SOIL 80 MAT_RAMBERG_OSGOOD 81 MAT_PLASTICITY_ WITH DAMAGE 83 MAT_FU_CHANG FOAM 86 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ VISCOELASTIC 87 MAT CELLULAR RUBBER 88 MAT_MTS 89 MAT_PLASTICITY_ POLYMER 90 MAT_ACOUSTIC 94 MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING DISCRETE BEAM 1 ELAST 1 ELAST 24 CONC 33 FOAM_PLAS 1 ELAST 33 FOAM_PLAS 35 FOAM_V
204. N COOK 100 MAT_SPOTWELD 103 MAT_ ANISOTROPIC VISCOPLASTIC 104 MAT_DAMAGE_1 105 MAT_DAMAGE_2 116 MAT_COMPOSITE_LAYUP 117 MAT_COMPOSITE_MATRIX 118 MAT_COMPOSITE_DIRECT 24 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 1 ELASTIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 22 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 123 MAT_MODIFIED_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 124 MAT_PLASTICITY_COMPRESSION_TENSION 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 126 MAT_MODIFIED HONEYCOMB 127 MAT_ARRUDA BOYCE RUBBER 128 MAT_HEART_TISSUE 129 MAT_LUNG_TISSUE 130 MAT_SPECIAL_ORTHOTROPIC OTHER MATERIAL 3 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE BOUNDARY_SPC_SET INITIAL_ VELOCITY INITIAL_ VELOCITY_NODE INITIAL_VELOCITY_ GENERATION LOAD _NODE_POINT Deleted when DOF is equal to 4 or 8 LOAD_NODE_SET Deleted when DOF is equal to 4 or 8 LOAD_SEGMENT LOAD_SEGMENT_SET LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT LOAD_SHELL_ SET BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION 3 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL C 8 2 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 42 HYPERELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 19 ELASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 1 ELASTIC RADIOSS V4 1 SPC SPC INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY CONCENTRATED LOAD CONCENTRATED LOAD PRESSURE LOAD PRESSURE LOAD PRESSURE LOAD PRESSURE LOAD IMPOSED VELOCITY_NODE velocity IMPOSED VELOCITY_RIGID velocity IMPOSED
205. N IT NOW Description this function enables the user to output the analysis file and submit it to dyna immediately for simulation 7 9 2 6 EXPORT DYNA FILE Description this function exports the analysis file but do not run it now 7 9 3 VIBRATION TEST This Vibration Test can quickly create simulation models for vibration tests in accordance with the process guidance For a Vibration Test process Users define a vibration base with a certain diameter A frequency domain PSD curve is created or read in VPG converts it to a time domain motional curve And a boundary motion is applied to the test Vibration base as specified such as DOF VAD Typically a displacement motion along z axle is applied to the base VIBRATION TEST BOUNDARY CONDITIONS DEFINE VIBRATION ANALY sls CONTROL TIME HISTORY OPTION RUN IT Mwy EXPORT ODYNA FILE A detailed description is given in the following sections 7 91 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 9 3 1 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Description This function helps to define SPCs for parts if needed SELECTION OPTION CREATE DECETE INCLUDE NODES IN SET LIST SET MODIFY REMOVE NODES IN SET SHO e CREATE create SPC for selected nodes DELETE delete SPC for selected node or node set INCLUDE NODES IN SET add nodes into the selected SPC node set the new added nodes have the same SPC with nodes in the selected node set LIST SET show node set of SPC in a list MODIFY modify the SPC for node
206. NA nonlinear codes CMOLD MOLDFLOW BEAM ELEMENT CBAR BEAM PART ELEMENT RIGID LINK RBE2 NODAL RIGID BODY CHANNEL PLOTEL ELEMENT THICK SHELL HOT RUNNER PLATE ELEMENT PLATE COLD RUNNER SOLID ELEMENT SOLID CONNECTOR SPRING CELAS2 SPRING DAMPER SPRING CELAS1 MASS RIGID BAR RBAR SEATBELT MASS CONM2 SPOTWELD BEAM JOINT TRUSS ELEMENT INERTIA HOLLOW TUBE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL RIGID BODY RBE3 SPOTWELD CREATE BEAM ELEMENT CBAR NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the BEAM ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CBAR OFFSET VALUE 6 40 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once offset value has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBAR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 3 Once the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR CBAR ORIENTATION NODE POINT VECTOR Up to three values may be entered to define a vector in the bar s local XY plane The local Y axis of the bar will be plotted at the first node of the bar element as it is generated 4 If user enters VECTOR then VPG prompts gt ENTER CBAR VECTOR e t e 0 0 1 CREATE RIGID LINK RBE2 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID LINK subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts
207. NCED NODE SETS Y N If no unreferenced node sets are found VPG prompts gt NO UNREF NODE SETS FOUND and returns to the node set menu 6 6 7 INCLUDE Description This function adds additional elements nodes parts to the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FOR type SET XXXX gt SELECT element node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the new additions with their set number and prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS NODES PARTS IN SET XXXX 6 6 8 LIST Description This function displays a list of the defined sets in the model database 6 6 9 REMOVE Description This function removes elements nodes parts from the current set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT element node part FROM type SET XXXX gt SELECT element node part 2 Once the elements nodes parts have been selected and the user has exited the REMOVE submenu VPG removes the elements nodes part from their set 6 6 10 RENUMBER SET Description This function allows the user to renumber any of the defined sets This may be performed on a single set or an all sets contained in the database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECTED OPTIONS AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT 2 If entering AUTOMATIC ALL VPG prompts gt ENTER FIRST type ID amp INC TYPE 0 TO EXIT 6 117 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 If entering ONE BY ONE
208. NG DIRECTION RADIAL TORSIONAL CONICAL BUSHO1 STIFFNESS 7600 00 7500000 61000000 BUSHO2 STIFFNESS 380000 760000 7500000 61000000 BUSHO3 STIFFNESS 410000 1200000 14000000 170000000 BUSHO4 STIFFNESS 380000 580000 18000000 130000000 BUSHO5 STIFFNESS 40000 90000 30000000 17000000 BUSHO6 STIFFNESS 130000 1000000 230000 11000000 BUSHO7 STIFFNESS 2000 00 3300 00 230000 00 250000 00 BUSHO8 STIFFNESS 14000 00 14000 00 1000 00 1000 00 BUSHO9 STIFFNESS 14000 00 14000 00 1000 00 1000 00 SPRING LOAD CURVE ID JOUNCE LOAD CURVE ID REBOUN LOAD CURVE ID OK Previous Cancel 5 VPG displays the following pop up window with spring damper rebound initial offset data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY INITIAL OFFSET gt SELECT AN ITEM TO EDIT e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT INITIAL OFFSET Y N e YES forwards the user to the next suspension table step 6 7 13 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e NOreturns the user to the BUSHING STIFFNESS table SPRING INITIAL OFFSET SPRING DIRECTION AXIAL INITIAL OFFSET OF SPRING 0 000000E 000 INITIAL OFFSET OF JOUNCE 0 000000 E 000 INITIAL OFFSET OF REBOUN 0 000000 E 000 OK Previous Cancel 6 VPG displays the following pop up window with damping coefficient data and VPG prompts gt MODIFY DAMPING COEFFICIENT DATA gt SEL
209. NG W FEATURE LINE Gouraud shading is the default setting for VPG Flat Shading W Edge displays the element outline in a shaded display Flat Shading with feature line displays feature line in a shaded display user can adjust width or color for edge and feature line TRANSPARENCY FACTOR Description This function sets a degree of transparency for the shading option Factors closer to 0 0 zero increase opacity while factors closer to 1 0 one decrease opacity FILL HIDE METHOD Description VPG provides two methods of FILLHIDE a hidden surface plot for all of the displayed elements STENCIL BUFFER and POLYGON OFFSET Various graphics cards may provide an improved display appearance by using either method It is known that on SGI IRIX workstations specifying the STENCIL BUFFER option may result in improved graphic display performance AUTOMATIC DELETE NODES WHEN DELETING ELEMENTS toggle Description This option controls when deleting elements whether to prompt user delete nodes making up those elements The default option is on VPG will not prompt user whether to delete nodes relative nodes will be deleted directly 10 4 13 SUMMARY REPORT Description This function will export summary of database as report 10 42 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 4 14 CLEAN MODEL Description This function helps to remove empty part and set unreferenced node section material define cards and sets All these functions are integrat
210. NS The functions in the NODE OPTIONS menu relate to the two types of nodes that are defined in the VPG program The first type is the referenced node connected to elements The second type the unreferenced node not connected to any element is represented with an asterisk Useful applications in this section include moving nodes node to node or node to point checking for and merging common or coincident nodes and transforming or rotating nodes MODE OPTIONS ALIGN NODES MODE BE TWEEN PT MNODE CHECK DUPLICATE ID LONCIDENT CHECK CoP CREATE DELETE UNREF NODES DISTANCE IDENTIFY NODESPOINT LABEL MOVE NODE PART CONNEC TION PROJECT RENUMBER NODES SALE TRANSFORM OM OFF UNREF NODES CIRCLE CENTER VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following section 6 4 1 ALIGN NODES Description This function allows users to align the selected nodes along the selected lines Nodes that have no projection to the selected line can also be aligned due to the temporary extent line of the selected line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT A LINE TO ALIGN NODES 2 After selecting a line VPG prompts 6 81 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT NODES TO ALIGN e The selected nodes will be aligned along the selected line 6 4 2 NODES BETWEEN PT NODE Description This command generates nodes that are spaced equally between two existing selected nodes or points The new nodes are disp
211. NTER CRITERIA 5 DEG e Any real number is a valid entry e If the warpage of the elements is less than the entered criteria then gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK The user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu If the warpage of the elements is greater than the entered criteria then gt ELEMENTS xxxx FAILED CHECK gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK e Step 3 is not applicable for solid elements Skip to step 4 to enter the definition of the new part 2 The user may replace warped elements gt REPLACE WARPED QUADS WITH TRI ELEMENTS Y N YES NO see step 4 e YES will replace any warped quadrilateral elements with triangular elements 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE e At this point the user may pick individual elements for degree of warpage e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu An example of warped l elements 4 If some ofthe elements fail and NO is entered VPG prompts the user to place them into a new part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The plates and or solids will be added to this part and the part will become Current NO gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR WARPAGE At this point the user may pick individual elements for degree of warpage e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu The warped solids quadrilateral elements or newly created triangular elements will remain in their original parts 6
212. NTER THE CRITERION FOR JACOBIAN CHECK DEFAULT 0 7 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N 3 If YES VPG prompts the user to define a new part 4 If NO VPG prompts the user to check individual elements for Jacobian value via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit the function 6 5 8 CHECK NORMAL Description This function draws a white boundary line between the opposing normals of the displayed plate elements See the following figure 6 100 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 CHECK PLATE NORMAL e VPG will highlight the boundary between the elements that have opposing normal orientations Afterwards VPG echoes the message gt PLATE NORMAL CHECK COMPLETED e The boundary will highlight when three or more plate elements connect at a common edge e PLATE NORMAL in the SETUP MENU will display the element normals 6 5 9 CHECK RIGID LINK Description This function checks the connectivity and length of all rigid elements RBE2 and RBAR Rigid bodies that exceed the length criteria of the user or that are loose zero length double dependent cyclic or redundant are highlighted Usage 1 VPG prompts gt FIND RIGID LINKS LONGER THAN CERTAIN LENGTH Y N YES gt ENTER LENGTH CRITERIA e Any real number greater than zero NO 2 The user has the option to place failed elements into new parts If the user opts to place the failed elements into a new par
213. NTROL TIME HISTORY OPTION RUN IT NOW BATCH OUTPUT TOOLKIT EXIT A detailed description is given in the following sections 7 9 1 1 DROP DIRECTION Description VPG module will automatically calculate the center of gravity location for the model when entering this menu The user can adjust the drop direction after entering this menu The model will rotate the view according to the user s definition 7 84 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES DROP DIRECTION CG TO ND1 ND1 TO ND ALONG X AXIS ALONG X AXIS ALONG Y AXIS ALONG Y AXIS ALONG 2 AXIS VECTOR EXIT The default drop direction is along Z axis The executable direction adjustment contains CG TO ND1 the direction from the center of gravity to the selected node e ND1 TO ND2 the direction from node 1 to node 2 ALONG X AXIS along X axis in the current view ALONG X AXIS along X axis in the current view ALONG Y AXIS along Y axis in the current view ALONG Y AXIS along Y axis in the current view ALONG Z AXIS along Z axis in the current view VECTOR along the defined vector direction 7 9 1 2 G AND DROP HEIGHT Descriptions this function allows the user to use the default gravity acceleration of 9810 0004196mm s 2 or arbitrary drop acceleration The three selections for the reference point node of drop height are the center of gravity The Lowest Node and Pick Node After entering the drop height the height to the floor will also be determined a
214. O PT NODE 1 If NODE TO PT NODE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE CONTROL KEYS MODE MERGE OM GFF UNDG LAST EXIT e MERGE ON OFF is an switch option for merging moved node and the target node the default option is on and the moved and target node will be merged e UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position If a coincident node is encountered skip to step 3 and then to step 2 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts for a new location for the nodes gt PICK NEW LOCATION 6 87 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 88 ABORT KEY IN X Y Z NODE POINT REJECT LAST DONE e The user may move to an existing point node by mouse or keyboard entry DONE or REJECT LAST returns the user to step 1 ABORT exits this function and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu 3 If multiple or coincident nodes are found near the cursor VPG prompts gt COINCIDENT NODES FOUND gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NODE e Ifan ELEMENT center is selected by the CURSOR and it is unconnected to the target node VPG prompts gt SELECTED NODE IS NOT CONNECTED TO DUPL NODE gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR NODE e After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 2 MOVE NODE TO MID POINT 1 If NODE TO MID POINT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE NODE UNDO LAST EXIT e UNDO LAST is a valid selection only
215. O567 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PARTO567 0 0 0 0 oos foo 0 0 foo foo 00 BEAMOO0FE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BEaMoo7s 0 0 foo foo oo foo foo 0 0 0 0 BEAMOOSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Beamooss a 0 foo oos foo foo foo foo 0 0 BEAMOOSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pBeamooee 0 0 foo _foo foo oos foo foo 00 BEAMO0SE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BEAMOO91 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Show Export 6 112 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 6 113 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 26 GAP REPAIR Description This function will fill in the gaps between selected elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 After selecting elements and click DONE VPG prompts gt ACCEPT REPAIRING RESUTL YES NO If YES is selected gap between elements will be repaired free nodes will be generated after merging elements If NO is selected nothing is done 6 5 27 TIME STEP Description the 10 smallest timestep table will pop up for user to confirm also the 10 elements have smallest steps will be labeled which is convenient for user to identify which elements have small time step and will give user a reference to define timestep Note This timestep calculation is just based on shell elements and MAT1 MAT3 MAT18 MAT24 MAT26 MAT36 MAT37 MAT39 MAT64 MAT103 MAT11
216. OLID 9 72 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING DASH DOT DASH DOT Usage The default type is SOLID and the user can press the _ button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 3 CURVE MARK Description This function offers an option for the user to change the type of curve mark There are six kinds of curve mark type available ROUND SQUARE UP TRIANGULAR DOWN TRIANGULAR DIAMOND NO MARK Usage The user can press the button on the right of the text box to select a desired type Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 4 CURVE COLOUR Description This function offers an option for the user to change the colour of curve Usage The colour of the current curve is displayed on the button The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 9 74 If don t want to change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else on the screen to cancel the colour select Then click the Apply button to change the setting Figure 9 74The Curve Color Palette 9 12 6 5 BACKGROUND COLOR Description This function offers an option for the user to change the background colour of the curve window The default background colour of the curve window is black and the colour is displaying on
217. ON OFF PART ON OFF SHADE PREVIOUS MENU EXIT Use KEY IN VECTOR to define a vector then move the upper or lower seatbelt to the right place 7 73 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES ff Has ee 5 aae 5 ra it Att AHL J Se a j Os 5 A F HAT aa EGae TT TETA Lit VAN ot wel es titres a Sy eee HTT AS y HAK a PE LES EF ES if SED if PP TRR SSA qel y maps ERA TORORO ee CE E Se E EEE 9 VPG prompts gt PICK A SEATBELT ELEMENT TO START PULL PUSH PULL PUSH ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN AMOUNT ON OFF PART PULL SEATBELT PUSH SEATBELT ON OFF SHADE PREVIOUS MENU EXIT eww ES SSS Ta RIA keepeee Cee wE HH aag Peer Sos LEK P SEEL Ry 7 74 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 DELETE MODEL Description This option allows the user to delete the currently defined crash models Any tool available in the Crash Tool Library may be deleted In the case where a dummy model and barrier model have been created using the same process the DELETE function will delete both the dummy model and the barrier Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE 2 Once the crash model is selected it is highlighted VPG prompts gt DO YOU WANT TO DELETE CRASH MODEL Y N e If YES is selected the model will be deleted 7 75 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 8 ALE FSI MODULE VPG s
218. ON SOLID _ALE SECTION_TSHELL SECTION SEATBELT 3 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY DYNA V970 1 MAT_ELASTIC 1 MAT ELASTIC FLUID 2 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_ELASTIC C 6 3 BEAM 3 BEAM 14 GENERAL SOLID 14 GENERAL SOLID 14 GENERAL SOLID 3 BEAM gt RADIOSS V4 1 1 ELASTIC 1 ELASTIC 14 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C C 7 2 MAT_ANISOTROPIC_ELASTIC 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 4 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ THERMAL 5 MAT_SOIL_AND_ FOAM 6 MAT_VISCOELASTIC 7 MAT_BLATZ KO_ RUBBER 8 MAT_HIGH EXPLOSIVE BURN 9 MAT_NULL 10 MAT_ ELASTIC _PLASTIC_HYDRO 10 2 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO_ SPALL 11 MAT_STEINBERG 11 2 MAT STEINBERG LUND 12 MAT ISOTROPIC ELASTIC PLASTIC 13 MAT ISOTROPIC ELASTIC FAILURE 14 MAT_SOIL_AND_ FOAM FAILURE 15 MAT_JOHNSON_COOK 16 MAT PSEUDO TENSOR 17 MAT_ORIENTED_ CRACK 18 MAT_POWER_LAW_ PLASTICITY 19 MAT_STRAIN_RATE DEPENDENT PLASTICITY 20 MAT RIGID 21 MAT_ORTHOTROPIC_THERMAL 22 MAT_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE 23 MAT_TEMPERATURE_DEPENDENT _ORTHOTROPIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_ PLASTICITY 25 MAT_GEOLOGICAL_CAP_ MODEL 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 27 MAT_MOONEY RIVLIN_ RUBBER 28 MAT RESULTANT PLASTICITY 29 MAT_FORCE_ LIMITED 30 MAT CLOSED FORM SHELL _ PLASTICITY 31 MAT_FRAZER NASH RUBBER MODEL 32 MAT_LAMINATED_ GLASS 33 MAT_BARLAT_ANISOTROPIC_ PLASTICITY 33 2 MAT_BARLAT_YLD96 34 MAT_FABRIC 35 MAT_PLASTIC_GREEN NAGHDI RATE 36 MAT_3 PARAMETER_BARLAT 37 MAT_TRANSVERSELY_ ANISOTROPIC _ELAST
219. ON and CURRENT NO e The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 12 CHECK TAPER Description This function allows the user to check the length to width ratio of elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER THE CRITERION FOR TAPER DEFAULT 0 5 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N e If yes VPG prompts the user to define a new part 3 VPG allows the user to check individual elements for taper value via cursor pick 6 5 13 CHECK VOLUME SKEW Description This function checks the shape of tetrahedral elements with respect to the deviation from a perfect pyramid shape Volume Skew is defined as the percentage of the volume of a tetrahedral element contains versus a sphere containing the 4 nodes of that element Volume Skew Volume of Sphere Volume of Tetrahedron Volume of Sphere Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER VOLUE SKEW CRITERIA 2 VPG prompts gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N e If yes VPG prompts the user to define a new part 6 5 14 CHECK WARPAGE Description This function color fills warpage failure elements of plate or solid The user has the option to split the plate elements into triangular elements All elements that fail may be added to a new part The user may specify warpage criteria for the check function 6 103 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt E
220. OPERATION e Reverses the split direction This option does not apply to group operations 6 3 16 SURFACE MESH Description This function allows the user to automatically mesh surface data VPG automeshes using 2D elements plate elements Supported surface types are covered in Pre Processor Section 2 2 of this manual The user has the option of automeshing by selecting one surface multiple surfaces or all of the displayed surfaces DISPLAYED SURFACES allows the user to automesh all surfaces at once To model one surface at a time default the user selects an individual surface with the cursor and selects DONE Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface mesh methods Surface mesh methods as following TOPOLOGY MESH TRIANGULAR MESH EXIT Enter TOPOLOGY MESH 2 VPG prompts to select surface 3 After selecting surface the Mesh Input Window pops up and allows parameters to be set in the window Click OK to close the window 6 63 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Kesh Input Findor Mesh Definition IGMORE HOLE SIZE pog MERGE BOUNDARY GAF 0 50 ELEMENT SIZE 15 00 F Check Surfaces _ Preview Boundary Skip Marrow Surfaces P Modify Boundary Nodes P Pave Inner Holes P Auto Repair _ In Original Part __ Mesh By Part __ Local Re mesh Variable Mesh __ Ctrl Points Mesh __ Add Washer intersecting Option __ intersecting Mesh INTERSECTIMNG GAP Ja 00 Flange Option lt 4 _ Flange Mesh ROWS OF ELEMENTS h
221. ORCE REMOVE PRESSURE SHOW EXIT LOAD STATIC LOAD CREATE Description This function defines a new load set The load set may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following FORCE PRESSURE FORCE FORCE GRAV MOMENT1 MOMENT2 PLOAD PLOAD1 PLOAD 2 RFORCE SLOAD LOAD EXIT e The user may enter an integer as the load set number If a load set with the entered number exists the user is prompted to enter a different integer e The user is allowed to apply pressure loads to the element centers in the VPG model Distributed element pressure loads are applied normal to the element surface Positive pressure loads are in the same direction as the positive element normal according to the right hand rule Negative pressure loads are in the opposite direction of the positive element normal LOAD STATIC LOAD DELETE Description This function deletes the selected load set Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 147 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE e Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST FORCE Description This function displays the applied forces and lists node numbers and respective loads in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR FORCE ALL NODES All nodes with applied forces will have arrowhe
222. OVE SEATBELTS ABORT UPPER BLOCK LOWER BLOCK REVERSE OPERATION KEY IN VECTOR ON OFF PART PREVIOUS MENU EXIT 5 VPG prompts gt DEFINE AN AXIS TO ROTATE SEATBELTS ABORT UPPER BLOCK LOWER BLOCK REVERSE OPERATION ROTATION ANGLE DEFINE AXIS ON OFF PART PREVIOUS MENU EXIT TTL LL 7 5 1 5 FMVSS225 CHILD RESTRAINTS ANCHORAGE Description This function will create child restraints anchorage in the model 7 64 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER CHILD RESTRAINTS INFORMATION CHILD RESTRAINTS DATA ITEMS FORWARD PULL 1 LATERAL PULL 2 NO OF CHILD SEAT lt 4 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT LEFT SIDE CLAMP ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position 3 VPG prompts gt PICK A NODE TO LOCATE FIRST SEAT RIGHT SIDE CLAMP CHILDSEAT LOADING MECHANISM 7 5 1 6 FMVSS208 KNEE BOLSTER Description This function will create knee impactors and position them in the model in order to conduct a knee bolster analysis Usage 7 65 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER KNEE BOLSTER CRASH INFORMATION ENEE BOLSTER DATA ITEMS mm m DATA KNEE STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 KNEE VELOCITY mm s 6 470000 E 003 BOLSTER VELOCITY mm s I 8 O50000E 003 Cancel
223. PART ON OFF dialog window and exits the function VIRTUAL X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global X axis when the cursor is moved up or down ia VIRTUAL Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down co Ne VIRTUAL Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen X axis is the horizontal axis located at the center of the graphics display window SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen Y axis is the vertical axis located at the center of the graphics display window SCREEN Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down The screen Z axis is the normal direction of the screen located at the center of the graphics display window D FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of Screen X and Screen Y rotation Moving the mouse up down manipulates the Screen X rotation Moving the mouse left right manipulates Screen Y rotation Moving the mouse diagonally combines the rotations of both directions Click the left mouse button to stop the rotation The user may acti
224. PG eta VPG 3 4 7 34 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Note For tire tuning procedures see the eta VPG applications manual sections 1 5 and 2 4 7 35 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 Introduction to VPG Safety The automotive industry is legally required to design vehicles to meet the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS or ECE EEC Homogenous Regulations and or Corporate Industry Standards Various experimental and simulation approaches have been adopted to achieve these requirements The most commonly performed vehicle crashworthiness and occupant safety simulations are somewhat standardized and various groups using different pre post processors have established what are known as best practice procedures ETA s consulting group has been performing simulations on vehicle development programs for over a decade and developed the crash tools and simulation technology to meet customer requirements throughout the process The VPG Safety Module is organized into three 3 components 1 Crash Tool Library consists of all necessary crash tool models dummy models barrier models impactors etc 2 Vehicle Crashworthiness Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards 3 Occupant Safety Processes includes FMVSS ECE EEC and Industry Standards Details of these components and their capabilities are documented in the following sections Notice to Users While the following sections of this manual hav
225. PG prompts SELECT PROPERTY NAME ENTER PART NAME OR EXIT PICK AN ELEM C OR PROPERTY NAME P OF A PROPERTY After the user selects the property VPG prompts for a new ID PROPERTY name IS SELECTED ENTER PRID number FOR PROP name Vv vVV 6 12 17 IMPORT BEAM SECTION Description This function defines a beam section by importing from file or table Usage 1 VPG prompts for the option gt SELECT OPTIONS IMPORT OPTION BY FILE BY TABLE EXIT BY FILE VPG opens a file and imports a beam section e BY TABLE VPG pops a table user defines the table for beam section e EXIT exits this function 6 174 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 13 CONTACT INTERFACE The functions in the CONTACT INTERFACE MENU define and modify contact interface data sliding and stonewall for transient nonlinear analysis codes The functions are organized as follows COPY CREATE DELETE MODIFY UST RENUMBER REVERSE NORMAL SHOW EXIT Once the CONTACT INTERFACE MENU is selected the active ON interfaces are displayed with the active parts The master segments are drawn as interior outlines of the elements where the segments are defined The letter M is labeled in the middle of the master segments Likewise the slave segments are labeled with the letter S The stonewalls are drawn as rectangular shapes and the slave nodes are labeled with small color filled squares The segments slave nodes and stonewalls are plotted
226. PG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE FRONT POLE ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAIL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE ABORT KEY IN VECTOR NODES VECTOR SHELL NORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UNDO LAST 4 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED 7 52 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Figure 10 An Example of a Generated Front Rigid Pole Impact Model 7 4 7 2 SIDE POLE IMPACT Description This function will create a rigid pole at the side of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER SIDE POLE CRASH INFORMATION SIDE POLE DATA ITEMS SSE a DATA POLE STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s j 115972E 004 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE SIDE POLE ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST POLE ABORT KEY IN VECTOR NODES VECTOR SHELL NORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UNDO LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR Manually key in a vector 7 53 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e NODES VECTOR Select
227. PG version 3 2 RADIOSS LS DYNA NASTRAN Conversion August 2007 OVERVIEW The RADIOSS interface was originally released in VPG 2 0 as a complete RADIOSS interface supporting fixed format input files from RADIOSS V2 1 V2 2 V2 3 V3 1 V4 1 and V4 4 and has the ability to write RADIOSS V3 1 V4 1 and V4 4 VPG not only reads RADIOSS files but also allows translation of RADIOSS files to NASTRAN or LS DYNA960 format The capability of this interface has been improved in VPG 3 2 to allow the import export of RADIOSS and translation into LS DYNA version 970 When reading in a RADIOSS file VPG adopts a RADIOSS environment with RADIOSS terminology VPG allows model manipulation of RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions local coordinates loads initial velocities contact and rigid walls To translate a RADIOSS file to another analysis format such as LS DYNA or NASTRAN the user changes the analysis program in the Setup Menu This will translate all RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions etc to the new analysis environment VPG will prompt the user for certain user defined information in the translation The translation of the code requires that certain assumptions be made in the equivalencies of elements properties contacts etc Where no equivalency could be found due to the fact that one code supports or defines an entity that another code does not the closest substitution is made In these cases t
228. PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER AGAINST ODB RIGHT UP CORNER ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the front bumper part as target position The ODB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model TAs VAG Figure 7 An Example of a Generated ECE 94 40 Front ODB Model 7 4 6 2 ECE 33 34 REAR IMPACT Description This function will create and position rigid walls that are used to simulate an ECE 33 34 Rear Impact test Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER REAR IMPACT INFORMATION 7 48 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES REAR INFACT DATA ITEMS RIGID WALL STRUCTURE CLEARANCE RIGID WALL VELOCITY mm s 1 055500E 004 Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000E 000 RIGID WALL MASS ton 1 120000E 000 Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE REAR BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL ABORT CURSOR AT NODE KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position The rear rigid wall and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model ETA VPG Figure 8 An Example of a Generated ECE33 34 Rear Impact Model 7 4 6 3 ECE 95 EURO SIDE IMPACT D
229. PROCESSOR eta VPG s extensive Preprocessing capabilities contain all of the functions necessary for expedient high quality finite element modeling Users can read in data with VPG s CAD interface build their model from scratch read in an existing model or a combination of the approaches CAD INTERFACE eta VPG enables users to read in CAD geometry data from the following CAD systems Catia Version 4 Catia Version 5 Unigraphics version 18 Unigraphics NX to NX5 Proe Parasolid Solidworks Sat STEP IGES Inventor The IGES interface reads files generated from any CAD system Supported IGES entity types include Name O oO O e O Null Entity 0 2 1 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Conic Arc Entity 104 Copious Data Entity Plane Entity Line Entity Point Entity 116 Ruled Surface Entity Surface of Revolution Entity 120 Tabulated Cylinder Entity 122 Boundary Entity 141 Curve on a Parametric Surface Entity 142 Bounded Surface Entity 143 Trimmed Parametric Surface Entity 144 Subfigure Definition Entity 308 Associativity Instance Entity 402 Property Entity 406 Singular Subfigure Instance Entity 408 For the German automotive industry VDA file format is supported Supported VDA entity types include POINT CIRCLE CURVE SURF CONS FACE If CAD data is not available eta VPG has a complete geometry and surface building capability which acts as an integrated CAD data generator This
230. PROPERTY NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 MAT 1 1 ELASTIC 7 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN SPC NODE FORCE SHELL PRESSURE INITIAL VELOCITY 7 5 OTHERS gt RADIOSS V4 1 SPC CONCENTRATED LOAD PRESSURE LOAD INITIAL_ VELOCITY General Comments Delete NODE SET ELEMENT SET NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 1 LOAD CURVE FUNCTION LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM SKEW_MOV RADIOSS 4 4 Conversion to LS DYNA amp NASTRAN 8 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO DYNA 8 1 ELEMENT eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C RADIOSS V4 4 BEAM gt JOINT MASS QUAD RBODY RIVET RLINK SHELL SHEL16 SOLID SPRING TRUSS XELEM 8 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY DYNA V970 BEAM If RADIOSS s JOINT has 4 nodes VPG will convert it into two CONSTRAINED_ NODAL RIGID BODY and one CONSTRAINED_ JOINT CYLINDRICAL Otherwise VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_ NODAL RIGID BODY MASS SHELL If RADIOSS RIGID BODY does not have mass and inertia VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_ BODY Otherwise VPG will convert it into CONSTRAINED_ NODAL_RIGID_ BODY_INERTIA RADIOSS s primary node RBID will be used as DYNA s NODEID in second card of CONSTRAINED_ NODAL_RIGID_ BODY_INERTIA CONSTRAINED SPOTWELD If user need MAT100 spotweld instead Of CONSTRAINED _SPOTWELD user can use function SPOTWELD TO MAT100 SP under ELEMENT OPTION MODIFY TYPE to convert it CONSTRAINED
231. R ABORT ADD TOP SURFACES REMOVE TOP SURFACES TURN OFF OTHER PARTS GROUP BOTTOM SURFACE DONE ADD TOP SURFACES add bottom surfaces to top surfaces REMOVE TOP SURFACES remove top surfaces to original surfaces e TURN OFF OTHER PARTS don t display parts except part including top surfaces e GROUP BOTTOM SURFACES turn to bottom surfaces operation 3 After generating top surface group VPG prompts ABORT ADD BOTTOM SURFACES REMOVE BOTTOM SURFACE TURN OFF OTHER PARTS DONE ADD BOTTOM SURFACES add other surfaces to bottom surfaces REMOVE BOTTOM SURFACES remove bottom surfaces to original surfaces e TURN OFF OTHER PARTS don t display parts except part including bottom surfaces e DONE finish and exit this function 6 2 25 SECTION CUT Description This function creates a cross section which may be saved as a geometric line entity Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system 2 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt ENTER DISTANCE OF SECTION PLANE FROM W 0 3 After entering the distance VPG prompts LINE PLOTEL ELEMENTS ABORT e LINE VPG prompts the user whether to add the line to a new part and enter the line split angle and then the section line is created e PLOTEL ELEMENTS VPG prompts wh
232. R Description The Curve Operation Toolbar that is shown in Figure 9 71 port Attribute Operation Save Figure 9 71 The Curve operation toolbar In the Curve operation toolbar there are six buttons can be used and the detailed functional description is given in the following section Usage e PRINT This function enables the user to print or save the content of the current curve window 9 70 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING e CLIPBOARD This function enables the user to copy the content of the current curve window to the clipboard and can be used for other text edit tool such as MS Word Copy to Clipboard is the standard Windows method of transferring data between a source and a destination Copy to Clipboard is a system service shared by the entire Windows session Using this function the user can copy a graph image directly to other Microsoft programs as a bitmapped image provided that the destination program supports a bitmapped image paste A demonstration as to inserting an image form clipboard to Microsoft Word is illustrated in figure 9 72 39 _g_1 Y force slave _g 1 X force master _ 29 5ca 2 24 16 TENN UH i f 4 I any WY ta Aa V a N 0 Al l f i j i l yi B 18 24 12 24 36 48 60 Time E 4 Figure 9 72 The demonstration on inserting an image form clipboard to MS Word e EXPORT This function enables the user to export and save the current window curves in a file with the CUR
233. RANSPARENCY This option allows the user to make the selected parts in transparent when the SHADE option is turned on Click on the TRANSPARENCY button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen Clicks APPLY and the transparency slider will be active The user may use the transparency slider to adjust the degree of transparency Slide to the left will make the selected parts more transparent The program will show the selected parts transparent when the SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure 9 22 WIREFRAME This option allows the user to display the selected parts in wire frame when the SHADE option is turned Part attributes option Fart Color E ee All Parts Displayed Reverse Clear Selection Linda Reda Apply Save Recall Exit Figure 9 20 Part Attributes control window Part Color Part attributes Option Part Material Selected By Figure 9 21 Part Attribute Control Window Part Material Part attributes Option Transparency Figure 9 22 Part Attributes control window Transparency on Click on the WIREFRAME button and select the parts from the part list window or click the parts from the screen The program will mark the part name wit
234. RBAG_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_GENERAL_INTERIOR CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_NODES_TO_SURFACE gt RADIOSS V4 4 TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_TIEBREAK CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_TIEBREAK CONTACT _CONSTRAINT_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _CONSTRAINT_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _DRAWBEAD TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE8 SLIDE eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C CONTACT _DRAWBEAD_INITIALIZE CONTACT_ERODING_NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_ERODING_SINGLE_SURFACE CONTACT_ERODING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _FORCE_TRANSDUCER_PENALTY CONTACT_FORCE_TRANSDUCER_CONSTRAINT CONTACT_FORMING_NODES_TO_SURFACE TYPE8 SLIDE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_FORMING_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT_FORMING_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _NODES_TO_SURFACE CONTACT _NODES_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE CONTACT_ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT _ONE_WAY_SURFACE_TO_SURFACE_INTERFERENCE CONTACT_RIGID_NODES_TO_RIGID_BODY CONTACT_RIG
235. REATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 8 3 INIT COND CARDS Description Initial condition cards provide a way of initializing velocities and detonation points Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION INITIAL CONDITIONS CFD DETONATION FOAM REF GEO GAS MIXTURE MOMENTUM STRAIN gt TRESS TEMFERATURE VEHICLE KINEMATICS VELOCITY VOID VOLUME FRACTION EXIT Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT INIT COND CARDS CFD Description This card defines initial CFD Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 140 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INIT COND CARDS DETONATION Description This card defines points to initiate the location of high explosive detonations in part IDs that use material type 8 Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS FOAM REF GEO Description This card defines initial foam reference geometry Refer
236. RGY DM DT IN GENSITY DM DT OUT TOTAL MASS GAS TEMPERATURE BOUNDARY NODAL FORCES BNDOUT Description The user can plot boundary nodal force time history data from the bndout file The following types are available XFORCE YFORCE ZFORCE ENERGY DEFORMED GEOMETRY DEFGEO Description The user can plot the deformed geometry data from the defgeo file DISCRETE ELEMENTS DEFORC Description This user can plot the discrete element time history data from the deforc file The following types are available X FORCE MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT X FORCE MOMENT 9 63 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING RESULTANT FORCE MOMENT ELEMENT DATA ELOUT Description The user can plot element force data from the elout file CONTACT ELEMENT RESULTANTS GCEOUT Description The user can plot contact element resultant data from the gceout file The following types are available XFORCE YFORCE ZFORCE FORCE MAGITUDE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT MOMENT MAGNITUDE GLOBAL DATA GLSTAT Description The user can plot the global time history data from the glstat file The following types are available TIME STEP TOTAL ENERGY TOTAL INITIAL ENERGY ENERGY RATIO KINETIC ENERGY ERODED KINETIC ENERGY INTERNAL ENERGY ERODED INTERNAL ENERGY SPRING amp DAMPER EMERGY HOURGLASS ENERGY SYSTEM DAMPING ENERGY SLIDING INTERFACE ENERGY EXTERNAL WORK TIME PER ZONE CYCLE
237. RIGIN e VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to create section lines VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 3 If the user accepts the coordinate system VPG prompts gt DISTANCE FROM PLANE W e Users may now input a distance along the W axis from origin of the selected coordinate system e Any real value is a valid response The section line will be created at the distance W in the UV plane A section line is defined at a specific distance from the user defined local coordinate system 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES ABORT exits the function without creating a section line DONE will complete the section line and return the user to step 3 EXIT completes the section line and exits this function 6 1 19 SHOW 6 13 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description The user may identify any existing line or line direction using this function The selected line is highlighted the starting point is labeled with a circle and subsequent points are represented with arrowheads oriented in the direction of the line The arrows indicate point locations on the line and line direction Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES ABORT KEY IN LINE NO enter the line No to select a line LINE select line wit
238. ROCESS icon bar allow the user to access the functions to process the result files There are two kinds of icon on the eta Post one is global icons which control part on off views and dynamic rotation The second group of icons controls the type of post processing to be performed deformed shape stress vector plots of graphing Each of these are described in the following sections of this chapter Figure 9 6 Post Processing Icons 9 9 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 4 2 DISPLAY OPTIONS Description The DISPLAY OPTIONS window displays the current part and contains the following commonly used functions Smooth Shade Gray Color Element Edge T Shrink Hidden Surface Plate Normal Background Figure 9 7 Display Options 9 4 2 1 SHADE toggle Description This command displays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to simulate the actual shading effect Eta Post uses two methods for object shading flat and smooth Flat shading shades each polygon upon the intensity of the light over a series of polygons making the elements appear flat and angled 9 4 2 2 SMOOTH SHADE toggle Description This function uses the Gourand shading method to make the model appears more smoothly The feature angles between adjacent elements are smoothed by this shading method Note The SMOOTH SHADE option is only
239. RT gt ENTER STARTING ELEMENT NUMBER FOR CHOSEN PARTS 6 3 14 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function allows the user to reverse the element orientation normal for all elements except CORD2R and CONM2 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once desired elements have been selected DONE executes the command 6 3 15 SPLIT Description This function divides CQUAD4 and CTRI3 elements into 2 or 4 elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION FOR SPLIT ELEMENT 2 QUADS 4 QUADS 2 TRIAS TRIA 2 TRIAS TRIA QUA COMBINE TRIA 4 TRIAS ARBITRARY LOCATION SOUD TO 86 SOLIDS 1 DIMENSION ELEMENT ALONG LINE EXIT 2 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into two QUAD4s 6 62 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 QUADS splits a QUAD4 into four QUAD4s 2 TRIAS splits a QUAD4 into two TRIAs TRIA 2 TRIAS splits a TRIA3 into two TRIASs TRIA QUAD COMBINE splits a QUAD into a QUAD and a TRIA TRIA 4 TRIAS splits a TRIA into four TRIAs ARBITRARY LOCATION defines locators for splitting elements SOLID TO 8 SOLIDS splits a SOLID into 8 SOLIDs 1 DIMENSION ELEMENT splits a 1 dimension element to several 1 dimension elements ALONG LINE split shell elements by line 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT TO SPLIT CURSOR LOCATION MULTI POINT REGION BY PART REVERSE OPERATION DRAG WINDOW FREE REGION SPREAD SHELL CIRCULAR REGION UNDO LAST DONE EXIT REVERSE
240. S ACCELEROHETER PRETENS TONER RETRACTOR SENSOR SLIPRING EXIT e Each of these seatbelt functions yields various definition cards For further description of these cards refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual 6 14 17 SENSOR Description This function provides a convenient way of activating and deactivating boundary conditions airbags discrete elements joints contact rigid walls single points constraints and constrained nodes Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option SENSOR OPTION SENSOR CONTROL SENSOR DEFINE SENSOR SWITCH EXIT e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 18 TERMINATION Description This function defines the analysis termination point in reference to a particular node or body The nodal stop condition works on the global coordinate position while the body stop condition works on the relative global translation Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 200 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR TERMINATION OPTIONS BODY CONTACT CURVE NODE EXIT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 201 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 15 SUPERELEMENT NASTRAN The functions in the SUPERELEMENT S E menu allow the user to assign and modify SUPERELEMENT I D numbers within a VPG da
241. S DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS NON REFLECTING Description This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements as indefinite domains are usually not modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting the size of the models Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 131 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BOUNDARY CARDS NON REFLECTING2D Description This function defines a non reflecting boundary The option applies to continuum domains modeled with two dimensional solid elements in the XY plane as indefinite domains are usually not modeled For geomechanical problems this option is important for limiting the size of the models Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS OUTFLOW CFD Description This function defines outflow CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED CFD Description This function defines prescribed CFD boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS PRESCRIBED MOTION Description This function defines an imposed nodal motion velocity acceleration or displacement on a node or a set of nodes Also velocities and displacements can be imposed on rigid bodies If the local option is active the motion is prescribed with
242. S NO RE MESH Enter TRIANGULAR MESH 2 VPG prompts to select surface 3 After selecting surface a mesh input window is pop up 6 66 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Kesh Input Findowr Mesh Definition MERGE BOUNDARY GAP ELEMENT SIZE 15 00 o Preview Boundary P in Original Part Ok Cancel 4 After clicking OK VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO RE MESH 6 3 17 AUTO REPAIR Description This function allows the user to automatically repair mesh Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 After selecting elements VPG prompts gt ENTER MINIMAL ELEMENT SIZE DEFAULT IS 4 000 3 After entering the value VPG prompts gt ENTER MIN INT ANGEL DEFAULT IS 25 00 4 After entering the value VPG prompts gt ENTER MAX INT ANGEL DEFAULT IS 150 00 5 After entering the value VPG prompts gt ENTER BOUNDARY GAP TOLERANCE DEFAULT IS 1 000 6 Then VPG prompts gt ACCEPT REPAIRING RESULT YES NO RE REPAIRING The user may re enter above parameters and repair again 6 3 18 2 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements between two selected lines A rectangular pattern of N1 by N2 quadrilateral elements will be generated where N1 is the number of elements along the direction of the first selected line and N2 is the number of elements between the two lines For a transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and N4 parameters for the mesh each side may have a different
243. S ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 3 9 LINE MESH is similar to 6 LINE MESH with the exception of 3 connecting lines e Line direction clockwise or counter clockwise for all line selections should be 6 71 eta VPG3 4 e VVV Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR consistent 2 See 6 LINE MESH for further details and the prompt descriptions SOLID MESH 12 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function allows the user to generate 8 node solid elements automatically ina volume The volume is defined by 12 lines 4 lines for the top surface 4 lines for the bottom surface see 8 LINE MESH and 4 lines for connecting the top and bottom surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT 4 LINES AT BOTTOM SELECT 4 LINES AT TOP SELECT 4 LINES ON THE SIDE STARTING BETWEEN LINE 1 amp 4 12 LINE MESH is similar to 8 LINE MESH with the exception of 4 connecting lines The user should maintain the consistent direction clockwise counter clock wise for all line selections eVVV 2 See section 8 LINE MESH for further details and prompt descriptions LINEAR MAPPING Description This function allows the user to generate solid elements model by linear mapping Linear Happing Linear Mapping Select Source Elements 199 elems selected Select Target Elements 199 elems selected Select Aligning Nodes Select Aligning Nodes Source M1 Source Ne ModelD 3 Model 1 Target N1 Target M2 ModelD 267 NodelD 264 Mum of Layers M
244. SCELLANEOUS SUPER ELEMENT MASS MENU ASSEMBLY CONSTRAINT LOAD CARDS INITIAL CONDITION ROAD MENU SUSPENSION MENU TIRE MODEL SAFETY ALE FSI DTM HEEDS ANALYSIS 2 6 An Overview of eta VPG Features Imports and exports data to and from VPG Creation display control and manipulation of part entities Contains a menu of preprocessing functions Creates and modifies line surface data Creates and modifies surfaces in VPG Creates and modifies elements Creates copies transforms and manipulates nodes Checks element criteria warpage boundary aspect ratio etc Creates node and element sets for Super element files substructure files etc Creates and verifies constraints and loads on a finite element model Creates and assigns material properties Creates and assigns element properties Creates and modifies sliding rigid wall interfaces for LS DYNA Handles distinct LS DYNA miscellaneous data Handles distinct NASTRAN miscellaneous data Assigns and modifies SUPER ELEMENT ID numbers only for NASTRAN application Creates and modifies MASS Arrange and assemble parts or part sets connections Creates and Modifies constraints Creates defines and modifies LOAD CARDS LS DYNA Creates defines and modifies INITIAL CONDITION CARDS LS DYNA Defines road surfaces Defines and auto generates front and rear automotive suspensions Defines and auto generates tire models Analyzes vehicle impact and oc
245. SE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 6 215 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Ifthe file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N e YES Overwrite the file with new data e NO Exit and do nothing 6 19 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types For the details of this function refer to section 6 3 4 Usage ASSEMBLY MENU LELAS 1 CELA FBAR FBE FBES EXIT 6 19 4 DELETE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to delete connections of the five types Choose one type of them and select a connection Usage DONE The selected connections would de deleted from the database ABORT DO nothing and exit 6 19 5 REPLACE PART Description This function allows the user to select a new part to replace an old part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART AS TARGET TO BE REPLACED e Select a part to be replaced by choosing its name or an element of it 2 After click EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A PART TO REPLACE TARGET PART e Select a new part by choosing i
246. SUPERELEMENT I D to all nodes in the entire VPG database the SUPERELEMENT I D is the same as the PID number of the corresponding part 6 202 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 15 3 CHANGE S E ID Description This function allows the user to change or assign a SUPERELEMENT I D to selected nodes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW SUPER EL I D OR 0 ZERO TO EXIT e The user may now enter the desired SUPERELEMENT I D 2 VPG prompts gt NEW S E ID DOES NOT EXIST OK TO CONTINUE Y N e YES will prompt step 3 e NO will exit this function 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NEW S E ID e Once the user selects the S E nodes DONE terminates this function VPG displays the new S E ID numbers on the screen above the appropriate nodes 6 15 4 IDENTIFY NODE POINT Description This function identifies any point node and its corresponding global location within the X Y Z coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY IN NODE NUMBER HODE POINT EXIT e If the user selects ALL NODES VPG displays the numbers of the nodes at their node locations and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu e If the user selects KEY IN NODE NUMBER VPG displays the corresponding node and echoes the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X xX xxx Ye y yyy Z 2Z zzz e If the user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node nearest to the cursor and echoes the following me
247. Suspension McPherson Strut Front Suspension REAR SUSPENSION 3 Link Suspension 4 Link Suspension Mazda J56a_Rear Suspension Quad Link Uca Rear Suspension 7 20 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Po Quad Link Struct Rear Suspension 7 2 6 READ STF_FILE Description This function reads in a STF suspension 7 2 7 READ XML_FILE Description This function reads in a XML suspension 7 2 8 MODIFY HARDPOINT Description When the user has read in an Adams Pre file this option allows the user to modify defined suspension geometry definitions from within the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION HARDPOINT e The MODIFY HARDPOINT window is displayed for user to modify hard point X Y Z positions SUSPENSION HARD POINTS X LEFT Y LEFT Z LEFT X RIGHT Y RIGHT Z RIGHT aero aa4oe 28008 176235 28284 vaago5 T2743 orai 145490 PITI DFONT 7 153885 63752 101849 154098 53874 DPONT 143866 78195 47264 144553 18629 HARD FONT 10 143588 78342 14008 144478 18452 jano PONT 11 49787 60083 47072 144527 T0478 ARD POINT 12 132852 74837 38179 133472 75552 HARD FONT 14 138397 28848 377168 138308 39341 ARD POINT 6 148426 60950 63978 148937 61401 OK Previous Cancel Abort When the user has finished altering the data select OK 7 2 9 MODIFY BUSHING Description This option allows
248. T ALL BOXES and WINDOW Boxes that are selected are displayed in gray When the user exits the menu they are deleted DISPLAY ON OFF e Toggle switch LIST e Lists the box ID numbers in a pop up window MODIFY e Allows the user to modify a selected box with new point node or xyz coordinates This command also displays the UL coordinates representing the two corners of the box in global coordinates RENUMBER e Renumber the selected box ID numbers or all boxes SHOW e Displays the nodes and elements of a box in white The box may be selected by cursor pick or by box ID VIEW e Sends the user to the VIEWING OPTIONS MENU EXIT 2 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW BOX ID X OR E TO EXIT 3 After entering new box ID VPG prompts gt DEFINE FIRST CORNER OF THE BOX ABORT KEY IN X Y Z HODE POINT 4 After selecting the first corner VPG prompts gt DEFINE SECOND CORNER OF THE BOX ABORT INCREMEHTAL amp 2 KEY IH X Y Z HODE FPFOIHT REJECT VECTOR TAIL Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 190 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE BOX DRAWBEAD Description Defines a specific box or tube shaped volume around a draw bead Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an BOX DRAWBEAD card DELETE e This function deletes already created BOX DRAWBEAD cards LIST e This function lists already created BOX DRAWBEAD cards in pop up win
249. T CARDS POINTS Description This function defines constrained points Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LOCAL Description This function defines a boundary constraint in a local coordinate system Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS NODAL RIGID BODY Description This function defines a rigid body that consists of defined nodes Refer to section 6 3 4 for more details CONSTRAINT CARDS NODE SET Description This function defines nodal constraint sets for translation motion in global coordinates Refer to section 6 3 4 for more details CONSTRAINT CARDS RIGID BODIES Description This function merges two rigid bodies One rigid body the slave rigid body is merged to the other one called the master rigid body Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA 6 138 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS RIGID BODY STOPPERS Description This function defines constrained rigid body stoppers Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS RIVET Description This function defines constrained rivets
250. T _AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE16 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE17 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE NOTE Or create a new CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE to replace all RADIOSS s contact Set all CONTACT AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE s SOFT 1 IGAP 2 IGNORE 1 If RADIOSS data does not have FS VPG will set it as 0 2 Moreover set FD as 0 2 RIGIDWALL RIGIDWALL_GEOMETRIC 8 6 AARBAG MONITORED VOLUMES MONITORED VOLUMES AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL If this MONITORED VOLUMES is a tire model we suggest use AIRBAG_SIMPLE_PRESSURE_ VOLUME instead of AIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL REPLACE THE ORIGINAL MATERIAL WITH MAT_FABRIC 8 7 SEATBELT CONVERT RADIOSS S MATERIAL TYPE 1 WHICH HAS VERY SMALL YOUNG S MODULUS INTO DYNA S MAT_FABRIC 8 8 OTHERS Delete all other cards that can t be converted to DYNA RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 FUNCTION DEFINE_CURVE FRAME DEFINE_COORDINATE NOTE If you don t have RADIOSS ENGINE file VPG will set up DYNA CONTROL cards for you as follows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CONTROL_HOURGLASS ihq qh 4 1 CONTROL_ACCURACY osu inn pidosu 0 2 0 CONTROL_BULK_VISCOSITY q2 q1 type 1 500 0 06000 1 CONTROL_CONTACT slsfac rwpnal islchk shithk penopt thkchg orien enmass 0 10000 1 000 2 0 1 1 2 0 usrstr usrfrc nsbcs interm xpene ssthk ecdt tiedprj 0 0 10 0 4 000 0 eta VPG
251. TATION to define the spring direction DISCRETE Create DEFINE SD ORIENTATION to define the spring direction CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD MASS amp INERTIA BEAM BEAM BEAM SHELL General Comments Delete PGAP properties Convert spring stiffness into DYNA material NASTRAN PSHELL PSOLID PBAR PBEAM PELAS PROD PTUBE 4 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN MAT1 DYNA V970 SECTION_SHELL SECTION_SOLID SECTION_BEAM resultant SECTION_BEAM resultant SECTION_DISCRETE SECTION_BEAM truss SECTION_BEAM integrated DYNA V970 1 MAT_ELASTIC 4 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN SPC NODE FORCE SHELL PRESSURE INITIAL VELOCITY 4 5 OTHERS gt gt DYNA V970 BOUNDARY_SPC_SET LOAD NODE SET LOAD SHELL SET INITIAL_VELOCITY General Comments Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET gt DYNA V970 NASTRAN LOAD CURVE LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_CURVE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM 5 CONVERTING FROM DYNA TO NASTRAN 5 1 ELEMENT General Comments Delete SEATBELT amp JOINT elements DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BEAM CBAR CBEAM CROD CTUBE according to element Prop CONSTRAINED _NODAL_RIGID_BODY RBE2 T SHELL SOLID SHELL SHELL eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C SOLID SOLID DISCRETE CELAS1 Create LCS for spring direction MASS CONM2 CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD RBAR INERTIA CONM2 CONSTRAINED NODE_SET RBE2 5 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete SEATBELT section Convert spr
252. TING FROM NASTRAN TO RADIOSS 13 1 ELEMENT Delete RBE3 CGAP element RADIOSS V4 4 NASTRAN gt CBAR BEAM RBE2 RBODY SHELL SHELL SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING Create a node for spring direction CELAS1 SPRING Create a node for spring direction RBAR RIVET CONM2 MASS CBEAM BEAM CROD TRUSS CTUBE BEAM ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL SHELL 13 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG deletes PGAP properties NASTRAN C 26 gt RADIOSS V4 4 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C PSHELL 1 SHELL PSOLID 14 GENERAL_SOLID PBAR 3 BEAM PBEAM 3 BEAM PELAS 4 SPRING PROD 2 TRUSS PTUBE 3 BEAM 13 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY MAT1 1 ELASTIC 13 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN gt RADIOSS V4 4 SPC BCS NODE FORCE CLOAD SHELL PRESSURE PLOAD INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY 13 5 OTHERS VPG deletes all other cards that can t be converted LOAD CURVE FUNCTION LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM FRAME C 27 eta VPG 3 4
253. The selected CONM2 element will be deleted and VPG will exit this function ABORT Rejects selected CONM2 elements and exists the command 6 18 5 CONM2 PROPERTY Description The details of this function refer to Section 6 12 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN ELEMENT C OR MATERIAL NAME M OF A MATERIAL 6 18 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This function identifies a mass element CONM2 and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR The user selects a mass element and VPG will display the information of this mass EXIT to MASS MENU 6 18 7 CALCULATE MASS Description This function calculates a mass center of gravity location and inertia properties for selected parts Parts must have a material property and thickness defined with a material density specified Usage 1 VPG prompts 6 213 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT e User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file SELECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file EXIT Returns the user to MASS MENU 6 18 8 ATTACH MASS Description This function creates RBE ALL DOFs elements in the current part and attaches them from the selected
254. This function defines nodal single point constraints After selecting CREATE NODE VPG displays the following dialogue box Once the DOF is determined in the dialogue box VPG prompts the user to select the nodes DONE finishes the selection and displays the nodes with their SPC set number SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM Local Coordinate System Select One From The Following _ ALLD OF __ X Symmetry X Anti Symmetry _ Y Z Symmetry _ Y Z Anti Symmetry _ X Z Symmetry _ X Z Anti Symmetry Select Any Combination From Following __ Translation __ XRotation __ Y Translation __ Rotation __ ZTranslation __ ZRotation Cancel The options in the top and bottom of the SPC DEGREE OF FREEDOM box represent alternate methods for defining the degree of freedom Only the top or the bottom can be selected not both X Y SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z SYMMETRY e Assigns symmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X Y ANTI SYMMETRY e Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XY plane Y Z ANTI SYMMETRY e Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the YZ plane X Z ANTI SYMMETRY e Assigns asymmetric boundary conditions to the XZ plane X TRANSLATION e X translation will be constrained Y TRANSLATION e Y translation will be constrained Z TRANSLATION e Z translation will be constrained X ROTATION e X rotatio
255. VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES will only output the active parts parts that are turned ON e N will output all parts in the database 4 VPG prompts gt INPUT THE HEADING OF THE FILE e The user can enter up to 60 characters 5 8 2 WRITE DYNA FILE This function allows the user to output an LS DYNA data deck directly from the VPG database 1 Enter a file name up to 24 characters The dyn extension is suggested for LS DYNA files 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILE NAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 User selects ANALSYS UNIT parts output mode FULL MODEL or Active Parts Only discrete beam output option inputs Analysis Title Engineering s Name and Project Name 5 9 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS ANALYSIS UNIT CURRENT SYSTEM Full Model _ Active Parts Only Output Requirement For Discrete Beam Analysis Tithe mee Engineer s Mame maene Project Mame 4 After clicking OK VPG displays the CONTROL TERMINATION CARD if a termination time has not been specified yet Once the card is defined and the user selects OK the DYNA deck is written 5 8 3 WRITE GENESIS FILE This function allows the user to output a GENESIS dat data deck directly from the VPG database 5 8 4 WRITE LINE DATA FILE
256. VPG prompts gt SELECT THE AXIS OF REVOLUTION gt SELECT THE FIRST POINT FOR THE AXIS ABORT LINE TWO POINTS e The user may select a line defined by only two points to be the axis of revolution TWO POINTS e Default REJECT LAST POINT e The user has been prompted to select the first of two points required to define the axis of revolution Once the first point has been selected VPG prompts gt SELECT THE SECOND POINT FOR THE AXIS The user selects the second point then VPG displays a vector representing the axis of revolution gt SELECT A LINE AS THE GENERATRIX OF REVOLUTION LINE default SEGMENT allows user to combine line segments into one line REJECT rejects last selection DONE 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER START AND END ANGLE DEFAULT 0 360 e The user may enter a desired start angle and end angle to generate a surface or press ENTER to generate a 360 degree angle 6 2 18 SHOW Description This function highlights the selected surface and UV lines in white color Choosing CLEAR in the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS MODULE removes highlights Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE CURSOR LOCATION KEY IN NUMBER SHOW SURF NUMBER EXIT 6 25 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e CURSOR LOCATION Select the surface in the graphics display window directly default the surface will be highlighted and ID will be shown e KEY IN NUMBER Enter the surface number in the field the surface will be
257. X 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 42 OGDEN 77 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 43 HILL_TAB 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTICITY 44 COWPER 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_ JOHNSON_COOK 48 ZHAO 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_ JOHNSON_COOK 49 STEINB 10 MAT_ELASTIC_PLASTIC_HYDRO 50 LAW50 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 52 GURSON 98 MAT_SIMPLIFIED_JOHNSON_COOK 53 LAW53 26 MAT_HONEYCOMB 54 LAW54 1 MAT_ELASTIC 8 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION RADIOSS V4 4 DYNA V970 gt gt BCS BOUNDARY_SPC_SET CLOAD LOAD_NODE_SET GRAVITY LOAD_BODY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET IMPOSED ACCELERATION BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET MPC CONSTRAINED_LINEAR_LOCAL PLOAD LOAD_SEGMENT_SET 8 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL Delete RIGIDWALLs which do not have nodes C 16 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C RADIOSS V4 4 gt DYNA V970 TYPE2 TIED CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPES SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPES SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE6 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPES SLIDE CONTACT_DRAWBEAD TYPE10 TIED VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE11 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE14 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE TYPE15 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE2 TIED CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE LAGMUL TYPE7 SLIDE VOID CONTAC
258. XIT will send the user to the LINE menu 6 1 12 MIRROR Description This function allows the user to reflect a copy of desired lines across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG is now asking for a coordinate system to mirror the lines VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 3 If the user selects YES then VPG prompts gt PICK LINES TO MIRROR gt SELECT LINES 6 9 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ABORT EXCLUDE ON OFF LINE MULTI POINT REGION PART WINDOW FREE REGION REJECT LAST DONE 4 Once desired lines have been selected DONE takes the user to the next step 5 VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ e The user may now select a local plane of symmetry in which to mirror lines 6 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE MIRRORED LINES IN ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO e YES will place all selected lines into the ORIGINAL PART e NO will place all selected lines into the current part 6 1 13 OFFSET Description This function allows the user to copy and offset a selected line The new line is generated in the UV plane according to a user specified distance and d
259. YSTEM 1 X MOMENT 4 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 2 Y MOMENT 1 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 3 Y MOMENT 2 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBSYSTEM 4 Y MOMENT 3 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 1 Y MOMENT 4 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 2 Z MOMENT 1 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 3 Z MOMENT 2 KINETIC ENERGY RATIOS 4 Z MOMENT 3 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 1 Z MOMENT 4 SPOTWELD RIVET FORCES SWFORC Description The user can plot the spotweld rivet force data from the swforc file The following types are available AXIAL SHEAR 9 68 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING TEMPERATURE OUTPUT TPRINT Description The user can plot the temperature output data from the tprint file The following types are available HEAT GENERATION TOTAL HEAT GENERATION ee CHANGE INTERNAL ENERGY TATE INTERNAL ENERGY Component NOTE The available data type depends on the data file Internal Energy Total Energy Total Initial Energy Usage Select a file for the Select File dialog box and click Open to Spring Damper Energy load the desired database to the Post Processor There are many ene different kinds of result files from LS DYNA analysis that can be read _ External vark in and the numbers of files which are depend on the type of analysis Step Size and the setting in preprocessor are not the same every time nave OE Y velocity Moreover the user can load several files in the current database _ Z velocity though repeating the operation
260. _ALE define ALE coupling control card e DATABASE FSI ASCII file dbfsi definition user can define list and remove this file definition here e EXIT exit ALE control definition 7 8 7 EXPORT DYNA FILE Description this function is used to export the files submitted for dyna operation 7 83 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 9 DTM MODULE This DTM module includes functions DROP TEST PRESSURE TEST VIBRATION TEST and SHOCK TEST These functions are mainly for reliability test for electric products and consumer products 7 9 1 DROP TEST DTM drop test module module is used for the drop analysis especially the analysis on electronic products and consumer products DIM module can automatically calculate the center of gravity define and modify the drop direction define the drop height initial analysis height drop acceleration and drop damping and flexibly select the drop reference point node and output control options It can also batch output the drop analysis files of multiple heights The floor and rigid floor required by the drop test as well as the contact definition of drop models will be completed by DTM module automatically DTM module can quickly create simulation models for drop and impact tests in accordance with the process guidance With various drop and impact test simulations it can provide reliable reference for the product design DROP TEST MODULE DROP DIRECTION G AND DROP HEIGHT DAMPING ANALYSIS CO
261. _NODAL_RIGID_BODY SHELL SOLID SOLID If this spring has element property type 4 8 12 13 VPG will convert it into BEAM Otherwise VPG convert it into spring BEAM CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_BODY Delete VOID RIVET KJOINT NSTRAND property Convert spring stiffness into DYNA material RADIOSS V4 4 1 SHELL 2 TRUSS 3 BEAM 4 SPRING 6 SOL_ORTH 8 SPR_GENE 9 SH_ORTH 10 SH_COMP 11 SH_SANDW 12 SPR_PUL 13 SPR_BEAM 14 SOLID 32 SPR_PRE 35 STITCH 36 PREDIT gt DYNA V970 SECTION_SHELL SECTION _BEAM truss SECTION_BEAM resultant SECTION_BEAM discrete SECTION _SOLID SECTION _BEAM discrete SECTION _SHELL SECTION _SHELL SECTION SHELL SECTION_BEAM discrete SECTION _BEAM discrete SECTION _SOLID SECTION DISCRETE SECTION DISCRETE SECTION _BEAM resultant CONVERT RADIOSS s SPRING PROPERTY TYPE 4 8 12 13 INTO DYNA s eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C MATERIAL 196 IF H 0 N1 0 LINEAR ELASTIC SPRING K DYNA K RADIOSS D DYNA C RADIOSS IF H 0 N1 gt 0 NONLINEAR ELASTIC SPRING IF H 1 N1 gt 0 K DYNA A RADIOSS IF A RADIOSS 0 0 THEN K DYNA 1 0 C2 DYNA B RADIOSS A RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS K DYNA K RADIOSS A RADIOSS 1 0 IS ASSUMED C2 DYNA B RADIOSS FLCID GLCID N1 RADIOSS HLCID N2 RADIOSS DLE DYNA D RADIOSS CONVERT RADIOSS SPRING INTO DYNA BEAM IN ALL CASES IF LENGTH OF SPRING IS
262. a e NO Exit and do nothing 6 17 3 CREATE CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to create connections of five types as following CREATE CONNECTION ica HODAL RIGID BODY SPRING DAHPER JOINT CONST HODE SET BUSHING EXIT Usage NODAL RIGID BODY Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail SPRING DAMPER Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail JOINT Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail CONST NODE SET Refer to section 6 3 4 for detail BUSHING 1 VPG prompts gt PICK RIGID BODY TO LOCATE BUSH FIRST NODE 6 209 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 After selecting a rigid body VPG prompts gt PICK THE FIRST NODE ON RIGID BODY 3 After selecting the first node VPG prompts gt PICK RIGID BODY TO LOCATE BUSH SECOND NODE 4 After selecting the second rigid body VPG prompts gt PICK THE SECOND NODE TO DEFINE BUSH AXIAL DIRECTION 5 After selecting the second node VPG prompts gt PICK THE THIRD NODE TO DEFINE BUSH ORIENTATION After selecting the third node material card for bush definition pops up After clicking OK the bush definition is finished EXIT 6 17 4 MODIFY CONNECTION Description This function allows the user to modify connections Choose one type of them and select a connection Please refer to section 6 3 11 Usage 1 After entering MODIFY CONNECTION VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND CHANGE ELEMENT TYPE ACMS3 TO MAT100 SP DIS BEAM TO MAT100 SP RBE TO SPRING
263. a from the rbdout file The following types are available GLOBAL X COORDINATE GLOBAL Y COORDINATE GLOBAL Z COORDINATE GLOBAL X DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Z DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL X ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Y ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL Z ROT DISPLACEMENT GLOBAL X VELOCITY GLOBAL Y VELOCITY GLOBAL Z VELOCITY GLOBAL X ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL Y ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL Z ROT VELOCITY GLOBAL X ACCELERATION GLOBAL Y ACCELERATION GLOBAL Z ACCELERATION GLOBAL X ROT ACCELERATION GLOBAL Y ROT ACCELERATION GLOBAL Z ROT ACCELERATION DVECTOR ROW 1 A DVECTOR ROW 1 B DVECTOR ROW_1 C DVECTOR ROW_2 A DVECTOR ROW_2 B DVECTOR ROW_2 C DVECTOR ROW_3 A DVECTOR ROW_3 B DVECTOR ROW_3 C LOCAL A DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B DISPLACEMENT LOCAL C DISPLACEMENT LOCAL A ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL B ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL C ROT DISPLACEMENT LOCAL A VELOCITY LOCAL B VELOCITY LOCAL C VELOCITY LOCAL A ROT VELOCITY LOCAL B ROT VELOCITY LOCAL C ROT VELOCITY LOCAL AACCELERATION LOCAL B ACCELERATION LOCAL C ACCELERATION LOCAL A ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL B ROT ACCELERATION LOCAL C ROT ACCELERATION eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING _ RESULT INTERFACE FORCES RCFORC gt Description The user can plot the resultant interface data from the reforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE MASS WALL FORCES RWFORC Description The user can plot the rigid wall time history data from the rwforc file Th
264. abled Note Reset Contour Range is inthe VECTOR The value more than the maximum the vector is displayed in red and the value less than the minimum while the vector is displayed in blue 9 12 GRAPH gt The GRAPH function is a more independent comparatively module than other functions of eta Post Processor listed above This function enables the user to visualize time history result from LS DYNA analysis with graph format Moreover the GRAPH function offers a wide range of tools to help the user better understand and convey the results Features include the ability to manipulate the display area s settings labels colors etc and a host of advanced filtering techniques FIR SAE Butterworth averaging etc The detailed description of available function in GRAPH is given in the following sections The GRAPH function can be active by clicking the GRAPH icon on toolbar in despite of if the user have loaded a model file to current database or not Then the result file load control window will pop up on the right of screen for the user to load the time history result file The control window is shown in Figure 9 67 9 60 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING ee ae C e a S N N L Q ce A m N Q Figure 9 67 The Initial Graph Window 9 12 1 LOAD RESULT FILE Description The function allows the user to read result files form LS DYNA analysis into the current database The user has the abil
265. above The Graph control windows Time norzana curio Ml will pop up as Figure 9 69 Plot The number of List Boxes is not the same every time and depends New Graph on the result file type The detailed description about those functions Exit is given in the following section Figure 9 69 Graph Control Window 9 12 2 RESULT FILE LIST BOX Description The Result File list box displays the name of result files that have been loaded in the current database The user can select the desired name listing in the result file list box and from which to retrieve the intend data 9 12 3 TYPE LIST BOX Description The items list the Type list box depends upon the result file selected on the Result file list box and only the actual contained data types will be displayed and the list box item may change depending upon the project For example in Figure 9 67 there are two types N A and Wall 1 9 12 4 COMPONENT LIST BOX Description The items list on Component box are not only depends upon the selected file type on Result file list box also depends upon the selected type on type list box Moreover the same as the item on type list only the actual contained data types will be displayed and the list box item may change depending upon the items specified in the analysis 9 69 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 5 PLOT Description This button allows the user to plot the selected item on Component list box with graph in current Curve
266. ads displayed but no specific load magnitudes will be listed NODE EXIT e Pressing the left mouse button or typing N will list the applied force of the grid nearest to the cursor If no FORCES or MOMENTS are applied at the selected grid VPG will display the message gt NO LOAD SPECIFIED AT SELECTED NODE and remain in the LIST FORCE option e EXIT will exit the function LIST FORCE LOAD STATIC LOAD LIST PRESSURE Description This function displays the pressure loads and respective element numbers in the command area of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR PRESSURE LOAD CURSOR LOCATION EXIT e f no pressure is applied at the selected element VPG will display the message gt NO PRESSURE DEFINED AT SELECTED ELEMENT and remain in the LIST PRESSURE option e EXIT will exit the function LIST PRESSURE e Ifthe selected element has a pressure load VPG prompts gt PRESSURE LOAD AT EL xxxx xxxx xx LOAD STATIC LOAD MODIFY Description This function modifies the selected load set Usage 6 148 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD LIST window LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE FORCE Description This function removes nodal forces from selected grids in the current load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG p
267. after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE 3 After selecting the first reference node VPG prompts gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 3 MOVE NODE TO MID DISTANCE 1 If NODE TO MID DISTANCE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT FIRST REFERENCE NODE gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE CONTROL KEYS MODE MERGE ON OFF UNDO LAST EIT e MERGE ON OFF is an switch option for merging moved node and the target node the default option is on and the moved and target node will be merged eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts gt SELECT SECOND REFERENCE NODE 3 After selecting the second reference node VPG prompts gt MERGE TWO MOVED NODES YES NO ABORT If YES is selected two moved nodes are merged After this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 12 4 MOVE NODE TO SHORTEST PT 1 If NODE TO SHORTEST PT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO MOVE NODE UNDO LAST EXIT UNDO LAST is a valid selection only after a node has been moved This command returns the last node moved to its previous position 2 After selecting a node VPG prompts
268. age 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE 2 INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter an additional DX DY DZ from the previous point or node selected to continue drawing the line KEY IN XYZ e The user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node NODE POINT WORK PLANE e Select nodes from work plane to generate lines WORK PLANE SETTING e Set work plane parameters including coordinate total size and grid size REJECT LAST e DONE completes the creation of the line and starts the generation of a new line e EXIT will terminate this function 6 1 11 IDENTIFY Description This function allows the user to identify any node or point and its corresponding global location in X Y Z coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY INNODE NUMBER 6 8 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NODE POINT EXIT lf ALL NODES is selected the numbers of the displayed nodes will appear on screen at their node locations the first clear button in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW will remove the numbers e If NODE is selected the number of the node nearest the cursor location will appear on screen The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z Z Zzz If POINT is selected the number of the point nearest the cursor location will appear on screen The following message will echo on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z Z zzz e E
269. aller elements from the selected corner Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions EDGE BIAS MESH toggle Description This option allows the user to enter an element bias factor 0 625 to 1 6 relative 10 40 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY to the selected edge of the line data that is to be modeled This function multiplies each adjacent element that is created from the selected edge by the bias factor Note A bias factor greater than 1 0 generates proportionately larger elements from the selected edge A bias factor less than 1 0 generates proportionately smaller elements from the selected edge Note This function may be used with only the 2L 3L 4L 6S 8S 9S and 12S functions AUTOMATIC BACKUP toggle Description VPG will automatically create a backup database for the current VPG database This parameter controls the frequency of this back up process The default for this parameter is OFF The back up database is stored in the file named bak where is the name of the current database In the event of a software failure or database corruption this file may be renamed or copied and then reopened in VPG ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY Description The toggle switches in the ELEMENT TYPE DISPLAY determine what element types will be shown in the drawing window The default setting for all the switches is ON TYPE IDENTIFIER Description This toggle switch controls
270. are given as a submenu See Figure 10 3 3 YEG Henu Findor PART NAME d CURSOR AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT LINE CURSOR AT SURFACE INVERSE ON OFF KEY IN PART RANGE ON ALL PARTS OFF ALL PARTS PART SETS ON OFF MULTI PT REGION WINDY SELECT ELEMENT TYPE UNDO EXIT 10 22 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Usage 1 gt Figure 10 3 3 Part On Off Menu VPG prompts PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART PART NAME clicking on the listed parts will turn them on off CURSOR AT ELEMENT selects part by element DEFAULT CURSOR AT LINE selects part by line CURSOR AT SURFACE selects part by surface INVERSE ON OFF all on parts off and all off parts on KEY IN PART RANGE selects by assigning a part number range ON ALL PARTS all parts are turned on OFF ALL PARTS all parts are turned off PART SETS ON OFF turns parts on off by their assigned set MULTI PT REGION selects part by user defined multi point region WINDOW selects part by drag window SELECT ELEMENT TYPE selects element type UNDO rejects last 10 3 14 PART COLORS ON OFF toggle Description This function changes each element type into a separate and uniform color i e quadrilateral elements turn blue triangular elements turn red 8 node cube elements turn green 6 node wedge elements turn magenta and 4 node tetrahedron elements turn light magenta This function activates the color changes when selected once and re
271. are shown or no longer shown in the window list and in the GRAPHIC DISPLAY window BEAM All parts with the beam element are removed from the part list if the BEAM is toggled off And all parts with the beam element appear in the part list if the BEAM is toggled on SHELL All parts with the shell element are removed from the part list if the SHELL is toggled off And all parts with the shell element appear in the part list if the SHELL is toggled on SOLID All parts with the solid element are removed from the part list if the SOLID is toggled off And all parts with the solid element appear in the part list if the SOLID is toggled on OTHER All parts with the line are removed from the part list if the OTHER is toggled off And all parts with the line appear in the part list if the OTHER is toggled on KEEP If KEEP is selected the selected parts are highlighted and are labeled with asterisk on the Part List When the user exits the function only the selected parts remain displayed ALL ON Turns all parts on and displays them on the screen ALL OFF Turns all parts off from the GRAPHICS DISPLAY REVERSE This function reverses the current on and off status of the parts in the model The program updates the model display accordingly UNDO 9 5 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Undo the last operation or part selection in Part ON OFF function REDO Redo the last operation in the part ON OFF function EXIT Closes the
272. at 4 3 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager Chapter Chapter 5 File Manager The options available in FILE MENU allow the user to input data from different analysis programs into VPG A detailed description of each function in the FILE menu is given in the following sections New Ctrl h Open Ctrl 0 Restart Ctril k SAVE Ctrl S save AS Merge Database Import Fo Export Print Print Setup Select Language Exit Ctrl Figure 5 1 File Menu 5 1 NEW This function allows the user to create a new database file 5 1 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager Look in Go GA H E hay F ecent Documents hay N mm Places 6 line_mesh pg Ej 10_field_Format pg r 0_empty pg appilar_7O0 vpq Beams model ivpq vpg Beams shading pg Ej boundary _condition_split pg bumper pg Ej bumper _700 v pg Ej burmper_nastran vpg Ei Caravan pg w flange pa Frives214 vpg Ej intersect line vpg line_revolute pg File name Files of tupe WPG Database wpa fmb r linear_ mapping pg mesh vpq Ej Rbez vpg solid _tetra ypg E split _surface Ypg surface split pg taper pg temp pg E test Ypg Ej test _O vpq Ei test_15 pg total mesh vpg unik vpq Cancel Figure 5 1 1 New File Window lf a database file already has been opened in VPG and has not been saved yet there is a warning message for saving the opened file before creating a new one See Figure 5 1 2
273. ata ENTER Pressing ENTER at any time during input data definition accepts and saves the defined data 2 16 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM 2 15 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features VPG refers to the local coordinate system to translate rotate mirror copy and generate points lines and nodes When such a function is selected the program will automatically prompt the user to generate a local system designated as the UVW coordinate frame One two or three reference points are required to establish a local coordinate system For a three point system the first reference point defines the local origin The second reference which extends from the first reference point defines the direction of the local U axis The third reference point defines the local UV plane The local W axis is defined in the UV plane and is perpendicular to the U axis The local W axis is then defined according to the right hand rule perpendicular to the UV plane For the two point option DONE should be selected after the second reference point is defined The local W axis lies along the vector from the origin to the second reference point the V axis lies in the VW plane and the U axis is defined by the right hand rule Note All rotational commands generating arcs copying with rotation etc are executed about the local W or global Z axis For the one reference point option the user selects a point or node on the screen as the local origin th
274. ate elements or plate elements to solid elements along 3 or 4 selected lines EXIT The following sections cover the details for each command DRAG MESH ONE LINE DRAG Description This section covers the options for the ONE LINE DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along the selected line to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts ABORT ELEMENT LINE ELEMENT select elements to drag LINE after a line is selected VPG will prompt user to enter the number of elements on the selected line temporary 1D elements will be created on this line 2 Then VPG prompts 6 55 gt SELECT CONTROL LINE FOR DRAG MESH Number of points on the selected drag line dictates the number of sections eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR created e Line direction must point in the direction of the intended mesh 3 Once the line is selected the mesh is created VPG prompts gt ACCEPT DRAG MESH Y N DRAG MESH VECTOR DRAG Description This section covers the options for the VECTOR DRAG subsection of DRAG MESH This function extrudes the selected elements along a vector to form the higher order elements i e 1D elements lt PLOTEL beams gt are extruded to form plates and plate elements are extruded to form solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts
275. ation The eta VPG Documentation consists of Manuals and Tutorials This manual serves as the primary description of all eta VPG functions and provides the user with a description of each of these functions and the necessary mechanics of how to use them The Tutorials demonstrate how to implement the various functions in eta VPG for use in specific finite element modeling applications This documentation was created to complete the following objectives 1 Provide a description of general purpose pre and post processor functions for constructing FEA models and reviewing analysis results 2 Provide descriptions of the usage of utility modules for meeting VPG specific application requirements Examples of this are tire model generation road surface library usage suspension template usage fatigue life prediction calculation and signal processing 3 Describe methods to interface with external data reading and writing files to various MCAE solvers and accepting data from commercial CAD software Accompanying this manual is a set of Tutorials specifically designed to introduce modeling and application topics to the user The Tutorials provide examples to demonstrate the different techniques used in creating a VPG simulation and how to use various modeling functions The Tutorials also serve as a training guide for new users to gain experience with VPG techniques methodology and software In addition to the eta VPG Manuals and Tutorials the s
276. ation method used to create nodal thicknesses requires that all elements be consistent with respect to normals This requires element connectivities to be defined in a consistent manner This function allows users to check the connectivity definitions for the components and reverse any elements that are inconsistent Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR AUTO NORMAL ALL ACTIVE PARTS CURSOR PICK PART 10 26 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 2 After the user selects the desired parts VPG prompts gt IS NORMAL DIRECTION ACCEPTABLE Y N CALCULATE Description This function executes a background process that uses component geometry material and thickness to calculate a nodal thickness and residual strain value READ DYNAIN Description This function allows users to read a DYNAIN file from a previously executed LS DYNA metal forming analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT DYNAIN FILE NAME READ CONTACT PRESSURE Description This function allows users to read a pressure file from a previously executed LS DYNA metal forming analysis Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT PRESSURE FILE NAME EXPORTED BY ETA POST MAP PRESSURE Description This function allows users to map pressure from a part to another part SHOW THICKNESS Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated thickness values via color fringe plots The thickness value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color ba
277. available when the SHADE option is on 9 4 2 3 GRAY COLOR toggle Description This function can only be used in SHADE mode If the function is toggled on the model will be plotted in gray color during deformed plot or animation deformation and the parts without stress strain during contour plot or animation If the parts are defined with material color in Part Attribute function they will be shaded in the material color Note The GRAY COLOR option is only available when the SHADE option is on 9 4 2 4 FILL COLOR toggle Description This function toggles on off the model in FILL COLOR mode FILL COLOR fills the displayed elements with their designated part color 9 4 2 5 ELEMENT EDGE toggle Description This function can only be used in FILL COLOR mode The outline of the elements 9 10 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING is plotted in white when options is toggled on The model can be displayed without the outline by toggling off the option Note The ELEMENT EDGE is only available when the FILL COLOR or SHADE option is on 9 4 2 6 SHRINK toggle Description SHRINK creates a plot with elements reduced in size by 20 percent This option allows the user to toggle the function on off 9 4 2 7 HIDDEN SURFACE Description This function toggles on off the model in HIDDEN SURFACE mode HIDDEN SURFACE hides the elements behind the elements viewed from the user s point of view 9 4 2 8 PLATE NORMAL toggle Description This
278. ay check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section e Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created Note Select lines in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction Note The direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate element normals 6 2 8 MIRROR Description Reflects a copy of desired surfaces across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG prompts the user to select a coordinate system followed by the plane of the mirror The user may create a local coordinate system using any method available in VPG 3 The user then has the option of putting the surface in original part or current part 6 2 9 REMOVE HOLES Description This function allows the user to remove holes on the selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select surface for remove holes 2 VPG prompts the user to select mode to remove holes on surface 6 21 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR INNER HOLES ON OUTER BDY EXIT 3 When selecting mode INNER HOLES VPG prompts the user to select hole on surface to remove HOLE ON SURFACE REJECT LAST HOLE HOLES BY SIZE ALL HOLES EXIT 4 After selecting the hole click EXIT and the hole on surface is removed 6 2 10 REVERSE NORMAL Description This function reverses the normal direction of the surface The Surface normal affects light source shading on some work
279. ber e NO compares the node element numbers and ignores the duplicates VPG retains only the original nodes and elements i e if the MOLDFLOW file contains all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in with out the presence of elements or nodes 4 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 7 1 6 READ NASTRAN BULK 5 6 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager VPG uses NASTRAN as a file translator so that the user may import and export models and mesh This function allows the user to read a NASTRAN bulk data file dat directly into VPG All existing properties materials and subcases are retained 1 VPG displays the VPG FILE MENU and prompts gt DEFINE NASTRAN BULK DATA FILE 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART CONTROL OPTION FOR CBARS The files with the suffix nas will be listed for you in the options area MAT1 ID e CBARS will be grouped by common MAT1 ID PBAR ID e CBARS will be grouped by common PBAR ID PART NAME e CBARS will be grouped by their individual part names 3 If the user is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts gt OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT NUMBERS Y N e YES renumbers the new data at the lowest available unused node element number e NO compares the node element numbers and ignores the duplicates VPG retains the only original nodes and elements i e if the NASTRAN file contains all duplicate node and element numbers the new part will read in wi
280. cards except for SPRINGBACK Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description of the above commands 2 Upon selecting SPRINGBACK VPG displays a pop up window with the following selections 6 198 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR SPRINGHACE OPTION LSDYNA_THICKNESS LSDYNA_NOTHICKNESS WAS TRAN THICKNESS NAS TRAN _NOTHICKNESS EXIT e Once the thickness is determined VPG displays the appropriate definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description of the above command 6 14 14 PERTURBATION Description This function provides a way of defining deviations from the designed structure such as buckling imperfections Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option SELECT TYPE PERTURBATION NODE PERTURBATION TSHELL e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 15 RAIL Description This function defines track and train property for railway applications etc Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts to select option SELECT RAIL TYPE TRACK TRAIN e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 16 SEATBELT Description This function defines a seatbelt 6 199 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 When SEATBELT is selected VPG prompts the following card options gt SELECT OPTION SEATBELT ADD CARD
281. cate with these CAD systems IGES PDGS standard CGS INCA and DES DXF etc Once the user has entered the command the files with the appropriate suffix will be listed in the options area The user can then select the desired file 5 7 1 2 READ ABAQUS FILE VPG reads ABAQUS files directly with its built in translator The VPG ABAQUS file extension is INp 5 7 1 3 READ DYNA FILE This function allows the user to read both keyword and non keyword LS DYNA dyn files directly into VPG VPG supports versions 88 to 971 Keyword Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dyn will be listed in the VPG FILE WINDOW The user can then select the desired file 5 7 1 4 READ GENESIS FILE This function allows users to read GENESIS dat files directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix dat will be listed in the options area The user can then select the desired file 5 7 1 5 READ MOLDFLOW FILE This function allows users to read MOLDFLOW data directly into VPG 1 VPG prompts gt READING MOLDFLOW INPUT FILE gt ENTER THE ROOT NAME OF THE MOLDFLOW INPUT FILES 2 After entering the root file name assuming that the mfl mod and tri files are available VPG displays the MOLDFLOW model 3 If the user is reading data into an existing model VPG prompts gt OFFSET NODE AND ELEMENT NUMBERS Y N e YES renumbers the new data at the lowest available unused node element num
282. ccordingly Gravity amp Drop Height mmis 2 Drop Height 0 00 mm Reference Point Node _ The center of gravity eiThe Lowest Node _ Pick Node OK G define drop acceleration 9810mm s 2 default drop acceleration Other user defined drop acceleration Drop Height set drop height value Reference Point Node select reference point node to determine the drop height The Center of Gravity select center of gravity as reference 7 85 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e The Lowest Node select the lowest node in model as reference e Pick Node user pick a node as reference 7 9 1 3 DAMPING Description this function enables the user to define the damping during the model drop process The damping can be constant or be defined as the time function by curve 7 9 1 4 ANALYSIS CONTROL Description this function allows the user to define the initial analysis height If the initial analysis height is less than the drop height DIM module will automatically calculate the initial velocity of the model at the beginning of the analysis and calculate the total time spent when the model dropped from the initial analysis height to the floor Analysis Control Simulation Starts From S Specified Height lo 00 mm Ref by the lowest Node Factor End Time Total Time 2 50 Steps in d3plot Steps in time history OK e Simulation Start From define initial analysis height note that this value s
283. changes all ACM link in database to mat 100 beam spot weld DIS TO MAT 100 SP changes all discrete beam link in database to mat 100 beam spot weld RBE2 TO SPRING changes selected RBE2 link in database to spring SPOTWELD TO MAT 100 SP changes all spot weld link in database to mat 100 spot weld SPOTWELD TO RBEz2 changes selected spot weld link in database to rbe2 SPRING TO SPOTWELD changes selected spring in database to spot weld DELETE SHELL THICKNESS deletes the thickness of selected shells eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e MAT100 BEAM TO BLOCK changes selected mati00 beam spot weld to mat100 block spot weld 6 3 12 LINE MESH Description This function allows the user to generate one dimensional elements along a selected line automatically The elements created will follow the direction of the selected line The node sequence of the element begins at the starting point of the selected line according to the right hand rule The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT TYPE e A list of available element types will be displayed as following O EXIT 1 BEAM ELEMENT 3 PLOTEL ELEMENT 2 VPG then prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR LINE MESH 3 Once the line selection has been made VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS ON SELECTED LINE e Any integer greater than 1 is valid
284. cifications Usage Select the FIR type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the corresponding parameters as Figure 9 77 shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient parameters in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for 9 78 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING DATA CONTROL Passband 100 00000 stopband 190 000000 Max Ripple lo 100000 Min Attenuation 10 000000 Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 77 DATA CONTROL of FIR filter 9 12 6 20 PASSBAND FREQUENCY Description The maximum passband frequency is determined through the equation Passbanduser Total Number of Points on Graph Time Duration The default value is 10 of the passband frequency 9 12 6 21 STOPBAND FREQUENCY Description Stopband frequency is formulated Stopband Passbandyser Passbanmax Passbandyser The default value depends on the Passbandyser 9 12 6 22 MAXIMUM PASSBAND RIPPLE MAX PASSBRIPP Description Passband ripple value is between 0 0 and 1 0 dB 9 12 6 23 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MIN ATT 1 0 DB Description Stopband attenuation must be greater than 1 0 dB The stopband frequency and maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or high end limits Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It is recommended tha
285. conditions VPG is specifically configured to recognize sets for this procedure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM type SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT element node part ALL type SETS EXIT 2 Ifthe user selects ALL type SETS in step 2 the sets are highlighted in red in the VPG MENU WINDOW gt OK TO DELETE ALL type SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL type SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the set submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual set in step 1 the set will be highlighted in red When the user exits the submenu all highlighted sets will be deleted 6 6 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them Usage 1 VPG deletes any empty node sets If empty node sets are found VPG shows the number of sets found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 EMPTY NODE SETS Y N If no unreferenced node sets are found VPG prompts gt NO EMTPY NODE SETS FOUND and returns to the node set menu 6 6 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions loads or contacts Usage 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced node sets If unreferenced node sets are found 6 116 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR VPG shows the number of sets found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 UNREFERE
286. cted VPG places edge numbers on the surface and prompts the user to enter a number of section lines along edges 1 and 2 3 VPG creates a set of section lines along edges 1 and 2 These lines are included in the current part 6 2 4 DELETE Description This function deletes the selected surfaces from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen gt SELECT SUFACE e Surfaces will be highlighted as they are selected Surfaces may be de selected by selecting REJECT LAST from the menu after selecting surfaces and click DONE the selected surfaces are deleted 6 2 5 2 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates surfaces between two selected lines The orientation of the surface is independent of the direction of the lines The created surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE e LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 2 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 2 LINE SURFACE e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section e Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created 6 2 6 3 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates a surface in an area defined by 3 l
287. cted from the specific locations from the model This function allows the user to rotate the light sources along the screen X Y axes The function only works when the SHADE option is turned on The program displays the light source 1 and 2 and their lighting directions when the function starts Usage The user uses the mouse to move the light sources on the screen The lighting effect is updated as the user moves the mouse Press the left mouse button to exit the function The user may activate this function by pressing the SHIFT and LEFT mouse button simultaneously Release the mouse button to exit the function 9 8 5 LIGHT PROPERTY Description The light property allows the user to adjust the brightness and shininess of the part by adjusting the setting of Ambient Diffuse and Specular light The LIGHT PROPERTY only is operational when the SHADE option is turned on The user may click and drag the slider in each Light Property Ambient Diffuse E O Specular light property to adjust the light property Slide to the right WO IIT results in more brightness or reflection of the display Reset Light Usage Material Property AMBIENT Material Aluminium Ambient light is a uniform light source coming from all directions to the part DIFFUSE Diffuse light is a parallel light source coming from the light source direction This light is reflected evenly from the part surface SPECULAR Specular light is similar to
288. ctions It also requires significantly less time to load the pp file FATIGUE VPG allows the user to generate and post process fatigue result files from within the VPG Interface ANIMATE CONTOUR This function is used to map the stresses strains and strain energy of the model across time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames ANIMATE DEFORMATION This command allows the user to animate displacements within the model in real time Animations can be edited to even odd or specified frames CONTOUR FILL This function maps stresses strains and strain energy in the model for a single step It allows the user to view the contour values by superimposing a fill color contour image onto the model The values are displayed in a color legend in the upper right hand corner of the screen CONTOUR LINES This function similar to the CONTOUR FILL function allows the user to check the model s contour values for a single step A color wire frame contour line plot of the component result is Superimposed onto the current model DEFORMED SHAPE This command displays the displacement results of the model for a single step The undeformed model shape is displayed in white The model can be animated to show the transition between the undeformed and deformed model 9 4 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features ELEMENT STRESS This function displays the stress results of each individual element as opposed to
289. cupants safety Sets up ale models especially for explosion analysis Sets up a series of drop tests for a specimen Define Heeds parameters for optimization Analyzes proving ground events eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features FATIGUE Analyzes element fatigue POST Provides options for viewing the results of an analysis Plots dynamic characteristics of the structure vs time velocity etc in X Y Curve format UTILITIES Provides a series of VPG tool kit functions VIEWING OPTIONS Manipulates the display position and perspective of the model MACRO Records commands executed by VPG and replays commands in automated fashion 2 5 FUNCTION KEYS Function keys 1 through 8 act as shortcuts the most frequently used menus The F1 Function key 1 is reserved for the Main Menu F1 Main Menu F5 Model Checker F2 Element Options F6 Node Options F3 File Open F7 Surface Options F4 Line F8 Pre Processor 2 6 DISPLAY WINDOW VPG breaks the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to receive input or display messages for the user The six regions are illustrated on the following page See Figure 2 6 1 DRAWING WINDOW Model and definition cards are displayed in this area MENU BAR The groups of menus containing all eta VPG modules ICON BAR This group of commands dynamically manipulates the display position and perspective of a model MENU Commands and the Command Options are disp
290. d VPG returns the prompt gt ELEMENT SET xxxx ALREADY EXISTS 3 After the user enters an element set ID number VPG prompts 6 123 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT ELEMENTS e Select elements by the following methods ABORT CURSOR LOCATION EXCLUDE ON OFF KEY IN ELEM RANGE MULTI POINT REGION PART SURFACE ELEMENT TYPE WINDOW FREE REGION SPREAD SHELL CIRCULAR REGION NEIGHBOR NEAT REJECT LAST DONE e The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor If the user selects the same element twice while creating a set VPG returns the prompt gt ELEMENT xxxx ALREADY PICKED If the user selects DONE VPG saves the set and prompts gt X ELEMENTS INCLUDED IN ELEMENT SET X e If the user selects ABORT VPG deletes the set and forwards the user to the ELEMENT SET submenu Note Users may not assign the same ID numbers to both node sets and element sets 6 7 15 CURRENT ELEMENT Description This function lists the defined element sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST List of all element sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 Once the set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ELEMENT SET X FLAGGED AS CURRENT SET 6 7 16 DELETE ELEMENT 6 124 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function allows the user to
291. d as many times as desired 10 1 4 REVERSE ROTATION Description This function works in conjunction with SCREEN AXES ROTATION and VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION to reverse the degree of rotation and to replot the geometry of a part The user may repeat this command as many times as desired 10 1 5 RECALL VIEW Description This function allows the user to recall any previously saved view VPG contains the following predefined views 1 TOP VIEW 10 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 4 2 SIDE VIEW 3 REAR VIEW 4 ISOMETRIC VIEW 60 DEGREE ISOMETRIC Usage When the user selects any of the above views VPG re scales the displayed part accordingly 10 1 6 SAVE VIEW Description This function allows the user to save and store a desired view in the current VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER VIEW TITLE UP TO 18 CHARACTERS e The user enters a title for the desired view RECALL VIEW lists the new view and its corresponding view number The program allows the user to save up to six new views plus the four views that are predefined a total of 10 views 2 If the user exceeds the total number of views allowed the prompt at the bottom of the screen will read gt SELECT VIEW TO OVERWRITE 5 to 10 The user may select a view to overwrite and repeat step 1 10 1 7 VIEWPORTS ON OFF Description This function allows the user to view an object using the four predefined views available in the split screen display mo
292. d in NVH post processing 1 2 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 1 Introduction The dual nature of many of the models created in VPG and the desire to construct one model for use in several types of simulations drove the development of the VPG Safety module This module was incorporated into eta VPG version 2 0 which was released in 2002 1 3 VPG Methodology for Event Simulations Virtual Proving Ground VPG is a general term used to reference a simulation methodology using the tire and proving ground road surface approach The VPG method is a set of techniques used with an explicit nonlinear dynamic analysis program which allows for the complete analysis of a mechanical system including all joints bushings materials and geometric non linearities using an event based analysis The class of problems targeted is those in which a mechanical system is to be analyzed in a dynamic sense In other words when a mechanical system is in use the displacements forces accelerations and stresses occur in real time The VPG method allows for the calculation of all of these quantities simultaneously using a single analysis run While VPG methodology was initially developed for full vehicle simulations based on a proving ground durability cycle the concept can also be applied to other dynamic mechanical systems 1 4 eta VPG Software Package eta Virtual Proving Ground eta VPG is a fully integrated dynamic nonlinear finite element software package used
293. d nodes into the SPC set and the user exits the function INCLUDE NODES IN SET e ABORT will exit the function INCLUDE NODES IN SET without adding any of the selected grids SPC LIST SET Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE SPC MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects a boundary SPC set the BOUNDARY SPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user may modify parameters in the window SPC REMOVE NODES IN SET Description This function deletes nodes from the selected boundary SPC set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BOUNDARY SPC SET TO REMOVE NODES 2 VPG prompts 6 153 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT NODES DONE will release nodes from the SPC set and the user exits the function REMOVE NODES IN SET e ABORT will exit the function REMOVE NODES IN SET without releasing any of the selected grids SPC SHOW Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defined SPC sets VPG displays D O F next to each node Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK SPC TO SHOW List of all SPC sets CURSOR AT NODE WINDOW MULTI PT REGION SELECT ALL UNDO ALL EXIT 6 9 4 INITIAL VELOCITY Description This function allows the
294. de Usage The user selects one of the following views 1 corresponds to the default view 2 corresponds to the TOP VIEW X Y PLANE and the SIDE VIEW X Z PLANE and 4 corresponds to the TOP VIEW X YPLANE the SIDE VIEW X ZPLANE the ISOMETRIC VIEW and the REAR VIEW Y Z PLANE Once the user executes the above option the displayed model will automatically rescale itself to fill the split screen display 10 1 8 SCREEN AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object in the display area according to an angle specified via the keyboard The screen axes are fixed at all times and are defined as follows 1 Screen X axis is the direction from the left to right of the terminal screen 2 Screen Y axis is the direction from the bottom to the top of the terminal screen 3 Screen Z axis is the direction from the screen to the user Usage The user defines the rotation by entering the angle of a particular axis The angle is defined as positive if the rotation corresponds to a counterclockwise direction i e follows the right hand rule 1 VPG prompts eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY gt ENTER 3 ANGLES TO ROTATE e The user may now enter the desired X Y Z angles of rotation Note The functions REPEAT ROTATION and REVERSE ROTATION are especially useful after executing the above command 10 1 9 VIRTUAL AXES ROTATION Description This function allows the user to rotate an object abou
295. de usually the center of the rigid body for display purposes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT THE FIRST NODE FOR RIGID BODY e The first node is selected e Nodes can be selected by cursor pick drag window multi point region or part gt SELECT NODES e The second and subsequent nodes are selected until the user selects DONE e The rigid body is displayed with double lines with an R alongside it 6 47 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE PLATE LS DYNA Description This function defines a triangle or quadrangle plate element This section covers the options for the PLATE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e Select three nodes if click DONE a triangle plate element is created if go on selecting the fourth node a quadrangle element is created CREATE SOLID LS DYNA Description This function defines a tetrahedron or hexahedron element This section covers the options for the SOLID subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e Select four nodes if click DONE a tetrahedron element is created if go on selecting nodes a hexahedron element is created after the eighth node is selected CREATE THICK SHELL LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the THICK SHELL subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user must
296. ded Naming Convention LS DYNA Cards Local Coordinate System Entity Selection CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED Opening Creating an eta VPG Database File Setting Up a VPG Model CHAPTER 4 MAIN MENU File Parts Pre Road Suspension Tire Safety ALE FSI DTM Heeds Analysis Fatigue Post Utilities View Macro Help Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 1 4 Section 1 5 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Section 2 6 Section 2 7 Section 2 8 Section 2 9 Section 2 10 Section 2 11 Section 2 12 Section 2 13 Section 2 14 Section 2 15 Section 2 16 Section 2 17 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 Section 4 5 Section 4 6 Section 4 7 Section 4 8 Section 4 9 Section 4 10 Section 4 11 Section 4 12 Section 4 13 Section 4 14 Section 4 15 Section 4 16 Section 4 17 CHAPTER 5 FILE MANAGER New Open Restart Save Save As Merge Database Import Export Print Print Setup Exit CHAPTER 6 PRE PROCESSOR Line Surface Options Element Options Node Options Model Checker Set Menu LS DYNA Set Menu NASTRAN Boundary Conditions LS DYNA Boundary Conditions NASTRAN Material Property LS DYNA Material Property NASTRAN Element Property Contact Interface Dyna Miscellaneous Super Element NASTRAN Mass Menu LS DYNA Assembly LS DYNA Mass Menu NASTRAN Assembly NASTRAN CHAPTER 7 VPG MODULES Road Menu Suspension Me
297. del will be displaced relative to the reference point in 9 33 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING the un constrained direction s Constrain Axis Select Reference Mode Show Reference Mode Clear Constrain Motion Figure 9 36 Constraint Motion Dialog Window Note When Axis is selected as the constraint axis the function will be labeled with asterisk When toggle on Show Reference Node the function will be labeled with asterisk and when animate the reference node will be labeled with highlighted circle Please see the Figure 9 36 9 9 3 MIRROR RESULT BY XYZ Description This function allows the user to select a mirror plane to mirror the analysis result There are three mirror planes XY PLANE YZ PLANE and ZX PLANE as shown in Figure 9 37 Control Option Mirror Result By yY Plane Mirror Result By v Plane Mirror Result By AK Plane Clean Mirror Result Figure 9 37 Mirror Result Control Option Window Usage Ihe following example is to mirror a quarter of the model and result as shown in Figure 9 38 When selecting MIRROR RESULT BY XZ PLANE the program mirrors the model and result as shown in Figure 9 39 9 34 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING BUMPER_2 STEP TIME 0 035999 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises 339 537 109 315 284454 291 031799 266 779144 242 526505 218 273849 194 021194 169 768555 145 515900 121 263252 97 010597 72 757950 48 505299 24 252649 0 000000 ETA POST Figu
298. dependent node is interpolated from the motion of a set of independent nodes Please refer to section 6 3 4 for details CONSTRAINT CARDS JOINT Description This function defines joint stiffness for joints defined by the previous option CONSTRAINT CARDS JOINT STIFFNESS Description This function defines a joint between two rigid bodies please refer to section 6 3 4 for details Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION FLEXION TORSION GENERALIZED TRANSLATIONAL EXIT The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LINEAR 6 137 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function defines linear constraint equations between displacements rotations which can be defined in local global coordinate systems Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAINT CARDS LAGRANGIAN SOLID Description This function couples Lagrangian mesh shells solids or beams to the material points of a Eulerain flow master This option may also be used to model rebar in concrete or tire cords in rubber The slave part or slave part set is coupled to the master part or master part set Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG displays one definition card Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description CONSTRAIN
299. desired road surface by selecting it from the ROAD SURFACE MENU If the road surface is not in the correct position in relation to the suspension after generation the MOVE ROAD SURFACE command is used to position it Next contact between the road surface and the tires are determined using the FIVE NODES TO SURFACE interface type The road is then constrained in the Y Z and rotational directions using the material property assigned to the road Next a velocity is assigned to the road using the BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION card Details on ROAD SURFACE libraries may be found in Chapter 7 Section 1 5 Adding a Body Model The body to chassis suspension attachment process depends upon what type of body model the user wishes to use for analysis deformable or rigid Rigid Body The rigid body model is constrained to the rigid beams that define the body attachment points on the suspension Deformable Body The specific coordinates for the body attachment points must be entered when the user defines the Extra Node Coordinates for the front rear suspension models This ensures that the generated suspension would fit the specific body model The user then creates weld spiders between the mounts on the vehicle and the rigid body beams on the suspension Next the user defines the BODY LOAD DEFINITION _CARD to define the gravity After defining the gravity the user pre loads the suspension using the ELEMENT DEFINITION CARD 6 Defining VPG Analy
300. dium in the model Usage 7 81 DEFINE COUPLING ALE ALE FSI PROJECTION LAGRANGIAN SOLID EXIT ALE user can define keyword relative to ALE ALE FSI PROJECTION user can define coupling by ALE FSI _ PROJECTION LAGRANGE SOLID user can define CONSTRAINED LAGRANGE IN SOLID EXIT exit coupling definition keyword coupling by keyword eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 8 4 INITIAL DETONATION Description this function is used to define the detonation parameters of explosives including the detonation locations and detonation time SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE UST MODIFY EXIT Usage CREATE define detonation card DELETE delete already created detonation card LIST list already created detonation card MODIFY modify already created detonation card 7 8 5 INITIAL VOLUME FRACTION Description this function is used to define initial volume fraction of different materials in multi material ALE elements SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE UST MODIFY EXIT Usage CREATE define volume fraction card DELETE delete already created volume fraction card LIST list already created volume fraction card MODIFY modify already created volume fraction card 7 8 6 DEFINE ALE CONTROL CARD Description this function is used to define ALE control options and output parameters 7 82 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES DEFINE ALE CONTROL CARD CONTROL_ALE DATABASE _FSl EXIT Usage e CONTROL
301. dle position of two selected adjacent nodes Merge Nodes merge two selected close nodes not merge adjacent nodes Re space BDY Nodes respace boundary nodes for equal distance Suppress Nodes on Edge select common edge to suppress nodes will not be generated on suppressed edge Auto Repair this option helps to remove small gaps and duplicate elements during mesh Mesh By Part allows to mesh part one by one Variable Mesh generate variable elements according to the geometry feature Add Washer generate washer elements around a hole see following figure eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Add Fasher Parameters Number of rows i Washer width OO Win Mum of elements on hole E Select Circular Hole On Surface Ok Cancel Number of rows number of layers for the selected holes Washer Width total width of the washer Min Num of elements on holes minimum number of elements around the selected holes Select Circular Hole On Surface select holes to generate washer elements e intersecting Mesh this option helps to generate elements for intersecting surfaces such as T shape X shape and pipe shape surfaces The surfaces whose mesh is not affected by other surfaces in T Shape Type and Pipes Type can be selected as master surfaces In X Shape Surfaces Type user can randomly select one surface as master surface 4 VPG prompts gt CONTINUE MESHING Y N 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YE
302. dow MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created BOX DRAWBEAD cards DEFINE CONNECTION PROPERTIES Description Defines failure related parameters for solid element spot weld failure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CON PROPERTIES OPTION CON PROPERTIES CON PROPERTIES ADD 2 select an option VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an CONNECTION PROPERTIES card DELETE e This function deletes already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES cards LIST e This function lists already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created CONNECTION PROPERTIES cards DEFINE CONSTRUCTION STAGES Description Defines times and durations of construction stages Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an CONSTRUCTION STAGES card DELETE 6 191 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e This function deletes already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards LIST e This function lists already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created CONSTRUCTION STAGES cards DEFINE CONTACT VOLUME Description Defines a rectangular a cylindrical or a spherical volume in a local coordinate system Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an CONTACT VOLUME card DELETE e This function deletes already created CONTACT VOLUME cards LIST e This function lists already created CONTACT VOLUME cards in po
303. e following types are available NORMAL FORCE X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE SEATBELT OUTPUT SBTOUT Description The user can plot the seatbelt output data from the sbtout file The following types are available SEATBELT SLIPRING RETRACTOR CROSS SECTION FORCE SECFORC Description The user can plot the cross section time history data from the secforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE X CENTROID Y CENTROID Z CENTROID X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT TOTAL FORCE TOTAL MOMENT AREA SLIDING INTERFACE ENERGY SLEOUT Description The user can plot the interface energy data from the sleout file The following types are available TOTAL SLAVE SIDE eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING TOTAL MASTER SILE TOTAL ENERGY SPC REACTION FORCES SPCFORC Description The user can plot the SPC reaction force data from the spcforc file The following types are available X FORCE Y FORCE Z FORCE X MOMENT Y MOMENT Z MOMENT SUBSYSTEM STATISTICS SSSTAT Description The user can plot the subsystem statistic data from the ssstat file The following types are available KINETIC ENERGY GLOGAL INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 2 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 1 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 3 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 2 INTERNAL ENERGY RATIOS 4 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 3 X MOMENT 1 KINETIC ENERGY SUBSYSEM 4 X MOMENT 2 INTERNAL ENERGY GLOBAL X MOMENT 3 INTERNAL ENERGY SUBS
304. e 2 8 1 Floating Pull Down Menu accessed via Right Mouse Button 2 9 KEYBOARD ENTRY 2 11 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features To increase speed and efficiency all VPG functions can also be accessed by keyboard entry Entering a one or two letter combination followed by the return key activates each command of the menu that the user presently has on the screen For main menus the letter combination is the first two letters of a one word command or the first letter of each of the first two words of a two or more word command As the user types the keys the matching command will be highlighted For example the keystroke entry for the command ELEMENT OPTIONS SURFACE MESH in the above menu would be s m followed by the RETURN key For the ELEMENT OPTIONS MODIFY command the keystroke entry would be m o followed by the RETURN key For control keys the user need only type the first letter to access the function 2 10 SPECIFICATIONS The standard version of VPG has the following specifications for model databases Entity LINES 150 000 POINTS 1 500 000 SURFACES 98 000 6 500 000 Edge Points 400 000 Control Points 2 11 LINE DATA VPG s built in translator converts and filters line data from the following programs into a neutral line format IGES lines and surfaces DXF file formats VDA file There are additional external translators to support CAD files generated from the following programs CATIA4
305. e EEE OAREECRE MANAI SIDE_CRASH STEP TIME 0 030000 0 030000 70 10 incr 1 Frames Second 10 m ETA POST Frame speed 0 360 seconds COMMAND COMPLETED 2 HM Shade z l Smooth Shade _ Material Color DEFORM PLOT Message Window rru cod 1S p kaya Qe tion Aadel ope gh rape ee Hidden Surface M Plate Normal V Background Ready Figure 9 1 eta Post interface window GRAPHIC DISPLAY WINDOW Models and graphs are displayed in this window MENU BAR Commands and options are displayed in this area ICON BAR Provides the user easy access to the commonly used functions of the program eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING CONTROL WINDOW AREA Once the user selects a command from the MENU BAR or ICON BAR a corresponding dialog window with the appropriate functions is displayed in this area DISPLAY OPTIONS The options in this group are used to control the model displayed in the graphic display window These options are always displayed and can be used at any time during an eta Post session PROMPT AREA eta Post displays comments and messages to the user The Graphic User Interface GUI is designed for easy access to all the functions for post processing DYNA and Nastran results This GUI is unified for both Windows and UNIX LINUX platforms The user activates the functions via mouse click 9 3 MENU BAR The menu bar contains the FILE EDIT TOOL and OPTION menus All the menus are designed in a l
306. e been created using the publicly available information for each of the tests and test simulations described in this manual the user should exercise caution when performing these analyses Current testing methods and governmental regulations should be studied and compared to the testing and analysis methods described here so that a fully accurate study can be performed The writers of this document and the authors of the VPG Safety software strongly recommend that all users take the initiative to study the testing procedure and the related analysis procedures and take any necessary measures to assure the accuracy of the simulations created using VPG Safety 7 36 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 1 General Processing Procedure The crash safety simulations documented herein have similar requirements and setup procedures They generally require a structure assembly either a full vehicle or a component of the vehicle and at least one crash tool model dummy barrier rigid wall etc During the simulation either a structure moves at a particular speed into a crash tool or a crash tool impacts the structure The displacement of the structure the acceleration or deceleration pulse the G forces on the dummy models and certain specified results are then post processed and compared with the performance criteria and legislated requirements Therefore the canned simulations have a general processing procedure From case to case the
307. e database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 lf the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Note All mass elements appear as small circles 6 16 2 WRITE TO FILE Description This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 Ifthe file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 205 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 Ifthe file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N e YES Overwrite the file with new data e NO Exit and do nothing 6 16 3 CREATE MASS Description This function allows the user add a new mass element to the database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE Enter a mass value that the user wants to create 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT To create a mass element the user may select a node point or keyboard entry EXIT or ABORT will exit this functi
308. e lines in the same order as the first set of three lines 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 1 TRIA AT CORNER 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE 3 1 gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 X N2 X N3 2 gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON ALONG THE FACE EDGE gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS BETWEEN THE FACES 4 Once N1 N2 and N3 have been entered the prompt will read gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 6 70 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR SOLID MESH 8 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function is intended for automatic 8 node solid element generation in a volume The volume is defined by a top and bottom surface enclosed by 4 lines Each line must be defined beforehand line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible A row of N2 elements will be generated from the starting end of line 1 along line 4 on the bottom surface The pattern will be repeated N1 times along line 1 on the bottom surface The element pattern on the bottom surface will be repeated N3 times toward the top surface The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 using the right hand rule The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function
309. e menu all asterisked sections will be deleted The following menu options allow the user to select the desired sections e SECTION NAME select section by name also displays section information in dialogue window CURSOR AT ELEMENT select section by element default WINDOW select part by drag window MULTI PT REGION select part by user defined multi point region SELECT ALL UNDO ALL UNDO LAST 6 12 9 DEFINE PROPERTIES NASTRAN Description This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a property e Select a property by picking an element or property name of a property 2 After the user selects a property VPG displays a definition card for editing the element property and prompts gt SECTION ID X IS SELECTED 3 VPG displays the user defined properties in a table The user may manually modify the properties and or their values in the definition card 6 12 10 DEFINE SECTION LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to define or modify the selected property Usage 1 VPG displays the section card list with all defined properties 6 172 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the user selects a section to be redefined VPG displays its definition card The user can then redefine that section 6 12 11 ERASE UNREF SECT Description This function automatically deletes all sections that have no parts assigned to them 6 12 12 LIST NASTR
310. e surface is selected all holes on the surface are removed 6 31 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface 2 Once the surface is selected VPG prompts gt KEEP THE TRIM LINES YES NO If there is no hole on selected surface VPG prompts gt SURFACE IS UNTRIM SURFACE 6 2 23 MIDDLE SURFACE Description This function creates a middle surface in a solid part and places this surface ina new part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE e After surfaces are selected VPG generates middle surfaces automatically into a new part and the thickness property of the middle surface will be added into this new part automatically 2 VPG prompts TOGGLE ON OFF MID SURFA TOGGLE ON OFF OTHER PAF MID SURF OF TWO SURFACE SURFACES OFFSET DONE e TOGGLE ON OFF MID SURFACES display on off generated middle surfaces TOGGLE ON OFF OTHER SURFACES display on off surfaces except middle surfaces MID SURF OF TWO SURFACES select two surfaces to generate middle surface e SURFACES OFFSET select surfaces to offset offset distance is half of the part thick DONE finish and exit this function 6 2 24 SURFACE SEPARATION Description This function separates the surfaces of a solid geometry into upper and lower surfaces and places them in new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 After selecting surfaces VPG prompts 6 32 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSO
311. e system VPG prompts gt SELECT ENTITY FOR PROJECTION 4 Based on the selected entity lines points are projected onto the surface If the point or points on the line do not intersect the surface along the global Z or W vector VPG displays a message gt NO PROJECTION FOUND FOR XXXX POINT 6 1 15 RESPACE LINE Description This function allows the user to re space the number of points on the selected line equidistantly Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE FOR RESPACING POINTS 6 11 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 Once the desired line is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS ON LINE ORE TO EXIT e Enter any integer greater than two VPG includes the endpoints of the line as part of the total count of points on the line 3 EXIT or DONE to exit this function 6 1 16 REVERSE DIRECTION Description Each line has a direction defined from the starting point to the end point of the line This function allows the user to reverse the line direction Arrowheads on the line presented during SHOW LINE SPLIT etc are identifiable points and also indicate the line direction Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES e Once the line is selected the direction is automatically reversed 6 1 17 SCALE FACTOR Description This function allows the user to scale the selected lines or points with respect to any axis global or local using magnification factors in the X Y or Z U V or W directions Enteri
312. e user selects ALL PART SETS in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL PART SETS Y N YES NO If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL PART SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE If NO VPG returns the user to the PART SET submenu 6 127 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 Ifthe user selects an individual part set in step 1 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE PART SET xxxx YES NO If the user selects YES VPG deletes the part set and returns the user to step 1 If the user selects NO VPG retains the part set and returns the user to step 1 4 EXIT returns the user to the PART SET submenu 6 7 26 INCLUDE PARTS Description This function adds additional parts to the current part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PARTS FOR PART SET XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 Once the user has selected a part VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED e The user is returned to step 1 until EXIT is selected 6 7 27 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 28 REMOVE PARTS Description This function deletes parts from the current part set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PARTS FROM PART SET XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 When the user has finished selecting parts and has exited the menu VPG removes the selected parts from the set 6 7 29 RENUMBER SET Description This function renumbers the defined sets Usage 1 VPG prompts
313. e user to the NODE SET sub menu Note Because more than one node set ID number may be assigned to each node viewing all of the ID numbers at once may be confusing The user may clarify the screen by displaying one specific node set at a time 6 122 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 13 ANNOTATE ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM ELEMENT SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered the user is returned to step 1 6 7 14 CREATE ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to generate sets with unique element ID numbers The elements may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 The ELEMENT TYPE SELECTION window pops up as following ELENEHNT TYPE SELECTION Select Element Type From the Following ni CBAR _ CSHEAR _ CBEAM _ CTRIA3 CQUAD4 _ CBEND _ CTRIAG CQUADS _ CBUSH _ CTRIAR CQUADR _ CBUSHID _ CTRIAX CQUADX _ CDAMP1 _ CTRIAX6 _ CDAMP2 _ CTUBE _ CELAS1 _ PLOTEL _ CELAS2 _ RBAR _ CGAP _ RBE2 _ CONM2 _ RBE3 _ CQUAD _ SOLID _ CROD OK Cancel 2 After the user selects element set type VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW ELEMENT SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid e If the user enters an element set ID number already assigne
314. eate a local coordinate system is covered in the Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 Note Arcs and circles are generated about the local W axis or global Z axis 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A 3 lf accepted VPG prompts gt ENTER RAD TH1 TH2 INC e RAD radius of arc e TH1 beginning point of arc or circle 6 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e TH2 ending point of arc or circle INC angle increment between points default is 5 degrees e Any real value greater than zero is valid i e 100 0 360 10 is a circle with a radius of 100 units with an increment of 10 degrees between points An arc and a circle have been generated with the same center 4 VPG prompts gt SAME CENTER AND PLANE YES NO EXIT e Do you want to create another circle arc using the same center and plane e YES returns the user to step 3 NO returns the user to step 1 EXIT exits the function 6 1 3 ARC TANGENT 2 LINES Description This command allows the user to create an arc tangent to 2 lines The arc will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU The tangent arc will trim the two intersecting lines Usage Arc tangent to two lines 1 VPG prompts for a line gt SELECT LINE 1 6 4 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts for a second line gt SELECT INTERSECTING LINE 3 VPG prompts
315. ed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window Note DELETE SUBCASE does not delete the SPC and Load sets in the subcase SUBCASE CONTROL SHOW SUBCASE Description This function displays the SPC and Load sets in the selected subcases in the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO SHOW e All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window SUBCASE CONTROL MODIFY SUBCASE Description This function modifies selected subcases in the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SUBCASE CARD TO MODIFY e All available subcases are listed in the SUBCASE CARD LIST window 2 Once the user selects a subcase to modify the NASTRAN SUBCASE DEFINITION window pops up 6 9 2 LOAD Description This menu lists the options to configure and modify load sets in the VPG database Descriptions of the various commands in this function are provided in the following sections Usage 1 VPG displays the following list of commands in the options area STATIC LOAD DYNAMIC LOAD NONLINEAR LOAD TEMPERATURE FIELD EXIT 2 These options are described as subsections in the following pages LOAD STATIC LOAD Description This function defines and modifies static loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition 6 146 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following SELECTION OPTION CREATE DELETE LIST FORCE LIST PRESSURE MODIFY SCALE REMOVE F
316. ed initial velocities VPG displays the initial velocities on the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO SHOW List of all initial velocities SELECT ALL ABORT UNDO EXIT All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box 6 9 5 MPC Description This function allows the user to create and or modify the MPC Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area 6 155 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CREATE DELETE UST MODIFY EXIT 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages MPC CREATE Description This function allows the user to create the MPC Usage 1 When the user enters CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following MPC MPCADD EX EXIT After the user enters MPC or MPCADD the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can set parameters in the window MPC DELETE Description This function enables the user to remove the selected MPC cards from the database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE e All available MPC cards are listed in the MPC CARD LIST box MPC LIST Description This function lists the defined MPC cards in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE MPC MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any MPC card Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY 2 After the user se
317. ed into a total dialog window for convenience Clean Kodel Interface Option ta Select All F Select All Undo All PatihodeSection Material P Empty Part __ Unref Node MS Unref Section E Unref Material Define Cards __ Unref Curve Unref Coordinate __ Unref vector Unref SD Orientation Sets _ Empty Node Set __ Unref Node Set _ Empty Part Set __ Unref Part Set Empty Beam Set Unref Beam Set Empty Discrete Set Wnref Discrete Set Empty Shell Set Wnref Shell Set Empty Solid Set Unref Solid Set Empty Tshell Set Unref Tshell Set Ernipty Segment Set Unref Segment Set OK Cancel If an option is shown as grey it shows that there is no relative information in current database for other options user can active or inactive them as needed user can also active all these options by method Select All Click OK all active options will be implemented and VPG exits this clean model function 10 5 DISPLAY OPTIONS Description The functions of the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW control various aspects of the model s appearance 10 43 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY W LINES SHRINK FILLHIDE W SURFACES NORMAL COLOR W ELEM ORIEN SHADE The user initiates the commands via mouse pick The window remains active in the lower right corner of the screen A detailed description of each function is given in the following pages LINES SHRINK FILLHIDE SURFACES NORMAL COLOR
318. ed to define and modify the element properties physical in the database When using these commands parts with property definition are displayed according to their property colors Parts without property definition are shown in white The functions in the ELEMENT PROPERTY menu are organized as follows ELEMENT SECTION ASSIGN SECTION CHANGE COLOR COPY CREATE DELETE DEFINE SECTION ERASE UNREF SECT UST ON OFF RENUMBER SECTION PART COLOR VIEW IMPORT BEAM SECTION EXIT By toggling the solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP window the user can assign and create properties that are solver code specific However the element property menu and its functions will change slightly between NASTRAN and LS DYNA analysis For example NASTRAN refers to element properties where LS DYNA refers to element sections The user may assign and create properties at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 12 1 ASSIGN PROPERTY Description This function assigns element properties physical to selected parts Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a section gt SELECT A SECTION e The user may select a property by picking an element on the screen that contains a desired property default or by selecting a property name e f no properties are present in the database the user will be prompted with the 6 168 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6
319. eformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to simulate FMVSS301 70 rear impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER REAR MDB INFORMATION 7 46 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES TOR ODE REAR INFACT DATA ITEMS DATA ODB STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 MDB VELOCITY mm s 2 235000 E 004 VEHICLE WIDTH mm j S00000E 003 OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000 E 000 Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE REAR MDB ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the rear bumper part as target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model ETA PG Figure 6 An Example of a Generated FMVSS301 70 Rear MDB Model 7 4 6 ECE REGULATIONS 7 4 6 1 ECE 94 40 OFFSET FRONTAL IMPACT Description This function will create 40 ODB and a rigid road surface to simulate an ECE 94 Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts 7 47 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES gt ENTER ECE 40 ODB CRASH INFORMATION ECE 40 ODE CRASH DATA ITEMS esse VEHICLE ODB CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 1 555600E 004 VEHICLE WIDTH mm 1 00000E 003 OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000 E 000 Cancel Input values and press OK 2 VPG prompts gt
320. eft button is released the area that had been circled is displayed full screen a Fe This command rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently turned on FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen fal ACTIVE WINDOW This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing For a detailed description see section 10 1 16 VIEW ACTIVE WINDOW ty __ REDRAW VPG is currently designed to update the screen after each command Occasionally the use of specific commands requires that images be updated with an additional step e g when the user operates the dynamic zoom at the same time that the element normals are displayed he or she must activate the REDRAW command to resize the arrows that represent the element normals CLEAR Allows the user to remove the highlighted entities from the screen such as those that are made with the commands SHOW LINE BOUNDARY CHECK ID ELEMENT DEFINE TITLE etc 10 14 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 15 y CLEAR NODE Clear the display of connecting nodes ap 4 CLEAR ELEMENT Clear the display of connecting elements zi IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the user to identify any node Yl IDENDFIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element PEPEE F DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function e
321. elected the program will prompt the user to enter a filename to save the current display to a file of the specified format 9 7 5 2 PAPER Description The user can specify the paper size and or margin for the image print out Usage c Select the button at the top left to choose a paper size Note The supported sizes are LETTER 8 5x11 inches A4 8 26x11 69 and B5 7 17x10 13 Users can also specify a paper size for a specific paper by entering size in the width and height field d Enter a number in the field next to MARGIN to define the margin of the shorter edge of the paper The program automatically determines the margin of the longer edge in order to maintain the original aspect ratio of the picture This 9 17 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING feature can also be used to scale the picture e Select the drop down option next to UNIT to choose the unit inch or mm used for paper size and margin 9 7 5 3 ORIENTATION Description This function defines the image orientation as landscape or portrait on the printed copy 9 7 5 4 OPTION Description These options are for defining printer output and layout on the paper Usage PRINT BACKGROUND If this function is toggled on the background color of the screen will be included in the print out If this function is toggled off there will be no background color on the print out BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around the picture s border PRINT T
322. elements will be included into current part gt ACCEPT YES NO YES e SPH elements will be created NO e SPH elements will not be created V V ef Vv V V V 3 If BY ELEMENT is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT SHELL OR SOLID TO CREATE SPH AT THEIR CENTER gt SELECT ELEMENTS e After selecting elements VPG prompts 6 53 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE After entering the values VPG prompts INCLUDE SPH ELEMENT INTO NEW PART YES NO YES e SPH elements will be included into a new created part NO e SPH elements will be included into current part gt ACCEPT YES NO YES e SPH elements will be created NO e SPH elements will not be created OV V 4 If BY NODE is selected VPG prompts ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE After entering the values VPG prompts SELECT NODES SPH elements are created at the location of the selected nodes CREATE SHELL ON SOLIDS LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the CREATE SHELL ON SOLIDS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS ev Vv Usage 1 VPG checks free solid faces and prompts whether to create new part to include new created shell elements e If click OK new created shell elements will be included into this new created part e If click CANCEL a part list will pop up new created shell elements will be included into selected part if click EXIT directly no shell elements will be created 6 3 5 DELETE Descr
323. ement label on or off When LABEL is executed and parts are turned ON the screen displays the elements and the element ID numbers in the database Usage 1 Depending on the current state of the toggle VPG prompts either gt ELEMENT NUMBER WILL BE LABELED or gt ELEMENT NUMBER WILL NOT BE LABELED e When ON the element labels are superimposed on their respective elements 1853 86568 ISBD 4 86568 lt _Soseass gases 30845 G BE A508572 and 450841 86508 8656848 8650843 8658844 g5a849 BOSE BOBDA The elements displayed with their element numbers 6 3 10 MIRROR Description This function allows the user to reflect a copy of desired elements across a local or global coordinate plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS 2 Once the desired elements have been selected VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local or global VPG prompts the user to create a local system 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT Y N A e If the user selects NO VPG returns to step 2 4 Ifthe user selects YES VPG prompts gt ENTER PLANE OF MIRROR XY YZ XZ 6 59 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR XY PLANE YZ PLANE XZ PLANE 5 VPG prompts whether or not to keep the elements in their original parts gt INCLUDE
324. en enters one of the X Y or Z options that are listed to define the local W along one of the global axes 1 When creating a local coordinate system VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts for a desired coordinate system local or global inthe options area ABORT GLOBAL SYSTEM KEY IN X Y Z e This signals the user to key in the origin of the local coordinate system gt ENTER X Y Z COORDINATES e The user enters the values for the X Y and Z coordinates e g 100 0 and O NODE Default POINT SHOW LAST C S e Once the last coordinate system has been displayed see step 3 e The user may select a node or a point enter a coordinate by keyboard or use any combination of these options to create a local coordinate system 2 Once a reference point has been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE 2 ABORT DONE e After the user selects 2 reference points VPG displays the coordinate system and continues to step 3 KEY IN XYZ e The user may enter up to 3 reference points globally to define a local coordinate system INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter DX DY and DZ from the previous reference point to define a local coordinate system NODE e The user may select up to 3 nodes to define a coordinate system POINT 2 16 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features e The user may select up to 3 points to define a coordinate system REJECT LAST e This allows
325. end and a target surface the program will automatically extend the first surface till the target surface EXTEND ALONG EDGE Select a surface to extend and then select an edge of this surface enter the extending distance the surface will be extended along adjacent edges NORMAL EXTEND Select a surface to extend and then select an edge of this surface enter the extending distance the surface will be extended perpendicular to the selected edge After selecting surfaces VPG prompts IS THE OFFSET DIRECTION CORRECT ABORT Abort offset surface and exit this function REVERSE Reverse current offset direction ACCEPT Accept current highlighted offset direction 3 After confirming the offset direction VPG prompts gt ENTER OFFSET DISTANCE enter distance value and click OK the selected surfaces are offset eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 ELEMENT The ELEMENT menu contains the commands to create and modify elements and to instantly mesh IGES surfaces The 2 3 and 4 LINE MESH commands create plate elements via line data selection and the 6 8 9 and 12 LINE SOLID MESH commands create solid elements via line data selection Elements can be modified to suit a particular model with the MODIFY SPLIT and COARSE ELEMENT commands The commands in the ELEMENT menu are organized as follows ELEMENT OPTIONS COARSE ELEMENT CHANGE ID COPY CREATE DELETE DRAG MESH ELEMENT TYPE IDENTIFY ELEMENT LABEL M
326. ent database The options are similar to the options mentioned above See Figure 5 8 1 Save As Save in B OA eE T zd_segment dyn pa rt_add_set dyn ae airbag_expork dyn SCP_2 dyni My Recent appliar dyn solid_tetra dyn Documents a blanking dyn test dyn 3 bug_modelcheck dyn driver _Flat dyn Desktop a dyna dyn z ece94_odb dyn a ece95_mdb dyn My Documents ie re a fmyss214_jun3 dyn Froves214_mdb_32 dyn y g Frnvss214_mdb_33 dyn lt S hy Computer 8 Fmvss214_vpg33_dyang dyn om 444 door slam O60707 1 dyn a ihs_mdb dyn a mat_extent dyn My Network Places File name save az type LSDY NA dyn Cancel Figure 5 8 1 Export file Window 5 8 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager A detailed description of each file export function is given in the following section 5 8 1 WRITE ABAQUS FILE VPG displays the CONTROL PARAMETER window Users may select the parameters with the mouse button and enter new values through the keyboard The parameters are ABAQUS specific Refer to the ABAQUS manual for more details 1 Enter a file name up to 24 characters Using the inp convention for ABAQUS files is suggested 2 If the file name already exists VPG prompts the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3
327. ents between the 2 lines N3 optional an integer value for the side opposite N1 where N1 is not greater than 2 N3 and N3 is not greater than 2 N1 N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 where N2 is not greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not greater than 2 N2 e i e 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE e i e 5 5 12 6 NOT ACCEPTABLE 3 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept the mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH rejects the mesh and prompts for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 19 3 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements in an area defined by 3 lines line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible Elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Two mesh patterns are available for 3 Line Mesh triangular shape VPG generates the triangular elements and allows the user to position them on the model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES NODE POINT allows the user to select node or point to create temporary lines for the 3 LINE MESH function The user must select this option before creating the desired lines for 2 LINE MESH 6 68 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lin
328. er to enter a name for the defined properties EDITING FIELDS VPG s smart editing field only allows values within the specified range to be entered If the value entered is beyond the LS DYNA defined range VPG prompts the user when the user tries to move to another field or card 2 14 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features HATERIAL DEFINITION Card Select Button Card Title MATERIAL DEFINITION CARD a MAT PIE E FL WITTY i MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_PLASTIC Card ITEMS Description Field CARD DESCRIPTION Description Editing Fielde w STRAN RATE PARAMETER O 0OOO000E 000 P STRAIN RATE PARAMETER fo 000000E 000 LOSS LOAD CURVE STRESS STRAIN LCSR LOAD CURVE STRAIN SCALING 0 Field Editing Push Buttone YP FORMULATION FOR RATE EFFECTS Figure 2 15 1 Card Definition Window FIELD DESCRIPTION The field description indicates the value to be added to the editing field If the field description text is gray it indicates that the value entered in that field is dependent on another field that must be edited first EDITING PUSH BUTTON An editing button forwards the user through a series of prompts menus or cards that results in a valid value for the chosen field OK Accepts and saves the defined input data NEXT Forwards the user to the next input data window for this entity PREVIOUS Forwards the user to the previous input window for this entity CANCEL Exits without saving or defining the d
329. erate part sets with unique element and node ID numbers The parts may be included in multiple sets Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PART SET NUMBER X OR E TO EXIT e Any integer greater than zero 0 is valid eta VPG3 4 6 126 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART list of all parts e The user may press the left mouse button or type C to select the element nearest to the cursor 3 VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS SELECTED gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART list of all parts 4 When the user finishes and selects EXIT VPG prompts gt X PARTS INCLUDED IN PART SET X VPG returns to the PART SET menu 6 7 24 CURRENT PART Description This function lists the defined part sets in a pop up window The user can then select the current set from those listed Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all part sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT EXIT 2 Once the set is selected VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt CURRENT PART SET IS X 6 7 25 DELETE PART Description This function allows the user to remove part sets by ID number VPG is specifically configured to recognize part sets for this procedure For deleting part nodes refer to the command DELETE NODE earlier in this section Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM PART SET LIST List of all PART sets CURSOR AT ELEMENT ALL PART SETS EXIT 2 If th
330. erimpose the integral of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the area under the selected curve from start point to the current X point E DIFFERENTIAL This function allows the user to superimpose the derivation of the curve on the graph which the Y axis value is equal to the slope of the curve s tangent on corresponding X point x2 sauare This function allows the user to superimpose the square of the curve on the graph where the Y axis value is equal to the original Y axis value multiplying by itself ra ROOT The function allows the user to superimpose the root of the curve on the graph where the Y axis value is equal to the root of the absolute value of the original Y axis value Uy RECIPROCAL This function allows the user to superimpose the reciprocal value of the curve on the graph where the Y axis value is equal to the reciprocal value of the original Y axis value Log LOGARITHM This function allows the user to superimpose the logarithm of the curve on the graph where the Y axis value is equal to the logarithm value of the original Y axis value EUU NAPIERIAN LOGARITHM This function allows the user to superimpose the Napierian logarithm of the curve on the graph where the Y axis value is equal to the Napierian logarithm value of the original Y axis value 9 76 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING ABS ABSOLUTE VALUE This function allows the user to plot the absolute value of the Y
331. ers Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART 2 After selecting the desired part s VPG prompts gt SLECTED PART ID XX NAME XXXXX gt XXXX ELEMENTS FROM XXX PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON e The connecting elements are highlighted User can select NEIGHBOR NEXT to show more elements to displayed shells 10 17 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 3 Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON e This step is repeated until the user selects exit 10 3 5 CONNECTING NODES Description This function is used to determine node connectivity from one part in the model to another Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR CONNECTING ELEMENTS gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR A PART NAME OF A PART lt part list gt CURSOR AT ELEMENT CURSOR AT LINE CURSOR AT SURFACE CURRENT PART UNDO EXIT 2 After selecting the desired part VPG prompts gt PART XXXXX IS SELECTED gt XXXX ELEMENTS FROM XXX PARTS CONNECTED TO XXXX gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON lt connected part list gt ALL CONNECTED PARTS SELECT BY ELEMENT UNDO LAST EXIT The connecting nodes are highlighted 3 Once the part is selected VPG prompts gt PART XXXX IS TURNED ON gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME TO TURN ON e This step is repeated until the user selects exit 10 3 6
332. es for the 3 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 3 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER MESH TYPE 1 OR 2 1 TRIA AT CORNER 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE EXIT 1 TRIA AT CORNER e Triangles are concentrated in the vertex of the first two selected lines gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 2 TRIA ALONG EDGE e Triangles are concentrated along the third selected line gt ENTER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 e VPG accepts only one entry as each side has the same number of elements 6 3 20 4 LINE MESH Description This function generates elements in an area defined by 4 selected lines A rectangular pattern of N1 N2 N3 by N4 quadrilateral elements will be generated where N1 is the number of elements along the direction of the first selected line and N2 is the number of elements along the direction of the second selected line etc For a transition mesh it is possible to enter N3 and N4 parameters for the mesh each side has a different number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generated from the starting end of line 1 to the s
333. escription This function allows the user to generate 4 or 10 node solid elements automatically in a volume Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TETRA MESH OPTION 4 NODES 10 NODES EXIT 2 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 6 73 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e After parts are selected VPG automatically generates 4 10 nodes tetra mesh 6 3 22 TRANSFORM Description This function allows the user to transform selected elements by move rotate mapping LCS and normal offset The normal offset option only applies to plate elements It should be noted that the normal of the plate elements should be consistent for a proper normal offset Usage 1 VPG first prompts the user to select the desired elements 2 VPG then prompts the user to select the desired transformation MOVE ROTATE NORMAL OFFSET POINT TO POINT ABORT MOVE moves the selected elements to a new location according to the distance entered along the selected axis ROTATE rotates the selected elements to an angle increment right hand rule NORMAL OFFSET moves the selected plate elements in the normal direction by the specified thickness POINT TO POINT moves the selected plate elements from one point to the other 3 VPG prompts for a desired coordinate system local or global this step is not required for NORMAL OFFSET A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate Syste
334. escription This function will generate a Moving Deformable Barrier and a rigid road surface to simulate an ECE95 Side Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ECE95 SIDE IMPACT INFORMATION 7 49 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 ECE SIDE INFACT DATA ITEMS VEH BARRIER Y CLEARANCE mm BARRIER VELOCITY mm s X OF VEHICLE R POINT mm OF VEHICLE GROUND mm DATA 2 000000E 001 i 366689E 004 l 00000E 003 0 000000 E 000 2 VPG prompts for the crash target for MDB ABORT gt PICK A NODE TO CALCULATE BARRIER VEHICLE CLEARANCE CURSOR AT NODE KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST VPG MODULES 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as 7 50 dummy or leg to adjust their position degree You can select CHANGE ANGLE to change it VPG prompts for the location of the driver dummy gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR ECE95 DUMMY DUMMY ASSEMBLY q ABORT ROTATION ANGLE ROTATE ROUND UP DOWN RIGHTLEFT RIGHT LEFT REJECT ASSEMBLY UNDO LAST PART ON OFF EXIT out on the specified location YEG Henu Findor target position The MDB and a rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Select KEY IN X Y Z and input values The EUROPEAN SIDE IMPACT DUMMY is imported from the library and 6 A ROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The user can rota
335. escription of the DATABASE ASCII definition cards DATABASE BINARY Description The definition cards in the BINARY subsection specify the BINARY database output files Usage 1 When DEFINE is selected VPG displays the DATABASE BINARY CARD and prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DEFINE 2 The user then selects the type of BINARY card to define VPG displays the definition card to be edited The time interval once entered will be used as the default value for future cards defined To edit the time interval for subsequently defined cards the user must click once on the card to turn it on and again to have it displayed e A YES in the right column of the DATABASE BINARY CARD indicates that this type of card has been defined e A NO in the right column indicates that this type of card has not been defined e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description of the DATABASE BINARY definition cards 6 184 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DATABASE BINARY CARD D3PLOT COMPLETE OUTPUT STATE DSTHDT ELEMENT SUBSET T H D3DRLF DYNAMIC RELAXATION D3DUMP BINARY RESTART FILE D3MEAN MEAN VALUE DATABASE D3PART PARTIAL OUTPUT STATE D3aCRACK CRACK DATA INTFOR CONTACT INTERFACE DATA RUNRSF BINARY RESTART FILE XTFILE EXTRA TIME HISTORY DATA FISFOR ALE INTERFACE FORCE DATA EXIT DATABASE CROSS SECTION Description The definition cards in the CROSS SECTION subsection define a cross section for resultant
336. eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY highlighted in white 10 1 12 TRUE VIEW Description This function allows the user to display an object in true view or the normal view of the local W axis as projected onto the local UV plane Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE POINT FOR ORIGIN e VPG asks for a desired coordinate system local or global 2 VPG displays the coordinates on screen and prompts gt ACCEPT Y N A NO returns the user to step 1 YES continues this command to step 3 ABORT 3 VPG prompts gt KEEP ANY GLOBAL AXIS VERTICAL Y N YES gt ENTER THE VERTICAL GLOBAL AXIS x y z e The user may select an axis to be displayed from the bottom to the top of the screen The object remains in its true view if this option is selected No NO displays the object in its true view perpendicular to the W axis This option displays the desired geometry in its true view according to the global X Y and Z coordinates or to the Z axis displayed vertically 4 VPG prompts gt DO YOU WISH TO MAP ANY LINE ON TO THE X Y PLANE YES NO exits the TRUE VIEW function 5 If the user selects YES VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES ABORT EXCLUDE ON OFF LINE MULTI POINT REGION PART WINDOW REJECT LAST DONE 6 Selecting DONE copies the selected lines along the XY plane in true view 10 1 13 HIDDEN SURFACE REMOVAL toggle Description This function improves the integrity of the
337. eta VPG_ User s Manual A Mechanical System Simulation Software eta VPG Version 3 4 Manual Release Date Apr 08 2009 FOREWORD The concepts methods and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design This material is a compilation of data and figures from many sources Engineering Technology Associates Inc assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein Engineering Technology Associates Inc 1133 East Maple Road Suite 200 Troy MI 48083 Phone 248 729 3010 Support 800 ETA 3362 Fax 248 729 3020 Engineering Technology Associates Inc ETA the ETA logo and eta VPG are the registered trademarks of Engineering Technology Associates Inc All other trademarks or names are the property of their respective owners Copyright 2009 Engineering Technology Associates Inc All rights reserved TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Documentation eta VPG History eta VPG Methodology eta VPG Software Package eta VPG Special Features CHAPTER 2 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW General Pre Processor Post Processor Menu System Function Keys Display Window Icon Bar Mouse Functions Keyboard Entry Specifications Line Data Conventions VPG File Menu Recommen
338. ether to add the plotel elements into a new part 6 33 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 26 CHECK DUPLICATE Description This function checks duplicate surfaces in database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES PARABETERS IO CHECKE 5 TOLERANCE 0 007000 DENSITY 4 000000 Ok Back Cancel TOLERANCE search tolerance of the checked surfaces DENSITY sample point density level of the checked surfaces Ok accept current input Back return to last input Cancel exit this function without executing 2 After defining above parameter VPG begins to check duplicate surfaces in database if there is no duplicate surfaces found otherwise VPG prompts YEG Question Include duplicate surfaces in a new part e YES duplicate surfaces are added to a new part user needs to enter a name for this new part No duplicate surfaces are reserved in original parts 6 2 27 SKIN SURFACE Description This function creates a surface by several lines Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES IN ORDER ABORT LINE e Select skin lines this is the default option REJECT e Reject last select lines DONE e generate surface after selecting lines user can go on selecting lines to generate surfaces EXIT 6 2 28 OFFSET SURFACE 6 34 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function helps to offset surfaces along their normal or reverse normal directions for a distance Usage
339. fset value has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CBEAM ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three 3 Once the desired nodes points have been selected VPG prompts gt PICK NODE PT OR VECTOR FOR CBEAM ORIENTATION NODE POINT VECTOR e Up to three values may be entered to define a vector normal to the beam s local XY plane 4 When user enters VECTOR VPG prompts gt ENTER CBEAM VECTOR i e 0 0 1 CREATE TRUSS ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the TRUSS ELEMENT subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT e VPG prompts the user to enter a property name if no properties exist in the database at the current time Once a name is entered a pop up window will appear with a list of properties to edit 2 Once the property ID has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e An element will be created after two nodes points are selected e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE HOLLOW TUBE NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the HOLLOW TUBE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW PROPERTY NAME OR EX TO EXIT e VPG prompts the user to
340. full screen A FREE HAND ZOOM The user defines a free region by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen to define the region Releases the left button the area included the region will be displayed in full screen ue FILL Rescale the model to include all entities that are currently displayed FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen gt top view Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane T ue Y Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the RIGHT or in the YZ plane a X Z VIEW Automatically displays the model from the LEFT or in the XZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW Automatically displays the model from the isometric plane 60 degree isometric g CLEAR Remove the highlighted entities from the screen zi IDENTIFY NODE 9 7 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING This function enables the user to identify any node by cursor selection default or key in node number The program labels the node number of the selected node is highlighted on the screen and the outputs the coordinates in the message window Figure 9 3 shows the CONTROL OPTION window when the function starts Control Option Node ID Exit Figure 9 3 Identify Node Control Option Window SELECT BY CURSOR Default The program highlights the node that is nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button when the desi
341. function toggles plate normal on and off The plate normal is shown with a vector drawn at the center of element and along the element s normal direction 9 4 2 9 BACKGROUND toggle Description If this function is toggled on the background color is set to white Otherwise default background color is black 9 4 3 PRIORITY OF FUNCTIONS Description The functions in eta Post are prioritized Functions in Display Options can be accessed to at any time The functions in Edit and Tool menu have the highest priority If any of these functions is started all other functions in eta POST are disabled Control Window has the lowest priority The user is enabled to access other functions when Control window is opened Only functions in Edit menu Tool menu and Display Option can be used during animation 9 4 4 CONTROL WINDOW AND CONTROL OPTION WINDOW Description eta Post incorporates two types of window FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW and CONTROL WINDOW At the bottom of the FUNCTION DIALOG WINDOW there are buttons to execute reject reset the data or close the window The functions of these buttons are listed below Usage APPLY Executes the current function CANCEL Rejects the current operation EXIT Exits the current window OK Accepts the data in the dialog box and forwards the user to the next step UNDO Rejects the last step of the operation 9 11 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING RESET Restores the original set REJECT Rejects
342. g VPG requirements 1 Generation of complicated full vehicle full system models and retention of complex non linear material properties contact definitions etc 2 Generation and retention of user defined libraries and modules such as a tire library proving ground road surface libraries etc 3 Post processing of potentially large amounts of analysis data displacement forces acceleration stress and strain derived from time domain solution of multiple events and the conversion from time domain results into frequency domain results frequency mode shape and PSD etc 4 Post processing of stress and strain results of multiple events and conducting the fatigue life prediction 5 Modeling and set up of vehicle impact analyses using FMVSS ECE and Insurance Institute standard testing procedures The key features are briefly described below A more detailed explanation of these features is found in Chapter 7 LS DYNA 971 Interface Module eta VPG incorporates a complete direct LS DYNA version 971 interface eta VPG reads and writes all LS DYNA 971 cards eliminating the need for text editing of the input deck It creates and retains all material nonlinear properties contact definitions and loading conditions Tire Model Generator eta VPG s tire model generator allows for easy construction of tire models The tire model generation tool employs specific tire geometry and inflation pressure to automatically construct a three dime
343. g and display functions As an example the user may add Arrows or Comments on the screen for additional information when creating JPEG or GIF image files An important feature of the UTILITIES menu is the SETUP command This command allows the user to specify display and model database characteristics From this menu the user may specify the model type and global parameters to be applied to the model On the SETUP menu the user may specify the analysis program for the current database This function defines the menus that will be displayed as well as the content of those menus As an example when the NASTRAN option is selected for this command the menus will then contain the material types element types and boundary conditions that pertain to NASTRAN models All analysis parameters will also be specified in a manner consistent with NASTRAN If the user selects LS DYNA similarly all menus material models contact types and element types will be consistent with LS DYNA models 4 15 VIEW This menu allows users to manipulate the model in the Display Window Views may be saved and recalled by the user 4 16 MACRO The MACRO menu allows the user to record commands executed by VPG and the replays those commands in an automated fashion 4 17 HELP The Version submenu allows user to identify the build date and version of the VPG software The Online Help menu provides access to the on line version of this user manual in a searchable form
344. g surfaces Note This surface is referred to as a Secondary surface in this section 2 Once the second surface has been selected and the user enters EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY ABORT DONE EXIT SURFACE BOUNDARY e This creates the outer closed surface boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e This locates an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the outer boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e This rejects the last curve selected for the trim operation 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT CLOSED CURVE AS INNER BOUNDARY e This retains the surface between the outer boundary and the inner boundary during the trim operation The inner boundary can be a line segment open spline closed spline or circle e ABORT DONE EXIT 6 29 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR NO INNER BOUNDARY e This trims the outside surface of the outer boundary CURVE ON SURFACE e The user may select an existing curve on the surface open or closed as the inner boundary of the trim operation REJECT LAST CURVE e This rejects the last curve selected for the trim operation 4 VPG then prompts gt DELETE THE ORIGINAL SURFACE Y N e YES generates a trimmed surface NO generates a trimmed surface and retains the original surface 5 VPG returns the user to step 2 of the TRIM SURFACE command TRIM SURFACE OPEN CURVE Description This function defines an open curve on a selected surface After determining t
345. ge 1 VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL e The user selects a material by picking an element C or material name M of a material 2 After the user selects a material the MATERIAL DEFINITION window appears and a prompt reads gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED 3 VPG displays the properties and the type of material that the user has defined in a table The user may modify the properties in the window HATERIAL DEFINITION MATERIAL DEFINITION CARD 1 har MAT1 ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION MID MATERIAL ID E YOUNG S MODULUS 2 070000E 005 G SHEAR MODULUS 0 000000E 000 NU POISSON S RATIO 2 800000E 001 RHO MASS DENSITY 7 830000E 009 A THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT 0 000000E 000 TREF REFERENCE TEMPERATURE 0 000000E 000 GE DAMPING COEFFICIENT 0 000000E 000 OK Next Previous Cancel Define Properties 6 11 7 ERASE UNREF MATL Description This function automatically deletes all materials that have no parts assigned to them Usage 6 165 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG deletes any unreferenced materials If unreferenced materials are found VPG shows the number of materials found and prompts gt OK TO DELETE 1 UNREFERENCED MATERIALS Y N If no unreferenced materials are found VPG prompts gt NO UNREF MATERIALS FOUND and returns to the material menu 6 11 8 LIST MATERIALS Description This function lists the defined materials in the MATERIAL
346. h Check Mesh Quality MIN ELEM SIZE cn MIAKELEM SIZE TRIA MIN INT ANGLE TRIA MAX INT ANGLE QUAD MIN INT ANGLE QUAD MAX INT ANGLE WARPAGE TAPER ASPECT RATIO o o 8 2 8 2 2 213 E OU DE Ea EI GI EI GE JACOBIN The user may modify any of the model checking parameters in the table and selects OK A MESH CHECK REPORT window is displayed summarizing the model mesh quality by parts MESH CHECK REPORT m E Triangle MinSize MaxSize Warpage Taper Aspect Tri Ang Quad ng Jacobin PARTOS3E 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prartosac o 0 foo fioo o foo oos foo foo oos foo PARTOS4C 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PPaRTosac o 0 0 0 fiooo foo foo foo foo 0 0 PARTO541 0 0 0 0 100 0 3 6 1 8 0 0 0 0 9 1 1 8 rpaRTos41 0 0 foo fiooo fae 18 oos foo 91 PARTOS4 7 1 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 1 0 0 0 0 PPARTOS4 7 1 foo fioo foo foo foo f71 oos PARTO542 3 4 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 3 0 0 pPaRTosaz 34 foo fiooo foo foo foo foo fios PARTO544 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 FPARTOS44 0 0 0 0 fiooo fos oos foo oos 16 PARTOS4E 113 6 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 5 4 5 0 0 PPARTOS4E 13 6 oo fiooo foo 0 0 foo 45 45 PARTO564 6 2 0 0 100 0 6 2 0 4 0 0 1 2 0 8 0 8 PPARTOS64 6 2 foo 100 0 fe2 foa oos f12 08 PART
347. h an asterisk and highlight the part on the screen The program will not shade the selected parts when the SHADE option is turned on Please see the Figure 9 23 NO CONTOUR The user may choose not to show contour result in select parts Click on the NO CONTOUR option and Part attributes Option Wireframe Selected By Figure 9 23 Part Attributes control window Wire Frame Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING select the parts from the part list window or click the TPE part from the screen The program will mark the part name with an asterisk and highlight the parts on the Option Mo Contour r screen Clicks APPLY and the program will not display contour of the selected part during CONTOUR ANIMATION Instead the selects parts will be plotted in gray color Please see the Figure 9 24 Selected By There are some functional buttons on the Part Attributes window for the user to easily select groups of parts ALL PARTS Enable the user to select all the parts on the Figure 9 24 Part Attributes control current database window No Contour DISPLAYED Enables the user to select all the parts that displaying on the current window REVERSE Enables the user to reverse the selected parts All the selected parts will be unselected and all the unselected parts will be selected CLEAR SELECTION Turn all the selected parts to unselected UNDO Enables the user to cancel the last selected operati
348. h cursor DONE EXIT e EXIT completes the show line and exits this function 6 1 20 SPLIT LINE Description The user may split a line at a desired cursor location at the nearest point or at an intersection with another line Usage 1 VPG prompts SPLIT BY CURSOR SPLIT BY PLANE EXIT SPLIT BY CURSOR is selected go to step 2 SPLIT BY PLANE is selected go to step 4 2 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO SPLIT 3 VPG prompts gt PICK SPLIT LOCATION ABORT CURSOR LOCATION anywhere the user clicks the mouse LINE The line will split at the location closest to the intersection of the 6 14 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR selected line POINT The line will split at the selected point closest to the selected line REJECT LAST ABORT will exit this function 4 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e VPG prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 5 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen 6 Ifthe user accepts the coordinate system VPG prompts gt DISTANCE FROM PLANE W e Users may now input a distance along the W axis from origin of the selected coordinate system e Any real value is a valid response 7 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO SPLIT ABORT LINE The line will be split by UV offset plane REJECT
349. h operation 9 83 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITY includes the following sections VIEWING OPTIONS ICON BAR FUNCTIONS PART CONTROL UTILITY and DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW The functions in these sections allow the user to alter the model s display define the model s parameters and define the model s part makeup 10 1 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 1 VIEW OPTIONS The functions in the VIEWING OPTIONS menu are used to adjust the display of the items on the screen See Figure 10 1 VIEW CHANGE COLOR MAGNIFY WINDOW REPEAT REVERSE ROTATION RECALL VIEW SAVE VIEW VIEWPORTS ON OFF SCREEN ROT VIRTUAL ROT DEFINE TITLE CURSOR ZOOM TRUE VIEW HIDDEN SURFACE REM TRANSP MODE ON OFF MOVE LIGHT SOURCE ACTIVE WINDOW EXPLODE VIEW NORMAL COLOR ON OFF RIGID NODE ON OFF EXIT Figure 10 1 View Option Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 1 1 CHANGE COLORS Description The functions in this submenu allow the user to change the color of any displayed item including part colors See Figure 10 1 1 CHANGE COLORS CHANGE PART COLORS COLOR BAR EXIT Figure10 1 1 Change Color Menu CHANGE PART COLORS Description This function changes the colors of selected parts The user may activate a color change when the parts are on or off 10 2 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART TO CHANGE CO
350. hanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters e VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N e YES outputs only the elements displayed on the screen e NO outputs all of the existing elements in the database e After entering the appropriate selection the user returns to the FILE MANAGER menu Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the 5 14 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager properties materials by default by global default or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A Programs 5 8 9 WRITE NASTRAN SOL 700 FILE This function allows the user to output a NASTRAN SOL 700 dat data file directly from the VPG database 1 VPG prompts FORMAT OPTION UNITS SYSTEM EXIT e FORMAT OPTION User selects output format as single field or double field e UNIT SYSTEM User selects unit system for output file 2 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO 3 VPG prompts to enter termination time The output file is written after entering this value 5 8 10 WRITE ANSYS FILE This function allows the user to output a ANSYS cdb data file directly from the VPG database 5 9 PRINT This function creates a postscript file of display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver m
351. hapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO e VPG prompts the user to check individual elements for interior angle via cursor pick Select EXIT to exit this function 6 5 6 CHECK OVERLAP Description This function checks the elements for duplicate nodal connectivity All element types are checked Usage 1 CHECK OVERLAP ELEM If no overlapping elements are found in the displayed elements the following message Is echoed and the user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu gt NO OVERLAP ELEMENT FOUND If duplicate elements are found in the displayed elements the following message will be echoed gt xxxx OVERLAP ELEMENTS FOUND VPG will continue with the option of adding these elements to a new part 2 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE DUPLICATE ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The duplicate elements will be removed from their original parts and added to the NEW PART The new part will be ON and CURRENT NO e The user will exit to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 7 CHECK JACOBIAN Description This function allows the user to check for element distortion against the element s ideal shape which is given a Jacobian value of 1 0 The more an element is warped the closer it approaches a zero Jacobian value Elements that fail the Jacobian check are color filled and the user has the option of putting them in a separate part Usage 1 VPG prompts gt E
352. he surface type of curve and points this function connects the points leaving the curve open with the first and last point selected as the starting and ending points of the curve j pE pe o a h a f s k is E y me A f i i T k i i i Ti F w ee x i i ae _f f a f 3 L k T Me li i a 7 F _ 1 Se i a T 1 l Tam al I T i f i a _ i 7 E R J f j l r F t a l l i I I Sy 7 ka i an ot 5 een 3 i i fi A E i nee 4 rd t m r t a x i Aa a 7 TRIM SURFACE POINT Description POINT is the default option in the trim surface menu Users may pick locations on the surface defining piecewise linear segments for trim operations TRIM SURFACE SPLINE CURVE Description This function cuts spline curves on a selected surface The user defines the location of the spline via mouse pick Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NEXT POINT FOR SPLINE CURVE e Once the user has selected the points for the curve then enters DONE CLOSED or enters OPEN CURVE to complete the spline e DONE CLOSED defines a closed spline curve passing through all 6 30 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR the points selected e OPEN CURVE defines a spline curve passing through all the points selected with the first and last point selected as the starting and ending points of the curve The user then selects exit twice 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT A CLOSED CURVE AS OUTER BOUNDARY e ABORT DONE EX
353. he Edit functions Create Line Delete Line Label Arrow Rotate Light Light Property Color Map Part Attributes Rotate View User View Background Color Figure 9 13 Edit menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 9 8 1 CREATE LINE Description This function enables the user to create a line by selecting a set of nodes In eta Post a line is formed by a sequence of points The program displays the line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence The generated lines are included in a new part The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 9 14 Control Option Select by Cursor End Pick Reject Last Reject All Figure 9 14 Create Line Control Option window Usage SELECT BY CURSOR Select the location of the node a point will be created END PICK Click this button to create a line by a set of straight line segments between adjacent points in sequence ENCLOSE LINE The created line is closed by a straight line segment between the first selected and 9 20 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING the last selected point REJECT LAST The last selected node is rejected REJECT ALL All selected nodes are rejected EXIT Exit the function 9 8 2 DELETE LINE Description This function enables the user to delete the selected line s 9 8 3 LABEL ARROW Description LABEL allows the user to enter a title or text label a
354. he analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 10 6 11 1 ASSIGN MATERIAL Description This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 1 If no materials are present in the database VPG gives the message NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL e Users may select an existing material by entering one by name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 6 163 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 4 The material will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected parts will be shown in the material color after the user exits this command 6 11 2 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected material Usage 1 The color bar is displayed on the right edge of the graphic area 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color from the color bar 6 11 3 COPY Description This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts
355. he selected file format Note EXPORT function is disabled until a d3plot file or NASTRAN punch output2 file is read in 9 7 4COPY TO CLIPBOARD Description This function allows the user to save the model displayed in the GRAPHICS DISPLAY window to the clipboard in the Windows environment The image in the clipboard can be pasted to the document files 9 7 5 PRINT Description The PRINT function prints the contents of the graphics display window to a printer or saves it to an image file This function allows the user to define the default settings for printing or saving image files The options are shown in Figure 9 12 9 16 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Paper etanjHP LaserJet 6L Letter C Print To File Width Height mm Eo Margin i Unit linch Portrait ption M Print Background Bounding Box i Print Stamp Time Print File Name Print ETA Logo Keep Background White C Print Graphic Description Print Cancel Figure 9 12 Print Window 9 7 5 1 PRINTER Description The user can select a printer or select a format to save to a file Usage a Enter the printer name in the field or select from the drop down list and click PRINT to print the image b If PRINT TO FILE option is selected the user can choose a format by selecting the options in the drop down list in FORMAT window DYNAFORM supports Postscript PS Encapsulated Postscript EPS GIF and JPEG file formats Note When PRINT TO FILE is s
356. he user should check the database translation to be sure that the entity is defined adequately in the translated model a complete list of all translations follows When converting RADIOSS to LS DYNA or vice versa the user should always check the definition of spring elements loading conditions air bags seat belt parts dummies and barriers These entities are either unsupported in the translation or the adequacy of the translation is questionable A complete list of all translations follows RADIOSS INTERFACE 1 The new RADIOSS interface template supports all RADIOSS cards in version 4 4 4 1 3 1 and 2 3 2 VPG 3 2 allows model manipulation of RADIOSS materials element properties boundary conditions local coordinates loads initial velocities contact and rigid walls 3 VPG 3 2 also supports the following functions accelerometer sensor fixed velocity section and monitored volume 4 Rigid body and cylindrical joint elements were enhanced to use node set 5 Multiple RADIOSS input files can be read at one time and directly read write RADIOSS input files in DYNA970 NASTRAN database KEY SUMMARIES FOR CONVERSION RADIOSS TO LS DYNA970 ELEMENT 1 Primary Nodal Rigid Body should be re calculated by VPG 3 2 2 Beam Truss and Spring elements in Radioss converts to Beam element in LS DYNA V970 C 1 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C 3 Joint element in Radioss convert to CONSTRAINED NODAL BODY and one CONSTRAINED JOINT CYLINDRICAL when
357. height Specified Height define initial analysis height Main Control cards active control cards about contact etc Total Time time needed from initial analysis height to the floor Steps in d3plot files steps during simulation Steps in time ASCII files steps during simulation 7 9 3 4 TIME HISTORY OPTION Description this function is used to add and control the output file options The user can select the desired nodes and elements to output the desired file The types of the output files are 7 93 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Animation file d3plot Node output file nodout Element output file elout Total energy message of the model glstat Material absorption capability matsum Resultant contact force during impact rcforc Contact energy message sleout Time History Files ELOUT GLSTAT MATSUM RCFORC SLEOUT Nodes Add Remove show Elements Add Remove Show 7 9 3 5 RUN IT NOW Description this function enables the user to output the analysis file and submit it to dyna immediately for simulation 7 9 3 6 EXPORT DYNA FILE Description this function exports the analysis file but do not run it now 7 9 4 SHOCK TEST This Shock Test can quickly create simulation models for shock tests in accordance with the process guidance For a Shock Test process Users define a shock base with a certain diameter A time domain curve is created or read in as a motional curve And a boundary
358. hell elements in database 6 76 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Auto Ee mesh Segmentation Normal Angle Segment Mesh Repair Regions _ Add to Region Merge Regions Create Region Mesh Control m Auto Repair hw Pave Inner Hole l Delete original mesh Original Size 15 New Elem Size Boundary Gap 2 500 Ignore Hole Size 0 000 Mesh Quality Re mesh Accept Mesh Usage 1 VPG prompts to do segment mesh SEGMENT MESH e Input Normal Angle between 1 30 degree and do segment mesh User can input new angle value and click this button many times 2 after click SEGMENT MESH user can adjust region ADD TO REGION e select elements and add them to the target region MERGE REGION e select regions one by one and they are merged into one region click middle mouse to accept the merge and right mouse to cancel the merge right mouse again to exit merge region CREATE A REGION e select elements to make up a new region 3 User can select option for elements AUTO REPAIR e VPG will repair elements during regenerate elements PAVE INNER HOLE e Quadrangle elements will be meshed around the inner hole DELETE ORIGINAL ELEMENTS e Original elements will be deleted if this option is on ORIGINAL SIZE e VPG automatically check the original elements size NEW ELEMENT SIZE e User needs to enter this size for regenerated elements BOUNDARY GAP e Gaps less than this value will be
359. hould be less than or equal to the drop height Drop height take drop height as initial analysis height Specified Height user define initial analysis height Total Time time needed from initial analysis height to the floor Steps in d3plot files steps during simulation Steps in time ASCII files steps during simulation 7 9 1 5 TIME HISTORY OPTION Description this function is used to add and control the output file options The user can select the desired nodes and elements to output the desired file The types of the output files are Animation file d3plot Node output file nodout Element output file elout Total energy message of the model glstat Material absorption capability matsum Resultant contact force during impact rcforc Contact energy message sleout 7 86 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES Time History Files ELOUT GLSTAT L MATSUM RCFORC SLEOQUT Nodes Add Remove show Elements Add Remove Show OK 7 9 1 6 RUN IT NOW Description this function enables the user to output the analysis file and submit it to dyna immediately for simulation 7 9 1 7 BATCH OUTPUT Description this function is used to output a series of calculation output files from different drop height or drop angle with other parameters stay unchanged Multiple simulations can be completed at one time The output files will be named as DI Mdeck001 dyn DI Mdeck002 dyn etc Sequential Drop Height Or
360. howing element normal or orientation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt NORMAL ORIENTATION COLOR ON or gt NORMAL ORIENTATION COLOR OFF 10 9 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY e When this option is on the normal or orientation will be shown with colour instead of arrow 10 1 19 RIGID NODE ON OFF Description This function toggles the rigid body node on or off when creating rigid link Usage 1 VPG prompts gt RIGID BODY NODE FILTER IS ON or gt RIGID BODY NODE FILTER IS OFF e When this option is on rigid body node will be shown as highlighted spots when try to create rigid link 10 1 20 ROTATE CENTER ON OFF Description This function helps to rotate model with a specified center When this option is on and user clicks the icon Free Rotation VPG will prompt user to select a rotation center 10 1 21 SHOW CARDS Description This function integrates all showing functions in VPG into a total menu page user here can show material section contact boundary condition initial condition constraint load and set please refer following figure and user can also find these functions in other menus of VPG 10 10 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 2 ICON BAR SHOW CARDS SECTION PROPERTY MATERIAL PROPERTY CONTACT BOUNDARY CONDITIONS PRESCRIBED MOTION oP CONSTRAINT CARDS EXTRA NODE RIGID BODY INITIAL CONDITIONS VELOCITY LOAD CARDS BEAM IE yy NODE PLATE PRESSURE SET BEAM DISCRETE NODE PART S
361. ibute data option of set if this option is on user can define the DA option when creating set 6 6 15 MODIFY SET ATTRIBUTE Description This function allows the user to modify DA1 DA4 options in the card of SET_PART SET NODE SET SHELL SET_ SEGMENT and SET_ 2D SEGMENT 6 118 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 7 SET MENU NASTRAN The functions in the SET MENU create sets that facilitate the organization of output control data The following options are available in the SET menu when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN in the SETUP MENU SET MENU ELEMENT NODE PART SEGMENT SPC EXIT Note If the analysis code is set to LS DYNA see section 6 6 Each option contains a similar submenu with the following options for manipulating the output control of their respective set groups ANNOTATE CREATE CURRENT DELETE REMOVE EMPTY SETS REMOVE UNREF SETS INCLUDE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS LIST REMOVE ELEMENTS NODES PARTS RENUMBER SET REVIEW LIST SHOW SET SET ON OFF PART VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 7 1 ANNOTATE NODE Description This function allows the user to add notes to a selected set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List of all sets CURSOR AT NODE EXIT 2 After selecting a set VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED gt ENTER CARD DESCRIPTION 70 CHAR MAX Once the note is entered
362. id number as unreferenced Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER TOL DEFAULT 0 01 e Any positive real number is a valid entry 2 After entering a tolerance VPG prompts the user to select the nodes to be checked gt SELECT OPTION FOR COINCIDENT NODE CHECK 6 83 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR COINCIDENT NODE CHECE OPTION NODE CHOICES SELECTED NODES ALL NODES MERGED BY LOWER ID HIGHER ID MIDDLE POSITION e Cancel Exits the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu without executing COINCIDENT NODE CHECK e After selecting one of the previous options or if no coincident nodes are found the user returns to the NODE OPTIONS menu e f coincident nodes are found VPG prompts gt XXXX COINCIDENT NODES FOUND gt PICK AN OPTION TO OPERATE FOUND COINCIDENT NODES COINCIDENT NODE OPTION MERGE AND DELETE MERGE ONLY EXIT MERGE AND DELETE Unreferenced nodes after merging will be deleted e MERGE ONLY Coincident nodes become unreferenced nodes and are represented by asterisks e VPG will not merge nodes belonging to the same element i e zero length elements with unique node numbers will not be merged avoiding the degeneration of the element 6 4 6 COPY Description This function generates a new set of unreferenced nodes at a user specified location from either referenced or unreferenced nodes Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Once the nodes have been selected DONE concludes this step 2 VPG
363. il the user selects DONE or ABORT CREATE ALDS LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the ALDS subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS This function will create ALDS Arbitrary Location Deformable Spotweld elements Usage 1 After define the section beam card VPG prompts gt SELECT MASTER PARTS gt SELECT AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After selecting parts click EXIT VPG prompts gt PICK ALDS LOCATION e Click cursor on the screen ALDS is created The contact between ALDS and elements they connect are created automatically CREATE MAT100 BEAM SPOTWELD LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the MAT100 BEAM SPOTWELD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 After define the section beam and mat100 card VPG prompts gt SELECT MASTER PARTS gt SELECT AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 2 After selecting parts click EXIT VPG prompts gt PICK MAT 100 SPOTWELD LOCATION e Click cursor on the screen MAT100 beam spotweld is created The contact between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically CREATE MAT100 BRICK SPOTWELD LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the MAT100 BRICK SPOTWELD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 After define the section solid and mat100 card VPG prompts gt PLEASE ENTER THE DIAMETER OF SPOTWELD 2 After entering the value VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 3 Afte
364. ill cause a computational error and too large a number will cause the program to stall Usage After the user enters the appropriate parameters clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window Press Apply to display the filter result 9 12 7 COMPUTATION Description This function allows the user to create a new curve through the algebraic operation of several selected curves including Add Subtract Multiply Divide and so on This function enables two or more curves to be selected and added to each other SUBTRACT This function enables two or more curves to be selected and subtracted form each other x MULTIPLY This function enables two or more curves to be selected and multiplied a DIVIDE This function enables two or more curves to be selected and the values are divided to from a quotient curve 9 81 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING aa a BRACKET This function enables the user to change the priority level of an expression s TRANSLATE This function enables the user to create a new curve with two selected curves The new X axis value is equal to the Y axis value of the first selected curve and the new Y axis value is equal to the Y axis value of the second curve 9 12 8 RESULT CURVE Description This function can display the expression dynamically during the operation For example if the user want to square a curve and integrate it The user can click the curve name
365. ime outside of VPG If the user wishes to automatically execute the simulation from within VPG the RUN ANALYSIS option should be selected prior to selecting the OK button 8 5 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Chapter Chapter 9 Post Processing 9 1 INTRODUCTION The POST function in VPG is a general post processor for all ETA software including DYNAFORM VPG and FEMB POST is an independent application module that is started when the user selects POST from the main menu The POST module quickly post processes result data of finite element analyses including the real time animation of stresses strain energy displacements and time history curves Its fully dynamic allocation of memory optimizes system resources allowing for unlimited model sizes 9 1 eta VPG 3 4 9 2 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 2 GENERAL OVERVIEW The POST application interface varies slightly from the preprocessing user interface It allows the user to quickly access most functions at any time during the session The icon bar and menu bar functions behave in the same manner as the preprocessing functions eta Post breaks the screen into six distinct regions The regions are used to provide input or display messages to the user The six regions are illustrated and described in Figure 9 1 ETA Post Processor 1 5 8 H results_bake CRASHWORTHIBESS FEVSS fmv214_ sidecrash d3plot File Edit Tool Option Hel p Vienu Dar cell ola doo osc Ac
366. imulate the FMVSS208 0 Degree or 30 Degree Frontal Impact Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RIGID WALL CRASH INFORMATION RIGID WALL DATA eee RIGID WALL STRUCTURE CLEARANCE m 5 000000E 001 VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 1 341600E 004 Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm 0 000000E 000 RIGID WALL Odeg 1 30deg 2 1 _ Cancel 2 VPG prompts gt PICK VEHICLE FRONT BUMPER TO LOCATE RIGID WALL ABORT CURSOR AT NODE KEY IN X Y Z 7 ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the bumper part as the target position The Frontal rigid wall and rigid road surface will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model Barrier and Ground Planes positioned with vehicle Tee Lek ieee Figure 3 An Example of a Generated FMVSS208 Frontal Impact Model 7 4 5 4 FMVSS 216 ROOF CRUSH Description This function allows users to create and position a rigid plate used to simulate the FMVSS216 roof crush test Usage 7 44 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ROOF CRASH INFORMATION ROOF CRUSH DATA ITEMS _ DATA ROOF IMPACTOR CLEARANCE mm 2 OO0000E 001 ROOF BOUNDARY VELOCITY mm s 2 231944E 003 ROOF HORIZONTAL ANGLE deg 5 000000 E 000 ROOF VERTICAL ANGLE deg 2 500000E 001 Cancel 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE
367. in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT BOUNDARY CARDS ACOUSTIC COUPLING Description This function defines acoustic coupling boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS AMBIENT EOS Description This function defines ambient Equation of State boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS CONVECTION Description This function defines convection boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS CYCLIC Description These boundary conditions can be used to model a segment of an object that has rotational symmetry such as an impeller The segment boundaries may be curved or planar Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS ELEMENT METHOD Description This function defines element method boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS FLUX Description This function defines flux boundary conditions for a thermal or coupled thermal structural analysis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS MCOL Description This function defines MCOL boundary conditions Refer to the L
368. ines line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The new surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES 6 20 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 3 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 3 LINE SURFACE The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section Once the lines have been selected and a surface is created Note Select lines in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction Note The direction of the surface normal dictates the direction of the plate element normals 6 2 7 4 LINE SURFACE Description This function generates a surface in an area defined by 4 selected lines The created surface is included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES e LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 4 LINE SURFACE function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 4 LINE MESH e The user m
369. ing or splitting of surfaces 6 2 14 SCALE Description This function allows the user to scale selected surfaces with respect to any axis global or local using magnification factors in the X Y or Z U V or W directions A scale factor greater than 1 will magnify the surface whereas a scale factor less than 1 will reduce the surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select the surfaces 2 Once the surfaces have been selected VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 3 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTOR OR E TO EXIT This scales the surface 6 2 15 SURF NORMAL ON OFF toggle Description This function controls the on and off display of normal vectors on a surface The normal vector below is shown at the center of the surface 6 23 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 16 SPLIT Description This function allows the user to split selected surfaces in several different ways All the options for splitting surfaces are addressed below Usage 1 VPG prompts to select surface 2 Upon selection of the surface VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION TO SPLIT DEFAULT IS SECTION LINE e User selects a displayed section line to split a surface TWO POINTS ON BOUNDARY gt SEL
370. ing sections and are also included in the Step by Step simulation procedure when applicable The details development process and validation data are available upon request 7 38 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 3 VPG Safety Menu The following functions are included in the VPG SAFETY menu SAFETY MENU CRASHWORTHINESS OCCUPANT SAFETY AIRBAG MENU DUMMY POSITION DELETE MODELING TOOL EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 4 4 Crashworthiness Menu 7 39 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 7 40 VPG MODULES CRASHWORTHINESS FMVSS REGULATIONS 214b SIDE DOOR INTRUSION 214 DYNAMIC SIDE IMPACT 208 RIGID WALL O 30DEG 216 ROOF CRUSH 301 FLAT REAR IMPACT 301 70 ODB REAR IMPACT ECE REGULATIONS 94 40 OFFSET 32 34 REAR IMPACT 95 EURO SIDE IMPACT OTHER STANDARDS FRONT RIGID POLE SIDE POLE IMPACT IIHS 40 ODB FRONT IIHS SIDE PASSED IMPACT AMS RIGID 15DEG BUMPER IMPACT ODEG BUMPER IMPACT OFFSET BUMPER IMPACT PENDULUM DELETE MODELING TOOL EXIT eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 FMVSS REGULATIONS 7 4 5 1 FMVSS214b SIDE DOOR INTRUSION Description This function allows the user to generate an FMVSS214b Static Side Door Intrusion impact ram and position it within the current VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER STATIC SIDE DOOR INTRUSION INFORMATION SIATIC SIDE DOOR DATA ITEMS DATA RAM DOOR CLEARANCE mm 2 000000
371. ing stiffness into element property DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN SECTION_BEAM integrated PBAR PTUBE According to ELFORM and CST SECTION BEAM resultant PBAR SECTION BEAM discrete PBAR SECTION BEAM truss PROD SECTION BEAM spotweld PBAR SECTION DISCRETE PELAS SECTION SHELL PSHELL SECTION SOLID PSOLID SECTION _SOLID_ALE PSOLID SECTION TSHELL PSOLID 5 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY All materials MAT1 5 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET SPC INITIAL_VELOCITY INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_VELOCITY_GENERATION INITIAL VELOCITY LOAD_NODE_POINT NODAL FORCE LOAD_NODE_SET NODAL FORCE LOAD_SHELL_ELEMENT SHELL PRESSURE LOAD_SHELL_SET SHELL PRESSURE 5 5 OTHERS General Comments Convert NODE SET ELEMENT SET Delete all other cards that can t be converted DYNA V970 gt NASTRAN DEFINE_COORDINATE_NODES LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_SYSTEM LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_COORDINATE_VECTOR LOCAL COORDINATE DEFINE_CURVE LOAD CURVE 6 CONVERTING FROM RADIOSS TO NASTRAN 6 1 ELEMENT RADIOSS V4 1 ssy NASTRAN BEAM CBAR C 11 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C TRUSS CROD SOLID SOLID SHELL SHELL SPRING ELAS1 8rd node is converted to a LCS in NASTRAN MASS CONM2 JOINT RBE2 RIGID BODY RBE2 SPOTWELD RBAR 6 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY General Comments Delete VOID RIVET properties RADIOSS V4 1 gt NASTRAN 1 SHELL PSHELL
372. ing the drop list beside Print File Format VPG supports postscript PS encapsulated postscript EPS GIF and JPG file formats Note When PRINT is selected the user will be prompted enter a file name instead of the File being directly sent to the printer 5 10 3 ORIENTATION This function sets the page orientation as landscape or portrait 5 10 4 COLOR TYPE Select the drop list beside Color Type to select a color type 5 10 5 POSTSCRIPT There are two levels Level 2 is the default setting Level 1 should be selected when using an older model PostScript printer 5 10 6 RUN LENGTH ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off 5 10 7 ASCII85 ENCODE This option reduces the Postscript file size Usually the reductions are dramatic for PS Level 1 this is automatically turned off 5 16 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager 5 10 8 BINDING OPTION This function leaves binding space along the top or left margins of the print and selects non Binding space 5 10 9 REVERSE VIDEO This function reverses the black and white colors image in some cases This feature affects only the background of the image 5 10 10 BOUNDING BOX This function draws a line frame around picture s border 5 10 11 TIME STAMP This function prints the current time at the lower right corner of the picture file 5 10 12 FILE NAME This function prints the
373. into current database See Figure 5 6 1 E My Recent Documents Fa My Network Places 5 7 IMPORT 6 line_mesh vpg E 10_Field_Format ypq fOO_empty vpg appilar_7O0 vpg Beams_model_lypq vpg Beams_shading vpg Ej boundary _condition_ split spg bumper vpq bumper FOO vpg E bumper_nastran pg E caravan vpg Flange pg Frnvss214 pq intersect lin e vpg E line_revolute yvpg File name Files of type PG Database wpa fmb E linear _mapping pg mesh pg Abe vpg E solid _tetra pg E split _surface v pg surface_split ypq Ej taper pd E temp pg test vpg test _O vpg test_15 paq E total_mesh pg Ej unit pg Cancel Figure 5 6 1 Merge Database This function allows the user to read CAD or model data See Figure 5 7 1 User can import more than one CAD or model data at a time by using CTRL or SHIFT key 5 4 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 Look ir D GA 2d_segment dyn ihs _mdb dyn EG airbag_export dyn mat_extent dyn My Recent appliar dyn part_add set dyn Documents blanking dyn SCP_ dyn E bug_modelcheck dyn A SCP 2 mod driver _Flat dyn solid_betra dyn Desktop dyna dyn test dyn ece94_odb dyn ece95_mdb dyn Frives214 dyn Froves214 jun3 dyn Frnvss214_mdb_32 dyn e g Froves214 mdb _33 dyn fmyss214_vpg33_dyang dyn gm444 door slam x 060707 1 dyn
374. ion This function allows the user to create local coordinate systems to be attached to the RBAR or RBE2 elements for the application of weld study Two options are provided The first option creates the RBAR and attaches the local coordinate systems at each node automatically The second option attaches the local coordinate system automatically to the existing RBAR elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT COORDINATE SYSTEM TYPE 6 46 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR RECTANGULAR CYLINDRICAL SPHERICAL ABORT 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL AXIS ALONG RBAR RBE2 U V wW ABORT 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION TO CREATE SPOTWELD NODE POINT RBAR EXIT 4 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT FOR INDEPENDENT NODE e This step is repeated once and the SPOTWELD is defined e Once the SPOTWELD is defined its coordinate system is displayed CREATE BEAM LS DYNA Description This function defines a beam element This section covers the options for the BEAM subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT 2 Select two nodes points VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES POINTS FOR BEAM ORIENTATION e Select a node point and a beam element is created CREATE NODAL RIGID BODY LS DYNA Description This function defines a NODAL RIGID BODY element between multiple nodes The first selected node serves as a reference point all additional nodes are connected to this first no
375. ion Definition card is shown The user enters the appropriate figures and selects OK to exit DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT 6 10 2 ADD THERMAL_EXPANSION Description This function is used to occupy an arbitrary material model in LS DYNA with a thermal expansion property Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE e Definition card is shown The user enters the appropriate figures and selects OK to exit DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT 6 10 3 NONLOCAL Description This function is used to define a NONLOCAL failure mode Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE e Definition card is shown The user enters the appropriate figures and selects OK to exit DELETE Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined card
376. ion by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor on the display screen Release the left button and the section included the region is displayed in full screen ACTIVE WINDOW This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the region by dragging a window over the desired area eta VPG displays the elements lines and surfaces within the window volume in space as active Other objects on the screen remain masked and inactive A Q FILL Rescales the model to include all entities belonging to parts that are currently turned on FILL automatically zooms in or out until the model fits the viewing area of the screen v TOP VIEW Automatically displays the model from the TOP or in the XY plane T ue SIDE VIEW Automatically displays the model from the SIDE or in the XZ plane J REAR VIEW Automatically displays the model from the REAR or in the YZ plane ISOMETRIC VIEW Automatically displays the model from the isometric plane 60 degree isometric CLEAR Removes the highlighted entities from the screen REDRAW MODEL eta VPG updates the screen after each command Occasionally the use of specific commands requires updating of the image with an additional step e g when operating the dynamic zoom at the same time that the element normal are displayed it is necessary to activate the REDRAW command to
377. iption This function allows the user to delete elements using several different functions Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS e The elements selected and the nodes belonging to the elements will be deleted if user wants to keep those unreferenced nodes user needs to tick off the AUTOMATICALLY DELETE NODES WHEN DELETING ELEMENTS option on the SETUP DEFAULT deck 6 3 6 DRAG MESH Description This function offers five methods to extrude elements from a cross section of pattern elements See the following figure for the five methods Usage 6 54 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 1 PRE PROCESSOR ONE LINE DRAG VECTOR DRAG NORMAL DRAG ROTATIONAL DRAG TRANSLATIONAL DRAG JOR 4 LINE DRAG EXIT VPG prompts gt SELECT DRAG MESH OPTION ONE LINE DRAG e Allows user to drag 1D elements into 2D elements beam to plate or 2D elements into 3D elements plate to solid along a selected line VECTOR DRAG e Allows user to drag 1D elements into 2D elements beam to plate or 2D elements into 3D elements plate to solid along a selected vector NORMAL DRAG e Extrudes plate elements into solid elements normal to the selected plate elements ROTATIONAL DRAG e Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along the axis of rotation TRANSLATIONAL DRAG e Extrudes beam elements to plate elements or plate elements to solid elements along W axis 3 OR 4 LINE DRAG e Extrudes beam elements to pl
378. ire model and its characteristics to a specific location Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CHOOSE A TIRE FOR COPYING BY PICKING AN ELEMENT 2 After selecting the tire VPG prompts gt ACCEPT THE SELECTED TIRE Y N ABORT 3 The user is then prompted for the location of the new tire Once entered the tire is copied to that location 7 30 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 4 CREATE COMPOSITE Description This option allows the user to auto generate composite tire models based on user defined parameters Usage 1 VPG displays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE TIRE PROFILE Tire Parameters SECTION WIDTH mm 195 000000 ASPECT RATIO 65 RIM DIAMETER inch 15 000000 RIM WIDTH inch 6 500000 NO OF RADIAL ELEMENTS 40 UTREAD HEIGHT mm 10 000000 LTREAD HEIGHT mm 8 000000 BEAD RATIO 56 000000 MASS UNIT 120 000000 PRESSURE UNIT MPa l Psi VALUE o 245000 NULL SHELL AATF ON E OFF BELT ELEMENT TYPE W SHELL I TSHELL LTREAD GROOVE BON _ OFF SOLID MATERIAL TYPE 2T nd SHELL MATERIAL TYPE 116 Y TIRE NUMBER 1 TIRE F OK Cancel 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT e NO returns the user to the tire parameter window 7 31 eta VPG 3 4 VPG MODULES
379. irection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE TO OFFSET 2 Once the desired lines have been selected VPG prompts gt DEFINE PLANE FOR LINE OFFSET gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN e The user enters a coordinate system to define the plane in which the line lies If the line does not lie in the global XY XZ or YZ plane then the user selects three points on the line to define the plane A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ACCEPT YES NO 4 Ifthe user selects YES then VPG prompts gt ENTER OFFSET DISTANCE IN UV PLANE OR 1 TO EXIT e The user enters a positive distance and an arrow appears at the beginning of the line 5 VPG prompts gt ACCEPT OFFSET DIRECTION YES NO e YES creates a line in the displayed direction at the specified distance 6 10 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e N creates a line opposite the displayed direction at the specified distance 6 1 14 PROJECT Description This function projects lines and or points onto selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE 2 Once the desired surfaces are selected click on DONE VPG prompts the user to create choose a coordinate system gt DEFINE PROJECTION VECTOR gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN 3 After accepting the coordinat
380. is the arc length and the ordinate Apply Reon Eit is the corresponding contour value EXPORT SECTION CUT Figure 9 32 Section Cut Operations This function allows the user to export the section cut as the PLOTEL elements to a NASTRAN file The program displays a Select File dialog window as shown in Figure 9 33 Select File FAQA Model ResultiNumisheet2002 te Numisheet2002 nas File Name pave FileType Nastran Data nas eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 33 Export Nastran File MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE This function allows the user to move the section cut location by using the mouse The movement may be translation along the local W axis or rotation about the local w axis TRANSLATE First select the MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to select a node on the current section as the reference node The program draws a line along the local W axis as the directional line Drag the mouse along the directional line to obtain the new section cut nearest the cursor Click the left mouse button to exit the function ROTATE First select MOVE SECTION BY MOUSE button eta Post allows the user to select two nodes on the current section as the U Axis Exit the Control Option to accept the U Axis at this time the user is allowed to drag mouse the section cut will rotate along the U Axis DISPLAY OPTIONS SECTION ONLY Only the section line will be displayed after exit from the secti
381. isplays the elements as if they were illuminated by a light source Elements that are not directly exposed to the light source are appropriately shaded to imitate actual shading Returns the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW to its default settings CURRENT PART 10 44 The current part name window not only lists the current part but it also serves as a shortcut to execute the current part command Clicking on this window will execute the CURRENT PART command allowing the user to set a new current part See section 10 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 6 MACRO MACRO is a module used for repeated operations All of the user s operations will be recorded in the text file in xml format after activating this module Then the user can repeat the recorded operations by executing macro files The user can also edit the macro files to obtain the desired results This module is very useful to reduce repeated operations and perform multiple operating system platforms 10 6 1 START MACRO Description this function is used to start macro files and enter the names of the macro files The following operations will be recorded in this macro file 10 6 2 END MACRO Description this function is used to end the macro file recording and write the end mark in the macro file 10 6 3 RUN MACRO Description this function is used to execute the macro files The program returns to the initial state of the original model and executes the mac
382. ition 3 VPG prompts gt ALL NODES ARE SLAVE TO RIGID WALL gt INFINITE SIZE PLANE IS DEFINED Figure 14 An Example of a Generated AMS 15 Degree Offset Crash Model 7 4 7 6 BUMPER IMPACT 0 DEG Description This function will create a rigid bumper at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION 7 57 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 BUMPER INPUT DATA IEMS eee BUMPER STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 2 VPG prompts VPG MODULES 2 Q000000E 001 F 117361E 003 Cancel gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPER ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as target position 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER ABORT KEY IN VECTOR NODES VECTOR SHELL NORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UNDO LAST There are four approaches to define the head direction e KEY IN VECTOR e NODES VECTOR e SHELL NORMAL e SHELL REVERSE NORMAL 7 98 Manually key in a vector Select two nodes to define a vector The head will align with the normal of the element selected The head will align with the reverse normal direction of the element selected eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES x Figure 15 An Example of a Generated Rigid Wall Bumper Impact Model 7 4 7 7 BUMPER IMPACT OFFSET Descrip
383. itle will be displayed under the Y axis 9 12 6 13 MIN MAX Description This function offers an option for the user to change the range of axis of coordination 9 12 6 14 NEW VALUE Description This function allows the user to modify the y value of selected point Clicking a point on a curve with left mouse a cross Is displaying on the selected point and the x and y value of coordinate of the point is displaying on the corresponding text boxes The X text box is inactive and can t be modified The Y text box is active and the user can modify the value on it 9 12 6 15 OPERATION Description This OPERATION allows the user to modify selected curve There are some kinds of operations on curve objects These operations belong to two categories curve data operation such as integration different square root and so on and curve object operations such as Copy Delete and Paste One or more curves must be selected before modify the data of the curve Clicking the Operation button the pop up window will display under the curve window The pop up window is shown in figure 9 75 Usage 9 74 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Curve Findow 1 Kax Displacement_ NODE 1255 Displacement Y NODE 1255 Displacement_ NODE 1255 Displacement_Total HODE 1255 4 2 o Displacement Time E 3 Print Clipboard Export Attribute Operation save C9 Displacement_X NODE 1 Curve Option C10 Displacement_Y NODE ergo
384. ity to input LS DYNA ASCII State and Time data formats Click the Load button and the program pops up the Select File dialog box for user to select a database file The figure is shown in Figure 9 68 9 61 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Select File Look in F QA Model Resulf Training C Springback 7 gistat matsum rbdout rcforc A sleout File Name pen File Type D3plot Graph Data 7 Cancel Figure 9 68 Select File dialog box D3PLOT GRAPH DATA Description There are some kinds of D3plot graph data format supported by eta Post Processor Those file formats including ABSTAT Airbag statistics BNDOUT Boundary nodal forces DEFGEO Deformed geometry DEFORC Discrete elements ELOUT Element data GCEOUT Contact element resultants GLSTAT Global data JNTFORC Joint force file MATSUM Material energies NCFORC Contact interface forces NODFOR Nodal force NODOUT Nodal point data RBDOUT Rigid body data RCFORC Resultant interface forces RWFORC Wall forces SBTOUT Seatbelt output SECFORC Cross section forces 9 62 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING SLEOUT Sliding interface energy SPCFORC Single point constraint SPC reaction forces SSSTAT Subsystem statistics SWFORC Spotweld rivet forces TPRINT Temperature output AIRBAG STATISTICS ABSTAT Description The user can plot airbag statistic data from the abstat file The following types are available VOLUME PRESSURE INTERNAL ENE
385. ive PART s HGID field in DYNA970 input file The Radioss yield functions for the HONEYCOMB material which as the abscissa values must be converted into DYNA V970 curves with abscissa values 4 AARRBAG MONITORED VOLUMESS MONITORED VOLUMES in Radioss converts SIRBAG_SIMPLE_AIRBAG_MODEL and replace the original airbag material type 27 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_BRITTLE converts to DYNA V970 material type 34 MAT _FABLIC 5 SEATBELT with Radioss material type 1 ELASTIC converts to DYNA V970 material type 34 MAT _FABLIC with very small young s modulus CONTACT 1 All the Radioss contacts convert to CONTACT AUTOMATIC SINGLE SURFACE contact in Dyna and create a new one more CONTACT AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_ SURFACE for full model VPG 3 2 RADIOSS INTERFACE AND CONVERSION TABLE RADIOSS Interface Notes 1 RADIOSS INTERFACE VPG 3 2 SUPPORTS ALL INPUT CARDS OF RADIOSS V4 1 FIXED FORMAT RADIOSS Entity Location in VPG GUI C 2 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C CONTROL VARABLES MATERIALS BOUNDARY CONDITIONS SKEW FRAMES PROPERTY SETS FUNCTIONS LOADS INITIAL VELOCITIES ACCELEROMETERS SENSORS GRAVITY INTERFACES RIGID WALLS RIGID BODIES ADDED MASSES IMPOSED VELOCITIES RIVETS SPOTWELDS SECTIONS CYLINDRICAL JOINTS MONITORED VOLUMES RADIOSS MISC CONTROL CARDS MATERIAL PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS SPC UTIL COORDINATE SYSTEM ELEMENT PROPERTY UTIL LOAD CURVE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LOADING BOUNDARY CONDITIONS INITIAL VELOCITY RADIOSS MISC A
386. l display the Select File window again for the user to select a Nastran model file after the Nastran result file is loaded It is necessary to select a matching Nastran model in order to post processing the result correctly 9 14 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 7 2 IMPORT Description This function allows the user to import DYNAFORM VPG FEMB Line Data file for SKID MARK and BLANK OUTLINE functions The Import File dialog is shown in Figure 9 10 Select File Lookin FAQA Model Result Numisheet2007 7 BINDER LIN P BLANK LIN File Name Open File Type Femb Line Data lin Cancel Figure 9 10 Import File window User User can select a DYNAFORM VPG FEMB Line Data file then click OPEN button or double click the desired file icon from the file name list to import it Note IMPORT function is disabled until a d3plot file or NASTRAN punch outputz file is read in 9 7 3 EXPORT Description This function allows user to export the current model as NASTRAN file or DYNAFORM VPG FEMB line data file The Export File dialog is shown in Figure 9 11 9 15 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Select File Look in FAQA Model Resuli Numisheet2002 ft Numisheet2002 nas File Name FileType Nastran Data nas Figure 9 11 Export file dialog box Usage User can export the model turned on in the current database as the NASTRAN FILE Give a file name then click SAVE button to export the model in t
387. layed as unreferenced free nodes and are labeled with asterisks Usage 1 VPG prompts for each point node gt SELECT NODE POINT 1 NODE POINT REJECT LAST EXIT e EXIT returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu e The user can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse button instead of typing the letter N e VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE POINT 2 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF NODES BETWEEN TWO NODES POINTS e Any positive integer is valid 3 The user has the option to enter EXIT to terminate Asterisks represent unreferenced nodes that have been created between two existing nodes 6 4 3 CHECK DUPLICATE ID Description This function renumbers any duplicate node numbers found in the VPG database Users are unable to create duplicate node numbers from within the program However users may import files containing duplicate nodes from other programs VPG will renumber the duplicates according to the value of the maximum node number 1 6 82 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 If any duplicate nodes are found the following messages echo on screen and in the VPG msg user files located in the work directory gt CHECKING xxxx NODES FOR DUPLICATE NODES gt DUPLICATE NODE xxxx CHANGED TO yyyy gt xxxx DUPLICATE NODES FOUND If no duplicate nodes are found the following messages echo on screen and in the VPG msg user files located in the work directory gt CHECKING xxx
388. layed in this area They can be accessed via the keyboard mouse DIALOGUE WINDOW VPG displays comments and messages to the user and accepts keyboard entry commands in the dialogue window DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW These commands set the plot options for the current model 2 7 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features ETA In Virtual Proving Ground Version J J ew ap E a a Ea Menu Bar E Parts Fre Safe aly Posi Utilities View HEMME 5 ES ls LSE Ros NGA ES TE E PRE PROCESSO lcon Bar SURFACE ELEMENT HODE MODEL CHECKER SET MENU MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONDITION CONSTRAINT INITIAL CONDITION LOAD CARDS CONTACT INTERFACE DYHA MISE Menu WASSMENU SSS ASSEMBLY EXIT Drawing Window ETASVPG CURRENT DATABASE FILE IS DOVE Sede vi cunRENT A NIT TEM MMT a CURRENT UNIT SYSTEM MM TOM SEC i i raoe ENTER COMMAND Peureaces I NORMAL Tee F ELEM C ORIEN SHADE Dialogue Window Display Figure 2 6 1 VPG Window Layout 2 7 ICON BAR The icon bar is designed to give the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta VPG Some of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menus The user may simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of clicking through the menus BIS ES d ABs Sls Di Aler sc tala Sel E NEW Creates a new database file OPEN Opens a database PRINT Creates a p
389. lays the VPG FILE MENU allowing the user to enter the curve cur file 2 Once the curve file is selected and the data is read in VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST The user has the choice of selecting the curves before they are plotted Note The load curve database format is shown below ALL text must be entered with CAPITAL letters 10 36 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY LOAD CURVE FILE FORMAT line 1 VPG LOAD CURVE Header line line 2 CURVE CURVE ID TYPE CURVE TITLE A5 15 15 1X A8 line 3 X1 Y1 2F10 lt 4 line 4 X2 Y2 2F10 4 line 5 X3 Y3 2F10 4 etc line n CURVE CURVEID TYPE CURVETITLE Repeat a new curve line n 1 X1 Y1 2F10 4 line n 2 X2 Y2 2F10 4 line n 3 X3 Y3 2F10 4 etc last line END A3 Terminate Input Where CURVE Header Required CURVE ID Load Curve Number TYPE Curve Type 0 Transient Analysis 1 Stress Initialization CURVE TITLE Curve s Title User Defined X1 Y1 Curve Point 1 X2 Y2 Curve Point 2 END Header Required The following is an example of the LOAD CURVE file SVPG LOAD CURVE CURVE 2 0 CURVE 2 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 1 5000 2 0000 0 0000 3 0000 0 5000 4 0000 1 5000 CURVE 4 0 CURVE 4 0 0000 2 0000 6 0000 3 5000 7 0000 1 5000 8 0000 2 0000 END RENUMBER Description This function allows user to renumber load curves Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 2 AUTOMATIC ALL ONE BY ONE SELECT ONE EXIT SHOW CURVE Descrip
390. lculated in addition to the crash pulse impact force and contact force and can then be post processed All simulations have more than one possible setup process The VPG Safety module offers the user great flexibility in the various utility routines to perform the simulations This manual documents one recommended processing approach for each case to demonstrate the program s capability and to allow less experienced users to adopt a consistent methodology Each Usage contains a documented proven procedure for setting up the case submitting the analysis and post processing the results The approach is technically sound and will provide correct simulation results Therefore it is highly recommended that new users run their simulations according to this step by step manual at least once before developing their own procedure using the various utility features and functions 7 4 2 Crash Tool Library ETA has developed and maintained a set of crash tool models for the cases presented in this manual for consulting projects over the last decade This set of crash tool models is included as part of the software license agreement and should not be used with other pre post processors The crash module allows users the flexibility to store their own crash tool models in a customized 7 37 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES library for easy access or to save them in ASCII format for private use ETA can demonstrate First Technology Safety Sys
391. le Manager 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT PAMCRASH VERSION 1 SEQUENTIAL 2 FREE NUMBERING gt DO YOU WANT TO USE KEYWORD INPUT Y N YES NO 4 VPG prompts gt OUTPUT ONLY ACTIVE PARTS Y N YES NO 5 VPG prompts for optional keyword cards via pop ups 6 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e The user enters an alphanumeric title containing a maximum of 48 characters e VPG returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu Note If the properties materials are not assigned to the parts in the database VPG prompts the user to define the properties materials by default by global default or by part Supported properties are listed in Appendix A VPG Capabilities for F E A Programs 5 8 8 WRITE RADIOSS FILE This function allows the user to output a RADIOSS data file directly from the VPG database When writing a RADIOSS input file VPG creates default materials and element properties for some elements For specific translation properties see the RADIOSS conversion tables 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER FILE NAME OR STOP TO EXIT e Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name already exists the program will prompt the following message gt FILENAME ALREADY EXISTS O K TO OVERWRITE Y N e YES will overwrite the existing file e NO will prompt for a file name 3 VPG prompts gt SELECT RADIOSS VERSION 1 VERSION 4 1 FIXED 2 VERSION 4 4 BLOCK 4 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e he user enters an alp
392. lecting a front suspension model from the SUSPENSION MENU The user determines the desired optional components such as stabilizers and steering system types and enters the node coordinates for suspension geometry Next the user will be prompted to edit the default spring stiffness damping coefficients extra node coordinates default mass center of gravity and inertia moment Once the user has edited the default suspension values the suspension will be displayed on screen Details on generation of suspension models and the types of suspensions available for generation through the VPG template system may be found in Chapter 7 Section 2 2 Generating a Rear Suspension Model The rear Suspension is generated in the same manner as a front Suspension 3 2 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 Generating Tire Models After entering the TIRE MENU the user selects GENERATE and is offered the TIRE PARAMETER dialogue box Default values for tire geometry mass and inflation pressure are edited to the user s parameters Once the tire geometry is defined VPG prompts the user for the location of the tire The user may define the location of the tire through an X Y Z position or by selecting an existing node point or by selecting a location on an existing Suspension system Tire modeling is discussed in Section 7 3 This topic is also described in the VPG Structure Tutorial 4 Auto Generating a Road Surface The user generates the
393. lects an MPC card the BOUNDARY MPC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can modify parameters in the window 6 156 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 10 MATERIAL PROPERTY LS DYNA The functions in the MATERIAL PROPERTY MENU are designed to define and modify the material properties in the database Parts are displayed according to the color of their material definition Parts without material definition are displayed in white The functions in this menu are organized as follows MATERIAL PROPERTY ADD EROSION ADD THERMAL EXPANSION NWONLOCAL ASSIGN MATERIAL CHANGE COLOR COPY CREATE DELETE DEFINE PROPERTIES ERASE UNREF MATL LIST MATERIAL COLOR ONSOFF ONOFF RENUMBER SHO DISCRETE BUSHING THERMAL MATL MENU VIEW By switching solver code settings in the ANALYSIS PROGRAM command in the SETUP menu the user can assign and create materials that are solver code specific The user may assign and create materials at the beginning or at the end of a VPG session A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note If the analysis code is set to NASTRAN see section 6 11 6 10 1 ADD EROSION Description This function creates and adds the erosion to selected materials and modifies the erosion Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION CREATE Defines a new card VPG prompts gt SELECT MATERIAL 6 157 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR After this menu is exited the Eros
394. lesh Quality WARPAGE TAPER ASPECT RATIO TRIA MIM INT ANGLE TRIA MAS INT ANGLE QUAD MIM INT ANGLE QUAD MAS INT ANGLE MIM ELEM SIZE WMAs ELEM SIZE 25 00 Cancel Check Surfaces check and find duplicate surfaces Skip Narrow Surfaces ignore narrow surfaces during mesh Pave Inner Holes generate a layer of quad elements around holes during mesh In Original Part generated elements will be put in its original part if this option is off those elements will be put in current part Local Re mesh meshed surface will be remeshed and boundary nodes will connect to elements generated by new meshed surfaces Cirl Points Mesh select points or nodes as control points to generate elements during mesh 6 64 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 65 CONTROL POINTS PROJECT MODE DIRECT MODE ABORT Project Mode selected control points nodes will be projected to selected surface to generate nodes Direct Mode selected control points nodes will directly generate nodes at their original position Preview Boundary preview the boundary nodes before generating elements Modify Boundary Nodes will allow user to modify boundary nodes see following figure Hesh Node Delete Modes Average Modes Merge Modes Re space BDY Modes Suppress Nodes on Edges Insert Nodes insert nodes between boundary nodes Delete Nodes delete selected boundary nodes Average Nodes generate a node at the mid
395. llowing the user to magnify or minimize their visual display For example if the plot state is set to deformation the user could magnify the deformation by a factor of ten to see small deformation not readily visible during animation 9 11 2 FRAME OPERATIONS Description This function allows user to select the desired frame s to plot single frame or animate more than one frame deformation shown as Figure 9 50 There are 6 options shown as Figure 9 51 Frames Single Frame From 1 9 48 0 000000 0 000779 0 001558 0 002336 0 003117 To 14 Px Reset Inr 1 Single Frame All Frames Even Frames Odd Frames select Frames Range oe Tiea Te 5 From 1 0 000000 0 000779 0 001558 0 002338 0 003117 To 16 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 50 Frames Operations Figure 9 51 Frames Options Figure 9 52 Frame Range FRAMES The FRAMES window allows the user to select the individual frame s for the plot or animation The frames selected are highlighted in blue When frames are selected in other options the corresponding frames are highlighted in the FRAME window SINGLE FRAME This function allows user to pick single one frame and eta Post plots the deformation simultaneously ALL FRAMES Once All Frames is picked all frames in the list window are selected prepared for animation EVEN FRAMES Once Even Frames is picked even frames in the list window are
396. ly imported from VPG s LS DYNA and NASTRAN solvers to the post processor for quick easy interpretation of analysis results Once entered VPG s full complement of post processing functions allow the user to graphically display 2 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features and manipulate simulation result files with contour and deformation animation contour plots and fills and geometry deformation VPG s post processing functions provide the user with numerous ways of animating and viewing the analysis results The user has the options of animating select frames viewing single frames altering the time step rotating the model or viewing only select parts of the model The post processing function automatically prompts the user for the result file when activated VPG post processes the following types of result data D3PLOT d3plot01 etc DYNA DEFORMED GEOMETRY defgeo HISTORY his NASTRAN PUNCH pch NASTRAN OUTPUT2 0p2 NASTRAN PACKED PUNCH pac VPG provides an option to create a more compact post processing file This binary file called a op file due to its extension pp is created after reading the result file into eta VPG Once the pp file is created the user may read this file to save both disk storage space and time when reloading the analysis results The pp file requires less space than the analysis result file used to create it and can be used for all subsequent post processing fun
397. m Section 2 16 4 VPG prompts for the transformation value 5 The elements are transformed 6 VPG prompts the user to select one of the following options AGAIN NEW TRANSFORM REVERSE EXIT AGAIN performs the same transformation again with the same specifications NEW TRANSFORM begins another transformation operation REVERSE rejects the previous transformation EXIT exits the function 6 3 23 COMPLETE MESH Description This function allows user to fill the element holes 6 74 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENTS FOR FILL INNER BOUNDARY 2 After selecting elements and click DONE VPG prompts gt SELECT A NODE ON THE CLOSED CURVE e The hole is filled when the node is selected 6 3 24 MIDDLE ELEMENT Description This function will create middle element between two layers of shell elements or directly by solid elements Usage 1 VPG prompts to select middle element options SOLID PLATE EXIT e SOLID middle element will be created between two segments of solid e PLATE middle element will be created between two lays of shell elements 6 3 25 ATTRIBUTE TABLE ON OFF Description This function available only in LS DYNA mode allows the user to add additional properties to elements that VPG does not prompt for when the elements are created thickness additional nodes etc The ATTRIBUTE TABLE supports BEAM DISCRETE MASS SEATBELT SHELL TSHELL and solid
398. merged during remesh IGNORE HOLE SIZE e Holes less than this value will be ignored during remesh MESH QUALITY 6 77 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Detailed quality set will be done in the pop up window 4 User now can remesh elements RE MESH e Remesh elements starts 5 After remesh elements VPG prompt user whether to accept remesh results YES e Accept remesh results NO e give up remesh results and return to remesh window 6 3 28 SEPARATE ELEMENT Description This function separates connected elements the separated elements will just have nodes of common positions but not connecting to each other Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT NODES e Select one or several nodes and click DONE the elements sharing the selected nodes are separated User can verify this separation by NODE COINCIDENT CHECK function 6 3 29 SPECIAL ELEMENT KEYWORD Description This function defines some element keyword cards Usage 2 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates a card DELETE e This function deletes already created cards LIST e This function lists already created cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created cards 3 when CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION MASS PART MASS PART SET SHELL SOURCE SINK TRIM select an option different cards appear refer to LS DYNA manual for further description 6 3 30 ADD WASHER Description This function helps to reme
399. motion is applied to the test SHOCK base as specified such as DOF VAD Typically an acceleration motion along z axle is applied to the base 7 94 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SHOCK TEST BOUNDARY CONDITIONS DEFINE SHOCK ANALY Sls CONTROL TIME HISTORY OPTION RUN IT NOW EXPORT DYNA FILE A detailed description is given in the following sections 7 9 4 1 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Description This function helps to define SPCs for parts if needed SELECTION OPTION CREATE DECE TE INCLUDE NODES IN SET LIST SET MODIFY REMOVE NODES IN SET SHO e CREATE create SPC for selected nodes DELETE delete SPC for selected node or node set INCLUDE NODES IN SET add nodes into the selected SPC node set the new added nodes have the same SPC with nodes in the selected node set LIST SET show node set of SPC in a list MODIFY modify the SPC for node or node set REMOVE NODES IN SET remove node from selected SPC node set SHOW show selected SPC node or node set in display window 7 9 4 2 DEFINE SHOCK Descriptions this function is used to define shock for part base here a keyword SHOCK PRESCRIBED MOTION is created 7 95 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES DYHA CARD DEFINITION DYNA CARD DEFINITION SHOCK _ PRESCRIBED MOTION ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION PID PART ID RIGID BODY DOF DEGREE OF FREEDOM VAD VELOCITY ACCELERATION DISPLACEMENT FL LEIO LOAD CURVE FOR MOTIONS DIA SHOCK BASE DIAMETER Cancel
400. n 2 N2 e j e 10 10 or 10 10 11 14 ACCEPTABLE 3 Once the desired element N1 N2 N3 N4 is entered VPG prompts gt ACCEPT MESH YES NO REMESH e YES will accept mesh and prompt for more lines e NO will not accept mesh and prompt for more lines e REMESH will not accept mesh and prompt for new N1 N2 N3 N4 6 3 21 SOLID MESH Description This function opens a menu listing the following solid meshing options SOLID MESH 6 LINE SOLID MESH Description This function is intended for automatic 6 or 8 node solid element generation ina volume The volume is defined by top and bottom surfaces which are enclosed by 3 lines each The lines must previously be defined line direction is not important The lines defining the area do not have to intersect an open area is possible The created elements will be included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT 3 LINES AT BOTTOM LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 6 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 6 LINE MESH The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt SELECT 3 LINES AT TOP Select the second set of thre
401. n element a plane or a part last click EXECUTE the distance will be plotted in the graph 9 9 11 SCREEN CURVE OPERATION Description This function allows the user to do some operations to curves last plotted User can on off hide show delete and export curves in the list 9 39 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Curve Operation Graph Options MV Show Graph MV Show Title and Data V Clear Curve Before In M Show Curve Mark Delete Export Curve Window Location Exit 9 9 12 PART DISTANCE Description This function will show the distance of source part from destination part Part Distance Tool set gt Source Destination lt Option Use Elem Normal Contour Setting Export Contour Line Export Contour Value List Value Usage select a source part and a destination part and then click button START the distance of source part from destination part will be shown as contour After that user can clear export and list value of this contour 9 9 13 PART INTERFACE CHECK 9 40 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function allows the user check interference between parts Interference elements will be shown highlighted Usage After selecting parts click button APPLY the interference will be shown highlighted User can define search tolerance for check result Interference Check Operati C By Part Groups PPE eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee lt
402. n identifies a mass element and provide X Y Z geometry and mass properties provided in the model unit system Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE SELECTED gt SELECT ELEMENTS User selects a mass element and it will display information of this mass 6 16 7 CALCULATE MASS Description This function calculates a mass center of gravity location and inertia properties for selected parts Parts must have a material property and thickness defined with a material density specified Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER OUTPUT FILE NAME OR CR FOR DEFAULT OR STOP FOR QUIT User inputs a file name 2 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND HASS CALCULATION ALL PARTS SELECT PART EXIT ALL PARTS Output all mass information of all parts to the input file SELECT PART Output the mass information of the selected part to the input file EXIT Returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 207 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 17 ASSEMBLY LS DYNA The functions of the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu are designed to add and modify connections in the database It also includes functions for replacing parts and part sets The functions in this menu are organized as follows ASSEMBLY AUTO READ FROM FILE WRITE TO FILE CREATE CONNECTION MODIFY CONNECTION DELETE CONNECTION REPLACE PART REPLACE PART SET EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 17 1 READ FROM FILE Descri
403. n t be converted to RADIOSS DYNA V970 gt RADIOSS V4 4 DEFINE_COORDINATE FRAME DEFINE_CURVE FUNCTION 10 CONVERTING FROM NASTRAN TO DYNA 10 1 ELEMENT C 22 When some RBE2 share the common node merge them into one RBE2 Delete CGAP elements eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C C 23 NASTRAN CBAR RBE2 SHELL SOLID CELAS2 CELAS1 RBAR CONM2 CBEAM CROD CTUBE ISOPARAMETRIC SHELL RBE3 gt DYNA V970 BEAM If NASTRAN s DOF is 123456 convert it into DYNA s CONSTRAINED_NODAL_RIGID_ BODY Otherwise convert it into DYNA s CONSTRAINED_NODE_ SET SHELL SOLID DISCRETE Create a DEFINE SD ORIENTATION for spring direction DISCRETE Create a DEFINE SD ORIENTATION for spring direction CONSTRAINED_SPOTWELD MASS amp INERTIA BEAM BEAM BEAM SHELL CONST INTERPOLATION 10 2 ELEMENT PROPERTY VPG deletes PGAP property VPG converts spring stiffness into DYNA material NASTRAN PSHELL PSOLID PBAR PBEAM PELAS PROD PTUBE gt DYNA V970 SECTION_SHELL SECTION_SOLID SECTION_BEAM resultant SECTION _BEAM resultant SECTION DISCRETE SECTION BEAM truss SECTION_BEAM integrated 10 3 MATERIAL PROPERTY NASTRAN MAT 1 gt DYNA V970 1 MAT_ELASTIC 10 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION NASTRAN SPC NODE FORCE SHELL PRESSURE INITIAL VELOCITY 10 5 OTHERS gt DYNA V970 BOUNDARY_SPC_SET LOAD_NODE_SET LOAD_SHELL_SET INITIAL_V
404. n will be constrained Y ROTATION e Y rotation will be constrained Z ROTATION e Z rotation will be constrained BOUNDARY CARDS SYMMETRY FAILURE Description This function defines a symmetry plane with a failure criterion This option applies to continuum domains modeled with solid elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 133 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR BOUNDARY CARDS TEMPERATURE Description This function defines temperature boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS THERMAL WELD Description This function defines thermal weld boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description BOUNDARY CARDS USA Description This function defines USA boundary conditions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 8 2 CONSTRAINT CARDS Description The functions in the CONSTRAINT CARDS menu provide a means of constraining the degrees of freedom in model parts 6 134 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CONSTRAINT CARDS ADAPTIVITY BUTT WELD EULER IN EULER EXTRA NODES GENERALIZED WELDS GLOBAL INTERPOLATION JOINT JOINT STIFFNESS LINEAR LAGRANGIAN SOLID LOCAL MODAL RIGID BODY MODE SET POINTS RIGID BODIES RIGIDBODY STOPPERS RIVET SHELL TO SOLID SPLINE SPOTYWELD TIE BREAK TIED NODES WWF AIL Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREAT
405. nables the user to calculate the distance between two nodes ES ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This function enables the user to measure the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes Ta COORDINATES ON OFF This function enables the user to turn on off coordinate systems eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 3 PART CONTROL The functions of the PART CONTROL menu are intended for organizing line surface and element data in a structure A PART is a set of lines surfaces and or elements grouped under a PART NAME The PART NAME is defined as a label of alphanumeric data that consists of no more than eight characters Presently up to 1000 parts may be defined in a database Each part has a unique Part Identification PID The functions in the PART CONTROL menu are organized as in Figure 10 3 1 PART CONTROL ADD ELEMS TO PART ADD LINES TO PART ADD SURFS TO PART CONNECTING ELEMENTS CONNECTING NODES CHANGE PART COLOR CREATE CURRENT DELETE KEEF PART UST MASS CALCULATION ON OFF PART COLOR ON OFF PART SUMMARY SEPARATE PARTS TRANSPARENT MODE RENAME RENUMBER PID DELETE EMPTY PARTS MODIFY THICKNESS PART ORDER VIEW EXIT Figure10 3 1 Part Control Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 3 1 ADD ELEMENTS TO PART Description This function allows the user to copy elements from one part to another part The part to which the elements are added does not have to be current or on
406. nctions found in the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu ANALYSIS OPTION CASE CONTROL ANALYSIS SUBMISSION EXIT The CASE CONTROL option will lead user to define each case user can select BOUNDARY CONDITIONS and LOADS defined in database for each needed case all these cases share the same finite elements model so user doesn t need to define B C and LOADS in several databases which will save user much time and energy The ANALYSIS SUBMISSSION Menu contains functions that create the necessary Control Cards and Analysis Parameters to specify a complete analysis model file The ANALYSIS Menu allows users to define what type of analysis results will be generated from the analysis through the definition of DATABASE cards VPG provides a command to write and execute the analysis model from the ANALYSIS SUBMISSION menu or alternately the option to export a file for later execution eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION 8 1 CASE CONTROL The CASE CONTROL menu allows the user to define or delete case control DEFINE CASE REMOVE ALL CASE EXIT 8 1 1 DEFINE CASE Description this function allows the user to define the cases all cases definition will be finished in the following pop up window All of the BOUNDARY_SPC_ BOUNDARY_ PRESCRIBE MOTION LOAD_ NODE LOAD_SHELL and LOAD_SEGMENT cards defined in database will be listed in the window Users select needed for each case Builti Case Define Multi Case C x ADD DEL Bc
407. nd allows the user to select and modify them EXIT 6 14 1 AIRBAGS Description This function provides various cards for defining the thermodynamic behavior of gas flow into an airbag as well as a reference configuration for the fully inflated bag 6 179 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION AIRBAG TYPES ADIABATIC GAS MODEL HYBRID HYBRID CHEMIN HYBRID JET TING LINEAR FLUID LOAD CURVE SIMPLE AIRBAG MODEL SIMPLE PRESSURE VOLUME WAN G NEF SKE WEN JET TING VEN MULTIPLE JET TING VEN POP WEN JET TIM s POP WEN MULTIPLE JET TING POP VAN JET TING CM WEN MULTIPLE JET TING CM ADVANCED ALE ALE INTERAC TION REFERENCE GEOMETRY e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Keyword User s Manual for further description 6 14 2 ALE Description This function sets the default Lagrange Eulerian and Eulerian calculations Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 180 PRE PROCESSOR Refer to the LS DYNA parameters for Arbitrary eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR SELECT ALE TYPE ALE CURVE GROUP ALE MODE GROUP ALE SWITCH AMMG SET OF AMMG Fal SWITCH MMG UP S vITCH e The preceding commands yield varying definition cards Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 14 3 COMPONENT GEBOD Description This function sets the default control parameters for component gebod Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SEL
408. nd returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU e NO returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU 7 2 0 TRANSLATE Description This option allows the user to translate auto generated suspension models Its purpose is to allow the user to quickly align the auto generated suspension model with the F E body model for attachment Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO TRANSLATE SUSPENSION MOVE SUSPENSION PICK TWO NODES INCREMENTAL XYZ UNDO LAST EXIT e Once the two locations have been determined the suspension is moved with the second coordinate now occupying the first 7 19 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 2 4 MODIFY Description This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK AN ELEMENT TO MODIFY SUSPENSION e Once an element from the suspension is selected VPG prompts gt OK TO MODIFY THIS SUSPENSION Y N e YES Modify step by step the suspension model like in the create method The user returns to the SUSPENSION MENU e NO Returns the user to the SUSPENSION MENU 7 2 5 READ ADAMS PRE Description This option allows the user to read in 10 types of Adams Pre format suspension files to the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt READ ADAMS PRE MENU e The READ ADAMS _PRE FILE MENU window is displayed for user to OPEN a fst rst database file ETAS PG ADAMS PRE SUSPENSION TYPES SUPPORTED ARE FRONT SUSPENSION SLA Front
409. ned parameters Usage 1 VPGdisplays a pop up window with tire parameter data and prompts gt CREATE TIRE PROFILE SECTION WIDTH mm 195 000000 ASPECT RATIO 65 RIM DIAMETER inch 15 000000 RIM WIDTH inch 6 500000 NO OF RADIAL ELEMENTS 40 0 MASS UNIT 20 000000 PRESSURE UNIT E MPa Psi VALUE lo 245000 NULL SHELL T li ON E OFF TIRE NUMBER 1 TIRE 2 When the user has exited the tire parameter window VPG displays the tire cross section along with mass and pressure values and prompts gt PROCESSING ELEMENTS AND NODES gt DO YOU ACCEPT THIS TIRE PROFILE Y N ABORT a NOreturns the user to the tire parameter window 3 Ifthe user accepts the tire profile VPG prompts gt DEFINE WHEEL CENTER LOCATION FOR TIRES ABORT KEY IN XYZ MAPPING NODE POINT SPINDLE 7 28 eta VPG 3 4 VPG MODULES Chapter 7 z x Y ETAZVPG 2 4 Note For tire tuning procedures see the VPG Structure Tutorial sections 1 5 and 1 29 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 2 DELETE TIRE MODEL Description This option allows the user to delete the currently defined tire models Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT TIRE FROM TIRE LIST OR SCREEN 2 Once the tire is selected it is highlighted and VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE THIS TIRE Y N ABORT e If YES is selected the tire will be deleted 7 3 3 COPY TIRE MODEL Description This function allows the user to copy a t
410. ng a scale factor greater than 1 will magnify the line whereas a scale factor less than 1 will reduce the length of the line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINES TO SCALE gt SELECT LINES ABORT EXCLUDE ON OFF LINE MULTI POINT REGION PART WINDOW FREE REGION REJECT LAST DONE Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 2 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG asks for a coordinate system to scale the lines and prompts the user to create a local system A thorough explanation of how to create a local coordinate system is covered in Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 3 Once the desired coordinate system is created it will be displayed on the screen and the user will be prompted to accept or decline the system If the user accepts then VPG 6 12 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR prompts gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS The user selects the desired scale factors Example The factors 1 1 1 reflect the line size in the negative Y direction across the UV plane the factors 0 5 0 5 0 5 reduce the lines by 0 5 6 1 18 SECTION CUT Description This function will generate line segments along a user defined UV plane at the intersection of selected lines intersecting the UV plane The line section that is created will be included in the CURRENT PART see PART CONTROL MENU Usage 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR O
411. node is moved after this command is completed the user returns to step 1 6 4 13 PART CONNECTION Description This function determines the names and identification numbers PID of all of the parts that share the selected node The message is displayed in the VPG prompt area of the screen and the nodes are highlighted with small white circles Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE TO SHOW PART CONNECTION KEY IN NODE NUMBER NODE EXIT e Once a node is selected the part connection is listed and the user returns to step 1 e Ifthe user selects a node number by KEYBOARD ENTRY that does not exist in the database VPG prompts gt NODE xxxx IS NOT IN DATABASE e lf the user selects a node number by KEYBOARD ENTRY that is not connected to a part VPG prompts gt NODE xxxx IS NOT CONNECTED TO ANY PART 6 4 14 PROJECT Description This function projects a node or group of nodes onto a plane surface s or mesh The nodes may be referenced or unreferenced referenced nodes would then project the finite element mesh Usage 6 90 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PROJECT OPTION EXIT F E MESH go to step 2 PLANE IN LOCAL UV go to step 3 SURFACE goto step 5 2 Option F E MESH gt SELECT PLATE ELEMENTS FOR TARGET SURFACE SELECT ELEMENTS ABORT exits without action DONE completes the operation and prompts the user to step 7 e e V 3 Option PLANE IN LOCAL UV gt DEFINE PROJ
412. node set INCLUDE NODES IN SET add nodes into the selected SPC node set the new added nodes have the same SPC with nodes in the selected node set LIST SET show node set of SPC in a list MODIFY modify the SPC for node or node set REMOVE NODES IN SET remove node from selected SPC node set SHOW show selected SPC node or node set in display window 7 9 2 2 PRESSURE LOCATION Descriptions this function is used to define pressure for part punch here a keyword 7 88 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES PRESSURE_MOTION is created DYNA CARD DEFINITION DYNA CARD DEFINITION PRESSURE_MOTION ITEMS DATA CARD DESCRIPTION NODE PUNCH HIT CENTER o DIA PUNCH DIAMETER 30 00 P PRESSURE hoo 086 RAMP_TIME TIME TO RAMP UP PRESSURE O10 000 STABLE_TIME TIME TO HOLD A STABLE PRESSURE 08000 2 20 FINAL TIME TIME TO RELEASE PRESSURE b10 OK Cancel CARD DESCRIPTION name of this card NODE define pressure location select one node as the punch hit center DIA the diameter of punch cross section P the pressure value of punch RAMP_TIME the ramp up time for punch pressure at a node STABLE_TIME the hold time for punch pressure at a node FINAL_TIME the release time for punch pressure at a node 7 9 2 3 ANALYSIS CONTROL Description this function helps user to define control parameters such as CONTROL_ CONTACT CONTROL_ SHELL etc and also automatically calculates the termination time 7 89 eta VPG3
413. normals to a positive volume e If elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ORIENTATION REVERSED FOR xxxx ELEMENTS e The elements that are reversed will highlight as they are checked off The user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu e If no elements are reversed the following message will be returned gt ALL SOLID ELEMENTS PASS CHECK No changes occur and the user is returned to the MODEL CHECKER menu Note The user may reverse the element normals by executing the REVERSE NORMAL command in the ELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 5 3 ASPECT RATIO Description This function allows the user to check the aspect ratio of the displayed plate and solid elements The aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest side to the shortest side of an 6 97 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR element In VPG the default aspect ratio is 8 0 to 1 0 but the user may adjust it as necessary Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ASPECT RATIO DEFAULT 8 0 e Users may accept the default value of 8 0 by pressing the Enter key or they may enter any real number that is a valid value for the aspect ratio e VPG runs a check on the values for the aspect ratio Any elements that exceed the desired aspect ratio are highlighted The messages echoed to the command line are gt XXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK or gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK 2 The following message will be displayed for the failed elements gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW
414. ns for the honeycomb material which have mu as the abscissa values must be converted into LS DYNA curves with mu 1 mu as the abscissa values In the discussion above it is assumed that the angle PHI in the RADIOSS orthotropic solid property set data is set to zero If PHI is nonzero further thought must be given to the conversion 32 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 3 MAT_PLASTIC_KINEMATIC 33 VISCOPLASTIC 53 MAT_CLOSED_CELL_FOAM 34 VISCOELASTIC 61 MAT_KELVIN MAXWELL_VISCOELASTIC 35 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 36 ELASTIC_PLASTIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_ PLASTICITY 38 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 40 VISCOELASTIC 76 MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC 42 HYPERELASTIC 77 5 MAT_OGDEN_RUBBER 43 ELASTIC_PLASTIC_ORTHOTROPIC 24 MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR_ PLASTICITY 2 4 BOUNDARY AND LOAD CONDITION RADIOSS V4 1 gt DYNA V970 SPC BOUNDARY_SPC_SET CONCENTRATED LOAD LOAD_NODE_SET PRESSURE LOAD LOAD_SEGMENT_SET INITIAL VELOCITY INITIAL_ VELOCITY IMPOSED VELOCITY BOUNDARY_PRESCRIBED_MOTION_SET 2 5 CONTACT AND RIGIDWALL Delete RIGIDWALL which not include node Convert slave master shell material property set into segment set RADIOSS V4 1 Ssss DYNA V970 2 TIED CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 3 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 5 SLIDE VOID CONTACT _AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 6 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 7 SLIDE VOID CONTACT_AUTOMATIC_SINGLE_SURFACE 8 SLIDE CONTACT _DRAWBEAD 10 TIED VOID CONT
415. nsional finite element model Tire models are used for both vehicle durability and NVH applications Specialized tire models are available for users requiring detailed models of tires These models are suitable for use in detailed tire focused analysis and require detailed material information Suspension Model Generator eta VPG s sophisticated suspension model generator automates the FEA modeling of the most popular suspension types Suspensions may be modeled using flexible finite element representations or rigid members Material properties of the suspension component can be 1 4 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 1 Introduction specified using the nonlinear stress strain characteristics of the material Included in eta VPG s suspension libraries are these suspension types MCPHERSON H ARM TRAILING ARM MCPHERSON A ARM HOTCHKISS SOLIDAXLE TWIST BEAM FIVE LINK HONDA 5 LINK QUADRA LINK SHORT LONG ARM Road Surface Library eta VPG S road surfaces form a full vehicle durability evaluation platform ready for kinematics and stress analyses of component subsystem and vehicular models Road surfaces are generated using any 3D data or selected from the VPG library The Library contains digitized models of the following MGA Proving Ground road surfaces POTHOLE TRACKS RIPPLE TRACKS ALTERNATE ROLL SURFACE WASHBOARDS COBBLESTONE TRACKS CHATTERSTRIP BODY TWIST LANE PAVE SURFACE Fatigue Analysis Program Module eta VPG s built in fatigue post
416. nu Tire Model Safety Module Occupant Safety Dummy Positioning Delete Model ALE FSI Module DTM Module Heeds CHAPTER 8 ANALYSIS Case Control Analysis Submission CHAPTER 9 POST PROCESSING Section 5 1 Section 5 2 Section 5 3 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 Section 5 7 Section 5 8 Section 5 9 Section 5 10 Section 5 11 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 Section 6 5 Section 6 6 Section 6 7 Section 6 8 Section 6 9 Section 6 10 Section 6 11 Section 6 12 Section 6 13 Section 6 14 Section 6 15 Section 6 16 Section 6 17 Section 6 18 Section 6 19 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 7 4 Section 7 5 Section 7 6 Section 7 7 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 Section 7 10 Section 8 1 Section 8 2 Introduction Section 9 1 General Overview Section 9 2 File Manager Section 9 3 Icon Bar Section 9 4 File Format Section 9 5 Configuration File Section 9 6 File Menu Section 9 7 Edit Menu Section 9 8 Tool Menu Section 9 9 Option Menu Section 9 10 Post Process Section 9 11 Graph Section 9 12 CHAPTER 10 UTILITY Viewing Options Section 10 1 Icon Bar Section 10 2 Part Control Section 10 3 Utility Section 10 4 Display Options Section 10 5 Macro Section 10 6 APPENDICES APPENDIX A VPG Hardware and Software Requirements APPENDIX B Supported IGES Entity Types APPENDIX C RADIOSS LS DYNA NASTRAN Conversion Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Document
417. number of elements e g 10 5 8 7 6 67 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR The nodes in the direction of N2 are generated by linear interpretation between the opposing nodes on the two lines A row of N2 quadrilateral elements is generated first from the starting end of line 1 to the starting end of line 2 The pattern will be repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE NODE POINT allows the user to select node or point to create temporary lines for the 2 LINE MESH function The user must select this option before creating the desired lines for 2 LINE MESH LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 2 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 2 LINE MESH e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS ON EACH SIDE N1 N2 N3 N4 N1 Any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines N2 Any positive integer for the number of elem
418. ode sets for this procedure For deleting element sets refer to the command in section 6 7 16 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SET FROM NODE SET LIST List ofall node sets 6 120 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR CURSOR AT NODE ALL NODE SETS UNDO EXIT 2 If the user selects ALL NODE SETS in step 2 VPG prompts gt OK TO DELETE ALL NODE SETS Y N YES NO e If YES VPG issues the following message gt ALL NODE SETS DELETED FROM DATABASE e If NO VPG returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 3 Ifthe user selects an individual node set in step 1 VPG prompts gt SET X IS SELECTED 4 EXIT returns the user to the NODE SET submenu 6 7 5 REMOVE EMPTY SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets with no nodes assigned to them 6 7 6 REMOVE UNREF SETS NODE Description This function deletes sets that have not been assigned boundary conditions constraints initial conditions or loads 6 7 7 INCLUDE NODES Description This function adds additional nodes to the current node set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES FOR NODE SET XXXX gt SELECT NODES 2 Once the nodes have been selected and the user has exited the INCLUDE submenu VPG displays the nodes with their node set number 6 7 8 LIST Description This function lists the defined sets in a pop up window 6 7 9 REMOVE NODES Description This function deletes selected nodes from the current node set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SEL
419. of product one is DYNAFORM and another is VPG The content of function icons in the Control Window is different between DYNAFORM and VPG The default is DYNAFORM Extended GUI Setting the extended GUI on off the default setting is on 9 6 4 DIRECTORY Description This parameter records the directory of the latest opened file 9 7 FILE MENU Description The options in this pull down menu are used to open save import export and print related files See Figure 9 8 9 13 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Eo Open Import Export Copy To Clipboard Print Print To File Quit Alt q Figure 9 8 The File Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 9 7 1 OPEN Description This function displays the Open File dialog and allows the user to read result file or model file into eta Post The open file dialog is shown in Figure 9 9 Select File FAQA Model Resultinumisheet2002 te d3plot EN dynain File Name d3plot Open FileType LS DYNA Post d3plot d3drif dynain Cancel Figure 9 9 Select File window Usage To open result file or model data select File Type that will be read in Locate the desired file using the browser and click OPEN The model win be displayed in the Graphic Display Window and will be ready for post processing Eta Post supports LS DYNA d3plot d3eigv and d3drif NASTRAN punch and output2 result files for post processing The program wil
420. ogical and efficient way to minimize number of mouse clicks and operations The FILE menu contains functions that control the input and output of data files the EDIT menu contains functions that allow the user to alter the model graph and the VIEW menu contains functions that alter the display Each of these menus branches into various submenus and functions File Edit Tool Option Help FILE MANAGER Imports and exports data from eta Post see Section 9 7 EDIT Organizes the functions for model operation TOOLS eta Post s tool kit OPTION Provide options in the graphics display window HELP Displays the program information and phone number for technical support The menus and functions will be described in the related sections 9 4 ICON BAR The icon bar is designed to give the user easy access to the most commonly used functions in eta Post Some of the functions represented in the icon bar are also located in the different menus The user may simply click these icons to activate the functions instead of navigating through the menus Opens a result or model file 9 3 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING PRINT Creates a postscript file of the display area and sends it to the printer default or writes the image to a file Prior to printing the printer must be initialized to accommodate the print out from eta Post software ag A PART ON OFF This function enables the user to turn the selected part s on off Once the
421. ollowing messages gt ELEMENT xxxx FAILED CHECK or gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user to place them into a part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements are removed from the original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part is ON and CURRENT NO gt SELECT ELEMENT FOR ELEMENT SIZE The user can cursor check individual elements for their size e DONE or EXIT returns the user to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 11 CHECK SKEW Description This function allows the user to check any skew in the plate or solid elements Usage Ws VPG prompts gt ENTER SKEW CRITERIA DEGREE e A valid response is any real number greater than zero e If the skew of the elements is less than the user defined criteria then VPG echoes the message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK The user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu e If the skew of some elements is greater than the user defined criteria then VPG echoes one of the following messages gt ELEMENT xxxx FAILED CHECK or 6 102 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt XXXX ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 If failed elements exist then VPG prompts the user to place them into a part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements are removed from the original parts and added to the NEW PART e The new part is
422. olver related features pertaining to eta VPG s dynamic simulations can be found in the LS DYNA User s Manual The LS DYNA Users Manual is the documentation for the LS DYNA software developed by Livermore Software Technology Corporation www Istc com 1 2 The History of eta VPG The eta VPG software has its origins in the automotive CAE community where the need for efficient finite element modeling tools emerged in the mid to late 1980 s These tools were needed to address the drive for shortened vehicle development schedules and the desire to implement CAE simulations in the design process ETA had been an early innovator in the area of finite element pre amp post processing 1 1 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 1 Introduction developing and commercializing the eta FEMB software in the mid 80 s This software met the needs of the automotive CAE engineers and was quickly adopted to help the transformation of the automotive CAE community As the need for more complex simulations arose there was a simultaneous increase in low cost high speed computing capacity This provided the opportunity to create system level simulations of events mimicking the test process more accurately Prior to this time conventional CAE techniques consisted of smaller specific analyses tailored to a specific task such as NVH separate from the global system level analysis of the automobile The eta VPG developers were faced with the need for an integrated analysis
423. on 6 16 4 MODIFY MASS Description The functions of this menu allow the user change the mass value and position The functions in this menu are organized as follows MODIFY MASS OPTION ay CHANGE VALUE CHANGE POSITION ATTACH HASS EXIT Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT MASS ELEMENT FOR MODIFY User should select a mass element for modification CHANGE VALUE VPG prompts gt ENTER ELEMENT VALUE OR 0 TO EXIT e Enter a new value for the selected mass element The value of the selected mass will be replaced with the new input value and VPG returns the user to the MODIFY MASS OPTION menu CHANGE POSITION VPG prompts gt SELECT NEW POSITION NODE POINT e Selects a new node point for the mass element The position of the selected mass will be moved to the new position and returns the user to the MODIFY MASS OPTION menu 6 206 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ATTACH MASS VPG prompts gt ATTACH ALL MASS TO NEAREST NODES Y N A e YES Attach all mass to the nearest nodes e No and Abort exit and do nothing 6 16 5 DELETE MASS Description This function deletes a selected individual or group of mass elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ONLY MASS ELEMENTS WILL BE DELETED gt SELECT ELEMENTS User can select mass elements with any methods DONE The selected mass elements are deleted and return to MASS MENU ABORT return to the MASS MENU 6 16 6 IDENTIFY MASS Description This functio
424. on This card defines a concentrated nodal force or moment to a node based on the motion of another node Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MOVING PRESSURE Description This card defines moving pressure loads to a surface Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS NODE Description This card defines a concentrated nodal force to a node or a set of nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 143 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LOAD CARDS REMOVE PART Description This card defines to delete the elements of a part Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS RIGID BODY Description This card applies a concentrated nodal force to a rigid body The force is applied at the center of mass or a moment is applied around a global axis Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS SEGMENT PRESSURE Description This card defines a distributed pressure load over one triangular or quadrilateral segment defined by four nodes Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS PLATE PRESSURE Description This card defines a distributed pressure load over one shell element or shell element set Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS SUPERPLASTIC FORM Description This card is used to perform superplastic forming analyses This opti
425. on before pressing the Apply button REDO Enables the user to cancel the UNDO operation APPLY Enables the user to execute the selected operation SAVE Enables the user to save the current part attributes in file A Select file dialog box will pop up and prompt the user to specify a name after clicking this button RECALL Enables the user to load the previously saved parts attribute file and set as the current parts attribute 9 8 9 ROTATION VIEW Description This function is used to finish virtual rotation or screen rotation for virtual rotation model rotates about global axis for screen rotation model rotates about screen axis Rotate view Virtual Rotation Screen Rotation x oo asg Y foo deg Z jo deg W Use Previous Rotate Cer Apply Exit 9 8 10 USER DEFINED VIEW 9 25 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function is used to save the current viewing orientation and recall the previously saved view User may save up to 10 views in a session The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 25 View List Useriewe 1 Userieyy 2 Save View Delete Recall view Exit Figure 9 25 User View control window Usage SAVE VIEW Saves the current viewing orientation The program assigns a default view name as shown in Figure 9 26 The User may enter any view name in the VIEW NAME field Click OK to save the current viewing orientation or click CANCEL to abort the save
426. on can be applied to both solid and shell elements Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS SURFACE STRESS Description This card is used to Store segment pressures from contact and applied pressure loads on the upper and lower surfaces of the shell surface Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS SUB SEA Description This card defines the effects of the primary explosion and the subsequent bubble oscillations Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS SFIFFEN PART Description This card defines for staged construction Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS THERMAL Description This card defines nodal temperatures that thermally load the structure Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS VOLUME LOSS Description This card defines to represent the effect of tunneling on surrounding structures it is common to assume that a pre defined fraction of the volume occupied by the tunnel is lost during the construction process Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 144 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 9 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS NASTRAN The functions of the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models The functions in the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU are organized as follows BOUNDARY CONDITIONS INITIAL
427. on cut function WHOLE MODEL Whole model in grey will be displayed with section line after exit from the section cut function SECTION CUT PORTION This function allows user to display a portion of the model on the positive or negative side of the local W axis after exit from the section cut function The program will display only the selected portion of the model on the screen Figure 9 34 shows a typical display of SECTION ONLY option 9 32 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING BUMPER_2 STEP TIME 0 036000 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises 320 065125 297 203339 274 341522 251 479736 228 617935 205 756149 182 894348 160 032562 137 170761 114 308968 91 447174 68 585381 45 723587 22 861794 0 000000 0 ETA POST Figure 9 34 An Example for SECTION CUT display 9 9 2 CONSTRAIN MOTION Description This function enables the user to define a reference point for animation The user may select any node in the model as the reference point by the function SELECT REFERENCE NODE The user may also select any or all translation degree of freedom X Y and Z to constrain the motion Figure 9 35 shows the dialog window of the Constraint Motion Control Option Constrain amp Axis Constrain Axis Constrain Axis Figure 9 35 Constraint Motion Dialog Window Disregarding the displacement of the node it will be stationary in the constrained direction during the animation The rest of the mo
428. oordinate systems load curves tables and orientation vectors for various uses Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION 6 188 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR DEFINE CARD TYPES ALEBAG BOK BO _ORAWBEADQ CONNECTION PROPERTIES CONSTRUCTION STAGES CONTACT YVOLUM COORDINATE SYSTEM CURVE DEATH TIMES FRICTION HEX SPOTVWELD ASSEMBLY SPRING ORIENTATION SET ADAPTIVE SPO TELD STAGED CONSTE PART TABLE VECTOR DEFINE ALEBAG Description Defines information about the Lagrangian airbag structure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION ALEBAG OPTION BAG HOLE INFLATOR 2 Select an option VPG prompts to select following option CREATE e This function creates an ALEBAG card DELETE e This function deletes already created ALEBAG cards LIST e This function lists already created ALEBAG cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created ALEBAG cards DEFINE BOX 6 189 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description Defines a specific box shaped volume from two corner points specified in global coordinates Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER COMMAND CREATE e This function creates a new box after the user enters a box ID number and defines the two opposing corners using either nodes points or xyz coordinates DELETE e This function deletes selected boxes Boxes can be selected via the following commands CURSOR AT BOX KEY IN BOX ID MULTI POINT REGION SELEC
429. or node set REMOVE NODES IN SET remove node from selected SPC node set SHOW show selected SPC node or node set in display window 7 9 3 2 DEFINE VIBRATION Descriptions this function is used to define vibration for part base here a keyword VIBRATION_PSD_MOTION is created DYHA CARD DEFINITION DYNA CARD DEFINITION VIBRATION PSO_MOTION ITEMS CARD DESCRIPTION PID PART ID RIGID BODY DOF DEGREE OF FREEDOM VAD WELOCITY ACCELERATION DISPLACEMENT FL LEIO PSD CURVE FOR MOTION DIA VIBRATION BASE DIAMETER Cancel e CARD DESCRIPTION name of this card 7 92 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES PID part ID of the base DOF the degree of freedom of the base vibration VAD set the vibration signal type LCID the vibration PSD value curve DIA the diameter of base cross section 7 9 3 3 ANALYSIS CONTROL Description this function helps user to define control parameters such as CONTROL_ CONTACT CONTROL_ SHELL etc and also automatically calculates the termination time Analysis Control Simulation Starts From E Control Shell A Control Hourglass E Control Timestep Termination Time Step Factor End Time Total Time 2 50 0 5000 5 Steps in daplot 20 Steps in time history 200 e Simulation Start From define initial analysis height note that this value should be less than or equal to the drop height Drop height take drop height as initial analysis
430. or points Usage 1 Click CIRCLE CENTER VPG prompts NODE POINT REJECT LAST EXIT e NODE select a node this is the default option e POINT select a point e REJECT LAST reject the last selected node or point Once three nodes or points are selected a node is created at the center of the circle formed by these three nodes points automatically 6 95 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 MODEL CHECKER The functions in the MODEL CHECKER menu validate the VPG models The values for model validation are set with defaults in VPG but the values may be adjusted to suit the user s needs Element orientation size skew connectivity and interior angles may be compared to the specified criteria Elements can be checked individually or for the entire model After a model check function is performed an interactive inquiry function allows the user to pick individual elements for the calculated quality MODEL CHECKER AUTO NORMAL AUTO ORIENT SOLID ASPECT RATIO BOUNDARY DISPLAY CHECK ANGLE CHECK OVERLAP CHECK JACOBIAN CHECK NORMAL CHECK RIGID LINK CHECK ELEM SIZE CHECK SKEW CHECK TAPER CHECK VOLUME SKEW CHECK WARPAGE FEATURE LINE DISPLAY SECTION CUT CHECK FREE SURFACE CHECK SPRING CHECK JOINT CHECK MASS AND INERTIA CHECK PENETRATION PART CONNEC TIVITY NORMAL ALIGNMENT ENHANCE MESH SUMMARY CHECK GAF REPAIR TIMESTEP VIEVY EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following section
431. order 3 Once the desired lines are selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF LAYERS OF SOLID ELEMENTS 2 ACCEPT MESH Y N 6 57 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Line direction is not important during 4 LINE DRAG but the lines should be of reasonable length to form the desired shape The control lines do not have to pass through the nodes of the plate elements 6 3 7 ELEMENT TYPE Description Defines element type prior to utilizing the 2 3 4 LINE MESH or SURFACE MESH Element types are as following QUADRILATERAL TRIANGULAR TSHELL SOUD EXIT Usage after finishing this function elements created in 2 3 4 LINE MESH will be the element type selected 6 3 8 IDENTIFY ELEMENT Description This function allows the user to identify an element and its nodes by cursor selection Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT ELEMENT BY CURSOR VPG identifies the element s respective type number part and nodes The selected element will be highlighted and element and node numbers will be displayed in the dialogue window e The user also has the option to key in the number of a desired element to identify its location and characteristics e It will also identify PLOTEL PLOTEL PLATE PLATE CONNECTOR SOLID SOLID CELAS2 SPRING CELAS1 SPOTWELD RBAR MASS CTUBE JOINT ISO SHL T SHELL RBE3 SEATBELT 6 58 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 3 9 LABEL Description This function toggles the el
432. ostscript file of the display area and sends the file to the printer default or to a file Prior to printing the postscript driver must be initialized a A PART ON OFF Turns the selected parts on or off The PART TURN ON OFF dialog window is displayed once selected 2 8 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features ey VIRTUAL X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global X axis when the cursor is moved up or down VIRTUAL Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down cts Ne VIRTUAL Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the global Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN X ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen X axis when the cursor is moved up or down gt SCREEN Y ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Y axis when the cursor is moved up or down SCREEN Z ROTATION The displayed model will dynamically rotate about the screen Z axis when the cursor is moved up or down Note Screen axis rotation uses the display screen as a plane of rotation The screen X axis is horizontal The screen Y axis vertical and screen Z axis is perpendicular to screen X and Y FREE ROTATION This function is a combination of SX and SY Moving the mouse up down manipulates SX Moving the mouse left right manipulates SY Moving
433. oundary condition load and constraint in suspension model 7 2 12 5 READ BLC STF FILE Description This option allows the user to read in a BLC STF file 7 2 12 6 G VALUE SPRUNG MASS Description This option allows the user to define sprung mass 7 2 12 7 g VALUE UNSPRUNG MASS Description This option allows the user to define unsprung mass 7 2 13 FIX STF_PART INERTIA Description This function removes inertia of selected parts from suspension model Usage 1 VPG prompts SELECT OPTION 7 25 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES FIX STF PART INERTIA AUTOMATIC SELECT FROM LIST EXIT AUTOMATIC e All parts inertia in suspension model are removed SELECT FROM LIST e Apart list pops up then inertia of selected part will be removed EXIT e Exit this function without removing inertia 7 2 14 WRITE STF _ FILE Description This function export suspension models Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME e Entering file name and click OK STF_FILE is exported 7 26 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 TIRE MENU The tire model is one of the most important components in a VPG analysis Although modern pneumatic tires have very complex structures the VPG tire model concentrates only on the most important global mechanical properties of the tire These properties ensure the proper transfer of forces and displacements from the tire road contact interface to the vehicle chassis suspension and body st
434. ove the light source in the positive and negative Y direction 10 1 16 ACTIVE WINDOW Description This command allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed geometry model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the region by dragging a window over the desired area by specifying the volume of space via the keyboard with X Y Z coordinates by two diagonal points nodes by multiple point region or by group elements VPG displays the elements lines and surfaces within the window volume in Space as active Other objects on screen remain masked and inactive See Figure 10 1 16 10 7 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY ACTIVE WINDOW DIAGONAL NODESPTS KEY IN sz RANGE OFF SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW DRAG WINDOW MULTIF POINT WINDOW GROUP ELEMENTS INVERSE EXIT Figure 10 1 16 Active Window Menu Note An ACTIVE WINDOW may be defined at any time within any menu of VPG by clicking the right mouse button Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION FOR ACTIVE WINDOW DIAGONAL NODE PTS KEY IN XYZ RANGE ACTIVE WINDOW OFF SCALE ACTIVE WINDOW DRAG WINDOW MULTI POINT WINDOW GROUP ELEMENTS INVERSE EXIT DIAGONAL NODE POINTS The user selects two nodes points in a diagonal fashion to define the active widow KEY IN XYZ RANGE The user defines the size volume of the active window by entering its global coordinates via the keyboard The user may also expand an existing active window by modifying any or all of its coordinates
435. p up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created CONTACT VOLUME cards DEFINE COORDINATE SYSTEM Description This function allows the user to define a local coordinate system using nodes points or vectors Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT LOCAL SYSTEM TYPE NODES e Defines a local coordinate system using three nodes SYSTEM Defines a local coordinate system from a previously defined coordinate system or key entry VECTOR e Uses a vector to define the coordinate system When using the MODIFY function to modify a coordinate system VPG displays the CSYS DEFINITION CARD after the DEFINE COORDINATE CARD LIST allowing the user to key in the exact XYZ coordinates of the system DEFINE CURVE Description This function defines a load curve Usage 1 When CURVE is selected VPG displays the following options CREATE When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER DATA TIME amp VALUE FOR POINT 1 OR END 6 192 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e At least two points must be defined to create a curve e Once the two points are defined the curve is displayed e Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DELETE e Displays DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST and allows user to select and delete curves ERASE UNREF CURVE e This function allows the user to DELETE either ALL or SELECTED unreferenced curves in a database LIST e Displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST
436. part set It allows for convenient organization of parts in a complicated model and manipulation of large numbers of parts in a sub assembly level 6 129 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 8 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS LS DYNA The functions of the BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MENU create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 8 1 BOUNDARY CARDS Description The BOUNDARY CARDS functions create and verify constraints and loads on finite element models The functions in the BOUNDARY CARDS MENU are organized as follows Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION BOUNDARY CARDS ACOUSTIC COUPLING AMBIENT EQS CONVECTION CYCLIC ELEMENT METHOD FLU MCOL NON REFLEC TING MON REFLEC TING 20 OUTFLOW CFO PRESCRIBED CFO PRESCRIBED MOTION PRESCRIBED ORIENTATION PRESSURE CFD SET PRESSURE OUTFLOW RADIATION SLIDING PLANE oPH a OYMMETRY FAILURE TEMPERATURE THERMAL WELD USA Note All of these options share this standard submenu The submenu yields varying ways to access 6 130 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR and create definition cards for the above BOUNDARY CARDS gt CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards
437. ponent displayed in the CURRENT COMPONENT CURRENT COMPONET The CURRENT COMPONET WINDOW determines the type of component that will be displayed during the plot animation Only one component may be selected per plot animation The component types displayed in the window are determined by the types STRESS STRAIN or DISPALCEMENT If STRESS STRAIN is selected the supported components are listed below SIGMA_XX SIGMA_YY SIGMA_ZZ SIGMA_XY SIGMA_YZ SIGMA_ZX BEND MONMENT_MXX BEND MONMENT_MYY BEND MONMENT_MZZ SHEAR_RES_ QXX SHEAR_RES QYY NORMAL_RES_NXX NORMAL_RES_ NYY NORMAL_RES_NXY THICKNESS EPSON _ XX EPSON_YY EPSON _ ZZ EPSON_XY EPSON_YZ EPSON ZX ENERGY MAX_VONMISES MEAN STRESS PRIN STRESS1 PRIN STRESS2 PRIN STRESS3 MAX _SHEAR_STRESS PRIN STRAIN1 PRIN STRAIN2 THINNING NORM_STRAIN If DISPLACEMENT is selected the supported components are listed below DISPLACEMENT_X DISPLACEMENT_Y DISPLACEMENT Z DISPLACEMENT TOTAL 9 52 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 11 5 SELECT ALAYER Description Refer to NIP number of integration point in LS DYNA menu 9 11 6 UNDEFORM Description This function allows the resultant contour of the current frame projects on the undeformed original blank surface Please see the Figure 9 57 and 9 58 to compare the result LS 07MA weer impa STEP 10 TUE NNa EHATE COMPOHERNT Xeiras ING 1 So area to Db 214 Foose iii izana 12 057 ETAPOST
438. processor automatically performs a fatigue life analysis prediction to identify the key damage events and stress amplitudes This data is then used to calculate the percentage of fatigue life remaining at the completion of the durability cycle eta VPG displays these results in easily read combined fatigue life contour plots Signal Processing Module eta VPG performs full vehicle NVH studies on simulated proving ground surfaces eta VPG automatically converts time domain analysis results into frequency domain via FFI Fast Fourier Transform eta VPG determines both low and mid range frequencies up to 250Hz for operating mode shapes frequencies structural and airborne noise and frequency responses such as idle shake rough road power train and wheel imbalance 1 5 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features Chapter Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features This chapter provides an overview of the main features of eta VPG Detailed descriptions of the use of these features are provided in subsequent chapters 2 1 GENERAL The eta VPG Processor has a complete graphical user interface that is operated on Windows Windows NT and above and UNIX Linux based workstations including IBM HP SUN and SGI operating systems The model generation input file preparation and results processing activities are all performed in an identical environment The solution can be executed on both local and or remote server systems 2 2 PRE
439. prompts for the location of the dummy gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR DRIVER FMVSS214 DUMMY e The H POINT is a reference point of the dummy based on which the dummy is located 5 Select KEY IN X Y Z and key in input values The US SIDE IMPACT DUMMY is imported from the library and put on the specified location 6 AROTATION menu appears in the VPG Menu Window Using these menu options the user may perform 2 D positioning of the dummy rotating the dummy body tibia lower leg or foot position 7 42 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES YPG Menu Vindor DUMMY ASSEMBLY mz gt ABORT ROTATION ANGLE ROTATE ROUND 7 Select EXIT 8 VPG prompts the location of passenger dummy gt PICK TEST POINT H POINT FOR PASSENGER FMVSS214 DUMMY 9 Select KEY IN X Y Z and input values The passenger dummy is imported and positioned according to the H point Similar to the driver dummy a rotation menu appears in the VPG Menu Window The user can rotate the whole dummy or just the leg or foot to adjust their positions Select EXIT to complete the dummy positioning The MDB and dummies will be positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model ETASVPG Figure 2 An Example of a Generated Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 43 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 4 5 3 FMVSS208 RIGID WALL 0 30 DEG Description This function allows users to create rigid walls to s
440. ption This option allows the user to add connections to the database from a file that stores the connection information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME e The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 If the file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the ASSEMBLY AUTO menu 6 17 2 WRITE TO FILE Description The function allows the user to output connection information to a file The output format is a simple xml file which contains the mass location and properties This file may be generated outside VPG and imported to create the necessary masses within VPG The functions in this menu are organized as follows 6 208 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR WRITE CONHECTION HODAL RIGID BODY SPRING DAHPER JOINT CONST HODE SET BUSHING EXIT Select one connection type Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 If the file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes the chosen connection information to the file and returns the user to the WRITE CONNECTION menu 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE xml ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N e YES Overwrite the file with new dat
441. quadrilateral and triangular subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e A CQUAD4 ELEMENT requires 4 nodes or points to be selected e ACTRIA3 requires 3 nodes or points to be selected then an entry of DONE e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE SOLID ELEMENT NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the SOLID ELEMENT cube wedge tetrahedron subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage Note A solid element cannot be created in a part that has plate properties The user must either create a new part and assign it solid properties or make a part current that contains solid properties 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR SOLID ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three CTETRA Pick 4 nodes points and type DONE CPENTA Pick 6 nodes points pick the second set of 3 nodes points in the same order as the first set of 3 nodes points and type DONE CHEXA Pick 8 nodes points pick the second set of 4 nodes points in the same order as the first set of 4 nodes points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT terminates this function CREATE SPRING ELEMENT CELAS2 NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the SPRING ELEMENT NASTRAN CELAS2 sub section
442. r This function will cut the curve from a time to another time 9 12 6 17 FILTERS Description In this section an introduction on digital filter is presented including the filter design usage and result interpretation There are four different filters implemented in OPERATION They are e Average Filter e Butterworth Filter e Finite Impulse Response FIR e SAE Filter 9 77 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 18 AVERAGE Description Average allows the user to smooth the curve through averaging the value of a point with a number of surrounding points defined by user This averaging of the points can make the curve become smoother Usage Select the Average type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the number of the points for averaging as Figure 9 76 is shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient in the input box which displays the default value of 10 DATA CONTROL Point Number faol Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 76 DATA CONTROL window of AVERAGE filter After the user enters the appropriate coefficient presses OK to accept the input value and exit the DATA CONTROL window Press Apply to display the filter result 9 12 6 19 FIR FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth the curve according to the finite impulse response FIR filter spe
443. r 6 PRE PROCESSOR The Pre Processor menu contains a series of submenus with the ability to create and edit lines surfaces elements material properties and element properties PRE PROCESSOR LINE SURFACE ELEMENT NODE MODEL CHECKER SET MENU MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONDITION CONSTRAINT INITIAL CONDITION LOAD CARDS CONTACT INTERFACE DYNA MISC MASS MENU ASSEMBLY EXIT The Pre Processor submenus are described in their own individual sections that follow Note DYNA MISC only appears when the analysis code is set to LS DYNA SUPERELEMENT only appears when the analysis code is set to NASTRAN 6 1 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 LINE The functions of the LINE MENU are intended to create a new set of line data or to modify existing line data VPG currently has a limitation of 150 000 lines or 200 000 points per database The following options are available in the LINE MENU LINE ADD POINTS GENERATE ARCS ARC TANGENT 2 LINES 3 POINT ARC COPY COMBINE LINES SPUNE CURVE DELETE EXTEND LINE GENERATE LINES IDENTIFY MIRROR OFFSET PROJECT RESPACE LINE REVERSE DIRECTION SCALE FACTOR SECTION LINE SHOW SPUT TRANSFORM BRIDGE LINE VIEW EXIT Each option is selectable by using the left mouse button to select the menu item or by typing the first two letters of each command in the prompt in the VPG Message Window A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections
444. r and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW EPS Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated resultant strain values via color fringe plots The resultant strain value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGxx Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xx component stress values via color fringe plots The xx component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SiGyy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated yy component stress values via color fringe plots The yy component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area 10 27 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY SHOW SIGzz Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated zz component stress values via color fringe plots The zZ component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of the display area SHOW SIGxy Description This function allows the user to visualize the calculated xy component stress values via color fringe plots The xy component stress value shown on the fringe plot will correspond to the color bar and legend shown on the right side of
445. r right hand corner of the screen The user can also access the CURRENT PART function by clicking on the current part name displayed in the DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS WINDOW 10 3 9 DELETE 10 20 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY Description This function allows the user to delete a part with its associated surfaces lines and elements The nodes of a part that are selected for deletion become unreferenced and appear as white asterisks on the screen Note If deleting the CURRENT PART the user must select a new current part in order to continue model generation Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A LINE L AN ELEM C OR PART NAME P OF A PART e The user selects a target part gt XXXX LINES XXXX SURFACES AND XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART YYYY 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT DELETE SELECTED PART OPTION PARTS ONLY PART NODES ABORT e The user selects a deletion option PARTS ONLY deletes the part s selected along with any element definition and geometric entities All nodes will remain as UNREFERENCED NODES PARTS NODES_ will delete the UNREFERENCED NODES in addition to element and geometry data ABORT will return the user to the PART MENU 3 Once the user selects the option VPG prompts gt XXXX LINES XXXX SURFACES AND XXXX ELEMENTS IN PART YYYY gt O K TO DELETE PART YYYY YES NO e YES deletes the selected part and its lines surfaces and elements e NO deselects the part 10 3 10 KEEP PART Description This
446. r selecting parts click EXIT VPG prompts gt PICK SPOTWELD LOCATION e Click cursor on the screen MAT100 brick spotweld is created The contact 6 52 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically CREATE MAT100 BY VIP FILE LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the MAT100 BY VIP FILE subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS The vip to be read includes information about spotweld location Usage 1 VPG prompts to select spotweld type as beam or solid 2 After selecting the spotweld type a file dialogue pops up open a vip file MAT 100 spotweld is created The contact between spotwelds and elements they connect are created automatically CREATE SPH GENERATE METHOD LS DYNA Description This section covers the options for the SPH GENERATE METHOD subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG offers three methods to create SPH elements SPH GENERATE METHOD 1 BY Box 2 BY ELEMENT 3 BY NODE 4 ExIT 2 If BY BOX is selected VPG prompts CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES After creating a coordinate VPG prompts ENTER BOX EDGE LENGTH ALONG LOCAL X Y Z AXIS After entering the values VPG prompts ENTER NO OF SPH ALONG LOCAL X Y Z AXIS After entering the values VPG prompts ENTER LUMPED MASS VALUE After entering the values VPG prompts INCLUDE SPH ELEMENT INTO NEW PART YES NO YES e SPH elements will be included into a new created part NO SPH
447. re 9 38 Example of Mirror Function Input BUMPER_2 STEP TIME 0 035999 9 9 COMPONENT Maximum Von Mises 339 53710 315 284454 291 031799 266 779144 242 526505 218 273849 gt 194 021194 A 169 768555 145 515900 121 263252 97 010597 72 757950 48 505299 24 252649 0 000000 ETA POST eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Figure 9 39 Mirror Results by XZ Plane Press the CLEAN MIRROR RESULT on the Control Option Window the mirror result is missing and the model is displayed as the original status 9 9 4 DEFINE ACTIVE WINDOW Description This function allows the user to isolate a portion of the displayed model for more detailed viewing or editing The user defines the desired area eta Post displays the elements with the analysis result as active window Other objects on the screen will be masked and inactive Usage The user can define the Active Window by Cursor Drag Window Polygon Freehand and Displayed See the Control Option shown in Figure 9 40 Control Option Select by Cursor Select by rindo Select by Polygon Select by Freehand Select by Displayed Reject Last Selected Figure 9 40 Define Active Window Control Window Click CLEAR ACTIVE WINDOW from the TOOL Pull down menu to remove the defined active window The program will display the whole model as the original status 9 9 5 DEFINE NODE TRACE Description NODE TRACING allows the user to select a set of nodes to be traced du
448. red 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis e Once the desired direction has been entered for the spring VPG prompts the user to enter a property If no properties exist in the database at the current time VPG prompts to create one 2 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR CELAS1 ELEMENT e To create the elements the user may select a node point keyboard entry or any combination of the three e Select 2 nodes points The element will be created e EXIT or ABORT will exit this function CREATE RIGID BAR RBAR NASTRAN Description This section covers the options for the RIGID BAR section of CREATE 6 43 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER D O F CNA CNB CMA CMB e Any combination of integers 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 may be entered as degrees of freedom 1 translational along the global X axis 2 translational along the global Y axis 3 translational along the global Z axis 4 rotational along the global X axis 5 rotational along the global Y axis 6 rotational along the global Z axis Blanks or commas are not allowed between the degrees of freedom i e 123 456 456 345 2 Once the desired D O F has been entered the prompt will read gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT
449. red node is traced The selected node will be labeled with the node number KEY IN ID This option allows user to identify the element by entering a node number The user enters the node number and selects OK The desired node will be highlighted and the node number displayed on the screen Ya IDENDTIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element its part and its nodes by cursor selection default or key in ID number The program will highlight the selected element with the element number on the screen and also display the element connectivity in the message window The operation of this function is same as the IDENTIFY NODE function Figure 9 4 shows the CONTROL OPTION window when the function starts Control Option Element ID Exit Figure 9 4 Identify Element Control Option Window il DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function calculates the distance between two nodes selected by cursor pick or key in node number The program displays a CONTROL OPTION window as shown as Figure 9 5 Control Option Node Point ID 148 Reject Figure 9 5 Measure distance Control Option window 9 8 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING The operation on SEELECT BY CURSOR and KEY IN ID is same as in IDENTIFY NODE function REJECT LAST allows user to reject the last selected node Once two nodes are selected the program labels the distance and X Y Z components between the selected nodes on the
450. resize the arrows that represent the element normal 2 10 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 An Overview of eta VPG Features P Y CLEAR NODE Clear the display of connecting nodes eps be CLEAR ELEMENT Clear the display of connecting elements Fail IDENTIFY NODE This function enables the user to identify any node ia IDENDFIY ELEMENT This function enables the user to identify any element Gute Gal DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO NODES This function enables the user to calculate the distance between two nodes amp ANGLE BETWEEN THREE NODES This function enables the user to measure the angle between two vectors formed by three nodes Ta COORDINATES ON OFF This function enables the user to turn on off coordinate systems 2 8 MOUSE FUNCTIONS All VPG model rotation pan zoom functions are accessible via selection using the left mouse button To access a function the user selects the desired button using the mouse pointer and presses the left mouse button This button is also used for selecting definition cards locating the cursor in definition cards creating drag windows locating points nodes elements etc The right mouse button activates a floating pull down menu with commonly used model manipulation functions See Figure 2 8 1 All functions on the menu will be described in following chapters Free Rotation Zoom Pan Fill Clear p vVitual x Rotation Vitual Y Rotation Virtual Rotation Screen Rotation P Fixed views p Figur
451. ring animation A trace is a line or track that identifies the path that a node takes during its movement from one time step to another An example of the Node Trace is show in Figure 9 41 Usage 9 36 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING ETA POST Figure 9 41 The Node Trace Click the CLEAR NODE TRACE from the TOOL Pull down menu to remove all of the currently defined traces 9 9 6 PART VALUE CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the maximum and minimum node results in a time history graph of the selected part The function only works during Contour Animation with ELEMENT RESULT options selected 9 9 7 NODAL VALUE CURVE Description This function allows the user to plot the result in a time history graph of the selected nodes The function only works during Contour Animation The user should start a contour animation of a selected result component before using this function The program displays a dialog window as shown in Figure 9 42 9 37 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Control Option Select by Cursor Select by Ainda Select by Polygon Select by Freehand Select by Displayed Reject Last Selected Figure 9 42 Select Nodes Control Option The procedure of selecting nodes is common with other functions described in previous sections After selecting desired nodes exit the function the node curve result is shown as in Figure 9 43 BUMPER_2 STEP TIME 0 035999 MAX_VONMISES NOD
452. ription templates 4 10 HEEDS HEEDS is an optimization program based on NASTRAN DYNA etc which will help to find a best result and do much good to the design HEEDS module in VPG supports to define HEEDS discrete set distribution variable tag and output HEEDS file and relative DYNA file For tagging it now only supports DYNA material and section 4 11 ANALYSIS The ANALYSIS menu allows users to define all parameters necessary to execute an analysis Many non graphical parameters are required to carry out an analysis For instance LS DYNA models require a termination time and require a definition of output frequency for the model results VPG allows users to access all CONTROL CARDS and DATABASE parameters available in LS DYNA Similar capabilities are available for NASTRAN RADIOSS and PAMCRASH model databases 4 12 FATIGUE The FATIGUE menu allows users to post process stress data calculate fatigue damage for LS DYNA or NASTRAN data This menu allows users to calculate and display the results of this fatigue calculation 4 13 POST 4 2 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 4 Main Menu The POST menu launches the ETA Postprocessor application By selecting this menu option the current database is stored in a temporary location and closed The Post Processor application is then opened Once the Postprocessor application is closed the temporary database is then restored 4 14 UTILITIES The UTILITIES menu allows users to perform various modelin
453. ro files The recording operations in the macro file will be performed one by one 10 45 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX A APPENDIX A HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS UNIX MB HP UX 11 Minimum CRX 8 Plane PLATFORM OS VERSION GRAPHICS CARD DISK SPACE AIX 4 24 Minimum 24 Plane Graphics IRIX 6 5 All Graphics Boards Supported SunOS 5 8 Minimum Creator 3D LINUX The RedHat operating system version 7 3 and above is supported eta VPG must run under KDE environment The NVIDIA graphic cards are recommended PC WINDOWS eta VPG in PC platform is compatible with PC LS DYNA 970 It will run in Windows 98 2000 and XP environments Itis not recommended for usage with earlier versions of Windows The following are minimum requirements for proper operation of eta VPG in a Windows environment Minimum Graphics Requirement XGA 1024 x 768 Graphics Card OpenGL based Nvidia chip set recommended Minimum Memory Requirement Small models under 50 000 elements 384 megabytes RAM Medium models 50 000 500 000 elements 512 megabytes RAM Large models 500 000 1 million elements 768 megabytes RAM Super large models 1 million to 4 millions 1024 megabytes RAM Minimum Load space requirement 256 megabytes Recommended processor Pentium 4 A 1 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX B APPENDIX B SUPPORTED IGES ENTITY TYPES NAME Conic Arc Entity Singular Subfigure Instance Entity B 1 eta VPG 3 4 APPENDIX C APPENDIX C V
454. rompts gt REMOVE NODAL FORCE SELECT NODES The left mouse button may be used to remove selected nodal forces one ata time When a nodal force is removed the node is highlighted by a small circle lf a node is selected twice the following message appears gt NODE xxxx ALREADY PICKED DONE removes the selected nodal forces and exits the function REMOVE FORCE ABORT exits the function REMOVE FORCE without deleting the selected nodal forces LOAD STATIC LOAD REMOVE PRESSURE Description This function removes pressure loads from selected elements in the current load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO LIST 2 VPG prompts gt gt e e Vv V e REMOVE PRESSURE LOAD SELECT ELEMENTS When a pressure load is removed the element is highlighted and the arrow is removed If an element is selected more than once the following message appears ELEMENT xxxx ALREADY PICKED SELECT ELEMENTS DONE will exit the user to the LOADING OPTIONS submenu ABORT will exit the user to the LOADING OPTIONS submenu without removing any of the selected pressure loads LOAD STATIC LOAD SHOW Description This function shows the selected load set Usage 1 VPG prompts gt 6 149 SELECT CARD TO SHOW eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Available load sets are displayed in the STATIC LOAD CARD window LOAD DYNAMIC LOAD Description This function defines and modifies dynamic loads The loads may be
455. rompts gt PICK NEXT POINT OR NODE ABORT DONE EXIT KEY IN XYZ e The user may enter up to 3 points globally to define a point or node INCREMENTAL XYZ e The user may enter DX DY DZ from the previous point selected to define a point or node NODE POINT REJECT LAST 2 DONE and EXIT will exit the function an example of a generated spline curve 6 1 8 DELETE Description This function allows the user to delete selected lines Lines may be selected by individual cursor selections by dragging a window by entering line numbers or by multi point region selections Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK LINE TO DELETE gt SELECT LINES Select DONE once the desired lines have been selected 6 7 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 1 9 EXTEND LINE Description This function allows the user to extend a line by a specified distance along the axis of the line at either end of the line Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINE TO EXTEND 2 VPG prompts gt SELECT END POINT TO EXTEND LINE e Select the desired end point of the line to extend 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER LENGTH TO BE EXTENDED e Input any real number 4 Selecting UNDO will undo the last extend operation 6 1 10 GENERATE LINES Description This function allows the user to draw a line between nodes or points via a combination of keyboard and mouse selections The created lines are incorporated into the CURRENT PART or see PART CONTROL MENU Us
456. rons Wedges Tetras Exit Figure 9 44 Model Summary 9 42 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 9 10 OPTION MENU The functions in this menu are shown in Figure 9 45 The user can customize the appearance in the graphic display window v Axis i Title M Color bar m Max Min Marker Ww Logo W Normal Color M Boundary Line i Elem Outline M Elem Orientation M Active Contour Range M Overall Contour Range Define Rotation Center l Display Graph on Screen M Apply VFG Layout l Apply Second Render Apply Local Light l Apply Mouse Tracking F Apply Model Configure Figure 9 45 Tool Menu A detailed description of each option is given in the following section 9 10 1 AXIS toggle Description The XYZ coordinate system is displayed in the lower left corner of the display window This option allows the user to toggle the axes on off 9 10 2 TITLE toggle Description The title of the result file is displayed in the upper left corner of the display window This option allows the user to toggle the title on off 9 10 3 COLORBAR Description This function shows color bar when animate results 9 10 4 MIN MAX MARKER Description This function shows the minimum and maximum marker at relative value position 9 10 5 LOGO toggle 9 43 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This function toggles the logo ETA POST at the lower left corner of screen on and off 9 10 6 NORMAL COLOR
457. rs Each function allows the user to graphically display and manipulate a specific result for stamping simulation The user selects the desired PLOT STATE TIME STEPS FRAME RANGE and COMPONENTS to plot or animate the result Note To load LS DYNA result files and to activate the post process menu see FILE OPEN in Chapter 3 FILE MANAGER Note The user will not have access to have the control window when other control option windows are active A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections oo This function shows the undeformed status of the model DEFORM The functions in this menu animate the displacement of the model in real time and display displacement of an individual step The options are shown in Figure 9 49 9 47 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Deform Operation C Undeform Scale Factor Frames Single Frame 0 00000 0 003416 0 006831 0 010246 5 0 013663 From 1 To z0 Frame Mumber 4 Frames Second Figure 9 49 Deform control window 9 11 1 DEFORM OPERATIONS SHOW UNDEFORM SHAPE This function enables user to toggle the undeformed geometry of the model on off The deformed shape plot is displayed in its original color The plot of the undeformed shape is displayed in white over the deformed shape SCALE FACTOR This command adjusts the default scale factor of the deformed shape plot The default is 1 It scales plot components to a user defined value a
458. ructure A key advantage of this tire model is its simplicity giving CPU economy Thetire has the ability to interact with three dimensional road surfaces in a manner consistent with actual tires This allows for the prediction of lateral and longitudinal force within the vehicle suspension with greater accuracy VPQG s tire generator creates tires with the following characteristics and properties The tire s tread and chafer are Mooney Rivlin type rubber materials modeled with eight node solid elements The tire s top ply and sidewall are modeled as shell elements with elastic material The wheel is made of rigid shell elements Tire inflation pressure is defined according to the formula pV T constant where p is pressure V is the volume confined within the top ply side wall and the wheel hub and T is a temperature assumed to be constant during the simulated testing process The finished VPG Tire model contains a total of 2441 nodes and 2264 elements including 1304 shell elements and 960 solid elements The TIRE MENU allows the user to generate tire models with user defined characteristics TIRE MODEL CREATE VPG TIRE CREATE COMPOSITE CREATE DIRECT MATRIX DELETE TIRE MODEL COPY TIRE MODEL EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 27 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 3 1 CREATE VPG TIRE Description This option allows the user to generate VPG tire models based on user defi
459. s 6 96 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 5 1 AUTO NORMAL Description This function sets the direction of the displayed plate element normal to a selected reference plate element The element normal is calculated by using a right hand rule as applied to the element numbering node 1 node 2 node 3 etc to establish the direction of the normal Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR AUTO NORMAL ALL ACTIVE PARTS CURSOR PICK PART EXIT 2 User will be prompted to select a part or an element for a reference normal The selected elements will display their current normal direction VPG prompts gt IS NORMAL DIRECTION ACCEPTABLE Y N YES e All selected element normals will be made consistent with a referenced element normal If normals are reversed for some elements VPG displays gt NORMAL REVERSED FOR XXXX ELEMENTS NO e All displayed element normals will be reversed according to the referenced element normal Note Selecting one part at a time is recommended Parts that branch off or are separated do not always get adjusted properly 6 5 2 AUTO ORIENT SOLID Description This function identifies displays and adjusts any solid elements hexa or tetra which due to element connectivity have a non positive volume to a positive volume Usage 1 AUTO ORIENT SOLID When the user selects AUTO ORIENT SOLID no selection options are provided The program automatically adjusts the display of solid element
460. s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VOID Description This card defines initial voided part set ID s or part numbers Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description INIT COND CARDS VOLUME FRACTION Description This card defines initial volume fraction Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 141 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 8 4 LOAD CARDS Description The LOAD CARD submenu contains cards that define applied forces Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION LOAD CARDS ALE CONVECTION BEAM BLAST BODY BRODE explosive DENSITY GRAVITY PART HEAT GENERATION MASK MOTION NODE MOVING PRESSURE NODE REMOVE PART RIGID BODY SEGMENT PRESSURE PLATE PRESSURE SUPERPLASTIC FORM SURFACE STRESS SUB SEA S TIFFEN PART THERMAL VOLUME LOSS Note All of these options share this standard submenu Only the CREATE command differs with respect to each function and will be explained in the following pages CREATE e Defines a new card DELETE e Deletes a selected card or cards from those displayed in a pop up window LIST e Lists the cards in the option s database via pop up window MODIFY e Similar to the CREATE command this command lists the defined cards in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them EXIT LOAD CARDS ALE CONVECTION Description This card defines the convection thermal energy transfer from a hot ALE fluid to the
461. s in a pop up window and allows the user to select and modify them 6 158 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR EXIT 6 10 4 ASSIGN MATERIAL Description This function assigns materials to selected parts Usage 1 If no materials are present in the database VPG gives the message NO MATERIALS DEFINED IN DATABASE and returns to the command prompt 2 Otherwise VPG prompts the user to select a material gt SELECT A MATERIAL Users may select an existing material by entering one name or by picking an element on the screen that is assigned to the desired material default 3 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT PARTS TO ASSIGN MATERIAL gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART 4 The material will be assigned to the selected elements of the parts The selected parts will be shown in the material color after the user exits this command 6 10 5 CHANGE COLOR Description This function changes the color of a selected material Usage 1 The color bar is displayed on the right edge of the graphic area 2 After the user selects the material VPG prompts gt MATERIAL ID X IS SELECTED gt SELECT COLOR FROM COLOR BAR OR EXIT 3 The color of the material changes to the user selected color from the color bar 6 10 6 COPY Description This function duplicates the properties from one material onto another material Usage 1 VPG displays the material card list and prompts
462. sage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS ALL NODES KEY IN NODE NUMBER NODE POINT EXIT e lf ALL NODES is selected VPG displays the appropriate numbers at the node locations e If KEY IN NODE NUMBER is selected VPG displays the appropriate node location The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx X xX xxx Ye y yyy Z 2Z zzz e If NODE is selected VPG displays the number of the node nearest the cursor location The following message will echo on the command line gt NODE xxxx X xX xxx Ye y yyy Z 2Z Zzz If POINT is selected VPG displays the number of the point nearest the cursor eta VPG3 4 6 86 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR location The following message will echo on the command line gt POINT xxxx X xX xxx Yoe y yyy Z 2Z Zzz e EXIT completes the command sequence and returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu Note To clear the label display select CLEAR from the VPG DISPLAY PARAMETER OPTIONS module 6 4 11 LABEL Description This function toggles the node labels ON OFF When the user selects LABEL VPG displays the numbers of the nodes in the database 6 4 12 MOVE NODE Description This function moves referenced or unreferenced nodes to any location on the display screen Usage 1 Click MOVE NODE VPG prompts MOVE NODE OPTIONS NODE TO PTYNODE NODE TO MID POINT NODE TO MID DISTANCE NODE TO SHORTEST PT NODE TO SURFACE NODE TO SURF BOUNDARY ALONG EDGE EXIT 6 4 12 1 MOVE NODE T
463. same name will be exported simultaneously Usage 1 The export file dialog pops up and VPG prompts user to enter the DYNA input file name 2 After input file name is entered DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS dialog pops up now user Can input some information such as analysis title etc e click OK the DYNA input file is exported and a HEEDS input file with the same name will be exported simultaneously 7 10 6 THICKNESS OPTIMIZATION Description This function guides user to define parameters for thickness optimization Usage 1 VPG prompts user to select a part from the part list 2 After apart is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER MINIMUM MAXIMUM THICKNESS FOR SELECTED PART MINIMUM gt 0 0 3 After the minimum and maximum thickness is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER RESOLUTION FOR THICKNESS RANGE RESOLUTION gt 0 0 4 After the resolution is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER MAXIMUM Von Mises STRESS gt 0 0 5 After maximum stress is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER MEMORY SIZE NUMBER OF WORDS TO RUN DYNA JOB gt 0 6 After memory size is entered VPG prompts gt ENTER NUMBER OF EVALUATION gt 0 7 After number of evaluation is entered VPG prompts to export input file to run 7 101 eta VPG3 4 8 1 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION Chapter Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION VPG allows the user to define CASE CONTROL ANALYSIS or to submit an analysis for execution directly from the VPG interface using the fu
464. screte sets EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 2 DISTRIBUTION Description This function helps user to define distribution 7 99 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY CREATE create a distribution DELETE delete defined distributions LIST list defined distributions MODIFY modify defined distributions EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 3 VARIABLE Description This function helps user to define variable SELECT OPTION CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY CREATE create a variable DELETE delete defined variables LIST list defined variables MODIFY modify defined variables EXIT exit and returns to the upper menu 7 10 4 TAGGING Description This function helps user to tag defined variables to material or section parameters Usage 1 7 100 The variable cards list pops up and VPG prompts gt SELECT VARIABLE CARD TO TAG After a variable is selected VPG prompts gt SELECT OPTION MATERIAL e the defined materials list will pop up SECTION e the defined sections list will pop up After a material or section is selected their definition card will pop up user now can eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES toggle on an option and click OK then the selected variable will be tagged to this option successfully 7 10 5 EXPORT HEEDS FILE Description This function helps user to export DYNA input file a HEEDS input file with the
465. selected and prepared for animation ODD FRAMES Once Odd Frames is picked odd frames in the list window are selected and prepared for animation SELECT FRAMES Once Select Frames is picked eta Post allows user to select more than frames prepared for animation The left mouse button picking works in conjunction with CTRL and SHIFT whereupon the user can select any desired frames RANGE The RANGE window allows the user multiple options for determining the frames to be animated shown as Figure 9 52 The RANGE option allows the user to input a select range of frames and the increment they will be run at The input field for the RANGE option is not accessible until the option is selected After inputs desired values clicks ENTER to make the PLAY tuni enabled RESET This function clears all previously selected frames 9 11 3 ANIMATION OPERATIONS Description This function allows the user to animate the selected frames shown as Figure 9 53 9 49 Frame Number 4 FramesfSecond Figure 9 53 Animation Control Panel PLAY heto eta Post stars to animate the selected frames When the PLAY icon is selected the eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 50 other three icons PAUSE STOP and EXPORT are active as seen in Figure 9 54 Frame Mumber 1 Frames Second Figure 9 54 Play Status PAUSE Pause the animation In this mode the four other functions are enabled to use shown as Figure 9 55 ES S E Ea
466. ser to change or operate the section cut CLEAR SECTION CUT This function enables the user to erase the section cut from the display window NORMAL VIEW This function enables the user to view from the normal of the cut plane SECTION CUT OPTIONS This function controls the export and display of the section cut CUT PLANE 9 30 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 31 The default number of cut planes is 20 if ALL PLANE option is selected This means there will be 20 cut planes equally spaced in the local W direction If the CUR PLANE is toggled on the current section cut will be exported when select the function EXPORT SECTION CUT If the ALL PLANE option is selected all 20 section cuts will be exported when select the function EXPORT SECTION CUT MAX RADIUS an l Set the maximum arc radius that can be section Cu Seles displayed Cut Plane MIN RADIUS No of Planes 20 Set the minimum arc radius that can be displayed Cur Plane All Plane RADIUS DEV Set the tolerance between two adjacent arcs to merge MIN CHORD Max Radius 35 0000 Set the minimum chord length that can be eres displayed Min Radius 0 5000 SECTION PLUS CURVE ae 2000 sa This function is only enabled for the O OCC section cut of contour mode Toggle on the Min Chord 40000 check box then press APPLY button the curve window will display Please see the ae Figure 9 32 In the curve window the Section plus curve abscissa
467. sh elements around a hole to generate washer elements 6 78 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Usage 1 VPG pops up a dialog as following Add Washer Parameters Number of rows id Washer width l OU Win Mum of elements on hole le Select Circular Hole On Mesh Add Unda Exit Number of rows number of layers for the selected holes Washer Width total width of the washer Min Num of elements on holes minimum number of elements around the selected holes Select Circular Hole On Mesh select holes to generate washer elements Add washer elements will be generated around the hole Undo reject the generated washer elements result Exit exit this Add Washer function 6 3 31 SMOOTHING Description This function is used to adjust the nodes of selected elements to achieve good element quality Smooth Select Anchor Modes Feature Angle f 0 0 Apply Accept hesh i ra E i Cancel Unda Exit Select Elements select elements for smoothing selected elements are shown highlighted Select Anchor Nodes select nodes which will keep fixed during smoothing 6 79 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Feature Angle angle between element normal as a standard to regenerate temporary surfaces during smoothing Apply executing smoothing mesh for selected elements New elements are shown highlighted and old elements keep their original color Yes accept the smoothing mesh result No reject the
468. sis Control Parameters First the CONTROL ENERGY and CONTROL TERMINATION cards must be defined Next the output control interval data for the ASCII database must be determined Then the BINARY DATABASE cards must be edited to control the output interval of the results and restarts 7 Analysis Submission From the ANALYSIS menu select DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS edit the dialogue box and 3 3 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 3 Getting Started submit the analysis For additional information please see Section 8 11 8 Displaying Results Enter the POST PROCESSING menu and select D3PLOT LS DYNA result file Then select the analysis d3plot from the File Menu The results from each of the analysis steps will then be read into eta VPG A binary result file will be created at this time named d3plot pp Since the results are not saved to the eta VPG database this binary file should be reread into the post processing menu when the user wishes to view the results again This file is read much faster than the d3plot files The results are now ready to be post processed using a variety of features 9 Graph Plotting To graph the results select GRAPH from the Post Processor Menu The user then has the option of reading in a previously saved LS DYNA ASCII graph file When exiting the GRAPH MENU the user has an option to save the graphs in a binary file for future processing This file will be loaded much faster than the LS DYNA ASCII files eta VP
469. splay screen The title may be removed by selecting the CLEAR function from the icon bar Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT CHARACTER SIZE 1 0 10 0 lt 1 0 gt 2 After the user selects a font size VPG prompts gt DEFINE TITLE STARTING LOCATION e The user defines the location of the text by positioning the cursor at the desired point on the screen and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts gt ENTER TITLE e The user types in the text and presses the enter key VPG displays the text at the selected location 10 33 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 10 4 6 IDENTIFY NODES POINTS Description This function identifies any node and its corresponding global location in X Y Z coordinates For options see Figure 10 4 6 ALL NODES KEY IN NODE NUMBER NODE POINT EXIT Figure 10 4 6 Identify Option Menu Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS If the user selects ALL NODES VPG displays the numbers of the nodes at their corresponding node locations The user returns to the UTILITY menu e Ifthe user selects NODE VPG displays the number of the node that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line gt NODE xxxx X x xxx Yoe y yyy Z Z zzz e If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is closest in proximity to the cursor VPG issues the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx X xX xxx Y y yyy 2Z z2Z 2zz DONE or
470. ssage on the command line gt NODE xxxx X xX xxx Ye y yyy Z 2Z zzz If the user selects POINT VPG displays the number of the point that is nearest to the cursor and echoes the following message on the command line gt POINT xxxx X x xxx Y y yyy Z 2Z Zzz e EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu 6 15 5 IDENTIFY S E ID 6 203 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR Description This function allows the user to identify the SUPERELEMENT I D number of a selected node s Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES POINTS ALL NODES HODE EXIT ALL NODES displays the SUPERELEMENT ID numbers of the nodes The user may select nodes randomly with the cursor to display the node and SUPERELEMENT I D numbers EXIT returns the user to the SUPERELEMENT OPTIONS menu eta VPG3 4 6 204 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 16 MASS MENU LS DYNA The functions of the MASS MENU are designed to add and modify mass properties in the database It is necessary sometimes to add masses to represent nonstructural components or to modify masses to change the center of the gravity of the whole body The functions in this menu are organized as follows MASS MENU READ FROM FILE WRITE TO FILE CREATE HASS HODIFY HASS DELETE MASS IDENTIFY HASS CALCULATE HASS EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 6 16 1 READ FROM FILE Description This option allows the user to add mass elements to th
471. stations REVERSE NORMAL also controls the normal direction of the plate elements during meshing Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT SURFACE e The normal direction is changed after a surface is selected 6 2 11 RESPACE UV LINE Description This function changes the UV line density of the selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 VPG labels the edge numbers on the surface and prompts the user to enter the number of UV lines along edges 1 and 2 3 VPG creates a set of UV lines along edges 1 and2 These UV lines are included in the original part Note This operation changes only the appearance of the selected surfaces It does not change the integrity of the surface 6 2 12 SURFACE INTERSECT Description This function creates a line at the intersection between two selected surfaces Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to choose a surface gt SELECT THE FIRST SURFACE 2 After selecting the first surface VPG prompts the user for the second surface 6 22 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt SELECT THE SECOND SURFACE 3 After selecting the second surface VPG automatically creates a line at the intersection of the two surfaces The newly created line is included in the current part 6 2 13 UV LINE ON OFF toggle Description This function controls the on and off display of UV lines on a surface Note Toggling the UV lines off has no effect on the outcome of meshing trimm
472. stores the original colors when selected again 10 3 15 PART SUMMARY Description This function displays statistics regarding the geometry model material and interface information of the selected parts The figures are displayed in the options area Usage 1 10 23 VPG prompts gt SELECT PART FOR SUMMARY gt PICK AN ELEMENT OR PART NAME OF A PART Note DRAG WINDOW and MULTI POINT REGION are not valid selections for this command The following figure is an example of the statistics display for selected parts eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY SUMMARY OF BUMPER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS NUMBER OF TRIA PLATES MIN ELEMENT NUMBER MAX ELEMENT NUMBER NUMBER OF NODES MIN NODE NUMBER MAX NODE NUMBER MATERIAL ID ELEMENT PROPERTY ID EXIT Figure 10 3 4 Part Summary Window 10 3 16 SEPARATE PART S Description This function allows the user to separate part s from a structure For example two parts that are connected by common nodes may be quickly separated or disconnected using SEPARATE PART This function also provides the user with the option to create zero length RBARS between the separated parts Common nodes between parts become new nodes once the parts are separated Usage 10 24 1 VPG prompts gt CREATE RIGID LINKS BETWEEN SEPARATED PARTS Y N e YES creates a part called ZEROBAR in PART CONTROL that automatically contains all of the newly created RBARS 2 VPG prompts gt S
473. surrounding Lagrangian structure Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description 6 142 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LOAD CARDS BEAM Description This card defines a distributed traction load along any local axis beam or set of beams Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BLAST Description This card defines a blast load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BODY Description This card defines body force loads due to a prescribed base acceleration or angular velocity using global axes directions Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS BRODE Description This card defines pressure loads due to explosion Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS DENSITY Description This card defines density versus depth for gravity loading Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS GRAVITY PART Description This card defines gravity for individual parts Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS HEAT GENERATION Description This card defines solid elements or solid element sets with heat generation Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MASK Description This card defines mask load Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description LOAD CARDS MOTION NODE Descripti
474. t VPG will generate the following part names r xlong e Checks for RBE 2s that fail length check r duplic e Checks for degenerate RBE2s r cyclic e Checks for two RBE s sharing the same two nodes in an independent dependent node loop r double e Checks for RBE2s with double dependent nodes 3 If failed elements are found VPG prompts as following LOOSE OPTION REMOVE LOOSE LEGS MANUAL RECONMEC TION ADDED TOA FAILED PART EXIT 6 101 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR REMOVE LOOSE LEGS select failed elements to remove their loose legs MANUAL RECONNECTION user can manually add connection for each loose leg ADDED TO A FAILED PART add failed elements to part r loose EXIT the user returns to the MODEL CHECKER menu 6 5 10 CHECK ELEM SIZE Description This function checks the minimum length of the edges of plate solid or beam elements VPG color fills any elements with dimensions that are shorter than the user defined length criteria Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM LENGTH CRITERIA e A valid response is any real number greater than zero e If the length of the of the edges of the elements is greater than the user defined MINIMUM and is less than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG echoes the message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e If the length of the of the edges of the elements is less than the user defined MINIMUM or is greater than the user defined MAXIMUM then VPG echoes one of the f
475. t File Options Run Analysis Write Input File Cancel Figure 8 2 Analysis Submission Menu The DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS bution displays a window see Figure 8 3 allowing the user to set the analysis unit for the job the input file name the analysis title the engineer s identification the project name and the parts to be included 8 2 1 CONTROL CARDS LS DYNA Description Control Cards define simulation control parameters for various entities in the model The values of these parameters are initially defined using the LS DYNA default values The user may modify any of these parameters to acceptable values All Control Cards defined in LS DYNA version 971 are accessible through this menu The use of the Control Card Menu is described in Section 6 14 4 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU 8 2 2 DATABASE CARDS Description LS DYNA models may produce various results data used for the study of the simulation and to assess the quality of the analysis VPG allows users to define both the ASCII and BINARY databases that may be output from LS DYNA This is described in Section 6 14 6 DYNA MISCELLANEOUS MENU of this manual 8 2 3 GRAVITY LOAD 8 3 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 8 ANALYSIS EXECUTION Description By selecting the GRAVITY LOAD option VPG will automatically create a GRAVITY card with the appropriate acceleration of gravity for the unit system selected for the model 8 2 4 BOUNDARY CARDS Description Boundary Cards allow the user to
476. t any location in the graphic display window ARROW allows the user to draw arrows at any location in the display window The program displays a control window as shown in Figure 9 15 Usage 9 21 DISPLAY LABEL ARROW Labelarrow Controls the Label Arrow display in the l l W Display abeliAarrowy graphic display window The default setting is toggled on ArTOt AFFOW ARROW This function enables the user to select two points by cursor to draw an arrow in the graphic display window The name of the arrow will be listed in the Label Arrow control window The first location is the tail of the arrow and the second location is the head of the arrow Arrow Text TEXT This function allows the user to add a text O Delete label in the graphic display area Enter a Exit string of characters in the field above the TEXT button Press the TEXT button then click a location on the screen The program Ee a and Arrow Control will add the text label at the clicked location pia DELETE Delete an arrow or a text label The program will highlight the arrow or text label on the screen as the user selects an arrow or text label in the list Click the DELETE button to delete the highlighted arrow or text label The user may combine the Shift or Ctrl key and mouse click for multiple selections EXIT Exit the function eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 8 4 ROTATE LIGHT Description eta Post uses two light sources dire
477. t the user choose a passhand frequency that is approximately 5 to 20 of the number Too small a number will cause a computational error and too large a number will cause the program to Stall Usage After the user enters the appropriate parameters clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window Select Apply to display the filter result 9 79 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 24 SAE FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth curves according to the Society of Automotive SAE filter specification Usage Select the SAE type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the Cutoff value as Figure 9 78 shown The user may enter the appropriate value in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for DATA CONTROL Cutoft 10 000000 Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 78 DATA CONTROL window for SAE Filter After the user enters the appropriate value clicks the OK and accept the input parameters and exit the DATA CONTROL window Select Apply to display the filter result 9 12 6 25 BUTTERWORTH FILTER Description This function allows the user to smooth the curves according to the Butterworth filter specifications Usage Select the Butterworth type from the pop up list window via clicking the down triangular button below
478. t the global or virtual X Y and Z axes according to an angle specified via the keyboard Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER 3 ANGLES TO ROTATE e The user enters the desired global X Y Z angles of rotation Note The functions REPEAT ROTATION and REVERSE ROTATION are especially useful after executing the above command 10 1 10 DEFINE TITLE Description This function allows the user to enter a title or a text label on the display screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt INPUT CHARACTER SIZE 1 0 10 0 2 Once the user selects the text size VPG prompts gt DEFINE TITLE STARTING LOCATION ABORT CURSOR LOCATION DONE EXIT UNDO LAST e The user places the text by positioning the cursor at the desired location and clicking the left mouse button 3 VPG prompts gt ENTERTITLE e The user types in the text for the title and presses enter The text appears at the previously selected location 10 1 11 CURSOR ZOOM Description This function allows the user to zoom in on any displayed area in the Display Window by dynamically defining a window about a region of the screen Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DEFINE ZOOM WINDOW The user defines the upper left corner of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user then presses the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally down the screen until the desired window size is reached The user clicks the mouse once to activate the window 10 5
479. tabase field 9 of a NASTRAN bulk data GRID card The following options are available in the SUPERELEMENT menu SUPER ELEMENT ASSIGN RESIDUAL ASSIGH S E ID CHANGE 3 E ID IDENTIFY HODE POTHT IDEHTIFY 3 E ID VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections Note The SUPERELEMENT option does not appear in the PRE PROCESSING MENU when the analysis software is LS DYNA 6 15 1 ASSIGN RESIDUAL Description This function allows the user to assign a residual I D number to selected nodes displayed in the VPG database SUPERELEMENT I D 0 Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT AN OPTION FOR RESIDUAL gt E EXIT l INDEPENDENT D DEPENDENT S SELECT INDEPENDENT NODES DEPENDENT HODES SELECT NODES EXIT If the user selects INDEPENDENT NODES VPG automatically assigns a residual I D number to the independent nodes of all the displayed RBE2 and RBAR elements e If the user enters SELECT NODES VPG assigns a residual I D number to the nodes that are specified by the user 2 When SELECT NODES is entered VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e The user specifies the nodes that are to receive a residual I D number e Once the user selects the residual nodes DONE or EXIT terminates this function VPG denotes the residual nodes with a small zero 0 on the screen above the appropriate nodes 6 15 2 ASSIGN S E ID Description This function is a one command operation that assigns a
480. tarting end of line 2 This pattern is repeated N1 times along line 1 The node sequence starts at the beginning of line 1 and follows the direction of line 1 with the right hand rule The created elements are included in the CURRENT PART The CURRENT PART should be verified before proceeding with this function Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT LINES NODE POINT allows the user to select node or point to create temporary lines for the 4 LINE MESH function The user must select this option before creating the desired lines for 2 LINE MESH e LINE SEGMENT allows the user to combine a broken line while selecting lines for the 4 LINE MESH function as in the COMBINE LINE function in the LINE section The user must select this option before selecting the desired lines for 4 LINE MESH e The user may check the line s prior to executing this function by using SHOW LINE in the LINE section 2 Once the user selects the desired lines the prompt will read gt ENTER NO OF ELEMENTS N1 N2 N3 N4 N1 Any positive integer greater than one for the number of elements along the selected lines N2 Any positive integer for the number of elements between the 2 lines 6 69 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR N3 optional an integer value for the side opposite N1 where N1 is not greater than 2 N3 and N3 is not greater than 2 N1 N4 optional an integer value for the side opposite N2 where N2 is not greater than 2 N4 and N4 is not greater tha
481. te the The default rotation angle increment is 1 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES 7 Select EXIT to finish Dummy Position ETAS PG Figure 9 An Example of a Generated ECE95 Dynamic Side Impact Model 7 4 6 4 ECE R66 Description This function will generate ground platform and supporters to simulate an ECE R66 bus roll over Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER ECE R66 INFORMATION ECE Rob DATA ITEMS PLATFORM ANGLE deg NUMBER OF TIRES Left Side ROTATION VELOCITY deg s 5 000000E 000 Cancel 2 VPG prompts to locate the supporters gt PICK FRONT LEFT TIRE TO LOCATE FIRST SUPPORTER ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from front left tire VPG prompts gt PICK REAR LEFT TIRE TO LOCATE SECOND SUPPORTER 4 Select an element from rear left tire the supporters ground and a platform will be 7 51 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES positioned in the desired locations Proper contacts and velocities will also be defined in the model 7 4 7 OTHER STANDARDS 7 4 7 1 FRONT RIGID POLE Description This function will create a rigid pole at the front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER RIGID POLE CRASH INFORMATION RIGID POLE DATA ITEMS _ DATA RAM STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 VEHICLE VELOCITY mm s 2 2351944E 003 Z OF VEHICLE GROUND mm lo 000000E 000 Cancel 2 V
482. tem FTSS dummy models for use with the module including Hybrid III 50 Male 95 Male 5 Female and various Child Dummy models However these dummy models are distributed by FTSS and are not part of the eta VPG license agreement ETA offers a set of generic FEA Flexible Body and or Rigid Body dummy models that are tuned to test simulation results Although the material properties joint rates and construction are not fully validated they are still complete models developed and used in crash simulation studies ETA fully supports and maintains the FTSS if properly licensed and generic dummy models as part of the VPG Safety licensing agreement A set of barrier models is included These are also generic models developed by ETA and tuned to test results The Crash Tool Library is in ASCII format so that the LS DYNA input file of each model is stored and can be modified and updated in the library per user criteria The user can also display models in the library to see a general description of the models and examine their characteristics using the VPG Safety module The crash tool models material properties contact definitions node sets segment sets section sets and other default definitions are automatically loaded as part of the input file and monitored throughout the crash safety simulation procedure Pictures and a brief description of the crash tool models included in the VPG Safety modules are documented in the follow
483. the FILTER Clicking the Select button the DATA CONTROL windows will pop up and prompt the user to input the corresponding parameters as Figure 9 79 shown The user may enter the appropriate coefficient parameters in the DATA CONTROL windows which displays the default values for DATA CONTROL Passband 10 0 000000 Stopband a 90 000000 Max Ripple lo 100000 Min Attenuation 10 000000 Reset OK Cancel Figure 9 79 DATA CONTROL window for Butterworth Filter 9 80 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING 9 12 6 26 PASSBAND FREQUENCY Description The maximum passband frequency is determined through the equation Passbanduser Total Number of Points on Graph Time Duration The default value is 10 of the passband frequency 9 12 6 27 STOPBAND FREQUENCY Description Stopband frequency is formulated Stopband Passbandyser PaSsbanmax Passbandyser The default value depends on the Passband ser 9 12 6 28 MAXIMUM PASSBAND RIPPLE MAX PASSBRIPP Description Passband ripple value is between 0 0 and 1 0 dB 9 12 6 29 MINIMUM STOPBAND ATTENUATION MIN ATT 1 0 DB Description Stopband attenuation must be greater than 1 0 dB The stopband frequency and maximum passband ripple should not be too close to either the given low or high end limits Attenuation factors commonly range between 10 and 50 It is recommended that the user choose a passhand frequency that is approximately 5 to 20 of the number Too small a number w
484. the button Usage The user can click this button and the colour panel will pop up and prompt the user to select the desired colour for the curve The colour panel is shown in figure 9 72 If don t want to change the colour after the colour panel have popped up the user can click anywhere else on the screen to cancel the colour select Then click the Apply button to change the setting 9 12 6 7 AXIS OPERATION 9 73 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description The functions of the Axis Operation enable the user to modify the attributes of the axis of coordinate including the Log X and Log Y Grid display and the change in height of Y axis 9 12 6 8 LOG X and LOG Y toggle Description This function enables the user to change the X and Y coordinate values to logarithmic values 9 12 6 9 GRID Description This function enables the user to display grid on the curve window 9 12 6 10 AXIS HEIGHT Description This function enables the user to specify the height of y axis on the curve window through clicking with left mouse on the area of positive orientation of y axis The user can re click the Modify button to cancel this operation 9 12 6 11 X TITLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the title of X axis horizontal The x title will be displayed under the X axis 9 12 6 12 Y TITLE Description This function offers an option for the user to change the title of Y axis vertical The Y t
485. the contour plot functions which display the stress results in terms of the average stress at each node A color legend for the corresponding color values is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen TIME HISTORY PLOT eta VPG s TIME HISTORY PLOT functions enable the user to visualize the results of an analysis with XY plots VPG offers a wide range of tools to manipulate the information on the display screen with labels colors multiple graphs and a host of advanced filtering techniques e g FIR Butterworth SAE scaling smoothing and averaging FFT FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM The TIME lt gt FREQUENCY function allows the user to convert time domain to frequency domain response for signal processing analysis The FFI equation is used to convert time domain to frequency domain and frequency domain to time domain for any graph plot 2 4 MENU SYSTEM The program starts in the MAIN menu see figure 2 4 1 and branches out into submenus The user selects a sub menu by mouse pick or keyboard entry Descriptions for these menu options are located in their respective sections File Parts Pre Road Suspension Tire Safety ALE FS DTM HEEDS Analysis Fatigue Post Utilities View Macro Help Figure 2 4 1 Main Menu 2 5 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 2 FILE PART PRE LINE SURFACE OPTIONS ELEMENT OPTIONS NODE OPTIONS MODEL CHECKER SET MENU BOUNDARY CONDITIONS MATERIAL ELEMENT PROPERTY CONTACT INTERFACE DYNA MISCELLANEOUS NASTRAN MI
486. the display of element type identifiers If the option is turned on a symbol for the 1 D element types will be plotted at the center of the element to indicate the element type The identifier symbols for the various elements are listed in the following table ANALYSIS IDENTIFIER ELEMENT TYPE PROGRAM SYMBOL ae LS DYNA amp NASTRAN CROD Truss NASTRAN CTUBE Pipe CTUBE Pipe NASTRAN LS DYNA amp E NASTRAN ents Spotweld LS DYNA W ISDYNA OD Seatbelt SDYNA so CELAS1 Mass LS DYNA NASTRAN Joint LS DYNA SPJ The default for this option is off 10 41 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY MENU LAYOUT Description This function allows the user to change Menu to VPG or FEMB style based on the user s preference MENU POSTITION Description This function allows the user to change Menu position to left or right hand side of the display window based on the user s preference CHANGE COLOR MAP Description This function allows the user to change the default colors of the COLOR BAR for plotting of part color or contour color ELEMENT SIZE Description This function allows the user to preset a default element size before generating the 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE or SURFACE mesh SHADING OPTIONS Description This function offers the following 3 options for shading a part or a model Options are GOURAUD SHADING smooth shading FLAT SHADING NO EDGE FLAT SHADING W EDGE FLAT SHADI
487. the display of the items on the screen See section 10 1 10 3 24 SPECIAL PART KEYWORD Description The functions in this menu are used to define special keywords about PART Those keywords are as following PART ADAPTIVE FAILURE PART MODES PART MOWE PART SENSOR EXIT All options use following functions CREATE create a special part keyword card DELETE delete already created special part keyword cards LIST shows a list already created special part keyword cards MODIFY prompis the user to select a special part keyword card to modify 10 4 UTILITY MENU The commands in the UTILITY menu make up VPG s tool kit Many of these commands are also located in other menus as well 10 29 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY UTILITIES MENU ANGLE COORDINATE SYSTEM DRAW ARROW DISTANCE DEFINE TITLE IDENTIFY NODE POINT IDENTIFY ELEMENT LOAD CURVE SHOW LINES STATISTICS HARDCOPY DEFAULTS SETUP SUMMARY REPORT EXIT Figure 10 4 Utilities Menu A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 10 4 1 ANGLE Description The ANGLE command measures the angle between three selected points and or nodes VPG calculates the measurements of four angles for this command The first is the true angle the angle in the plane of the selected points The remaining three angles are measured from the TOP SIDE and REAR views of the model Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT VERTEX 2 VPG prompts gt SELE
488. the previous selection 9 5 FILE FORMAT The protocol for naming files during an eta Post session includes attaching suffixes to the file names that specify the file types The appropriate file names are listed in the option area of the display screen DYNA result file d3plot d3drif dynain d3plotaa d3plotint DYNA model file dyn DYNA result file of eigenvalue analysis dSeigv NASTRAN results file pch op2 NASTRAN model file nas dat DYNAFORM VPG FEMB LINE DATA file lin P n S eta Post can open DYNA result files to process the results directly After the NASTRAN result file is loaded the program will require loading the corresponding NASTRAN model file The user may import LINE DATA DYNA or NASTRAN model files 9 6 CONFIGURATION FILE The etapost config file or initialization file controls the default setting of eta Post This file is located in the installation directory and can be edited via the text editor The normal content of the etapost config file is ETA Post User Configure File GRAPHIC ENGINE 2 Buffer Bit 16 Color Buffer Bit 16 Edge Color 255 255 255 Background Color O00 Zor Plotter styler GDI Light Source Type LOCAL Second Render OFF Debug OFF WINDOW PARAMETER Layout Type RIGHT PRODUCT PARAMETER Product Mame DYNAFORM Extended GUI Oo DIRECTORY Home F 04 Model DF test INDEX FILE File Name etapost idx 9 6 1 GRAPHIC ENGINE Descrip
489. the scale factor is greater than 1 and reduced if the scale factor is less than 1 The user may reflect and or enlarge or reduce a part without retaining a copy of the original grids elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODES e Once the user selects the desired nodes and clicks DONE VPG prompts gt CREATE LOCAL COORDINATES gt PICK NODE PT FOR ORIGIN VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system 2 Once the desired coordinate system is acquired it will be displayed on the screen and the prompt will read gt ENTER X Y Z SCALE FACTORS e All real numbers are valid ZEROS or BLANKS will default to 1 EXAMPLES 1 1 1 will reflect the selected nodes across the XZ plane Y direction All Y components will be multiplied by 1 e 2 1 0 5 will magnify the X components by two times their size and reflect the nodes across the YZ plane X direction These coordinates will not affect the Y components but they will shrink the Z components by half their size and reflect the nodes on the original side of the XY plane e DONE returns the user to the NODE OPTIONS menu 6 4 17 TRANSFORM Description This function translates or rotates the selected nodes to new locations Usage 1 Click TRANSFORM VPG prompts 6 93 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR LCS POINT TO POINT EXIT e If click LCS go to step 2 if click POINT TO POINT go to step 5 2 If click LCS VPG prompts CREATE LOCAL COORDINAT
490. the user to modify defined suspension models bushing definition from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK A BUSHING TO MODIFY SUSPENSION e Once a bushing from the suspension is selected the definition window is displayed as shown 7 21 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES MATERIAL DEFINITION MATERIAL DEFINITION CARD 1 hi BUSHINGS_PROPERTIES ITEMS DATA CARD DESCRIPTION BUSHR3 RADIAL X AXIS V TRANS SPRING RATE 1 000000E 004 RADIAL Y AXIS W TRANS SPRING RATE 1 000000E 004 AXIAL Z AXIS U TRANS SPRING RATE 1 000000E 003 CONICAL X AXIS V ROTATIONAL SPRING RATE 1 000000E 006 CONICAL Y AXIS W ROTATIONAL SPRING RATE 1 000000E 006 TORSIONAL Z AXIS U ROTATIONAL SPRING RATE 1 000000E 005 RADIAL X AXIS V TRANS DAMPING RATE 1 000000E 001 RADIAL Y AXIS W TRANS DAMPING RATE 1 000000E 001 AXIAL Z AXIS U TRANS DAMPING RATE 5 000000E 001 CONICAL X AXIS V ROTATIONAL DAMPING RATE 1 000000E 003 CONICAL Y AXIS W ROTATIONAL DAMPING RATE 1 000000E 003 TORSIONAL Z AXIS U ROTATIONAL DAMPING RATE 1 000000E 002 e When the user has finished altering the data select OK to accept this change or select cancel to quit 7 2 10 MODIFY STF_PART Description This option allows the user to modify defined suspension models STF part definition from the VPG database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt MODIFY STF_PART gt SELECT PART BY SELECTING AN ELEMENT THE PART
491. thout the presence of elements or nodes 4 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the FILE MANAGER menu 5 7 1 7 READ PAMCRASH FILE This function allows the user to read a PAMCRASH pc file directly into VPG Once the user has entered the command the files with the suffix pe will be listed in the options area The user may then select the desired file 5 7 1 8 READ RADIOSS FILE This function allows the user to read a RADIOSS data file directly into VPG VPG can read fixed format input files from RADIOSS Versions 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 4 1and 4 4 VPG can write RADIOSS 4 4 fixed format input files VPG supports all input cards of RADIOSS 4 4 fixed format VPG contains options when reading RADIOSS input and output files These options relate to the translation of rigid bodies to VPG and the loading of model information RADIOSS requires two files to be loaded one is the RADIOSS output file out which contains the rigid body information The second is the RADIOSS input file D00 which contains model information If the user has both files he should click YES at the first prompt to read both the RADIOSS output and input files If the user has only the RADIOSS input file the user should select NO 1 Begin with reading the RADIOSS output file out This loads the rigid body information VPG will prompt gt ADJUST RIGID BODY PRIMARY NODES FROM RADIOSS OUTPUT Y N e lf YES is selected the RIGID BODY information will be loaded
492. tion The parameters in this group are used to customize the OpenGL behavior with various graphics cards Usage Z buffer Bit Sets the bits of Z buffer when rendering a model the default value is 16 9 12 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Color buffer Bit Setting the bits of color buffer when displaying a model the default value is 16 Edge color Setting the color of the edge of model when rendering the default color is white Background color Setting the background color of Graphic Display Window the default color is black Xor Plotter Styler Setting the Xor Plotter style the default style is GDI Light Source Type Setting the type of light source the default type is local light source Second Render Setting the second render on off the default type is off NVIDIA Quadro FX series high performance graphic cards require this option set to ON in order to work properly Debug Setting the mode of version debug on off the default mode is off 9 6 2 WINDOW PARAMETER Description The parameter LAYOUT TYPE controls the location LEFT or RIGHT of the CONTROL WINDOW Usage Default setting is on the RIGHT side of the screen The user may change the parameter to LEFT to place the CONTROL WINODW on the left side of the screen 9 6 3 PRODUCT PARAMETER Description The parameters in this group are used to customize the product parameters Usage Product Name Setting the product of Pre Processor of eta There are two kinks
493. tion This function displays load curves Usage 10 37 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY 1 VPGdisplays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST 2 After selecting a curve VPG displays the following curve operations CURVES CURVE OPERATIONS CLEAR SCREEN DELETE HARDCOPY OPTIONS QUERY RANGE SAVE EXIT These options are explained in GRAPH COPY CURVE Description This function copies load curves Usage 1 VPG displays the DEFINE CURVE CARD LIST 2 After selecting a curve or several curves and click EXIT copied curve s will be added into the list CHECK PENSION CURVE Description This function checks curves used in suspension bushing 10 4 9 SHOW LINES Description This function identifies any existing line and its direction VPG highlights the selected line and marks its points with arrowheads that are oriented in the direction of the line 10 4 10 DATABASE STATISTICS Description This function displays statistics about the VPG database regarding geometry models materials and interfaces and user can export the result to an excel format file The figures are displayed in the following window 10 38 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 10 UTILITY DATABASE STATISTICS Part Information No Of Parts Max PID No Model Information No Of Nodes Max Node No No Of Elements Max Element No No Of Materials No Of Properties No Of Contacts No Of Load Curves No of Node Sets Element Type Distribution 35 BEAM BARS 1118
494. tion This function will create a rigid pendulum in the front or rear of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION BOURPER OFFSET DATA TEMS OOO __ _ DATA BUMPER STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 001 BUMPER VELOCITY mm s VEHICLE BUMPER FRONT 1 REAR 2 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE PENDULUM ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST Select CURSOR AT ELEMENT default and select an element from the part as the target position 7 59 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES f 1 Ween AE TINI Figure 16 An Example of a Generated 0 Degree Pendulum Bumper Impact 7 4 7 8 BUMPER IMPACT PENDULUM Description This function will create a rigid pendulum in front of the vehicle Usage 1 VPG prompts gt ENTER BUMPER CRASH INFORMATION BURFER FENDULUN DATA ITEMS M_ i _ q _z_ DATA BUMPER STRUCTURE CLEARANCE mm 2 000000E 0071 BUMPER VELOCITY mm s j 115972E 003 Cancel 2 VPG prompts gt PICK A CRASH TARGET CENTER TO LOCATE BUMPER ABORT CURSOR AT ELEMENT KEY IN X Y Z ON OFF PART KEEP PART UNDO LAST 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE CONTACT NORMAL DIRECTION AGAINST BUMPER ABORT KEY IN VECTOR NODES VECTOR SHELL NORMAL SHELL REVERSE NORMAL UNDOLAST There are four approaches to define the normal direction 7 60 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 7 VPG MODULES e KEY
495. tions Manual Section 1 3 Currently two Front and eight Rear Suspension types can be auto generated SUSPENSION LIB MENU CREATE DELETE TRANSLATE MODIFY READ ADAMS PRE READ STF_FILE READ xML FILE MODIFY HARDPOINT MODIFY BEAM BUSHING MODIFY STF PART VISUALIZE LOADING ANALYSIS Fix STF PART INERTIA WRITE STF_FILE EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections 7 2 1 CREATE Description This option allows the user to define and auto generate suspension models Usage 1 VPG prompts gt GENERATE SUSPENSION MODEL gt ENTER COMMAND 7 11 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 7 2 3 7 12 VPG MODULES SUSPENSION TYPE FRONT SUSPENSION 1 SHORT LONG ARM 2 MACPHERSON A ARM REAR SUSPENSION 3 MACPHERSON H ARM 4 SOLID AXLE 5 FIVE LINK 6 QUADRA LINK T TRAILING ARM 8 HOTCHKISS 9 TWIST BEAM 10 HONDA 5 LINK EX EXIT Depending on the suspension type VPG will display one or both of the following two tables and attachments and is only necessary for some suspension types The first table displays suspension specific options such as stabilizers springs VPG prompts gt MODIFY SUSPENSION OPTIONS e When the user has finished altering the data and has selected OK VPG forwards the user to the next suspension table on the following page SLA SUSPENSION OPTION STEER SYSTEM RACKIPINION RIDE SPRING TYPE COIL IN SHOCK JOUNCE BUMPER JOUNCE IN SHOCK REBOUN
496. to VPG format The CAD Import function in the FILE Menu is used to import externally created CAD data SURFACE OPTIONS BOUNDARY LINE COPY CREATE 3 LINES DELETE 2 LINE SURFACE 3 LINE SURFACE 4 LINE SURFACE MIRROR REMOVE HOLES REVERSE NORMAL RESPACE U LINE SURFACE INTERSECT U LINE ONMSOFF SCALE SURF NORMAL ON OFF oPLIT SECTION REVOLUTION SHOW SWEEP SURFACE TRANSFORM TRIM SURFACE UN TRIM SURFACE MIDDLE SURFACE SURFACE SEPARATION SECTION CUT CHECK DUPLICATE SKIN SURFACE OFFSET SURFACE MERGE SURFACES EXTEND SURFACE VIEW EXIT A detailed description of each function is given in the following sections The following are working definitions used throughout this section of VPG 6 18 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR e Domain The trimmed surface of the common region of the interior of the outer boundary and the exterior of the inner boundaries as well as the boundary curves e Outer Boundary One boundary that is situated within the domain the surface that is to be trimmed In particular it describes the boundary curve of the domain e inner Boundary Any number of inner boundaries including zero The set of inner boundaries satisfies two criteria a The curves as well as their interiors are mutually disjointed b Each curve lies in the interior of the outer boundary 6 2 1 BOUNDARY LINE Description This function creates a line on the boundary of a selected surface Usage 1 VPG promp
497. to create analyze edit and visualize dynamic nonlinear engineering problems The software includes an integrated preprocessor post processor and solver VPG is a complete CAE software toolset for applying theory and engineering principles common in areas of mechanical and structural engineering eta VPG provides a single package for use in analysis of multi body dynamics problems linear static nonlinear static and dynamic nonlinear finite element analysis eta VPG s strength lies in its ability to integrate problems that are treated as multidisciplinary by other software packages eta VPG allows the user to combine multi body dynamics problems with structural finite element analysis problems providing real time kinematics or dynamics as well as the stress or strain response of the structure in real time eta VPG consists of three primary modules the VPG PrePost module the VPG Structure Module and the VPG Safety Module Each module may operate independently and usage is controlled via licensing options VPG PrePost is a general purpose full featured modeling software for the construction and results display of finite element models This module allows users to import CAD data construct CAD data import existing FE models and construct the geometry and mesh required for finite element analysis All boundary conditions and material properties may also be created in this module Output of the model in various finite element solver formats is
498. to define load curves for use in LS DYNA analyses This function is described in detail in Section 10 4 8 of this manual 8 2 10 DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS Description This function allows the user to define the analysis unit and the portion of the model that is to be exported into an LS DYNA input file The user may also add comments to the model describing the Analysis Title Engineers name and the Project Name 8 4 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 8 8 2 11 RUN ANALYSIS ANALYSIS EXECUTION DINA INPUT FILE OPTIONS ANALYSIS UNIT CURRENT avo leh Full Model _ Active Parts Only Output Requirement For Discrete Beam Analysis Tithe e Engineer s Name pae Project Mame Figure 8 3 Write DYNA Input File Window Description The user may elect to execute the analysis directly from within the VPG user interface By selecting this option prior to selecting the OK button the user will generate a model file according to the defined DYNA INPUT FILE OPTIONS If the user wishes to create an LS DYNA input file for later execution the WRITE INPUT FILE option should be selected The user must have LS DYNA and a valid license for this option to execute properly An execution window will be opened and an interactive LS DYNA analysis will be started This will not affect the operation of VPG 8 2 12 WRITE INPUT FILE Description The WRITE INPUT FILE option allows the user to write an LS DYNA input file to be executed at a later t
499. toggle Description This option allows the user to display the part color on positive side and gray color on the negative side of the finite element model when PLATE NORMAL option is selected in the DISPLAY OPTIONS window This option is essential for the user to visually check the part for reversed normal of the finite element mesh Figure 9 46 shows a part displayed with NORMAL COLOR and PLATE NORMAL option Figure 9 46 Typical display with Normal Color and Plate Normal option 9 10 7 BOUNDARY LINE toggle Description Boundary lines are shown black when this option is on 9 10 8 ELEM OUTLINE toggle Description Element outlines are shown black when this option is on 9 10 9 ELEMENT ORIENTATION toggle 9 44 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING Description This option shows a vector from the first node to the second node of each plate element It allows the user to visualize the direction of the element location U axis and local Z axis according to the right hand rule It is useful to check the orientation of the composite material Figure 9 47 shows a typical display of a part with ELEMENT ORIENTATION option i ae as onal _ k Dms bis ap or i z Te fa E fr z x OT E A 2 rue ae Pie il h e ma Tir oo e hag et Sn el Fog PIRI a i 5 ai E C une a Tier i r i AL 7 al f s r z paa Ea i _ n ee igh m n Figure 9 47 Typical display with Element Orientation option 9 10 10 ACT
500. ts gt INCLUDE COPIED ELEMENTS IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO e YES places all copied elements in their original part e NO places all copied elements into the CURRENT PART COPY MAPPING LCS Description Mapping allows the user to copy and move or simply move selected elements from one user defined coordinate system to another user defined coordinate system along the UV plane Usage 6 39 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 1 VPG prompts gt KEEP SELECTED ELEMENTS e YES copies the selected elements and moves the copied elements to the new location e NO removes the selected elements to the new location 2 VPG prompts gt DEFINE FIRST LOCAL COORDINATE e This defines the orientation of the selected elements 3 VPG prompts gt DEFINE SECOND LOCAL COORDINATE e This defines the new orientation for the selected elements e VPG aligns the copied or moved elements according to their UV orientation 6 3 4 CREATE Description This function creates elements of specific type by connecting selected nodes or points The element type refers to the analysis program defined at the creation of the database Depending on the analysis program NASTRAN or LS DYNA VPG offers a list of element types and prompts the user to select one Because the NASTRAN element types are more comprehensive they are documented first in the following pages with the LS DYNA elements following ELEMENT EQUIVALENCY TABLE NASTRAN ABAQUS SLS DY
501. ts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e This step is repeated once e When the second node point is defined VPG displays the SEATBELT element 2 Once the seatbelt elements have been created it is recommended that the user enter the DYNA MISC menu in the PRE PROCESSOR menu and select SEATBELT to define the accelerometer pretensioner retractor sensor and slipring CREATE SEATBELT 4 NODES LS DYNA Description This function defines a shell type seatbelt element with 4 nodes points This section covers the options for the SEATBELT 4 NODES subsection of CREATE ELEMENTS Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PICK NODES POINTS FOR ELEMENT e When the fourth node point is defined VPG displays the SEATBELT element CREATE JOINT LS DYNA Description This function allows the user to create joints for DYNA analysis All types of joints are supported The procedure to create joints has been simplified to create the coincident nodes for the second rigid body The program first prompts for the Relative Penalty Stiffness default 1 0 The program next prompts the user to select the first part rigid body with material type 20 for the joint If no material is defined for the selected part the program prompts a warning message NO MATERIAL ASSIGNED TO SELECTED PART The program then prompts the user to select necessary nodes in the first rigid body to define the orientation of the joint The requirements for each type of joint are listed in the
502. ts name or an element of it to replace the part that has been selected 3 VPG prompts 6 216 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR gt REPLACE TARGET PART BY THIS PICKED PART Y N e YES The target part will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE DEFAULT VALUE 10 e Key in a tolerance value between the old part and the new part the nodes index on the old part based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new part 6 19 6 REPLACE PART SET Description This function allows the user to select a part set to replace an old part set the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts Usage 1 VPG prompts gt REPLACE PART SET gt SELECTED FIRST PART SET AS TARGET e Select a part set to be replaced from the part set list 2 VPG prompts gt SELECTED THE PART SET TO REPLACE THE TARGET e Select another part set from the part set list to replace the part set that has been selected 3 VPG prompts gt REPLACE TARGET PART SET BY THIS PICKED ONE Y N e YES The target part set will be replaced 4 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE TOLERANCE VALUE DEFAULT VALUE 10 e Key in a tolerance value between the old parts and the new parts the nodes index on the old parts based on this distance tolerance are switched to mostly close nodes index on the new parts 6 217 eta VPG3 4 Chapter
503. ts the user to select a surface on the screen gt SELECT SURFACE FOR BOUNDARY LINE 2 VPG creates a boundary line around the selected surface and includes it in the current part Note The boundary line should be split if it is intended for use with line meshing 6 2 2 COPY Description This function copies selected surface s to a new location Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select surfaces to copy 2 VPG prompts the user to create a local coordinate system The user also has the option to select the global coordinate system Refer to Local Coordinate System Section 2 16 for a thorough explanation of this procedure 3 Once the desired coordinate system has been defined VPG prompts for the number of copies 4 Once the number of copies has been entered VPG prompts for the method of copy gt MOVE OR ROTATE M R MOVE gt ENTER U V W INCREMENTS e i e 0 0 1000 This copies the surface s 1000 units along the W axis or global Z ROTATE e If ROTATE is selected enter the angle increment right hand rule about the W axis The remaining commands are the same as the MOVE option ABORT 5 VPG prompts gt INCLUDE COPIED SURFACE IN ITS ORIGINAL PART Y N YES NO 6 19 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 6 2 3 CREATE S LINES Description This function creates sectional line data on the selected surface Usage 1 VPG prompts the user to select a surface on the screen 2 Once the surface is sele
504. ts to the database from a file that stores the mass information Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME e The files with the suffix xml will be listed in the window The user would select the name of a previously saved file or cancel to exit 2 Ifthe file does not exist the prompt reads gt CANNOT OPEN THE INPUT FILE 3 VPG reads in the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU Notes All mass elements appear as small circles 6 18 2 WRITE TO FILE Description This function allows the user to output all mass information to a file Usage 1 VPG prompts gt PLEASE INPUT THE FILE NAME gt ENTER DATABASE FILE NAME Enter a file name up to 24 characters 2 Ifthe file name is a new one VPG will create it VPG writes all mass information to the file and returns the user to the MASS MENU 6 212 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR 3 If the file name is old VPG prompts gt WARNING FILE ALREADY EXISTS OVERWRITE Y N e YES Overwrite the file with new data e NO Exit and do nothing 6 18 3 CREATE CONM2 Description This function allows the user create a new mass element to the database For details please refer to Section 6 3 6 18 4 DELETE CONM2 Description This function deletes a selected individual or group of CONM2 elements Usage 1 VPG prompts gt DELETE CONM2 gt SELECT ELEMENTS User may select a CONM2 element with any methods DONE
505. ture Users should also use the CHECK FREE SURFACE command for solid element structures that are described in this section Single Surface Boundary Check Multiple Surfaces Boundary Check 6 5 5 CHECK ANGLE Description This function checks the minimum values of the interior angles for shell and solid elements VPG checks and color fills any interior angles that are less than the default values Users have the option to adjust the default values as desired Usage 1 The ANGLE CHECK window pops up and the user sees the following figure ANGLE CHECE Quad Element M Min Interior Angle Tri Element __ Max interior Angle __ MinJnterior Angle Check Clear Exit e Once parameters are defined click Check e If the elements pass the interior angle check VPG echoes the following message gt ALL ELEMENTS PASS CHECK e If any of the elements fail the model check VPG prompts gt REPLACE FAILED QUADS WITH TRI ELEMENTS Y N e Click YES failed QUAD elements will be replaced by TRI Elements accept the replace result or not the ANGLE CHECK dialog pops up and VPG prompts gt xxxx ELEMENTS FAILED CHECK 2 If the elements fail the model check after clicking Exit VPG prompts the user to place these elements into a new part gt INCLUDE FAILED ELEMENTS IN A NEW PART Y N YES The PART DEFINITION window pops up e The failed elements will be removed from their original part and added 6 99 eta VPG3 4 C
506. um of Layers g Bias Factor From Source Face Bias Factor From Source Face lo s 0 9 Apply Cancel Apply Cancel Usage 1 Select source elements and target elements and the numbers of both elements 6 72 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR should be the same 2 The distributions of node locations are similar and VPG will automatically look for the aligning nodes in the model sometimes user needs to manually select the aligning nodes from source and target elements 3 Set the number of layers between source elements and target elements and the bias factor from source face click the Apply button to generate solid elements by linear mapping SPHERICAL MESH Description The BALL MESH function creates a spherical mesh using either solid elements or shell elements The solid element option creates a hexahedron and tetrahedron mesh of a sphere using the diameter and mesh size values input into the BALL MESH table The sphere will be centered at the X Y and Z location specified in the table If the Surface Mesh option is selected a shell mesh will be created using the center diameter and mesh size parameters specified Usage 1 The following window pops up The user defines parameters in the window and clicks Mesh Balllesh IY Solid Mesh Surface Mesh Center A ARAN Y 0 00 Z 0 00 Define Center Diameter Size Diameter 0 000 Element Size 0 000 Mesh Cancel TETRA MESH D
507. used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY EXIT 2 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following RLOAD1 RLOAD TLOAD1 TLOAD DLOAD EXIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD LOAD NONLINEAR LOAD Description This function defines and modifies nonlinear loads The loads may be used in the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY EXIT 2 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following NOLIN1 NOLIN2 NOUNS NOLINA EXIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD LOAD TEMPERATURE FIELD Description This function defines and modifies temperature fields The fields may be used in 6 150 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR the subcase definition Usage 1 VPG prompts to select option as following CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY EXIT 2 When entering CREATE VPG prompts to select option as following TEMP TEMPP1 TEMPRB EXIT e The functions DELETE LIST and MODIFY refer to STATIC LOAD 6 9 3 SPC Description This function allows the user to create and or modify the SPC single point constraint options that constrain nodes in six degrees of freedom Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area CREATE DELETE INCLUDE NODES IN SET LIST SET
508. user to define and assign both linear and angular velocities to selected nodes Usage 1 VPG displays a list of additional commands in the options area CREATE DELETE LIST MODIFY SHOW EXIT 2 Each of these commands is described in the following pages INITIAL VELOCITY CREATE Description This function enables the user to define and assign initial velocity to the displayed model Usage 1 After the user enters CREATE the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user sets parameters in the window INITIAL VELOCITY DELETE Description This function enables the user to remove the selected initial velocities from the 6 154 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR database Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO DELETE All available initial velocities are listed in the TIC CARD LIST box INITIAL VELOCITY LIST Description This function lists the defined initial velocities in a pop up window Usage 1 VPG prompts gt LIST SET ONLY EXIT TO CONTINUE INITIAL VELOCITY MODIFY Description This function allows the user to simultaneously delete and recreate any initial velocity Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT CARD TO MODIFY 2 After the user selects an initial velocity the BOUNDARY BTIC DEFINITION window pops up and the user can modify parameters in the window INITIAL VELOCITY SHOW Description This function allows the user to display all or some of the defin
509. user will see variations in the components and setup procedure However the general process remains the same The user first establishes a validated structure model that includes proper mesh material properties contact definitions and correct connectivity to satisfy the given modeling guidelines The structure model is then placed in simulation position most model positions are equivalent to the vehicle design coordinate system However some are defined in an alternative testing fixture coordinate system The crash tool model is then placed in a particular location and in a certain direction In most cases the crash tool model position is given Occasionally users will have to define the location and direction if there is no default standard In occupant safety cases the dummy models are placed on the seat at the H point or a test fixture position The prescribed impact velocity and direction are given as default values according to legislated criteria The user is able to alter these values according to individual case test requirements The simulation results have to be output according to their case requirements Therefore the nodes contact surfaces and sections are defined either automatically or by user defined node set segment set and section during the setup process The output request and the frequency Sampling rate are also defined for post processing purposes Legislated criteria such as HIC TTI and Femur Load are ca
510. ust be initialized to accommodate the eta VPG software The user can define the printing default 5 10 PRINT SETUP This function allows the user to define the default setting for printing of image files The options are shown in Figure 5 11 1 5 10 1 PAPER CUT The user can specify a given paper size and margin Standard paper sizes are supported such as 8 5 x11 11 x17 A4 etc 5 15 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager HARDCOPY DEFAULTS M Run Length Paper Margin 0 300000 C ASCII85 No Of Copies 1 M Reverse Video Color Type Color x M Bounding Box Binding Option None x M File Name Printer Name 200 1 1 2HP La x M eta VPG ae ee Print File Format Ps x M Time Stamp Paper Cut Letter v F Select Region Load System Defaults PS Level Orientation Portrait W Landscape Load User Defaults Paper Length Unit M Inch O mm Save As Defaults Print To Printer W File OK Cancel Figure 5 10 1 Printer Setup Select drop list at the right of PAPER CUT to choose a paper size Enter a number in the field beside PAPER MARGIN to define the shorter of the paper s two margins top and bottom Select the button beside Paper Length Unit to choose a unit in or mm 5 10 2 PRINTER The user can select a printer or select a format to print to a file Enter the printer name in field or select from the list below If Print To File is toggled on the user can choose a format by select
511. usters that make up a single spot weld for computing the force and moment resultants that are written into the SWFORC output file Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY card DELETE e This function deletes already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY cards LIST e This function lists already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY cards in pop up window MODIFY e Allows user to modify already created HEX SPOTWELD ASSEMBLY cards DEFINE SPRING ORIENTATION Description The definition card in the SPRING ORIENTATION subsection defines orientation vectors for discrete springs and dampers Usage 1 When CREATE is selected VPG prompts gt ENTER NEW VECTOR ID X OR E TO EXIT 2 Once the vector ID has been established VPG prompts gt SELECT SPRING ORIENTATION OPTION ALONG VECTOR VECTOR NORMAL PLANE ALONG 2 HODES 2 HODE NORMAL PLANE EXIT e After defining the vector it is displayed with its vector number in the display window Note Refer to the LS DYNA User s Manual for further description DEFINE SET ADAPTIVE Description This function is to control the adaptive refinement level by element or part set Usage 1 VPG prompts CREATE e This function creates an SET ADAPTIVE card DELETE e This function deletes already created SET ADAPTIVE cards LIST e This function lists already created SET ADAPTIVE cards in pop up window MODIFY 6 194 eta VPG3 4 Chapter 6 PRE PROCESSOR
512. values of the selected curve RES RESULTANT This function allows the user to find the square root of the sum of the square of the Y New VN thy h values of the selected curves The new value is The function is used to plot the vector length from three curves containing the X Y and Z component For a two dimensional vector only two curves need to be selected This function will be activated after the user selects more than one curve FFT FFT This function allows the user to convert curve data from time domain to frequency domain response for signal processing analysis The FFT is a fast algorithm for computing the Discrete Fourier Transform DFT The DFT is a basic operation to transform an ordered sequence of data samples from a signal usually in a time domain into the frequency domain The spectral information about the signal is then represented explicitly There are various implementation of FFT when the samples are not of power of two The algorithms adopted in eta Post can deal with both cases whether the number of samples is a power of two or not h15 HIC 15 This function enables the user to calculate the maximum Head Injure Criteria when the impact time is less than 15 milliseconds This is a special function used for eta VPG N36 Ic 36 This function enables the user to calculate the maximum Head Injure Criteria when the impact time is less than 36 milliseconds This is a special function used for eta VPG CUE cu
513. vate this function by pressing Control and left mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to stop the rotation PAN This command enables the user to translate the model on the screen by following the movement of the cursor If the cursor is moved off the graphics display window the cursor reappears at the 9 6 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 9 POST PROCESSING opposite edge of the window to continue the operation Click the left mouse button to stop the pan operation The user may activate this function by pressing Control and Middle mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function A CURSOR ZOOM The user picks a point about which to zoom The model is centered about this point and the user may move the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out The user may activate this function by pressing Control and right mouse button while moving the mouse Release the mouse button to exit the function Note If the cursor is moved off the graphics display window in functions ROTATE PAN or CURSOR ROOM the cursor re appears at the opposite of the window automatically to continue the operation P E 4 WINDOW ZOOM The user defines the corners of the zoom window by positioning the cursor on the display screen The user presses and holds the left mouse button and drags the cursor diagonally until the desired window size is reached Releases the left button the area included in the window will be displayed in
514. w appears Select NO to reopen the current database from the last saved point ABORT to cancel the operation 5 4 SAVE This function updates the current database The User may overwrite the existing file or create a new file at the execution of the SAVE command If the user chooses to overwrite the file all previous mode data will be overwritten and the current model configuration will be saved If the user chooses to create a new file the current database will not be updated and the current model configuration will be written to a new file with the database name provided by the user This file now becomes the current model database open in VPG 5 5 SAVE AS This function saves the current database as a new file See Figure 5 5 1 5 3 eta VPG 3 4 Chapter 5 File Manager Save in B OA My Recent Documents be My Network Places 6 line_mesh vpg E 10 Field Format ypq E r00 empty vpg appilar_FOO vpq Beams _model_lypq vpg Ej Beams_shading vpg boundary condition_split vpg E bumper pg E bumper FOO vpg intersect line wpa line_revolute ypa File name Save az type VPG vp i E linear _mapping pg mesh pg al qyn vpg E Robe vpg Ei solid_tetra vpg split_surface vp surface split vpg Ei taper pg temp Ypg test vpg test_9 pq test 15 vpq tokal_mesh vpg unit pq Cancel Figure 5 5 1 Save Database As 5 6 MERGE DATABASE This function adds another VPG database
515. x NODES FOR DUPLICATE NODES gt NO DUPLICATE NODE FOUND 6 4 4 CHANGE ID Description This function changes the numbers of the existing nodes The parts containing these nodes do not need to be on or current during this procedure Usage 1 VPG prompts gt SELECT NODE FOR NEW NODE NUMBER e The user can select the node nearest the cursor by pressing the left mouse button instead of typing the letter N or entering the keyboard option 2 After selecting a node the user is prompted for a new node number gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE e Any unused positive integer is a valid entry If the entered number is already being used the following prompt will appear gt NODE NUMBER xxxx ALREADY EXISTS REQUEST DENIED gt ENTER NEW NODE NO FOR XXXX OR CR FOR UNCHANGE 6 4 5 COINCIDENT CHECK Description This option checks for coincident nodes that may be in the displayed or other part s of the model Coincident nodes are defined as having distance between each other that is less than or equal to a specified tolerance The VPG default tolerance which is the lowest tolerance VPG allows is 0 01 units The user may increase the default tolerance as necessary The COINCIDENT NODE CHECK merges two nodes in a coincident node group into one node and retains the lower node number i e VPG combines two nodes that share the same location and renumbers the new node with the lower grid number VPG designates the higher gr

VPG 3.4 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents